fire fighting valves

Al Mashaaer Al Mugaddassah Metro Project

Mashaaer Mugaddassah MMMP-SL-CR18G-MECH-DEPOT-TRM-I- FF-01,FF-07, FF-09-A03

/6

Date:25/04/2010

Al-Madar-Mechanical- Sprinkler heads and Accessories and Valves– DAB, OCC

Document number

MMMP-SL CR18G MECH DEPOT TRM I

FF-01,FF-07,

FF-09, A03

Project Originator Discipline Location Doc Type Stage Doc. Number Revision

PDF processed with CutePDF evaluation edition www.CutePDF.com

http://www.cutepdf.com



/6

Mark Date Subject of Issue

A03 25/04/10 Third Issue

A02 11/04/10 Second Issue

A01 03/02/10 First Issue

Edition Name Date

A03 Author CR18g / Al Madar 25/04/2010

Checked by Ummes ahmed 25/04/2010

Approved by Muhammed Yahya 25/04/2010



/6

CONTENT

1. Supplier's Name

2. Supplier's Address

3. Name of Product or Service

4. Type of Product or Service

5. Applicable Specification Clause

6. Applicable Standard

7. Test/Backup Data Provided

8. Previous History of Use

9. Previous Location of Use

10. Previous Duration of Use

11. Health and Safety Information Provided

12. Test Certificates

13. Catalogues



/6

1) Supplier's Name :

SELA - PASS

2) Supplier's Address :

Jeddah, Saudi Arabia

3) Name of Product or Service :

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

4) Type of Product or Service :

Sprinkler heads and Accessories and Valves

5) Applicable Specification Clause :

Mechanical specification clause: 3.2

6) Applicable Standard :

NFPA 13, NFPA 14, UL listed and FM approved

7) Test/Backup Data Provided

N/A

8) Previous History of Use :

SAUDI BRITISH BANK, KING FAHD MEDICAL CITY

9) Previous Location of Use :

All types of applications

10) Previous Duration of Use :

15 years



/6

11) Health and Safety Information Provided :

N/A

12) Test Certificates :

N/A

LAST SUBMISSION COMMENTS

1. LAST SUBMISSION DATE- 11 April, 2010

2. BRAND SUBMITTED- The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 3. RESPONSE- REJECTED

4. 4. FOR DETAILS SEE ATTACHED CONSULTANT COMMENTS

PROJECT SPECIFICATION

(1) See Attached.

CLIENT :AL-MADAR Co. DATE: April 19th

,2010

PROJECT :Al Mashaaer Al Mugaddassah Metro Project Our Ref: J091205FF

________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-1.2

Compliance statement

شركة صلة

ألنظمة القوى والتحكم والسالمة

Specifications Compliance MMMP-SL-EMDD-GEN-GEN-DSP-D-3003-A01

Client : Al Madar Co. Date: March 18th

, 2010

Project: Our Ref: J091205FF-02L

Consultant Comments Sela-PASS Reply

FIRE SERVICES SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

WET FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS

General Wet fire fighting systems shall comprise the following:

* Water tank.

* Standpipe system

* Sprinkler system.

* Foam – water sprinkler pre-action system

* Pumps and motors.

The complete system shall be in accordance with the requirement of Saudi

Civil Defence (SCD). Complied - As per NFPA Standard

Whenever the word "provide" is used it shall mean "furnish, install, test &

commission complete and ready for use".Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Equipment capacities and performance requirements shall be as listed in

the schedule of Equipment shown on the Drawings. Under Al-Madar Co.

The proposed fire fighting system as shown on the drawings or the one to

be provided shall be submitted for approval to SCD. Under Al-Madar Co.

Standpipe System

Standpipe systems shall be provided in accordance with the requirements

of NFPA 14, 2007 Edition. Under Al-Madar Co.

Standpipe system water shall be supplied from the fire water storage

tanks. Fire pumps shall supply the water to supply the standpipe outlets

and hose reels.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Civil Defence inlet breeching pieces shall be provided at each station for

the use of the Saudi Civil Defence to pump water into the system. Under Al-Madar Co.

The location of the breeching inlet shall not be more than 30.5m from the

hard standing location. Hard standing location shall be designed by the

Architect considering the road accesses with appropriate turning radius as

required by NFPA and local authorities.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Sprinklers;

The installation shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 13 ordinary

hazard 2 and shall comprise of an incoming water main to a storage tanks,

duty and standby sprinkler pumps, Installation control sets, distribution

pipe work, control valves and sprinkler heads.

Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Fire water reserve shall be maintained for one hour operation of fire pump

as required by NFPA. Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.1

3.2.2

3.2.3

Sela Company

for Power, Automation & Safety Systems

3

Item No.

Al Mashaaer Al Mugaddassah Metro Project - MAKKAH

3.2

Page 1 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Centrifugal pumps arranged as duty and standby each designed to cater

the 100% demand of the fire protection system. Each fire pump shall have

its own dedicated controller located at fire pump room. Duty fire pump

shall be of electrical motor driven & standby fire pump shall be of diesel

engine driven with a diesel storage tank located within the fire pump

room. The fuel capacity shall be as required for 8 hours operation of the

fire pump. The requirements of electrical & equipments shall comply with

the requirements of NFPA 20, 2007 Edition & NFPA 70, 2007 Edition. The

system pressure shall be maintained by jockey pump. Jockey pump

capacity shall be 5 – 7% of the main fire pump

Under Al-Madar Co.

The entire assembly & components in the fire pump room like but not

limited to pressure relief valve with waste cone, flow testing

arrangements, venturi, shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20

Under Al-Madar Co.

Diesel tank shall be located with in a bund wall & the bund wall shall be

sized for 110% of the fuel tank capacity. Diesel storage tank shall have level

indicators to monitor the fuel level in the tank

Under Al-Madar Co.

Diesel tank area shall be provided with a modular type foam water

sprinkler pre action system complying with NFPA 16 Under Al-Madar Co.

Codes and Standards;

The works described in this section shall comply fully with the

requirements of the applicable “Code and Standards” section of this

specification

Complied

Pipe Work;

Potable pipe and fittings shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Pipe

work” section of this specification Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Pipes used in Fire Portection system shall be Hot dip galvanised SEAMLESS

steel pipe confirming to ASTM A53, Grade B Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Valves;

Valves shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Valves” section of this

specification

(2.16.3 through 2.16.17).

Fire protection valves shall all be UL listed and or FM approved with 1380

kpa (200 psi) minimum pressure. Valve shall have 2070 kPa pressure rating

if valves are components of high pressure piping system

Complied, we submit OS&Y gate valve with 250 PSI (17.2

Bar), UL Listed FM Approved.

Valves controlling water flow in fire protection piping shall be O.S&Y-

Outside Screw and Yoke type, except as noted, and shall be UL Listed, FM

approved.

Complied.

Gate valve shall be OS& Y type as indicated in the drawing. Sizes up to 50

mm and below shall be threaded type. The valve body shall be cast bronze

and wheel shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL listed and rated for 1380

KPa (200 psi) working pressure.

Complied, with model (18) , UNITED Brand, OS&Y Gate

Valve, Threaded Type, Sizes up to 50 mm and below with

200 PSI, UL Listed FM Approved.

3.2.4

3.2.5

3.2.6

Under Al-Madar Co.

Page 2 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Sizes 65 mm and above shall be Cast Iron OS&Y Gate valves where

indicated. The valve body shall be cast iron with grooved or flanged ends.

The valve shall be UL / FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa working

pressure (or 1725 KPa where required).

Complied, with model (F-607-RW), NIBCO Brand, OS&Y Gate

Valve, Flanged Ends with 250 PSI (17.2Bar), UL Listed FM

Approved.

Use class 1725 KPa OS&Y gate valves where required. The valve body shall

be cast iron and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA

standards.

Complied.

OS & Y gate valves have a tamper switch & shall be monitored electrically

through a supervisory switch in the fire alarm panel.

Complied, with model (OSY2), SYSTEM SENSOR Brand, UL

Listed FM Approved.

Supervision switches shall be installed for all fire protection valves. The

devices shall be electrical; single pole, double-throw; with normally closed

contacts and include design that signals controlled valve is in other than

normal position

Complied

Check valves shall be swinging type or split clapper type with flanged /

grooved ends. The valve body shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL / FM

approved and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure (or 1725 KPa where

required).

Complied, with model (F-908-W), NIBCO Brand, Check

Valve, Cast Iron, Flanged Ends with 175 PSI (12.1 Bar), UL

Listed FM Approved.

Complied, with model (F-938-31), NIBCO Brand, Check

Valve, Ductile Iron, Flanged Ends with 285 PSI (19.7 Bar),

Conform to (MSS SP-71).

Complied, with model (F-968-B), NIBCO Brand, Check Valve,

Ductile Iron, Flanged Ends with 500 PSI (34.5 Bar), Conform

to (MSS SP-71).

Butterfly valves shall be Grooved type with tamper switch. The valve body

shall be made of ductile Iron coated with nylon-11. The valve shall be UL /

FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure.

Complied, with model (GD-4765-8N), NIBCO Brand,

Butterfly Valve, Ductile Iron with 300 PSI (20.7 Bar), UL

Listed FM Approved.

Complied, with model (X43H), CLA-VAL Brand, H Style for

large flow area design, service without removal from line,

with a 316 Stainless Steel Strainer. Strainer Mesh size

standard 10 mesh / 2000 Micron / Openings 0.078 inch.

Complied, with model (911), MUELLER Brand, Y Type, Cast

Iron, ASTM A126 Grade B.

Riser Check Valve : Grooved Riser check valve Black Enamel Painted,

Ductile Iron Body to ASTM A536 grade 65-45-12 4”-8”, Grade E EPDM

encapsulated Ductile Iron disc, stainless steel spring and shaft, rated to

300psi (1370kPa). Suitable for Anti Hammer service and horizontal or

vertical installation. Provided drilled, tapped and plugged stream for 2”

drainage outlet and ½” pressure taps both upstream and down stream of

disc. UL Listed and FM approved.

Complied - with model (E2), RELIABLE Brand, Grooved Type

Riser (Alarm) Check Valve, Color Black, 300 PSI (20.70 Bar),

Horizontal OR Vertical Installation, 2" Drainage Outlet, UL

Listed and FM Approved.

Use class 1725 / 2070 KPa check valves where required. The valve body

shall be cast steel and shall be designed & manufactured according to

AWWA standards.

Y–Type Strainer: Y Type Strainer consist of Ductile Iron Body , ASTM A-536

grade 65-4512 , Type 304 Stainless Steel cylindrical removable baskets with

1/16” perforations and 41% open area for 2-3” strainer size. 1/8” (3.2mm)

diameter perforations and 40% open area 4”12” strainer size.

Page 3 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Flexible Joints: Flexible Couplings in series shall be installed near the

pumps to reduce the noise and Vibration if recommended by the pump

manufacturer

Under Al-Madar Co.

Building Expansion Joints: Flexible couplings shall be used to accommodate

any movement in the pipe due to Building expansion or contraction. A

proper study and calculation needs to provide by the Manufacturer.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Hangers and Supports; Under Al-Madar Co.

Hangers and Supports shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Hangers

and Supports” section of this specification (2.15.15 and 2.15.23). Under Al-Madar Co.

Pipeline Identification and Labeling; Under Al-Madar Co.

Pipelines and equipment shall be as scheduled and specified in the

“Pipeline Identification and Labeling” section of this specification (4.16). Under Al-Madar Co.

Fire Fighting Water Piping – General

All pipes used for fire fighting water distribution shall be hot galvanized

steel iron seamless schedule 40 confirming to ASTM A53 Gr. B assembled

with GI threaded fittings for pipe sizes 2" and smaller and with grooved

mechanical fittings for pipe sizes 2½" and larger.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire fighting water piping system shall be provided with valves on all

mains and branches for sectionalizing the system for maintenance and

operation.

Under Al-Madar Co.

All valves used in the fire fighting water piping system (Pump Suction,

Discharge, Risers) shall be of the rising stem type to clearly indicate

whether the valve is in the open or closed position. All these valves shall

be provided with tamper switch with and shall be monitored through fire

alarm system. All valves in the zone control valve shall be butterfly valve

with supervisory switch and shall be monitored through fire alarm system.

The valves shall conform in all other respects to the specifications given

under Valves.

Complied - With all valaves used in the fire fighting water

piping system and in the zone control valve shall be OS&Y

Gate Valves 250 PSI with supervisory switch.

All over ground pipe fittings up to 50mm shall be of malleable iron

threaded joint confirming to ASTM / ASME B16.3 & piping of 65mm and

above shall be of mechanical grooved type confirming to ASTM F1476 &

ASTM F-1548

Under Al-Madar Co.

A 2" drain valve of the globe type shall be provided at the base of every

riser as referred in NFPA13 & 14. Piping shall be sloped not less than 2%

towards the drain valves.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire fighting water pipes shall not be used in any way to supply water

for other purposes. Under Al-Madar Co.

All valves shall be supervised electrically in the Fire Alarm Panel. Under Al-Madar Co.

Sprinkler System Description

Installation of sprinkler systems shall comply with NFPA 13, standard for

the installation of sprinkler system, or as directed by the civil defence

authorities.

Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.7

3.2.8

Page 4 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

The installation shall be a Wet Sprinkler System and the flow of water to

the sprinkler pipe work shall be controlled by installation control valvesUnder Al-Madar Co.

The system shall be charged with water under pressure up to the sprinkler

heads so that when one or more of the sprinkler heads operates the wet

alarm valve is actuated allowing water to flow from the open sprinkler

heads.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The water from the storage tank shall be used as the suction supply for the

electrically driven pumps. Pumps shall be automatic in operation and shall

be designed to comply with the performance characteristic of automatic

pumps as specified in the relevant section of the NFPA Rules.

Under Al-Madar Co.

A jockey pump shall be installed to maintain pressure in the system pipe

work. Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire water storage tanks shall be located as shown in drawings. The

tanks shall be of concrete construction as detailed on the structural

drawings. High grade corrosion resistant hot deep galvanized steel puddle

flanged sleeves shall be used and the velocity in the suction pipe shall not

exceed 4.57m/s.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Water tightness is to be assured by caulking the space between the two

pipes. Provide caulking rings on the inner pipe. Under Al-Madar Co.

The water tanks shall be lined with a laminated non toxic plastic liner or

equivalents, factory made, with all necessary pipe openings ready formed.

The liner material shall be approved by water authorities for the storage of

potable water.

Under Al-Madar Co.

electrically, flow switch (connected to the fire alarm system) test and drain

valve, pressure gauge, etc to comply with NFPA 13. The outlet of the drain

valve shall be connected to the nearest floor drain.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Each sprinkler riser shall be connected with an alarm check valve &

isolation valve. The zoning of the sprinkler system shall comply with the

requirements of NFPA 13.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Alarm check valve shall be provided with pressure switches to monitor the

pressure drop in the downstream. An alarm motor gong shall be connected

to the alarm check valve which shall generate mechanical alarm upon flow

across the alarm check valve. The location of the gong shall be near to the

location of breeching inlet.

Complied - with model (E2), RELIABLE Brand, UL Listed and

FM Approved.

Complied, with Supervisory Switch model (OSY2), SYSTEM

SENSOR Brand, UL Listed FM Approved.

Complied, with Flow Switch model (WFD), SYSTEM SENSOR

Brand, UL Listed FM Approved.

Sprinklers shall be provided at the escalators truss with dedicated isolation

valve (with supervisory switch) & flow switch to monitor in the Fire alarm

panel. A drain valve shall be provided at the lower most level of the fire

pipe network.

Page 5 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Where the void height exceeds 800mm above the false ceiling shall be

considered as a separate zone and shall be provided with sprinkler system. Under Al-Madar Co.

All the isolation valves shall be provided with a supervisory switch which

shall be electrically supervised in the Main fire alarm panel. There shall be

an individual address for each isolation valve.

Complied

Provide fire alarm panel to indicate all sprinkler zone control valve -

monitoring , solenoid valves, FM 200 gaseous fire suppression system and

flow switches. The alarm panel shall be prepared to be connected to the

fire alarm panel of the station or the concerned building (if any).

Under Al-Madar Co.

Fire Protection Specialties

* Installation Control Valves

Both the wet and dry type CVs shall have the following components. Select

the trim as appropriate.

* System Isolation Valve

Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), Outside Screw and Yoke (O.S&Y)

construction with solid wedge and flanged ends.

* Alarm Check Valve

Cast Iron body, Flap type construction with flanged/grooved ends,

metered bypass with ball valve for pressure maintenance flow, test and

alarm flow arts, bolted access cover, pressure gauges, pressure switch at

inlet and outlet etc.UL listed & FM approved.

* Test And Drain Valve

All bronze, angle valve with screwed ends complete with metering orifice,

discharge turn dish etc.

* Alarm Test Valve

All bronze, multi port plug valve with screwed ends, operating lever,

engraved position indicator attached to body.

* Strainer

All bronze, Y type strainer with screwed ends, screwed cover and 30 mesh

stainless steel screen for alarm supply line.

* Water Motor Alarm

All bronze construction of through the wall type with threaded inlet and

outlet connections, wall sleeve, drive shaft and bell.

* Pressure Switch

Normally closed, pressure switch with contacts rated for 5amps. The unit

shall be fully enclosed with tapped conduit entry.

* Flow Switches

3.2.9

Complied - with Y Type Strainer 3/4" 24 mesh.

Complied

Complied





Complied

Complied, with model (EPS10-2), SYSTEM SENSOR Brand,

Contacts Rated at 10.0 Amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5 Amp @

6/12/24 VDC, UL Listed FM Approved.

Complied

Page 6 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Provide vane type flow switches with volt free, normally open contacts

rated for 5amps and enclosure with tapped conduit entry. The flow switch

shall be adjustable, to give contact at flow equal to that of one sprinkler.

The unit shall be complete with pipe size saddle, clamp, sealing gasket etc.

Sprinklers

All sprinklers shall be one of the following types.

Concealed fast response type with chrome plated cover for front of house

areas as indicated on drawings.

Complied - with model (G4A-R5415), RELIABLE Brand,

Pendent Fusible Element Quick Response Concealed

Sprinkler, 1/2" NPT, 1/2" Orifice, K5.6, 74°C for Sprinkler,

57°C for Cover Plate, Brass Finishe for Body, Deflector &

Deflector Pin, Chrome Finishe for Cover Plate, UL Listed and

FM Approved.

Complied - with model (G XLO-R2921), RELIABLE Brand,

Upright Fusible Element Extra Large Orifice Sprinkler, 1/2"

NPT, 0.64 Orifice, K11.2, 74°C Temperature, UL Listed and

FM Approved.

Complied - with model (JL112 ECLH/ECOH-R7326), RELIABLE

Brand, Upright Fusible Element Quick Response Sprinkler,

Brass Finishe, 3/4" NPT, K11.2, 74°C Temperature, UL/ULC

Listed.

All sprinkler indicated on the drawings as concealed type shall be of a

decorative style flushComplied

with the ceiling with ceiling plate cover. The visible parts shall be of satin

finish chrome.

Complied, with Chrome Finishe for Cover of Pendent Fusible

Element Quick Response Concealed Sprinkler.

The deflector and retaining parts shall be concealed in the sprinkler body. Complied




57°C for Cover Plate, Chrome Finishe for Cover, UL Listed

and FM Approved.




FM Approved.




Listed.

Return bends arrangement to be followed for any Pendent sprinkler

installation Sprinkler Material:

3.2.10


Brand, Contacts Rated at 10.0 Amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5

Amp @ 6/12/24 VDC, UL Listed FM Approved.

Upright fusible bulb fast response type as indicated on drawings.

All sprinklers indicated on drawings as pendent, upright and side wall,

concealed shall be of the fusible solder fast threaded inlet and standard

½"response type constructed of high quality bronze with ½" male

Page 7 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Body: Brass

Body cap: Brass

Deflector: Copper

Deflector pin: Stainless steel

Fusible link assembly: Nickel alloy and eutectic solder

Sprinkler selection, type, temperature shall comply with NFPA 13.

Sprinklers shall be pressure rated to suit the selected fire pump’s shut off

head

Complied.

Sprinkler guards shall be provided to sprinklers located with in escalators

and locations where there are possibilities of mechanical damage to the

sprinkler

Complied - with models (C & D), RELIABLE Brand.

Complied - with Sprinkler models (G4A-R5415) & (G XLO-

R2921) are UL Listed & FM Approved.

Complied - with Sprinkler model (JL112 ECLH/ECOH-R7326)

is UL/ULC Listed.

Fire Pumps

The fire pump shall be of the base mounted, single stage, centrifugal type,

horizontal split case directly connected to an electric motor through a

heavy duty flexible coupling for main pump & diesel engine for stand by

pump. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common cast iron base

plated provided with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.

The fire pump unit shall be supplied complete with pump, driver, and

accessories as described below. The pumping unit (Pumps, drives,

controllers, couplings, etc) shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories

and FM approved shall meet all requirements of the National Fire

protection Association, 20, 2007 Edition. The pump capacity and pressure

shall be as shown on the Drawings. The pump shall deliver not less than

150% of rated capacity at a pressure not less than 65% of rated pressure.

The shut-off pressure shall not exceed 120% of rated pressure.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump casing shall be of cast iron having a minimum tensile strength of

35,000psi and shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psig and

hydrostatically tested at the factory to not less than 250 psig. Bearing

housing supports and suction and discharge flanges shall be integrally cast

with the lower half of the casing. Removal of the upper half of

Under Al-Madar Co.

The impeller shall be of the enclosed type and shall be of vacuum cast

bronze. It shall be dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft sleeves. The

shaft sleeves shall extend the entire length of the seal boxes to protect the

shaft and shall be key locked and threaded so that they tighten with the

rotation of the shaft

Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.11






FM Approved.

Sprinklers shall be UL listed, FM approved & approved by Saudi Civil

defence

Page 8 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Teflon gaskets shall be provided between the impeller hub and the shaft

sleeves to protect the pump shaft. The pump shall be equipped with

renewable casing wear rings which shall be locked by dwelling to prevent

rotation

Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump rotating element shall be supported by two heavy duty grease

lubricated ball bearings mounted in machined moisture and dust proof

cast iron housing and bolted to the pump casing with register fits to ensure

permanent alignment.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Grease seals and water stingers shall be provided to protect the bearings

from contamination. Bearing housings shall be so designed as to flush

lubricant through the bearing. Easily accessible grease fittings shall be

provided for positive bearing lubrication. The pump shaft shall be of high

strength steel accurately machined to give a true running rotating element.

The shaft shall be sealed by split packing glands designed for easy removal

for inspection and maintenance. The packing shall consist of

INTERWOVEN, GRAPHITED asbestos, diagonally cut packing rings with

lantern ring connected to the pressure side of the pump by a cored

passage in the parting flange of the pump.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The electric motor shall be of the drip-proof, squirrel cage, induction type

with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed shall

not exceed 2900rpm. The pump shall be provided from the factory with

lifting lugs, coupling guard and tapped holes in the suction and discharge

flanges for pressure gauge connections

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire pump unit shall be supplied complete from the factory with the

following accessories: Under Al-Madar Co.

* Suction and discharge pressure gauges, not less than 3½" dial,

reading in P.S.I. and having arranged equal to twice the rated design

working pressure of the pump complete with gauge valves.

Under Al-Madar Co.

* Main relief valve, size 3" minimum, factory set to open at a

pressure slightly greater than the rated design working pressure of the

pump with capacity to pass all the water discharged by the pump without

developing excessive pressure on the system.

Under Al-Madar Co.

* Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of the pump

when operating at shutoff, factory set to open just higher than the rated

design working pressure of the pump and lower than shut-off discharge

pressure

Under Al-Madar Co.

* Automatic air release valve on the casing vent. Under Al-Madar Co.

* Suction and discharge matching flanges Under Al-Madar Co.

Each fire pump unit shall be supplied from the factory with controller, for

floor mounting, of water tight construction and marked Fire Pump

Controller.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Page 9 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic, across-the-

line type and shall contain the following: Externally operable disconnect

switch, circuit breaker with an inter rupting capacity to suit the motor

magnetic starter, pressure switch, pilot lamp to indicate circuit breaker

closed and power available, ammeter test link, voltmeter test studs, and a

two position selector switch marked automatic and non automatic.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The controller shall be completely assembled, wired and tested at the

factory, ready for installation and operation with simple external electrical

connections. The controller shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20

& NFPA 70

Under Al-Madar Co.

Fire Pump controllers are to be located within the Fire pump room which is

to be sprinkle red, hence the controllers shall be drip proof as well Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump shall be given a complete performance test at the factory with

positive suction pressure and with a 15 foot suction lift. Under Al-Madar Co.

NPSH shall be calculated and considered for designing the pump. Under Al-Madar Co.

All fire pumps shall be designed to be suitable for the prevailing climatic

conditions in Saudi Arabia. Factory visit shall be provided by the contractor

at no extra cost to the client for employer’s representative/s to witness the

factory testing with performance of fire pump sets before shipment to the

project site.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Jockey Fire Pump

The Jockey fire pump shall be vertical multi stages stainless steel

construction. Under Al-Madar Co.

The electrical motor shall be close-coupled to the pump and shall be of the

drip-proof, squirrel cage induction type with permanently Lubricated and

sealed ball bearings. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm

Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump shall be provided from the factory with one suitable starter of

the totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct on line type with low volt and

overload protection in each phase and suitable for automatic operation.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Sprinkler Piping

No pipe serving automatic sprinklers shall be less than 1" even if serving

only sprinkler. All connections of sprinkler pipes shall be made to the top

of cross mains and feed mains to keep dirt and sediment out of sprinklers

and sprinkler pipe. The ends of all the cross of feed mains shall be

provided with a flush and test connection comprised of 1" gate valve and

1" hose adapter to allow fitting a 1" rubber hose for manually discharging

the water to the nearest bathroom of sanitary fixture. No test outlet shall

be made less than 1" in order to give a test flow equivalent to the flow

from one sprinkler.

Under Al-Madar Co.

A Hydraulic Calculation to be submitted by the specialised contractor

complying with NFPA 13 &14. Under Al-Madar Co.

Hangers And Supports 3.2.14

3.2.12

3.2.13

Page 10 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Horizontal pipes shall be supported by hangers of the universal pipe loop

type. The hangers shall have rods that are adjustable in length and washer

type ceiling plates. The hanger shall be attached to the concrete of the

ceiling by means of expansion shields of size to suit the hanger rod size.

The hangers shall have the thickness and width of flat steel and the size of

hanger rod as given in the following table:

Pipe Dimensions Size of Rod Size of Flat Steel

1" -2" 1/16" x 5/8" 3/8"

2 1/2" & 3" 3/32" x 3/4" 1/2"

4" & 5" 1/8" x 3/4" 5/8"

6" 1/8" x 1" 3/4"

All pipe sizes shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 meters. Cross

mains of automatic sprinkler piping shall be supported independently of

the branch line hangers.

One hanger shall be provided on each length between branch lines.

Hangers shall be installed without regard to the locations of pipe sleeves

through walls. The pipe shall be centred in the sleeve and not supported

by it. Vertical pipes shall be supported at every floor by means of clamps

bolted around the pipe with legs on both sides that rest on the concrete

floor.

Standpipe

Standpipes shall be UL listed oblique pattern globe type with non-rising

bronze spindle, fitted with a leather strap and padlock with two keys. The

hand wheel shall be marked to show direction of rotation and the valve

shall be complete with blank plug and chain. Inlet size shall be 65mm

flanged and the outlet 65mm female to suit instantaneous coupling. The

Standpipe shall include an adjustable pressure-reducing device to ensure

an outlet pressure of 6.9 bar (100 psi), as per NFPA requirements (as

acceptable to the Saudi Civil Defence).

Under Al-Madar Co.

Breeching Inlets;

Breeching Inlets shall be UL listed and of vertical or horizontal pattern

having a 150mm flanged outlet and four 65mm instantaneous male inlets

complete with blank caps and chains. Breeching inlets shall be equipped

with a 25mm drain valve to drain the riser. The entire breeching inlet shall

be enclosed in a suitable flush mounted box with a labelled wired glass

door.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Breeching Inlet location for stations shall be placed diagonally at 2

locations along the perimeter of the premises and the location shall be not

more than 30.5mtrs from the fire brigade hard standing location

Under Al-Madar Co.

Portable Fire Extinguishers

Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.15

3.2.16

3.2.17

Page 11 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided as required by NFPA 10, 2007

Edition. The stored pressure extinguishers shall be 4.5 kg, ABC dry powder

or 5 kg carbon dioxide type or 2 kg ABC dry powder. The extinguisher shall

include a gauge for indication of pressure.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed at a suitable height and in the

hose cabinets. Where fire extinguishers are installed on the wall, they shall

be complete with wall mounting brackets.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire extinguishers shall be designed and constructed as per the latest

BS 5423, shall be UL/FM approved. Under Al-Madar Co.

All the equipments used in fire fighting system shall be UL/FM approved &

shall also be one approved by local authorities. Complied, with UL Listed or/and FM Approved.

Pipes, fittings and all the valves, sprinklers, equipments used in Fire

fighting system shall be pressure rated to suit to the operation of shut of

pressure of the pumps

Under Al-Madar Co.

Page 12 of 12


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2

Sprinkler System Components


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.1.1

(Model JL112& J112 –Upright)

Extended Coverage Ordinary sprinkler (ECOH)

Extended Coverage Light Hazard sprinkler (ECLH)

ModelJL112&J112-UprightECLH-ExtendedCoverageLightHazardECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazardECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazard-QuickResponse

Model JL112 & J112 ECLH/ECOH Upright(SIN R7326 – Link and RA7326 – Bulb)

• Quick Response for Light Hazard(16' x 16', 18' x 18' and 20' x 20' spacing)

• Quick Response for Ordinary Hazard(12' x 12' and 14' x 14' spacing)

• Standard Response for Ordinary Hazard(16' x 16', 18' x 18' and 20' x 20' spacing)

Features1. Extended Coverage Ordinary Hazard protection to400 ft2 (37.2m2) per sprinkler.

2. Nominal K = 11.2 (160).3. Available in brass, chrome and polyester coatedfinishes.

4. For applications as per NFPA 13.

Approvals Organizations1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)2. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (cULus)3. NYC MEA 258-93-E

UL Listing CategorySprinklers, Automatic and Open Extended CoverageSprinklers-Ordinary Hazard Occupancy UL GuideNumber – VNIV.The Reliable Model JL112 and J112 sprinkler areExtended Coverage Sprinklers for use in OrdinaryHazard 1 and 2 occupancies with a coverage area of upto 400 square feet per sprinkler.For all light hazard applications it is a Quick Responsesprinkler. For ordinary hazard applications, it is aStandard Response sprinkler when the spacing is 16' x16' and larger. When the spacing is 12' x 12' or 14' x 14',the sprinkler is Quick Response for ordinary hazardapplications.The use of ECLH/ECOH sprinklers can provide lowerinstallation costs by requiring fewer sprinklers, lesspiping and reduced labor.ECLH/ECOH sprinklers are to be installed accordingto the design criteria shown in this bulletin, NFPA 13,and all other local codes and ordinances. Flows andpressures as shown on pages 2 and 3 of this bulletin,must be used for the appropriate spacing and for thedesignated hazard classifications.

This ECLH/ECOH sprinkler is available in variousfinishes, which includes a white polyester corrosionresistant finish.

Design CriteriaReliable Model JL112 & J112 ECLH/ECOH sprinklersshall only be used in systems designed and installed inaccordance with NFPA 13 and all other local codes andordinances. The following design criteria also apply:• Minimum sprinkler spacing is 8 ft.• Sprinklers have a minimum flow requirement for eachspacing as shown in the Flow Requirements Table onthe reverse side.

• Sprinklers are only to be used in systemshydraulically designed per NFPA 13.

• Deflector to commodity clearance shall be aminimum of 18 in (457mm).

• ECOH sprinklers shall be installed in unobstructedconstructions as defined in NFPA 13. For open webtruss construction web thickness is not to exceed 1inch.

• ECOH sprinklers which are installed above thebottom of a horizontal obstruction, shall have theirdeflectors located as shown in the Obstruction Tableon page 3.

• Sprinklers can be installed under a sloping ceiling notexceeding 2 inches of rise in 12 inches.

• Maximumworking pressure is 175 psi at the sprinkler.

Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc., 103 Fairview Park Drive, Elmsford NY 10523

SIN RA 7326 is Corrosion Resistant withWhite Polyester Coating.

Bulletin 173 Rev.A

Bulletin173Rev.A

Model JL112 Upright(R 7326) - Link

Model J112 Upright(RA 7326) - Bulb

ECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazardECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazardECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazardECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazard-QuickResponseECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinary

l K = 11.2 (160).

Model JL112 UprightModel JL112 Upright(R 7326) - Link

4. For applications as per NFPA 13.

Sprinkler Model TypeTemperature Rating Max. Ceiling Temp. Maximum

SprinklerSpacing

MaximumCoverage

AreaTHD Size Approvals

°F °C °F °C

JL112 ECLH/ECOH- R7326 Upright 165 74 100 3820' 400 ft2

¾"

NPT1,2

JL112 /ECOH- R7326 Upright 212 100 150 66

J112 ECLH/ECOH- RA7326 Upright 155

200

68

93

100

150

38

6620' 400 ft2

J112 ECLH/ECOH- RA7326 Upright

Sprinkler Model Specifications

(1)For metric equivalent see Conversion Table.

Spacing Coverage Area

Ordinary Hazard 1 Ordinary Hazard 2"K" Factor

0.15 gpm/ft2 Density 0.20 gpm/ft2 Density

*Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure US Metric

16' x 16' 256 ft2 39 12.1 51 20.7

11.2 160.018' x 18' 324 ft2 49 19.1 65 33.7

20' x 20' 400 ft2 60 28.7 80 51.0

Flow Requirements - Ordinary Hazard - Standard Response

* Flow is in gpm and pressure is in psi(1)

For metric equivalent see Conversion Table.

2.





14' x 14' 196 ft2

30 7.2 39 12.1 11.2 160.012' x 12' 144 ft2

Flow Requirements - Ordinary Hazard - Quick Response



Spacing Coverage AreaFlow(gpm)

Pressure(psi)

"K" Factor

US Metric

16' x 16' 256 ft2 30 7.2

11.2 160.018' x 18' 324 ft2 33 8.7

20' x 20' 400 ft2 40 12.8

Flow Requirements - Light Hazard - Quick Response


Conversion Table

1 in = 25.4 mm

1 ft = 0.3048 m

1 ft2 = 0.093 m2

1 gpm = 3.785 lpm

1 gpm/ft2 = 40.74 mm/mim

1 psi = 0.6895 bar

JL112 ECLH/ECOH- R7326 Upright 165 74 100 38JL112 ECLH/ECOH- R7326 Upright 165 74 100 38


Ordinary Hazard 1 Ordinary Hazard 2

SpacingCoverage

Area

NFPA13 - 1991 Requirements NFPA13 - 1989 Requirements "K" Factor

Ordinary Hazard 1 Ordinary Hazard 2 Ordinary Hazard 1 Ordinary Hazard 2 Ordinary Hazard 3

US Metric0.15 gpm/ft2

Density0.20 gpm/ft

2

Density0.16 gpm/ft

2

Density0.19 gpm/ft

2

Density0.21 gpm/ft

2

Density

*Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure

14' x 14'and less

196 ft2 30.2 7.0 39.2 11.9 31.4 7.6 37.3 10.7 41.2 13.0

11.4 164.416' x 16' 256 ft2 38.4 11.4 51.2 20.2 41.0 12.9 48.7 18.2 53.8 22.3

18' x 18' 324 ft2 48.6 18.2 64.8 32.3 51.9 20.7 61.6 29.2 68.0 35.7

20' x 20' 400 ft2 60.0 27.7 80.0 49.3 64.0 31.5 76.0 44.5 84.0 54.3

Minimum Flow Requirements For Earlier Editions of NFPA 13 - FOR REFERENCE ONLY

*Flow is in gpm and pressure is in psi(1)For metric equivalent see Conversion Table.

3.

Installation Requirements for Under Concrete Tees - cULus

• The stems of the concrete tee construction must be spaced at less than 7.5 feet (2.3m) on center but more than 3feet (0,9m) on center. The depth of the concrete tees must not exceed 30 inches (762mm). The maximumpermitted concrete tee length is 32 feet (9,8m); however, where the concrete tee length exceeds 32 feet (9;8m),non-combustible baffles, equal in height to the depth of the tees, can be installed so that the longitudinal spacebetween the tees does not exceed 32 feet (9,8m) in length.

• The sprinkler deflectors are to be located in a horizontal plane at or above 1 inch (25,4mm) below the bottom of theconcrete tee stems.

• When the sprinkler deflectors are located higher than a horizontal plane 1 inch (25,4mm) beneath the bottom ofthe concrete tee stems, the obstruction to sprinkler discharge criteria requirements of NFPA13 for extendedcoverage upright sprinkler applies.

Sprinkler Finishes

Bronze

Chrome

White Polyester Coated

Finishes

Ordering Information1. Sprinkler Model2. Temperature Rating3. Finish

Corrosion Resistant

J112 ECLH/ECOH

Bulb

°F °C

155

200

68

93

J1 Wrench

Model J1Sprinkler Wrench

Use Model J1 Wrench for JL112 & J112ECLH/ECOH Upright SprinklerRemoval and Installation

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest pertinent Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory MutualResearch Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances, whenever applicable.

Products manufactured and distributed by RELIABLE have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by themost highly qualified andreputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.(800) 431-1588 Sales Offices(800) 848-6051 Sales Fax(914) 829-2042 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address

Manufactured by

Revision lines indicate updated or new data.EG. Printed in U.S.A. 09/08 P/N 9999970311

Recycled Paper

Fig. 1

Distance from Sprinklerto Side of Obstruction

Maximum Allowable DistanceDeflector Above Bottom of

Obstruction

Less than 1'....................................................... 0"

1' to less than 1' - 6".......................................... 0"

1' - 6" to less than 2'.......................................... 1"

2' to less than 2' - 6".......................................... 1"

2' - 6" to less than 3'.......................................... 1"

3' to less than 3' - 6" ......................................... 3"

4' to less than 4' - 6".......................................... 5"

4' - 6" to less than 5' ..........................................7"

5' to less than 5' - 6" ......................................... 7"

5' - 6" to less than 6' ......................................... 7"

6' to less than 6' - 6" ......................................... 9"

6' - 6" to less than 7' ........................................ 11"

7' and greater .................................................. 14"

Location of Deflector to Horizontal Obstruction


Solder Link Bulb

Classification °F °C Classification °F °C Bulb Color

Ordinary

*Intermediate

165

212

74

100

Ordinary

Intermediate

155

200

68

93

Red

Green

*Ordinary Hazard only

Ordinary 74


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.1.2

Quick Response Concealed Automatic Sprinkler (Model: G4A)

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc., 103 Fairview Park Drive, Elmsford, New York 10523

Bulle

tin 1

29 R

ev. H

Bulletin 129 Rev. H

Model G XLO

Extra Large OriÞ ce

Sprinkler

Extra Large OriÞ ce Sprinkler

(SIN R2921)Features

The Reliable Model G XLO sprinkler offers the opportunity for:

Pipe size reductionFewer sprinklersElimination of booster pumpsIncreasing densities with existing systems1/2” NPT (R½) available for retrofit installations only.Also includes additional Specific Application listing. (See detailed “UL Specification Application listing” described on the back page.)

Listings & Approvals:Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)Listed by Underwriters Laboratories’ of Canada (ULC)Approved by Factory Mutual (FM)NYC MEA 258-93-E (NFPA 13*).

UL Guide NumberVNIV

UL Listing CategorySprinklers, Automatic & Open Extra Large Orifice Upright Sprinkler and Specific Application Sprinkler.Technical Data

Sprinkler

Type

Nominal K FactorSprinkler

HeightApprovals

Sprinkler

IdentiÞ cation

Number (SIN)US Metric

Upright 0.64 Orifice with

¾” NPT (R¾)11.2 160

3.14” (80mm)

1,2,3,4 R2921

Upright Retrofit 0.64 Orifice with

½” NPT (R½)

11.2 1603.25”

(83mm)1,2,3,4 R2921

Note: This product has been tested and listed for storage applications to qualify its use in lieu of 5.6K or 8.0K Factor sprinklers for the protection of high-piled storage.

Product DescriptionThe Reliable Model G XLO sprinkler is a center strut solder in

compression extra large orifice upright sprinkler that has been designed to control high challenge fires in both palletized and rack storage occupancies utilizing relatively low water pres-sures. This sprinkler is available with either the standard 3/4” NPT (R ¾) threads for new installations or with 1/2” NPT (R½) threads for retrofit applications.

1.2.3.4.5.

6.

1.2.3.4.

It has been proven in full–scale fire testing, has complied with the applicable mechanical and hydraulic sections of the lat-est sprinkler standards and has Factory Mutual Approval and Underwriters Laboratories and Underwriters Laboratories’ of Canada Listings.

This product is intended for use as a standard spray sprinkler in hydraulically designed systems with a minimum pressure of 7 psi (0.5 bar) in accordance with the area/density curves of NFPA 13* standards and for all area/density methods of design as ref-erenced by Factory Mutual (FM) Prevention Data Sheets.

Design CriteriaThe following criteria apply when designing an automatic

sprinkler system utilizing the Model G XLO sprinkler for NFPA 13* applications.

Sprinkler spacing shall be a minimum of 6 ft. (1.8m)Sprinklers with ² NPT (R½) are to be used for retrofit applica-tions only.Sprinkler discharge pressure for NFPA 13* standard and all Factory Mutual (FM) applications shall be a minimum of 7 psi (0,5 bar).Factory Mutual (FM) Loss Prevention Data Sheets contain requirements which differ from NFPA. The Model G XLO is Approved by Factory Mutual for all area/density meth-ods of design as referenced by FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets.

The Model G XLO Extra Large Orifice sprinkler is intended for standard flow/pressure requirements and standard placement as specified for NFPA storage requirements. The Model G XLO sprinkler is not a “Large Drop” or “ESFR” sprinkler.

Temperature Ratings

ClassiÞ cationSprinkler

Rating

Maximum Ambient

TemperatureFrame

Color°F °C °F °C

OrdinaryIntermediate

High

165212286

74100141

100150225

3866107

UncoloredWhiteBlue

* For sprinkler standards prior to 1999 edition of NFPA 13, use NFPA standards 231, 231C, 231D & 231F.

••

•

•

Model G XLO

Extra Large OriÞ ceÞ

Sprinkler

Listings & Approvals:Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

Approved by Factory Mutual (FM)

11.2 160

74

11.2 160

½” NPT (R½)½” NPT (R½)

Extra Large OriÞ ce SprinklerÞ

(SIN R2921)


Manufactured by

RecycledPaper

Revision lines indicate updated or new data.

EG. Printed in U.S.A 11/09 P/N 9999970022

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory Mutual Research Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable.

Productsmanufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highly qualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.

Finishes

Standard Finishes

Bronze

Chrome

Special Application Finishes

Lead Plated (1)

Wax (1) (2)

Wax/Lead (1) (2)

- 165°F (74°C), 212°F (100°C) and 286°F (141°C) Temp. Ratings

- 165°F (74°C) Clear Wax, 212°F (100°C) Brown Wax


(1) UL Listed only.(2) 212°F (100°C) Brown wax may be used on 286°F (141°C) Sprinklers when maximum ambient temperatures do not exceed 150°F (66°C)

The UL SpeciÞ c Application Listing is:The Model G XLO upright sprinkler is intended for use in accor-

dance with NFPA 13* standards when installed in accordance with the standard sprinkler positioning and area/density flow cal-culation requirements as specified in each respective standard. Model G XLO upright sprinklers may also be installed to protect single, double and multiple – row and portable rack storage of Class I–IV, Groups A and B plastics, cartoned, expanded or un-expanded, as well as exposed unexpanded with a maximum storage height of 20 ft. (6.5m), maximum ceiling height of 25 ft. (8.2m) or 27** ft (8.8m) maximum ceiling height, 36” (914mm) minimum deflector to top of storage clearance, design density of 0.60 gpm/ft2. (24.7 L/min/m2), and a design area of 2000 ft2. (186m2) for wet systems and 2600 ft2. (242m2) for dry systems.

**Note: Maximum 27ft ceilling height is allowed by NFPA 13*, without in-rack sprinklers in a protected area, pro-vided the ceiling sprinklers’ discharge is increased to 0.6 gpm/ft2 in a 2000 ft2 design area.

InstallationReliable’s Model G XLO sprinkler must be installed accord-

ing to NFPA Standards or the appropriate Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheets for all area/density methods of design as well as the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

The Model GXLO sprinkler meets the NFPA 13* code stan-dards for approval by Factory Mutual and listings by Underwrit-ers Laboratories & Underwriters Laboratories of Canada.


MaintenanceModel G XLO Sprinklers should be inspected quarterly and

the sprinkler system maintained in accordance with NFPA 25. Do not clean sprinklers with soap and water, ammonia or any other cleaning fluids. Remove dust by using a soft brush or gentle vacuuming. Remove any sprinkler which has been painted (other than factory applied) or damaged in any way. A stock of spare sprinklers should be maintained to allow quick replacement of damaged or operated sprinklers. Prior to instal-lation, sprinklers should be maintained in the original cartons and packaging until used to minimize the potential for damage to sprinklers that would cause improper operation or non-opera-tion.

Ordering Information

Specify:Sprinkler ModelTemperature RatingFinishes

1.2.3.

Model H Sprinkler Use only the Model H sprinkler wrench for sprinkler removal and installation. Any other type of wrench may damage the sprinkler.


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.1.3

Extra Large Orifice Sprinkler (Model: G XLO)

Model G4AQuick ResponseConcealedAutomatic Sprinkler

Bulletin 154 Rev.F

Approvals & Listings

1. Underwriters Labortories, Inc. (UL)-Quick Response

2. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)-Quick Response

3. Factory Mutual Research Corp. (FM)-Standard Response• Light Hazard Occupanicies-No Limitations• Ordinary Hazard OccupanciesGroups 1 & 2 Wet Systems Only

4. NYC MEA 258-93-E - Quick Response

U.S. Patent number 4,880,063.

ApplicationThe Reliable Model G4A

Concealer®is the most versatile

quick response concealed sprin-kler available. It provides the bestform of fire protection whileoffering an attractive appearanceand ½² (13mm) of cover adjust-ment for ease of installation. Thesmall diameter cover plate as-sembly is easily attached andblends into theceiling,concealingthe most dependable fire protec-tion available, an automaticsprinkler system.

The Model G4A Concealer® is designed for use whereaesthetic appearance is important. Offices, hospitals, motelsandrestaurantsarebuta fewof theapplicationswhere itcanbeused. It isavailable indifferentorificesizesallowingthedesignerto optimize system performance, thereby achieving a veryefficient installation.TheModelG4AConcealer® is aULListedQuickResponse

Concealedsprinkler intended foruse inaccordancewithNFPA13. FM Approves this sprinkler as a standard responseconcealed sprinkler intended for use in accordance with FMLoss PreventionData Sheet 2-8N.

Product DescriptionTheReliableModelG4AConcealer

®usesaprovenquick re-

sponsefusibleelement inastandardstylesprinkler framewithadrop-downdeflector. This assembly is recessed into theceilingand concealed by a flat cover plate assembly. The threadedengagementprovides½² (13mm)of cover adjustment. The flatcover plate is attached to the skirt using either 135°F (57°C) or165°F (74°C) ordinary temperature classification solder.Whentheceilingtemperaturerises, thesolderholdingtheflat

cover plate melts, the flat cover plate released thus exposingthe sprinkler inside to the rising ambient temperature.The subsequent fusing of the element opens the waterway

and causes the deflector to distribute the water. Any secureengagement between the cover plate and cupwill assure thatthe drop-down deflector is properly located below the ceiling.

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. , 103 Fairview Park Drive, Elmsford, New York 10523

The Concealerâ

UL Quick ResponseFM Standard ResponseConcealed Sprinkler With a½² (13mm) or 1½² (38mm) Adjustment

Features1. Cover plate attachment with 1

2² (13mm)assembly adjustment.

2. Smooth aesthetic ceiling profile.3. Factory installed protective cap.4. Available in brass, chrome or blackplated and white painted finishes.

5. Ordinary temperature rating.6. Multiple orifices for design flexibility.

Bulletin154Rev.F

Model G4AQuick ResponseQuick ResponseConcealedAutomatic Sprinkler

1. Underwriters Labortories, Inc. (UL)-

2. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)-Quick Response

Quick Response3. Factory Mutual Research Corp. (FM)-

Standard Response

• Ordinary Hazard Occupancies

4. NYC MEA 258-93-E - Quick Response

Concealed Sprinkler With a½ (13mm) or 1½½²

InstallationDo not install the G4A Concealer

®in ceilings which have

positive pressure in the space above.• Cuta25 8 inch (67mm)diameterhole iscut in theceiling, thesprinkler is easily installedwith theModel G4Wrench. Thewrench has drive tangs which insert into the cup slots.When installingasprinkler thewrench is first positioned intothe sprinkler/cup assembly until the wrench tangs engagethe drive slots in the top of the cup (there are two sets ofdrive slots in the cup). The sprinkler is then tightened intothepipefitting. Wheninsertingorremovingthewrenchfromthesprinkler/cupassembly,careshouldbetakentopreventdamage to the sprinkler. DO NOT WRENCH ON ANYOTHER PART OF THE SPRINKLER/CUP ASSEMBLY.Install the cover plate by hand turning the cover in theclockwise direction until it is tight against the ceiling.

A protective cap is provided to protect the drop-down sprinklerdeflector from damage which could occur during constructionbefore the cover plate is installed. The cap is factory installedinside the sprinkler cup. Remove cap to install sprinkler, thenre-install cap until the cover plate is installed.

MaintenanceThe Model G4A Concealer

â

should be inspected quarterlyand the sprinkler system maintained in accordance with NFPA25. Donotcleansprinklerswithsoapandwater, ammoniaoranyother cleaning fluids. Remove any sprinkler that has beenpainted (other than factory applied) or damaged in any way. Astock of spare sprinklers should be maintained to allow quickreplacement of damaged or operated sprinklers. Prior toinstallation, sprinklers should be maintained in the originalcartons and packaging to minimize the potential for damage tosprinklers thatwouldcauseimproperoperationornon-operation.

Ordering Information1. Sprinkler Model2. Nominal Orifice3. Flat Cover PlateAssembly Finish

4. Inlet Type

Temperature Rating

Classification SprinklerCoverPlate

Max. AmbientTemp.

Ordinary 165°F/74°C 135°F/57°C 100°F/38°C

Intermediate 212°F/100°C 165°F/74°C 150°F/66°C

Technical Data

Sprinkler InletTotal

AdjustmentNominalOrifice

Nominal K FactorThread Approvals

SprinklerIdentifcation (SIN)US Metric

Non Adjustable ½² (13mm) ½² (15mm) 5.6 80 ½² NPT (R½) 1,2,3,4 R5415

Non Adjustable ½² (13mm) 716² (11mm) 4.2 60 ½ ²NPT (R½) 1,2,4 R5413

Non Adjustable ½² (13mm) 38² (10mm) 2.8 40 ½ ²NPT (R½) 1,2,3,4 R5411

Adjustable 1½² (38mm) ½² (15mm) 5.6 80 1² NPT Male or Female 1,2,4 R5418

Adjustable 1½² (38mm) 716² (11mm) 4.2 60 1² NPT Male or Female 1,2,4 R5413

Adjustable 1½² (38mm) 38² (10mm) 2.8 40 1² NPT Male or Female 1,2,4 R5412

Model G4 SprinklerWrench

UL Listing CategorySprinklers, Automatic andOpenQuick Response Sprinkler

UL Guide NumberVNIV

Standard Finishes

BronzeChromeWhite Paint

Special ApplicationFinishes

Bright BrassBlack PlatingBlack PaintOff WhiteSatin Chrome

Cover Plate Finishes(1)

(1)Other finishes and colors areavailable on special order.Consult factory for details.

Fig.1 - ½² NPT Non-Adjustable Inlet Fig. 2 - 1² NPT Male-Adjustable Inlet Fig. 3 - 1² NPT Female-Adjustable Inlet

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordancewith the latest publishedStandards of theNational Fire Protection Association, FactoryMutualResearch Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable.ProductsmanufacturedanddistributedbyReliable havebeenprotecting life andproperty for over 80 years, andare installedandservicedby themosthighlyqualifiedand reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.


(800) 431-1588 Sales Offices(800) 848-6051 Sales Fax(914) 829-2042 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address

RecycledPaper


EG. Printed in USA 4/07 P/N 9999970150

Bright Brass

Ordinary 165Ordinary 165 F/74 C 135C 135 F/57 C 100C 100 F/38 COrdinary 165°F/74F/74°C 135C 135°F/57F/57°C 100C 100°F/38F/38°C

(13mm) ½ (15mm) 5.6 80 ½(15mm) 5.6 80 ½(15mm) 5.6 80 ½(15mm) 5.6 80 ½ NPT (R½) 1,2,3,4 R5415NPT (R½) 1,2,3,4 R5415NPT (R½) 1,2,3,4 R5415(13mm) ½² (15mm) 5.6 80 ½²


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.2

Sprinkler Guard

Model C & Model D

Sprinkler Guards• Model C• Model D

Model C Sprinkler Guards

Model C Series sprinkler guards are designed to beassembled onto installed sprinklers. They areconstructed of heavy gauge wire welded to steelmounting plates and finished with zinc plating. Otherfinishes are available. Guards protect automaticsprinklers in locations where they are subject tophysical damage. Refer to guard selection table forlisting and approval information regarding specificsprinkler and guard combinations.

All Model C guards are certified by FM Approvals.Models C-2 and C-3 also have cULus Listings.

• Model C-1

Model C-1 guards are used with pendent, upright,horizontal sidewall and vertical sidewall sprinklers.

• Model C-2

Model C-2 guards are used with pendent drysprinklers.

• Model C-3

Model C-3 guards have a water shield attached.When assembled to an upright sprinkler, thecombination is for upright intermediate sprinklerapplications.

• Model C-5

Model C-5 guards are supplied with a water shieldand O-Ring which are assembled to the sprinklerbefore the sprinkler is installed. The guard is theninstalled to the sprinkler after it is installed in thefitting.

Model D Sprinkler Guards

The Model D Series sprinkler guards aresupplied as kits to be assembled to the sprinkler atthe job site before sprinkler installation. The kitconsists of the guard, ½² and ¾² locknuts and awater shield when being used as an intermediatelevel sprinkler. The pendent intermediate has anO-Ring supplied.

Each guard type is fabricated of heavy gaugewire welded to steel mounting plates and complieswith the latest UL standards. Guards protectautomatic sprinklers in locations where physicaldamage can occur.

Model D Series guards are also available factoryassembled on the sprinkler ready for immediatesprinkler/guard installation. Consult factory foravailability.

• Model D-1

Model D-1 guards can be assembled to pendent,upright and horizontal sidewall sprinklers.

• Model D-3 and D-6

Model D-3 and D-6 guards have a water shieldattached and are assembled to upright sprinklers.The sprinkler guard assembly is for uprightintermediate level sprinkler applications.


Model D-4 and D-5 guards are D-1 guards suppliedwith an original water shield which is threaded on (½²)or passed over (¾²) the sprinkler inlet thread. Thecombination forms a pendent intermediate levelsprinkler.

Guards and water shields are finished with zincplating. Other finishes are available upon request.

All Model D Guards are cULus Listed. Refer toguard selection table for listing and approvalinformation regarding specific sprinkler and guardcombinations.

Model D1 Sprinkler Guard

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. • 525NorthMacQuestenParkway • MountVernon • NewYork • 10552

Bulletin 208 Rev.F

Listings & Approvals

1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. andUL certified for Canada (cULus)

2. Certified by FM Approvals

3. NYC MEA 258-93-E

4. Scientific Services Laboratories (SSL, Australia)*

* For Models C1, C2, C3 guards.

Patents:

USA Patent Number 5,893,418Applies to Model D Series Guards

Bulletin208Rev.F

All Model C guards are certified by FM Approvals.Models C-2 and C-3 also have cULus Listings.All Model C guards are certified by FM Approvals.


2.

Model C-1 Guards

Model C-2 Guards

Model C-3 Guards

Model C-5 Guards

Model D-1 Guards

Model D-5 Guards

Model D-3 Guards

Model D-4 Guards

3.

Model D-6 Guards

Guards are approved to be used with sprinklers listed below.

(1) MEA approval on D-1, D-3, D-4, D-5, C-2, and C-3

(2) SSL approval on C-1, C-2, and C-3

(3) Model GFR does not have FM Approval.

(4) Sprinkler guards are listed and approved only for use with specific sprinklers. The use of any other

guards on these sprinklers may impede their operation or distribution and negate all approvals and warranties.

Guard Model (3) Sprinkler ModelApplication

Sprinkler Type Orifice Sizes

Approvals with SIN Number

MEA(1) , SSL(2)

cULus FM (3)

D-1 G, GFR, F1, F1FRPendent, Upright,HSW

3/8”, 7/16”, ½”,17/32”

R3611, R3613, R3615,R3612, R3621, R3623,R3625, R3622, R3111,R3113, R3115, R3117,R3121, R3123, R3125,R3127, R3635, R3131,R3133, R3135, R3137,R1711, R1713, R1715,R1712, R1721, R1723,R1725, R1722, R1735,R1011, R1013, R1015,R1016, R1017, R1021,R1023, R1025, R1026,R1027, R1231, R1233,R1235, R1236, R1237

D-3 G, GFR, F1, F1FR Upright Intermediate ½”, 17/32”R3625, R3622, R3125,R3127, R1725, R1722,R1025, R1026, R1027

D-4 G, GFR, F1, F1FRPendent Intermediate(Large Shield)

½”, 17/32 R3115, R3117

D-5 G, F1, F1FRPendent Intermediate

(Small Shield)½”, 17/32

R3615, R3612, R1715,R1712, R1015, R1016,R1017

D-6 G XLO Upright Intermediate 0.64 R2921

C-1 G, F1, F1FR

Pendent, Upright,HSW, VerticalSidewall, Upright &Pendent

3/8”, ½”, 17/32”

R1011, R1015, R1016,R1017, R1021, R1025,R1026, R1027, R1235,R1285, R1712, R1715,R1721, R1725, R1735,R1785, R3612, R3615,R3622, R3625, R3635,R3685

C-2 F3, F3QR Pendent ½”R1616, R5314,R5714, R4216

R5314, R5714

C-3 G, GFR, F1, F1FR Upright Intermediate ½”, 17/32”R3625, R3622, R3125,R3127, R1725, R1722,R1025, R1026, R1027

R3625, R1725,R1025, R1027

C-5 G, F1, F1FR Pendent Intermediate ½”, 17/32”R1015, R1017,R3615, R1715,R1712, R3612

4.

Installation Instructions

• Model C Guards

With both cups unhooked, slightly spread open theguard. Insert steel plate into the installed sprinklerbetween the threads and the wrench flats. The steelplate tabs should face the sprinkler wrench flats and fourcontact points engage the sprinkler neck.

For Model C-2, the steel plate fits into the groove ineach wrench flat and the guard is located by the notch inboth steel plates.

Snap the farther locking clip into place, then close thenear clip. The guard is now securely installed in place. Iflocking clip requires too much force to snap closed oropen, slightly flex the wires on both sides of the clip andeither close or open the clip.

Finish

Standard Finish—Zinc with chromate dip.

Other finishes, quoted on request.


• Guard Type (D-1,D-2 etc.)

• Finish (Standard or other)

• Sprinkler Inlet Thread Size,D-4 & D-5 Guards Only.

• Optional: Consult Factory for assembly onsprinkler.

Specify Sprinkler:- Type.- Temperature Rating.- Finish.

• Wrench: Not supplied by Reliable

Overall Cage Size:

Models C-1, C-2, C-5

27 8² (73mm) High X 234² (70mm) Diameter

Models C-3, D-3, D-6

234² (70mm) High X 412² (114mm) Diameter

Models D-1, D-5

258² (67mm) High X 3² (76mm) Diameter

Model C-4

278² High X 412² Diameter

• Model D Guards

Before a sprinkler is installed into a fitting, assemblethe guard on the sprinkler using the same techniquedescribed above for the Model C Guards. Theninstall a ½² or ¾² locking nut on to the NPT threadsuntil the nut is tight against the guard. Each guard issupplied with both size of locking nuts. Theassembly of sprinkler and guard is then wrenchedinto place using an adjustable wrench maximumsize 8² and a jaw opening of 11

8² (for D-1, D-3, D-4

or D-5) or an adjustable wrench maximum size 10²

and a jaw opening of 1516² (for D-6).

Wrench must be placed over the guard. Do notuse the wrench directly on the sprinkler wrenchboss. The sprinkler wrench boss requires aspecial wrench.

5.


(800) 431–1588 Sales Offices(800) 848–6051 Sales Fax(914) 668–3470 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address

Manufactured by


E.G. Printed in U.S.A. 8/04 P/N 9999970152

Recycled Paper

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, FactoryMutual Research Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable.

Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highlyqualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.

Reliable...For Complete ProtectionReliable offers a wide selection of sprinkler components. Following are some of the many

precision-made Reliable products that guard life and property from fire around the clock.

• Automatic sprinklers

• Flush automatic sprinklers

• Recessed automatic sprinklers

• Concealed automatic sprinklers

• Adjustable automatic sprinklers

• Dry automatic sprinklers

• Intermediate level sprinklers

• Open sprinklers

• Spray nozzles

• Alarm valves

• Retarding chambers

• Dry pipe valves

• Accelerators for dry pipe valves

• Mechanical sprinkler alarms

• Electrical sprinkler alarm switches

• Water flow detectors

• Deluge valves

• Detector check valves

• Check valves

• Supertrol electrical system

• Sprinkler emergency cabinets

• Sprinkler wrenches

• Sprinkler escutcheons and guards

• Inspectors test connections

• Sight drains

• Ball drips and drum drips

• Control valve seals

• Air maintenance devices

• Air compressors

• Pressure gauges

• Identification signs

• Fire department connection


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.3

Water Flow Detector (WFD) -WFD30-2

Replacement Parts

A3008-00 Retard Mechanism

A77-01-02 Terminal Block

546-7000 Cover Tamper Switch Kit

WFDW Cover Wrench

WFDN4 Replacement gasket kit

New WFD30-2 models install in 2″

hole sizes

UL models are NEMA 4 rated

Sealed retard mechanism assures that

the retard is not contaminated by dust

and dirt when the cover is removed

Visual switch activation permits installer

to accurately set retard under noisy

conditions

Rugged, dual SPDT switches are

enclosed in a durable terminal block

Accommodates up to 12 AWG wire

100% synchronization activates

both alarm panel and local bell

simultaneously

System Sensor’s WFD series is compatible with schedule 10 through 40 steel pipe,

sizes 2″ through 8″, and can be mounted in a vertical or horizontal position.

Robust Construction. The WFD series consists of a rugged, NEMA 4 rated enclo-sure. Designed for both indoor and outdoor use, the WFD series operates across a wide temperature range, from 32°F to 120°F.

Reliable Performance. UL listed models are equipped with tamper resistant cover screws to prevent unauthorized entry. Inside, two sets of SPDT (Form C) syn-chronized switches are enclosed in a durable terminal block to assure reliable performance.

False Alarm Immunity. The WFD series incorporates a mechanical retard feature, which minimizes the risk of false alarm due to pressure surges or air trapped in the sprinkler system. In addition, the mechanical retard’s unique sealed design is immune to dust and other contaminants.

Simplified Operation. The WFD series is designed to simplify installation. Two conduit openings permit easy attachment to the local alarm system. The retard mechanism and dual SPDT switches are field-replaceable.

UL ULC/Canadian

Models Models

WFD20 WFD20A

WFD25 WFD25A

WFD30-2 WFD30-2A

WFD35 WFD35A

WFD40 WFD40A

WFD50 WFD50A

WFD60 WFD60A

WFD80 WFD80A

Product Overview

WFD40

WFD Series

Waterflow Detector

S P R I N K L E R S Y S T E M S M O N I T O R I N G

S739

CS169

1W9A2.AH

7770-1209:140

167-93-E

WFD Series

S739

1W9A2.AH

Engineering Specifications

Vane-type waterflow detectors shall be installed on system piping as designated on the drawing and/or as specified herein. Detectors shall mount on any clear pipe span of the appropriate nominal size, either a vertical upflow or horizontal run, at least 6″ from any fittings which may change water direction, flow rate, or pipe diameter or no closer than 24″ from a valve or drain. Detectors shall have a sensitivity in the range of 4 to 10 gallons per minute and a static pressure rating of 450 psi* for 2″ - 8″ pipes. The detector shall respond to waterflow in the specified direction after a preset time delay which is field adjustable. The delay mechanism shall be a sealed mechanical pneumatic unit with visual indication of actuation. The actuation mechanism shall include a polyethylene vane inserted through a hole in the pipe and connected by a mechanical linkage to the delay mechanism. Outputs shall consist of dual SPDT switches (Form C contacts). Two conduit entrances for standard fittings of commonly used electrical conduit shall be provided on the detectors. A grounding provision is provided. Unless noted, enclosures shall be NEMA 4 listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. All detectors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for indoor or outdoor use.

Static Pressure Rating

450 PSI*

Triggering Threshold Bandwidth (Flow Rate)

4–10 GPM

Maximum Surge

18 Feet Per Second (FPS)

Compatible Pipe:

Steel water pipe, schedule 10 through 40

Contact Ratings

Two sets of SPDT (Form C)

10.0 A, 1/2 HP @ 125/250 VAC

2.5 A @ 6/12/24 VDC

Overall Dimensions Installed:

©2005 System Sensor. The company reserves the right to change product specifications without notice. A05-0180-010•6/05•1381


UL Model Numbers ULC/Canadian Model Numbers Pipe Size Hole Size

WFD20 WFD20A 2″ 11⁄4″

WFD25 WFD25A 21⁄2″ 11⁄4″

WFD30-2 WFD30-2A 3″ 2″

WFD35 WFD35A 31⁄2″ 11⁄4″

WFD40 WFD40A 4″ 2″

WFD50 WFD50A 5″ 2″

WFD60* WFD60A 6″ 2″

WFD80* WFD80A 8″ 2″

*Maximum pressure rating 400 psi as approved by Factory Mutual.

Conduit Entrances

Two openings for 1⁄2″ conduit. One open, one knock-

out type

Operating Temperature Range

32ºF to 120ºF (0ºC to 49ºC)

Enclosure Rating*

NEMA 4 – suitable for indoor/outdoor use

Cover Tamper Switch

Standard with ULC models

Optional for UL models, part no. 546-7000

Shipping Weight

WFD20: 4.2 lbs. WFD40: 5.2 lbs.

WFD25: 4.3 lbs. WFD50: 6.3 lbs.

WFD30-2: 4.5 lbs. WFD60: 6.8 lbs.

WFD35: 4.7 lbs. WFD80: 7.5 lbs.

Delay Adjustment Dial:

Service Use

Automatic Sprinkler: NFPA-13

One or Two Family Dwelling: NFPA 13D

Residential Occupancies up to 4 Stories: NFPA 13R

National Fire Alarm Code: NFPA-72

Warranty

3 Years

U.S. Patent Numbers

3,845,259

4,782,333

5,213,205

Part Number Description

A3008-00 Retard mechanism

A77-01-02 Terminal block

546-7000 Tamper proof switch kit

WFDW Tamper proof wrench for cover

WFDN4 Gasket kit

Standard Specifications

3.0″

3.75″

Pipe saddle

U bolt nut

Width: See Table

Plastic vane

Pipe

U bolt

1.6″

ModelWFD20

WFD25

WFD30-2

WFD35

Width4.6″4.6″5.2″5.7″

ModelWFD40

WFD50

WFD60

WFD80

Width6.8″7.8″9.0″10.8″

NOTE: Common and B connections willclose when vane is deflected, i.e.,when water is flowing. Dual switchespermit applications to be combinedon a single detector.

CONTACT RATINGS

125/250 VAC

24 VDC

10 AMPS

2.5 AMPS

WFD

B B

COM COM

WFD

B B

COM COM

Typical FACP Connection

To nonsilenceable initiating zone of

listed FACP

end-of-line resistor

B

COM

To power sourcecompatible

with bell

localbell

WFDswitch assembly

Typical Local Bell Connection

Break wire as shown forsupervision of connection.DO NOT allow stripped wireleads to extend beyondswitch housing. DO NOTloop wires.

T16-0010-XXX

B

COM

ACOM COM

SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2

A B B A

•CAUTION•ROUTE WIRINGAWAY FROMSHARP EDGES & COPONENTS

SWITCH SCHEMATIC•READY• STATE

System Sensor Sales and Service

System Sensor Headquarters

3825 Ohio Avenue

St. Charles, IL 60174

Ph: 800/SENSOR2

Fx: 630/377-6495

www.systemsensor.com

System Sensor Canada

Ph: 905.812.0767

Fx: 905.812.0771

System Sensor Europe

Ph: 44.1403.891920

Fx: 44.1403.891921

System Sensor in China

Ph: 86.29.8832.0119

Fx: 86.29.8832.5119

System Sensor in Singapore

Ph: 65.6273.2230

Fx: 65.6273.2610

System Sensor – Far East

Ph: 85.22.191.9003

Fx: 85.22.736.6580

System Sensor – Australia

Ph: 613.54.281.142

Fx: 613.54.281.172

System Sensor – India

Ph: 91.124.237.1770 x.2700

Fx: 91.124.237.3118

System Sensor – Russia

Ph: 70.95.937.7982

Fx: 70.95.937.7983


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.4.1

Supervisory Switch (Model: OSY2)

Models Available

EPS10-1 One SPDT Switch

EPS10-2 Two SPDT Switches

EPSA10-1 ULC/Canadian Version


Replacement Parts

S07-66-02 Replacement Cover Screws

WFDW Replacement Cover Wrench

546-8000 Cover Tamper Switch

EPS10 Series

Pressure Adjustment Wheel

System Sensor EPS10 Series switches are designed for use in wet, dry, deluge, and pre-

action automatic sprinkler systems to indicate a discharge from a sprinkler. The EPS10-1

has a single SPDT switch while the EPS10-2 model contains two SPDT switches.

The EPS10 Series features field adjustable pressure sensitivity to provide an alarmresponse between 4 and 20 psi. It is factory set to respond at 4 – 8 psi on risingpressure. The pressure adjustment wheel requires no special tools and does notaffect switch synchronization on the EPS10-2.

Product Overview

Model shall be an EPS10-1 or EPS10-2 pressure type waterflow switch as manufac-tured by System Sensor of St. Charles, IL. They shall be installed on the sprinklersystem with connection as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.Pressure switches shall be of the bellows-activated type.

Switches shall have a maximum service pressure rating of 250 psi and shall be fac-tory adjusted to operate at a pressure of 4 – 8 psi. There shall be one (1) or two (2)SPDT contacts rated at 10.0 Amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5 Amp @ 6/12/24 VDC.

The contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated on the plans, pressureswitches according to appropriate NFPA standards. Switches shall be providedwith a 1⁄2″ NPT male pressure connection to be connected to the alarm check valveof a “wet” sprinkler system, into the intermediate chamber of a “dry” system, or toa pre-action or deluge valve. They shall be activated by any flow of water equal toor in excess of the discharge from one sprinkler head. Switches shall provide 1knockout type and 1 open hole for 1⁄2″ conduit fitting attachment and a groundscrew provision for electrical grounding.

The switch enclosure shall be weatherproof and carry a UL 4x/NEMA 4 ratingwhen used with proper electrical fittings and conduit. The cover shall incorporatetamper-resistant screws.

The unit shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and approved by FactoryMutual.

Engineering Specifications EPS10-1 (SPDT), EPS10-2 (2/SPDT)

APPROVED

Sensitivity adjustment wheel,

no tools required

Reinforced diaphragm resists

pressure spikes

Two conduit entrances provided

NEMA 4 rated

EPS10-1 AND EPS10-2

Alarm Pressure Switches


VdS

EPS10-1 One SPDT Switch

EPS10-1 AND EPS10-2

EPS10-2 Two SPDT Switches

©2003 System Sensor. The company reserves the right to change product specifications without notice. A05-0176-008•6/03•#1037

Specifications

Maximum Operating Pressure

250 psi

Differential

Approximately 3 psi throughout range

Maximum Adjustment Pressure Range

4 to 20 psi

Factory Setting

Operates at rising pressure 4 to 8 psi

Pressure Connection1/2″ NPT male glass reinforced nylon

Switch Contact Ratings

EPS10-1: One set SPDT (Form C)

EPS10-2: Two sets SPDT (Form C)

10.0 A, 1/2 HP @ 125/250 VAC

2.5 A @ 6/12/24 VDC

Dimensions

5.12″ H x 3.325″ W x 4.250″ L

(13.0 cm x 8.4 cm x 10.8 cm)

Operating Temperature Range:

Indoor or outdoor use

–40°F to 160°F (–40°C to 71°C)

Cover Tamper Switch

UL Models: Optional P/N 546-8000

ULC Models: Factory Installed

Enclosure

Rated UL 4x, NEMA 4 for indoor or outdoor use

Shipping Weight

1.2 lbs. (.54 Kg)

Service Use

Automatic Sprinkler: NFPA 13


Residential Occupancies up to 4 Stories: NFPA 13R

National Fire Alarm Code: NFPA 72

Warranty

3 years

Pressure Switch Basic Dimensons Electrical Connections for EPS10-1 and EPS10-2

Typical Sprinkler Applications

HEX

ADJUSTMENT

SCREW

MAIN ADJUSTMENT

WHEEL

41/4″�

51/8″�

LOCKING

SCREW1/2″ NPT

COM

AB

GROUND

SCREW

(GREEN) SWITCH #2

MODEL EPS10-1

ACOM

B

SWITCH AT 0 PSI

SWITCH AT 4-8 PSI (HIGH TRIP PT.)B

COMA

SWITCH 1

MODEL EPS10-2

SWITCHES AT 0 PSIB

COMA

BCOM

A

ACOM

B

ACOM

B

BOTH SWITCHES ACTIVATE SIMULTANEOUSLY

SW1 SW2

SW1 SW2

SWITCHES AT 4-8 PSI (HIGH TRIP PT.)


Model Description

EPS10-1 Alarm Waterflow Pressure Switch, One SPDT, 4–20 PSI

EPS10-2 Alarm Water flow Pressure Switch, Two SPDT, 4–20 PSI



Replacement Parts

Model Description

S07-66-02 Replacement Tamper Screws for Cover of EPS

WFDW Replacement Tamper Proof Wrench for Cover of EPS

546-8000 Cover Tamper Switch for EPS Series

ALARM

CHECK

VALVE

OS & Y

VALVE

WATER

BY-PASS

VALVE

LOCAL ALARM

SHUT OFF

VALVE

RETARD

WATER

MOTOR

GONG

EPS10

WET SYSTEM

WIRE TO ALARM

INDICATING CIRCUIT

OF FIRE ALARM

CONTROL PANEL

TO

SPRINKLER

SYSTEM

ALARM

CHECK

VALVE

OS & Y

VALVE

WATER

BY-PASS

VALVE

LOCAL ALARM

SHUT OFF

VALVE

RETARD

WATER

MOTOR

GONG

EPS10

WET SYSTEM

WIRE TO

ALARM

INDICATING

CIRCUIT

OF FIRE

ALARM

CONTROL

PANEL

TO

SPRINKLER

SYSTEM

DRY

PIPE

VALVE

OS & Y

VALVE

WATER

BY-PASS

VALVE

LOCAL ALARM

SHUT OFF

VALVE

WATER

MOTOR

GONG

CHECK

VALVE

EPS10

DRY SYSTEM

WIRE TO

ALARM

INDICATING

CIRCUIT

OF FIRE ALARM

CONTROL PANEL

TO

SPRINKLER

SYSTEM



3825 Ohio Avenue


Ph: 800/SENSOR2

Fx: 630/377-6495

Documents-on-Demand

800/736-7672 x3



Ph: 905.812.0767

Fx: 905.812.0771


Ph: 44.1403.276500

Fx: 44.1403.276501


Ph: 86.29.524.6253

Fx: 86.29.524.6259


Ph: 65.6273.2230

Fx: 65.6273.2610


Ph: 85.22.191.9003

Fx: 85.22.736.6580


Ph: 613.54.281.142

Fx: 613.54.281.172


Ph: 91.124.637.1770 x.2700

Fx: 91.124.637.3118

EPS10-1 Alarm Waterflow Pressure Switch, One SPDT, 4–20 PSIEPS10-1 Alarm Waterflow Pressure Switch, One SPDT, 4–20 PSI

EPS10-2 Alarm Water flow Pressure Switch, Two SPDT, 4–20 PSIEPS10-2 Alarm Water flow Pressure Switch, Two SPDT, 4–20 PSI


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.4.2

Alarm Pressure Switches (EPS10-1 & EPS10-2)

System Sensor’s OSY2 is used to monitor the open position of an Outside Screw

and Yoke (OS&Y) type gate valve.

Robust Construction. The OSY2 consists of a rugged housing, intended for indoor and outdoor use. When installed with the actuator in the vertical position, the OSY2 is NEMA 3R rated per UL.

Application Flexibility. The OSY2 features a user-friendly mounting bracket and adjustable shaft to permit mounting to most OS&Y valves, ranging in size from 1″ to 12″. Its right angle design and wide bracket span provides maximum clearance for valve components, to accommodate troublesome valves. Removing the OSY2’s gate valve bracket allows the unit to monitor side-bracket style pressure reducing valves.

Simplified Operation. Installation is made easier with the OSY2’s single side conduit entrance. By providing a direct conduit pathway to the electrical source, right angle fittings are not required. Installation is further simplified by the OSY2’s adjustable length actuator, which eliminates the need for cutting the shaft.

Reliable Performance. The OSY2 is equipped with tamper resistant cover screws to prevent unauthorized entry. Inside, two sets of SPDT (Form C) synchronized switches are enclosed in a durable terminal block to assure reliable performance.

Models Available

OSY2 OS&Y Supervisory Switch

OSY2A OS&Y Supervisory Switch

(ULC/Canadian)

Replacement Parts

OSYRK Replacement Hardware Kit

546 -7000 Cover Tamper Switch Kit

S07-66-xx Tamper Screws for Cover

WFDW Cover Wrench

HEXW Replacement Hex Wrench

Product Overview

OSY2

NEMA 3R rated enclosure

User-friendly mounting bracket

fits newer valve yokes

Single side conduit entry does not

require right angle fittings

Adjustable length actuator eliminates

the need for cutting the shaft


Three position switch monitors

vandal and valve close signals

Two SPDT contacts are enclosed in a

durable terminal block for added strength

100% synchronization activates both

alarm panel and local bell simultaneously

OSY2Supervisory Switch


S739 CS169 7770 –1209:217

OW6A8.AY 167– 93–E





Contact Ratings

Two sets of SPDT (Form C)

10.0 A @ 125/250VAC

2.5 @ 6/12/24VDC

Overall Switch Dimensions

53/4″H x 3 1/2″W x 3 1/4″D

(14.6cm x 8.9cm x 8.2cm)

Bracket Span

2 1/4″H x 6 3/4″W x 1″D

(5.7cm x 17.1cm x 2.5cm)

Maximum Stem Extension

25/8″ (6.7cm)

Shipping Weight

2.8 lbs. (1.3 kg)

Conduit Entrances

One single side open for 1/2″ conduit

Operating Temperature Range

32ºF to 120°F ( 0ºC to 49ºC)

NOTE: The OSY2 will operate from – 40ºF to 120ºF

(– 40ºC to 49ºC); however UL does not test control

valve supervisory switches below 32ºF (0ºC).

Enclosure Rating

UL indoor/outdoor

NEMA 3R when mounted with the actuator vertical

Cover Tamper Switch

Standard with ULC model

Optional for UL model, part no. 546 -7000

Service Use

Automatic Sprinkler: NFPA 13


Residential Occupancies up to 4 stories: NFPA 13R

National Fire Alarm code: NFPA 72

Warranty

3 years

U.S. Patent Nos.

5,478,038; 5,213,205


Model shall be model number OSY2 supervisory switch as manufactured by System Sensor. OSY2 shall be installed on each valve as designated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and shall be adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the valve control or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die cast metal housing, which shall provide a side entrance for 1/2″ conduit and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. A grounding provision is provided. The switch assembly shall include two switches each with a rated capacity of 10 Amp @ 125/250VAC and 2.5 Amp @ 24VDC. The cover shall contain tamper-resistant screws for which a security wrench will be provided with each switch. The OSY2 shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed for indoor or outdoor use. The OSY2 shall be Factory Mutual, CSFM, and MEA approved.

OSY2 Mounting

Electrical Connections for OSY2


Model Number Description

OSY2 Outside Screw and Yoke valve supervisory switch

OSY2A Outside Screw and Yoke valve supervisory switch (ULC model)

Part Number Description

OSYRK Replacement hardware kit (wrenches, screw pack and J–hooks)

546 –7000 Cover tamper switch kit

S07– 66–XX Tamper screws for cover

WFDW Replacement tamper proof wrench for cover

HEXW Replacement hex wrench



3825 Ohio Avenue


Ph: 800/SENSOR2

Fx: 630/377-6495



Ph: 905.812.0767

Fx: 905.812.0771


Ph: 44.1403.276500

Fx: 44.1403.276501


Ph: 86.29.8832.0119

Fx: 86.29.8832.5110


Ph: 65.6273.2230

Fx: 65.6273.2610


Ph: 85.22.191.9003

Fx: 85.22.736.6580


Ph: 613.54.281.142

Fx: 613.54.281.172


Ph: 91.124.637.1770 x.2700

Fx: 91.124.637.3118

System Sensor – Russia

Ph: 70.95.937.7982

Fx: 70.95.937.7983

THE FOLLOWING ARE EXAMPLES OF

ACCEPTABLE MOUNTING POSITIONS:

THE FOLLOWING MOUNTING

POSITION IS

ACTUATOR

VERTICAL (DOWN)

ACTUATOR

HORIZONTAL

ACTUATOR VERTICAL

(POINTING UP)

Top View

Switch 1

COM COM

A B B A Switch 2CONTACT RATINGS

125/250 VAC

24 VDC

10 AMPS

2.5 AMPS

Sup. Switch

B B

COM COM

Sup. Switch

B B

COM COM


to nonsilenceable initiatingzone of listed FACP


B

COM

to power sourcecompatible

with bell

localbell


Break wire as shown for supervisionof connection. DO NOT allow strippedwire leads to extend beyond switchhousing. DO NOT loop wires.

Strip Gauge

W0223-00W0211-00

OSY2 OutsideOSY2 Outside Screw and Yoke valve supervisory switch


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5

Valves


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.1

High Pressure Alarm Check Valve (E3)

Model E3 High PressureAlarm Check Valve4² (100mm), 6² (150mm),165 mm & 8² (200mm)


Features

1. 300 psi (20,7 bar) ratings. Factory testedhydrostatically to 600 psi (41,4 bar).

2. Grooved seat design ensures positivewater flow alarm operation.

3. Precision retard chamber minimizes falsealarmsunder variablepressureconditions.

4. External by-pass minimizes false alarmsunder all supply pressure conditions.

5. Grooved inlet and outlet connections.Less weight than flange valves.

6. Vertical and horizontal trims available.7. Three compact galvanized trim stylesavailable:• Individual part trim• Segmentally assembled trim• Factory trimmed valve

8. TestANDrainâ

valve with pressure relief,optional:• Exercises the clapper with alarm test.• Functions like the Inspector’s TestPort with greater convenience.

DescriptionThe Reliable Model E3 Alarm Valve activates the waterflow alarm device in wet pipe sprinklers systems. Thedesign allows for installation under both variable andconstant supply pressure conditions. When water flowsin the sprinkler system due to the operation of one ormore automatic fire sprinklers, the alarm valve opens,allowing continuous flow of water into the system andtransmittal of water pressure to electrical and/ormechanical water flow alarm devices.

Bulletin 410 Rev.D Bulletin410Rev.D

Approvals & Listings1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.and Certified by UL for Canada (cULus).

2. Approved by FM Research (FM).

• When used with the Model E3 trim sets.

• Optional TestANDrainâ

Valve is not FM Approved.

3. Scientific Services Laboratory (SSL, Australia).100mm, 165mm & 200mm.

4. NYC MEA 258-93-E

5. Conforms to EN 12259-2 metric sizes only (CE).

6. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) Approved.

Ordering Information – Specify:

• Valve size – 4² (100mm) or 6² (150mm), or 165mmor 8² (200mm).

• Type of trim – Constant Pressure or VariablePressure.

• Style of trim – Individual parts trim, segmentallyassembled trim, or factory trimmed valve.

Model E3 High PressureModel E3 High PressureAlarm Check ValveModel E3 High Pressure


Valve Description1. Rated working pressure: 300 (20,7 bar).2. Factory hydrostatic test pressure: 600 psi (41,4 bar).3. End and trim connections:

• Threaded openings per ANSI B 2.1 or ISO 7/1 R.

• Grooves per ANSI/AWWA C606.4. Color: Black.

Red (E3A*)Red (Metric)

Model E3 Trim DescriptionThe basic trims for the Reliable Model E3 HighPressure Alarm Valve (Figs. 3 & 4), are arranged forrapid, easy and compact attachment, and serve asconnection points to Reliable alarm and otherdevices. They also act as a means for testing theoperation of the alarm devices without causing thesystem to operate. The Model E3 high pressure alarmvalves are available in two trims and may be installedin the vertical or horizontal position in the main supplyto the wet pipe system:• Constant Pressure Closed Drain – Retard chambernot required. This trim set is used where water supplypressure does not vary such as a gravity tank. Themechanical sprinkler alarm line automatically drainsto the 2² (50mm) main drain line.

• Variable Pressure Closed Retard Chamber Drain –Retard chamber required. This trim set is used wherewater supply pressures vary. The retard chamber andmechanical sprinkler alarm line are drained through aclosed, checked connection to the 2² (50mm) maindrain line. Only one drain connection is required.

Note:• The trim set permits both verticaland horizontal installation.

• A TestANDrainâ

valve segment is optional, tobepurchased separately, as a replacement tothe valve (Figs. 3 & 4).

2.

OperationVariable PressureThe Reliable Model E3 High Pressure Alarm Valvein it’s closed and open positions is shown inFigures 1 and 2. The closed position is maintainedas long as the water pressure in the sprinklersystem piping above the alarm valve is greaterthan, or equal to, the supply pressure. A flow ofwater in the system piping, resulting from thedischarge through one or more fused automaticsprinklers, causes the clapper to rise off itsgrooved seat and permits water from the supply toenter the system for distribution on the fire.Water now flows through the uncovered grooveand alarm line into the retard chamber. Once theretard chamber is filled the water flow activates themechanical and electrical alarms (Figs. 3 & 4).Virtually all sprinkler system piping containsconfined air. If a water hammer or pressure surgeoccurs in the supply line, the increased pressurewill compress the confined air and cause the alarmvalve clapper to lift intermittently which may resultin false alarms. The Reliable Model E3 Alarm Valveminimizes false alarms under these conditions bytwo features:a. The by-pass connection with check valve (Figs. 3 & 4)allows pressure surges from the supply to by-pass thealarm valve clapper. An excess system pressure isthus created which steadies the clapper. Should aheavy surge unseat the clapper and permit water toflow into the alarm line, the retarding chamber thencomes into action.

b. Two Drain Orifice restrictions on the supply side ofthe Retard Chamber allow intermittent flow to bedrained before the Chamber fills and activates thealarms.

Constant PressureThe operation of the Model E3 Alarm Valve ininstallations where the water pressure is constantis the same as described above, with thisexception: The retard chamber is not required andwater passing through the groove in the alarmvalve seat flows directly to activate the mechanicaland electrical alarms.

Fig. 1 Closed Position

Model E3 High Pressure Alarm Valve (Figs. 1&2)

Fig. 2 Open Position

Groove Dimensions

ValveSize

OutletDia.

GrooveDia.

GrooveWidth

Face ToGroove

Dim.

ValveType

in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in mm

4 100 4.500 114.0 4.334 110.1 38 9.5 5

8 16 E3&E3A*

6 150 6.625 168.0 6.455 164.0 38 9.5 5

8 16 E3

6 165 6.500 165.0 6.330 160.8 38 9.5 5

8 16 E3A*

8 200 8.625 219 8.441 214 716 11 3

4 19 E3&E3A*

* “A” designates valves made for Australia

Grooves per ANSI/AWWA C606.

3.

Fig. 3 E3 Vertical Trim

Fig. 4 E3 Horizontal Trim

E-3 Vertical and Horizontal Trims:


Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by themost highly qualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.

Manufactured by:

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.800.431.1588 Sales Offices800.848.6051 Sales Fax914.829.2042 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address

Recycled

Paper

Revision lines indicate updated or new data.E.G. Printed in USA 11/07 P/N 9999970179

Constant Pressure,Vertical Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Vertical Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Vertical Trim — Top View

Installation must be made with 300 psi (20,7 bar) minimum rated grooved couplings, such as the Starâ

Fittings Model C-2 LW. Tomate with ANSI Class 250 or Class 300 Flanges, use listed grooved flanged adapters having appropriate pressure rating.

Valve A B C D E F G H I J K L M

4²

(100mm)7²

(178)10½²

(267)15²

(381)6²

(152)16¾²

(426)15²

(381)3½²

(89)5¾²

(146)12²

(305)4½²

(114)6½²

(165)10²

(254)8¼²

(210)

6²

(150mm)(165mm)

75 8²

(194)11½²

(292)16²

(406)7²

(178)15¼²

(387)16½²

(419)4¼²

(108)7²

(108)12²

(305)4½²

(114)6½²

(165)10²

(254)6¾²

(172)

8²

(200mm)75 8²

(194)11½²

(292)16²

(406)7²

(178)15¼²

(387)16½²

(419)4¼²

(108)7²

(108)12²

(305)4½²

(114)6½²

(165)10²

(254)6¾²

(172)

Installation Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Model E3 Vertical & Horizontal Trim Illustrations

Constant Pressure,Horizontal Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Horizontal Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Horizontal Trim — Top View


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.2

Iron Body Check Valves (500 PSI WWP)

NIBCO INC. WORLD HEADQUARTERS • 1516 MIDDLEBURY ST. • ELKHART, IN 46516-4740 • USA • PH: 1.800.234.0227

TECH SERVICES PH: 1.888.446.4226 • FAX: 1.888.336.4226 • INTERNATIONAL OFFICE PH: +1.574.295.3327 • FAX: +1.574.295.3455

www.nibco.com

38

A H E A D O F T H E F L O W®

www.nibco.comRevision 4/20/2009

DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions F-968-B Size A B D E Weight In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg.

2¹⁄₂ 65 11.50 292 5.83 149 7.50 191 1.00 25 62 28

3 80 12.50 318 6.31 160 8.25 210 1.13 29 77 35

4 100 14.00 356 7.56 192 10.00 254 1.25 32 129 58

6 150 17.50 445 8.50 216 12.50 318 1.44 37 225 102

* Proper machining facilities required.

MATERIAL LIST PART SPECIFICATION

1. Body Bolt Steel ASTM A 307

2. Identification Plate Aluminum

3. Bonnet Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B

4. Body Gasket Reinforced Graphite

5. Body Nut Steel ASTM A 307

6. Side Plug Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000

7. Hanger Pin Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000

8. Hanger Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400

9. Disc Nut Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400

10. Disc Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400

11. Seat Ring Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400

12. Body Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B

500 PSI WWP Iron Body Check ValvesFire Protection Valve • Bolted Bonnet • Horizontal Swing • *Renewable Bronze Seat and Disc •Class 250 Flanges

250 PSI/17.2 Bar Saturated Steam to 406º F/207º C500 PSI/34.5 Bar Non-Shock Cold Working Pressureto -20º F to 150º F/-29º C to 66º C

CONFORMS TO MSS SP-71 TYPE 1 •

APPROVED BY NEW YORK CITY B.S.A. 143-69-SA AT

350 PSI NON-SHOCK COLD WATER

F-968-BFlanged

F-968-BFlg x Flg

WARNING: Do not use for Reciprocating Air Compressor Service.

NIBCO Iron Body Check Valves may be installed in both horizontal and

vertical lines with upward flow or in any intermediate position.

500 PSI/34.5 Bar Non-Shock Cold Working Pressureto -20º F to 150º F/-29º C to 66º Cto -20º F to 150º F/-29º C to 66º Cto -20º F to 150º F/-29º C to 66º C

500 PSI WWP Iron Body Check Valves500 PSI WWP Iron Body Check Valves


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.3

Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm (Model C)

Model C Me chan i calSprin klerAlarm

Bul le tin 612 Rev.I

The Re li able Au to matic Sprin kler Co., Inc., 525 North MacQuesten Park way, Mount Vernon, New York 10552

Fea tures

1. De pend able − Pel ton Wheel Type.

2. Prompt − Pos i tive Op er a tion.

3. Ny lon Bear ings − No Lu bri ca tionNeeded.

4. Com pact − Light weight − Easily In stalled.

5. Rust-Free Cast Alu mi num Gong. No Gong Cover Needed.

6. Gong Avail able in Red and Bright Me tal lic Fin ishes.

7. Self-Setting Af ter Op er a tion Elim i nating Need of Re moving Cov ers, Plates, Etc. to Re set In ter nal Mech a nisms.

The Re li able Model C Me chan i cal Alarm, also called a wa ter mo tor and gong, is the hy dro-mechanicalalarm of Re li able Wet and Dry Pipe Au to matic Sprin -kler Sys tems. Usually mounted on an out side build -ing wall and en er gized by wa ter flow ing from thealarm (wet) or dry pipe valve, it au to mat i cally sounds a con tin u ous pierc ing alarm when the sprin kler sys -tem op er ates to ex tin guish a fire.

Approvals

1. Listed by Un der writers Lab o ra tories, Inc. (UL).

2. Listed by Un der writers Lab o ra tories of Can ada (ULC).3. Ap proved by Fac tory Mu tual Re search Cor po ra tion, (FM).4. Verband der Schandenversicherer eV. (VdS).

5. Loss Pre ven tion Coun cil (LPC).6. NYC BS & A No. 587-75-SA.

Model C Model C Me chan i calSprin klerMe chan i calSprin klerSprin klerAlarm

2. Listed by Un der writers Lab o ra tories of Can ada (ULC).3. Ap proved by Fac tory Mu tual Re search Cor po ra tion, (FM).

1. Listed by Un der writers Lab o ra tories, Inc. (UL).

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory MutualResearch Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable.

Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highly qualified andreputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.


(800) 431-1588 Sales Offices(800) 848-6051 Sales Fax(914) 668-3470 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler .com Internet Address

Manufactured by

RecycledPaper


E.G.. Printed in U.S.A 08/01 P/N 9999970059

Operation

When an alarm (wet) or dry pipe valve is operated by thefusing of one or more automatic sprinklers due to fire,water flows through the ¾ inch strainer, and ¾ inchpiping that connects the mechanical sprinkler alarm tothe alarm or dry pipe valve. On entering the mechanicalsprinkler alarm inlet, the water passes through thenozzle and impinges against the pelton wheel bladescausing the pelton wheel to rotate. The striker assemblyconnected to the pelton wheel by the drive shaft alsorotates causing the striker to impact against the gongproducing a continuous piercing alarm. The water, afterimpinging against the pelton wheel, drains off throughthe 1-inch drain outlet in the body housing.

The alarm continues to sound as long as water is flowing through the sprinkler system. It may be shut off by closingthe alarm control valve located in the piping lineconnecting the mechanical sprinkler alarm with the alarm(wet) or dry pipe valve.

Reliable Model C Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm is selfsetting after each operation, eliminating the need ofremoving cover plates, etc. to reset internal mechanisms.

Installation

The Reliable Model C Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm iseasily installed. As illustrated in the figure below, a ¾”(19mm) support pipe of appropriate length runs throughthe wall supporting the pelton wheel body on the insidewall surface and the gong assembly on the exterior wallsurface. The entire assembly can be secured andaligned by simply screwing the body onto the supportpipe, compressing the wall support washer.

The drive shaft is furnished in a standard length of 18” for a 14” (355mm) wall. Longer shafts for thicker walls arefurnished on request. The drive shaft can be installed byremoving the body cover and pelton wheel from thebody.

The gong has a raised boss at its center so thatidentification nameplates can be retained by the 3

8” gong bolt. A stan dard fire alarm iden ti fi ca tion sign forat tach ment be low sprin kler alarm gongs can be sup plied by Re li able.

The Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm shall be located asnear to the alarm (wet) or dry pipe valve as practicable toavoid long runs or many fittings in the piping thatconnects to such devices. Galvanized or brass pipe of asize not less than ¾” (19mm) is to be used. The ¾”(19mm) Strainer, provided with the Mechanical SprinklerAlarm, must be installed at the alarm outlet of the waterflow detecting device. When a retarding chamber isused in connection with an alarm valve, the strainer shallbe located at the outlet of the retarding chamber.

The 1-inch drain outlet should discharge into an opendrain. For installation instructions, refer to the separatebulletins, “Instructions for Installation, Operation, Careand Maintenance” for Reliable Mechanical SprinklerAlarms, Alarm (Wet) Valves and Dry Pipe Valves.


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.4

Ductile Iron Body Swing Check Valve (Class 150)


www.nibco.com



www.nibco.com

84

Revised 9/28/2009

Class 150 Ductile Iron Body Swing Check ValvesRaised Face Flanges • Bolted Bonnet • B 584 Bronze Trim

285 PSI/19.7 Bar Non-Shock Cold Working Pressureto -20º F to 100º F/-29º C to 38º C185 PSI/12.8 Bar Saturated Steam to 450°F/232°C u

TESTING SPECIFICATION TO MSS SP-136

F-938-31Flanged-Raised Face

F-938-31Flg x Flg

MATERIAL LIST

PART SPECIFICATION 1. Bolt Steel ASTM A 307

2. Identification Plate Aluminum

3. Bonnet Ductile Iron ASTM A 395

4. Body Gasket Synthetic Fibers

5. Nut Steel ASTM A 307

6. Side Plug Bronze ASTM B 584

7. Hanger Pin Bronze ASTM B 371

8. Hanger Bronze ASTM B 584

or Ductile Iron ASTM A 536

9. Disc Bronze ASTM B 584

10. Seat Ring Bronze ASTM B 584

11. Disc Nut Bronze ASTM B 371

12. Body Ductile Iron ASTM A 395

NIBCO Check Valves may be installed in both horizontal and vertical lines with upward flow or in any intermediate position.


u For detailed Operating Pressure, refer to Pressure Temperature Chart on page 111.

DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions Size A B D E Weight In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg.

2 50 8.00 203 3.94 100 6.00 152 .63 16 24 11

2¹⁄₂ 65 8.50 216 4.50 114 7.00 178 .69 17 35 16

3 80 9.50 241 5.13 130 7.50 191 .75 19 47 21

4 100 11.50 292 6.13 156 9.00 229 .94 24 81 37

5 125 13.00 330 6.81 173 10.00 254 .94 24 100 45

6 150 14.00 356 8.00 203 11.00 279 1.00 25 146 66

8 200 19.50 495 9.44 240 13.50 343 1.13 29 255 116

10 250 24.50 622 12.06 306 16.00 406 1.19 30 426 193

12 300 27.50 699 16.13 410 19.00 483 1.25 32 660 299

Lever and Weight/Spring Options available. (see page 99)

F-938-31

Class 150 Ductile Iron Body Swing Check Valves



,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.5

Iron Body Check Valve (175 PSI WWP)



www.nibco.com

31



175 PSI WWP Iron Body Check ValvesFire Protection Valve • Bolted Bonnet • Horizontal Swing • Renewable Seat and Disc •

Drilled and Tapped for Ball Drip Outlet

MATERIAL LIST PART SPECIFICATION

1. Pipe Plug Cast Iron or Steel

2. Bonnet Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B

3. Bonnet Gasket Non Asbestos

4. Bonnet Bolt and Nut Steel ASTM A 307

5. Hinge Plug Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400

6. Hinge Pin Brass ASTM B 16 (not shown)

7. Disc Hanger Nut Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400

8. Disc Stud Bolt Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000

9. Disc Cage Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B

or Malleable Iron ASTM A 47 (not shown)

10. Disc Plate Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400

11. Disc Hanger Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400

12. Disc Nut Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000

13. Seat Ring Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400

14. Disc Rubber (W)

15. Body Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B

NOTE: Sizes 21⁄2, 3, 5, & 10 are manufactured by Kennedy Valve and distributed

by NIBCO.

Material list applies to sizes 4", 6", 8", 12" only.

All sizes are drilled and tapped ³⁄₄" at Boss "C" for ball drip.

175 PSI/12.1 Bar Non-Shock Cold Water

CONFORMS TO MSS SP-71 • UL/ULC LISTED • FM APPROVED •

APPROVED BY THE NEW YORK CITY B.S.A. 143-69-SA

An automatic ball drip is available for NIBCO Underwriter's check valves. The ball drip is installed at boss location "C" on the check valve of the fire department connection. It will close against pressure, but will open when pressure is off allowing water to drain from the fire department connection.

¹⁄₂" Ball Drip # RG 22000

³⁄₄" Ball Drip # RG 22100

F-908-WFlanged

F-908-WFlg x Flg

Ball Drip

DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions

Size A B C D Weight

In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg.

2¹⁄₂ 65 10.00 254 6.44 164 7.00 178 .69 17 53 24

3 80 10.25 260 6.63 168 7.50 191 .75 19 62 28

4 100 13.00 330 8.00 203 9.00 229 .94 24 103 47

5 125 15.00 381 9.19 233 10.00 254 1.00 25 145 66

6 150 16.25 413 10.31 262 11.00 279 1.00 25 174 79

8 200 19.50 495 11.50 292 13.50 343 1.13 29 290 132

10 250 22.00 559 13.31 338 16.00 406 1.19 30 490 223

12 300 27.50 699 15.56 395 19.00 483 1.25 32 683 310

NIBCO Iron Body check valves may be installed in both horizontal and vertical lines with upward flow.

175 PSI WWP Iron Body Check Valves

UL/ULC LISTED • FM APPROVED • CONFORMS TO MSS SP-71 •

F-908-W


UL/ULC LISTED • FM APPROVED •


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.6

Butterfly Valve (300 lb. WWP)



www.nibco.com

41

A H E A D O F T H E F L O W ®


MATERIAL LIST PART SPECIFICATION 1. Upper Stem Stainless Steel ASTM A 582 Type 416

2. Upper Bushing PTFE Bronze Sintered on Steel

3. "O" Ring Buna-N

4. Body Ductile Iron ASTM A 395 with Polymide Coating

5. Disc Ductile Iron ASTM A 395 with EPDM Encapsulation

6. Lower Bushing PTFE Bronze Sintered on Steel

7. Lower Stem Stainless Steel ASTM A 582 Type 416

8. Dust Plug PVC

9. Nameplate Aluminum

10. Gear Operator Cast Iron and Steel

11. Indicator Flag Cast Iron

12. Handwheel Cast Iron*-8N version has two factory mounted internal supervisory switches. -4N version is gear operated only

Uses NIBCO model #TS-4 Switch Kit. Polymide coating has NSF certification.

UL/ULC LISTED • FMRC APPROVED • 2¹⁄₂" - 10" UL LISTED FOR

INDOOR AND OUTDOOR SERVICE • CALIFORNIA STATE FIRE

MARSHALL APPROVAL NO. 7770-1243:101 • APPROVED BY THE

NEW YORK CITY MEA 9-97-E, VOL.2 WHEN ASSEMBLED WITH

APPROPRIATE NYC INDICATOR FLAG

Fire Protection Valve • Grooved Mechanical Style • Nylon Coated Ductile Iron Body • Extended Neck •

Elastomer Encapsulated Disc • Accepts Internal Supervisory Switches • Compatible with IPS Pipe

DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions

Size A B C D E F G H

In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm.

2¹⁄₂ 65 2.88 73 2.72 69 0.31 8 0.63 16 3.85 98 2.42 61 11.94 303 2.91 74

3 O.D. 76.1 3.00 76 2.84 72 0.31 8 0.63 16 3.85 98 2.42 61 11.94 303 2.91 74

3 80 3.50 89 3.34 85 0.31 8 0.63 16 3.85 98 2.86 73 12.48 317 2.91 74

4 100 4.50 114 4.33 110 0.38 10 0.63 16 4.56 116 3.84 98 14.18 360 2.91 74

5 125 5.56 141 5.39 137 0.38 10 0.63 16 5.86 149 4.79 122 15.17 385 2.91 74

6 150 6.63 168 6.45 164 0.38 10 0.63 16 5.86 149 5.73 146 17.54 446 2.91 74

6 O.D. 165.1 6.51 165 6.32 161 0.38 10 0.63 16 5.86 149 5.73 146 17.54 446 2.91 74

8 200 8.63 219 8.44 214 0.44 11 0.75 19 5.26 134 7.71 196 19.42 493 2.91 74

10 250 10.75 273 10.56 268 0.50 13 0.75 19 6.29 160 9.56 243 24.03 610 3.90 99

Dimensions

Size J K L M N P Q R Weight

In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg.

2¹⁄₂ 65 3.54 90 2.13 54 5.82 148 5.67 144 4.19 106 3.25 83 5.9 150 3.46 88 22 10.0

3 O.D. 76.1 3.54 90 2.13 54 5.82 148 5.67 144 4.19 106 3.25 83 5.9 150 3.46 88 22 10.4

3 80 3.54 90 2.13 54 5.82 148 5.94 151 4.44 113 3.54 90 5.9 150 3.97 101 23 10.4

4 100 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 6.31 173 5.33 135 4.35 110 5.9 150 5.03 128 28 12.7

5 125 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 7.32 186 5.83 148 4.84 123 5.9 150 6.27 159 31 14.1

6 150 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 8.62 219 7.11 181 5.93 151 5.9 150 7.25 184 41 18.6

6 O.D. 165.1 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 8.62 219 7.11 181 5.93 151 5.9 150 7.25 184 41 18.6

8 200 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.91 201 9.80 249 8.05 204 6.87 174 9.8 250 9.25 235 53 24.1

10 250 3.98 101 3.03 77 9.49 241 11.61 295 9.86 250 9.17 233 11.8 300 18.00 457 88 40.0

GD-4765-8N*Grooved

2¹⁄₂" thru 8"

GD-1765-8N10"

(not shown)

300 lb. WWP UL/FM Butterfly Valves

UL/ULC LISTED • FMRC APPROVED • 2UL/ULC LISTED • FMRC APPROVED • 2


GD-4765-8N*Grooved

2¹⁄₂" thru 8"2¹⁄₂


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.7

Gate Valve (Model-18)

22

MATERIAL LIST NO. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL

1 Set Screw Steel

2 Hand Wheel Iron

3 Yoke Bushing Brass

4 Stem Brass

5 Packing Gland Brass

6 Cap Screw Steel

7 Packing Graphite Non-Asb.

8 Bonnet Bronze

9 Spirol Pin Stainless Steel

10 Wedge Bronze

11 Body Bronze

Size A B C Ship Wgt.

(lbs.)

Qty.

Unit Pack

Qty.

Per Case

1 2.55 6.55 7.97 3.85 6 18

1 ¼” 2.81 7.61 9.47 6.26 2 12

1 ½” 2.86 7.84 9.75 6.55 2 6

2” 3.09 8.88 11.22 9.96 2 6

UNITED BRASS WORKS, INC. 714 S. Main St., Randleman, NC 27317

Tel: 800-334-3035 Fax: 800-498-4696 www.ubw.com

Model 18 Gate Valve

Bronze Screwed Ends

Outside Screw & Yoke

UL Listed / FM Approved @ 175 lbs.

WOG

200 WOG @ 180 ° Max

100% Pressure Tested

Rising Stem

MEA Approval 255-93-E

Model 18 Gate Valve

UL Listed / FM Approved @ 175 lbs. UL Listed / FM Approved @ 175 lbs. UL Listed / FM Approved @ 175 lbs. UL Listed / FM Approved @ 175 lbs.

WOG

UL Listed / FM Approved @ 175 lbs.


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-3

Strainers


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-3.1

H Style Strainer (X43H)

H Style Strainer

X43HMODEL

• Low Pressure Drop• Ductile Iron Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated Construction with a 316 Stainless Steel Strainer

• Large Flow Area H-Style Design• Service Without Removal From LineThe Cla-Val Model X43H H-Style Strainer offers an effective means ofremoving unwanted solid particles in pipeline flow. These strainers areideal for preventing fouling, debris and particle buildup in Cla-ValAutomatic Control Valves. The large flow area design, with a flat stainlesssteel strainer mesh perpendicular to flow, is optimized for low pressuredrop applications. Maintenance is fast and easy with the compact H-pat-tern, requiring only top cover removal. The strainer may be installed in anyposition, however, installation with cover up is recommended.

D

C

B

C

B

DD

C

B

Strainer Size (inches) 1 1⁄2 2 2 1⁄2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 24A 150 ANSI 9.06 9.06 9.06 11.81 11.81 15.7519.6922.8324.0225.5931.5037.4043.31AA 300 ANSI 9.13 9.13 9.13 11.89 11.89 15.8319.7622.9124.0925.6731.5737.4843.39B 150 ANSI 3.26 3.26 3.66 4.06 4.33 5.63 6.69 8.86 8.88 10.2412.2019.0919.09BB 300 ANSI 3.26 3.26 3.66 4.06 4.33 5.63 6.69 8.86 9.56 10.9412.2019.0919.09C Max. 150 ANSI 3.78 3.78 3.78 5.91 5.91 7.52 8.82 11.61 15.1614.9619.6923.9823.98CC Max. 300 ANSI 5.20 5.20 5.35 6.22 6.22 7.99 9.33 12.7915.6715.6719.6923.9823.98D Dia. 150 ANSI 7.87 7.87 7.87 9.25 9.25 15.74 18.11 22.0526.7726.7735.4346.8546.85DD Dia. 300 ANSI 7.99 7.99 7.99 9.37 9.37 15.8618.2322.1726.8526.8535.4346.8546.85G Drain/Blow-off Plug 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 2 2 2 3 3Approx. Ship Wt. Lbs. 33 36 39 59 73 143 212 432 626 683 970 1175 1962Strainer Size (mm) 40 50 65 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600A 150 ANSI 230 230 230 300 300 400 500 580 610 650 800 950 1100AA 300 ANSI 232 232 232 302 302 402 502 582 612 652 802 952 1102B 150 ANSI 83 83 93 103 110 143 170 225 228 260 310 485 485BB 300 ANSI 83 83 93 103 110 143 170 225 243 278 310 485 486C Max. 150 ANSI 96 96 96 150 150 191 224 295 385 380 500 609 609CC Max. 300 ANSI 132 132 136 158 158 203 237 325 398 398 500 609 609D Dia. 150 ANSI 200 200 200 235 235 400 460 560 680 680 900 1190 1190DD Dia. 300 ANSI 203 203 203 238 238 403 463 563 682 682 900 1190 1190G Drain/Blow-off Plug 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 2 2 2 3 3Approx. Ship Wt. (kg) 15 16 18 27 33 65 96 196 284 310 440 810 890

Dimensions

Sizes (Inches): 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 24Ends: Flanged, ANSI Class 150 and 300Max Pressure Rating: 150# - 250 psi • 300# - 400 psiFluids: Compatible with Materials of ConstructionTemperature: Maximum 180°FMaterials:

Body & Cover: Ductile Iron ANSI B16.42; Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating StandardCover Seal: Buna-N® Synthetic RubberStrainer: 316 Stainless Steel; Ductile Iron, Epoxy Coated FrameStrainer Mesh Sizes: Standard 10 mesh / 2000 Micron / Openings 0.078 inch

Optional .039 and .059 inch openings availableDrain/Blow-Off Connection Furnished with Stainless Steel Plug as Standard.

Cover Fasteners: Stainless Steel

Specifications

X43H

H Style Strainer• Low Pressure Drop

Strainer: 316 Stainless Steel; Ductile Iron, Epoxy Coated Frame: 316 Stainless Steel; Ductile Iron, Epoxy Coated FrameStrainer Mesh Sizes: Standard 10 mesh / 2000 Micron / Openings 0.078 inch

Optional .039 and .059 inch openings available

CLA-VAL Copyright Cla-Val 2010 Printed in USA Specifications subject to change without notice. P.O. Box 1325 • Newport Beach, CA 92659-0325 • Phone: 949-722-4800 • Fax: 949-548-5441 • E-mail: [email protected] • Website cla-val.com

©

Model X43H Style Strainer Typical Application

Model X43H Flow Chart

E-X43H H-Style Strainer (R-1/2010)

100

10

100 1,000 10,000 100,000Flow (gpm)

Pre

ssure

Dro

p (p

si)

1

3” 4”

2 1

/2”

1 1

/2”

6” 8” 10”2” 12” 16” 24”14”

200,000

20”

Constant Downstream

Pressure

Strainer Size (inches) 1 1⁄2 2 2 1⁄2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 24CV (Gal/Min. - gpm.) 96 150 254 367 654 1644 3922 4566 6800 8949 11692 18264 26302CV (Litres/Sec - l/s.) 23 36 61 85 157 395 702 1097 1580 2150 2809 4388 6319

CV Factor

Cv in gpm = gpm @ 1psid head loss • Cv in l/s = l/s @ 1bar head loss


,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-3.2

UL Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Strainer (Model: 911U)

Strainers provide economical protection for costly pumps, meters, valves, and other similar

mechanical equipment by straining foreign matter from the connected piping system.

Typical ServiceThese strainers are UL approved and are used to prevent clogging in fire service systems such

as automatic sprinkler systems and various spray systems.

Features• Extra large baskets have an Open Area Ratio of at least 7 to 1. AWWA a minimum require-

ment is 4 to 1 Ratio

• Extra large capacity baskets equal very low pressure drop and long intervals between clean-

ing and servicing, essential in this service.

• NPT tapped blow-off connections are available on request.

Pressure Drop

Screen

Material

ES-MS-911U

Model: 911U

U.L. Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Y Strainers for FirelinesSizes: 21⁄2" – 12" (80 – 300mm)

911U Class 125

Pressure/Temperature–Non-Shock

Model Material Rating

CWP

911U Cast Iron 175psi @ 150°F

12 bar @ 66°C

125psi @ 406°F

Model 911U

STANDARD (WATER)

MODEL SIZES MATERIAL OPENING

911U 21⁄2" – 12" 304SS .250 perf

SIZE

PRESSURE DROP @

15 FT/SEC

21⁄2" 2.31

3" 3.27

4" 3.18

5" 3.62

6" 3.59

8" 3.08

10" 3.29

12" 2.79

911U

Body Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B

Cover Steel ASTM A515 Grade 70

Gasket Compressed Fiber

U.L. Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Y Strainers for FirelinesU.L. Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Y Strainers U.L. Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Y Strainers

• Extra large baskets have an Open Area Ratio of at least 7 to 1. AWWA a minimum require-

911U Class 125911U Class 125

A Div is ion of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. USA: 1491 NC Hwy 20 West St. Pauls, NC 28384; www.muellersteam.com Tel: 910-865-8241 Fax: 910-865-6220

Toll Free Phone 1-800-334-6259 Toll Free Fax: 1-800-421-6772

ES-MS-911U 0715 © Mueller Steam Specialty, 2007

Mueller Steam Specialty product specifications in U.S. customary units and metric are approximate and are provided for reference only. For precise measure-ments, please contact Mueller Steam Specialty Technical Service. Mueller Steam Specialty reserves the right to change or modify product design, construction, specifications, or materials without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make such changes and modifications on Mueller Steam Specialty products previously or subsequently sold.

Dimensions and Weights

Apply for Certified Drawings

B

A

C

Model 911U

SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT

A B C

in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. kgs.

21⁄2 60 14 356 101⁄4 200 14 356 60 27

3 80 143⁄4 375 103⁄4 208 15 381 65 29

4 100 171⁄2 445 1213⁄16 318 18 457 125 56

5 125 193⁄4 502 141⁄2 276 201⁄2 521 172 78

6 150 215⁄8 549 157⁄8 298 22 559 210 95

8 200 26 660 211⁄2 398 301⁄2 774.7 360 163

10 250 31 787 243⁄4 467 351⁄2 902 610 277

12 300 371⁄4 946 291⁄2 552 421⁄2 1080 1045 475

A Mashaaer Al Mugaddassah Metro Project

Mashaaer Mugaddassah MMMP-SL-EMDD-GEN-GEN-DSP-D-3003-A02

Page 176/231

Stage 1 alarm

Stage 2 alarm

All sounds are to be distinctive, separate noises with the general building alarm being

common to the other areas of the buildings.

Each room shall be fire rated and air tight from other room. The room integrity test shall be

conducted for each room protected with gas suppression system, complying with the


Fire detection actuation & alarm system provided for each gas suppression system shall be

standalone. Min.2 no of detectors with a combination of ionisation & optical type smoke

detectors shall be provided with actuation for gas release shall be based on 23 sq. m /

detector.

There shall be a maximum time delay of 60 seconds for the discharge of gas from the time of

double knock of detectors. However this time delay shall be decided by the operatives

Where the rooms have raised floor or raised ceiling, the volume of these shall be considered

for calculating the gas quantity. There shall be dedicated detectors & nozzles for these area

and all the design requirements shall be the same as described former part of the sub section.

Response indicators shall be installed & connected at room level for the detectors installed in

raised floor or raise ceiling for monitoring the detector status.

Gas shall be discharged within 10 seconds after the actuation of the solenoid valve. Piping

shall be designed accordingly.

A specialised fire contractor approved by the authorities having jurisdiction for design,

supply, install & commissioning of the system shall submit a flow calculation for FM 200

system. The software used for the calculation shall be UL listed & shall be approved by AHJ.

4.2 WET FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS

4.2.1 General

Wet fire fighting systems shall comprise the following:

Water tank.

Standpipe system

Sprinkler system.

Foam – water sprinkler pre-action system

Pumps and motors.

The complete system shall be in accordance with the requirement of Saudi Civil Defence

(SCD).

Whenever the word "provide" is used it shall mean "furnish, install, test & commission

complete and ready for use".

Equipment capacities and performance requirements shall be as listed in the schedule of

Equipment shown on the Drawings.

The proposed fire fighting system as shown on the drawings or the one to be provided shall

be submitted for approval to SCD.

4.2.2 Standpipe System

Standpipe systems shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 14, 2007

Edition.



Page 177/231

Standpipe system water shall be supplied from the fire water storage tanks. Fire pumps shall

supply the water to supply the standpipe outlets and hose reels.

Civil Defence breeching inlet shall be provided at each station for the use of the Saudi Civil

Defence to pump water into the system.

The location of the breeching inlet shall not be more than 30.5m from the hard standing

location. Hard standing location shall be designed by the Architect considering the road

accesses with appropriate turning radius as required by NFPA and local authorities.

4.2.3 Sprinklers;

The installation shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 13 ordinary hazard 2 and shall

comprise of an incoming water main to a storage tanks, duty and standby sprinkler pumps,

Installation control sets, distribution pipe work, control valves and sprinkler heads.

Fire water reserve shall be maintained for one hour operation of fire pump as required by

NFPA.

Centrifugal pumps arranged as duty and standby each designed to cater the 100% demand of

the fire protection system. Each fire pump shall have its own dedicated controller located at

fire pump room. Duty fire pump shall be of electrical motor driven & standby fire pump

shall be of diesel engine driven with a diesel storage tank located within the fire pump room.

The fuel capacity shall be as required for 8 hours operation of the fire pump. The

requirements of electrical & equipments shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20,

2007 Edition & NFPA 70, 2007 Edition. The system pressure shall be maintained by jockey

pump. Jockey pump capacity shall be 5 – 7% of the main fire pump

The entire assembly & components in the fire pump room like but not limited to pressure

relief valve with waste cone, flow testing arrangements, venturi, shall comply with the

requirements of NFPA 20

As required by SCD, the diesel tank shall be located within a fire rated enclosure. Diesel

tank shall be located with in a bund wall & the bund wall shall be sized for 110% of the fuel

tank capacity. Bund wall shall be a drain pipe connected with an isolation valve which shall

be used to drain the diesel spilled within the bund.

Diesel storage tank shall have level indicators to monitor the fuel level in the tank. Diesel

tank shall be provided with vent pipe which shall be terminated to ground level. Vent pipe

shall be sized as required by SCD. The diesel tank shall be connected to a fuel filling

connected from ground level. The pipes shall confirm to ASTM A53 Gr B seamless Sch 40

painted to the local requirements. The filling pipe shall be sized to the requirements of SCD

& shall be routed in a fire rated enclosure to protect from any mechanical damages and to

avoid any exposure to heat and fire.

The Fire rated room enclosing diesel tank shall be provided with an extract system with a

dedicated duct work which shall terminate to atmosphere. The fan used for the extract shall

be suitable for the purpose which shall not produce any spark or fire.

Diesel tank area shall be provided with a modular type foam water sprinkler pre action

system complying with NFPA 16

4.2.4 Codes and Standards;

The works described in this section shall comply fully with the requirements of the

applicable “Code and Standards” section of this specification.

4.2.5 Pipe Work;

Potable pipe and fittings shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Pipe work” section of

this specification



Page 178/231

Pipes used in Fire Protection system shall be Hot dip galvanised SEAMLESS steel pipe

confirming to ASTM A53, Grade B

If welding is undertaken during installation of the fire suppression systems (Sprinkler piping, Standpipe, breeching inlet, etc) then Non Destructive Testing shall be carried out on the welding. The welder qualification, welding & testing shall comply with the requirements stated in AWS, ASME Section IX as stated by NFPA 13.

Any portion of Fire suppression piping which is casted in concrete or buried shall be coated & wrapped to protect again corrosion.

4.2.6 Valves;

Valves shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Valves” section of this specification

(2.16.3 through 2.16.17).

Fire protection valves shall all be UL listed and or FM approved with 1380 kpa (200 psi)

minimum pressure. Valve shall have 2070 kPa pressure rating if valves are components of

high pressure piping system.

Valves controlling water flow in fire protection piping shall be O.S&Y-Outside Screw and

Yoke type, except as noted, and shall be UL Listed, FM approved.

Gate valve shall be OS& Y type as indicated in the drawing. Sizes up to 50 mm and below

shall be threaded type. The valve body shall be cast bronze and wheel shall be cast iron. The

valve shall be UL listed and rated for 1380 KPa (200 psi) working pressure.

Sizes 65 mm and above shall be Cast Iron OS&Y Gate valves where indicated. The valve

body shall be cast iron with grooved or flanged ends. The valve shall be UL / FM approved

and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure (or 1725 KPa where required).

Use class 1725 KPa OS&Y gate valves where required. The valve body shall be cast iron

and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA standards.

OS & Y gate valves have a tamper switch & shall be monitored electrically through a

supervisory switch in the fire alarm panel.

Supervision switches shall be installed for all fire protection valves. The devices shall be

electrical; single pole, double-throw; with normally closed contacts and include design that

signals controlled valve is in other than normal position

Check valves shall be swinging type or split clapper type with flanged / grooved ends. The

valve body shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL / FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa

working pressure (or 1725 KPa where required).

Use class 1725 / 2070 KPa check valves where required. The valve body shall be cast steel

and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA standards.

Butterfly valves shall be Grooved type with tamper switch. The valve body shall be made of

ductile Iron coated with nylon-11. The valve shall be UL / FM approved and rated for 1380

KPa working pressure.

Y–Type Strainer: Y Type Strainer consist of Ductile Iron Body , ASTM A-536 grade 65-45-

12 , Type 304 Stainless Steel cylindrical removable baskets with 1/16” perforations and 41%

open area for 2-3” strainer size. 1/8” (3.2mm) diameter perforations and 40% open area 4”-

12” strainer size.

Riser Check Valve : Grooved Riser check valve Black Enamel Painted, Ductile Iron Body to

ASTM A536 grade 65-45-12 4”-8”, Grade E EPDM encapsulated Ductile Iron disc, stainless

steel spring and shaft, rated to 300psi (1370kPa). Suitable for Anti Hammer service and

horizontal or vertical installation. Provided drilled, tapped and plugged stream for 2”



Page 179/231

drainage outlet and ½” pressure taps both upstream and down stream of disc. UL Listed and

FM approved.

Flexible Joints: Flexible Couplings in series shall be installed near the pumps to reduce the

noise and Vibration if recommended by the pump manufacturer

Building Expansion Joints: Flexible couplings shall be used to accommodate any movement

in the pipe due to Building expansion or contraction. A proper study and calculation needs to

provide by the Manufacturer.

Hangers and Supports;

Hangers and Supports shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Hangers and Supports”

section of this specification (2.15.15 and 2.15.23).

Pipeline Identification and Labelling;

Pipelines and equipment shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Identification”.

4.2.7 Fire Fighting Water Piping – General

All pipes used for fire fighting water distribution shall be hot galvanized steel iron seamless

schedule 40 confirming to ASTM A53 Gr. B assembled with galvanised malleable iron

threaded fittings for pipe sizes 2" and smaller and with grooved mechanical fittings for pipe

sizes 2½" and larger.

The fire fighting water piping system shall be provided with valves on all mains and

branches for sectionalizing the system for maintenance and operation.

All valves used in the fire fighting water piping system (Pump Suction, Discharge, Risers)

shall be of the rising stem type to clearly indicate whether the valve is in the open or closed

position. All these valves shall be provided with tamper switch with and shall be monitored

through fire alarm system. All valves in the zone control valve shall be butterfly valve with

supervisory switch and shall be monitored through fire alarm system. The valves shall

conform in all other respects to the specifications given under Valves.

All over ground pipe fittings up to 50mm shall be of malleable iron threaded joint

confirming to ASTM / ASME B16.3 & piping of 65mm and above shall be of mechanical

grooved type confirming to ASTM F1476 & ASTM F-1548

A 2" drain valve of the globe type shall be provided at the base of every riser as referred in

NFPA13 & 14. Piping shall be sloped not less than 2% towards the drain valves.

The fire fighting water pipes shall not be used in any way to supply water for other purposes.

All valves shall be supervised electrically in the Fire Alarm Panel.

4.2.8 Sprinkler System Description

Installation of sprinkler systems shall comply with NFPA 13, standard for the installation of

sprinkler system, or as directed by the civil defence authorities.

The installation shall be a Wet Sprinkler System and the flow of water to the sprinkler pipe

work shall be controlled by installation control valves.

The system shall be charged with water under pressure up to the sprinkler heads so that when

one or more of the sprinkler heads operates the wet alarm valve is actuated allowing water to

flow from the open sprinkler heads.

The water from the storage tank shall be used as the suction supply for the pumps. Pumps

shall be automatic in operation and shall be designed to comply with the performance

characteristic of automatic pumps as specified in the relevant section of the NFPA 20.



Page 180/231

A jockey pump shall be installed to maintain pressure in the system pipe work.

The fire water storage tanks shall be located as shown in drawings. The tanks shall be of

concrete construction as detailed on the structural drawings. High grade corrosion resistant

hot deep galvanized steel puddle flanged sleeves shall be used and the velocity in the suction

pipe shall not exceed 4.57m/s.

Water tightness is to be assured by caulking the space between the two pipes. Provide

caulking rings on the inner pipe.

The water tanks shall be lined with a laminated non toxic plastic liner or equivalents, factory

made, with all necessary pipe openings ready formed. The liner material shall be approved

by water authorities for the storage of potable water.

The sprinkler system shall be zoned & each zone shall be provided with an isolation valve

supervised electrically, flow switch (connected to the fire alarm system) test and drain valve,

pressure gauge, etc to comply with NFPA 13. The outlet of the drain valve shall be

connected to the nearest floor drain.

Each sprinkler riser shall be connected with an alarm check valve & isolation valve. The

zoning of the sprinkler system shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 13.

Alarm check valve shall be provided with pressure switches to monitor the pressure drop in

the downstream. An alarm motor gong shall be connected to the alarm check valve which

shall generate mechanical alarm upon flow across the alarm check valve. The location of the

gong shall be near to the location of breeching inlet.

Sprinklers shall be provided at the escalators truss with dedicated isolation valve (with

supervisory switch) & flow switch to monitor in the Fire alarm panel. A drain valve shall be

provided at the lower most level of the fire pipe network.

Where the void height exceeds 800mm above the false ceiling shall be considered as a

separate zone and shall be provided with sprinkler system.

All the isolation valves shall be provided with a supervisory switch which shall be

electrically supervised in the Main fire alarm panel. There shall be an individual address for

each isolation valve.

Provide fire alarm panel to indicate all sprinkler zone control valve - monitoring , solenoid

valves, FM 200 gaseous fire suppression system and flow switches. The alarm panel shall

be prepared to be connected to the fire alarm panel of the station or the concerned building

(if any).

4.2.9 Fire Protection Specialties

Installation Control Valves

Both the wet and dry type CVs shall have the following components. Select the trim as

appropriate.

System Isolation Valve

Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), Outside Screw and Yoke (O.S&Y) construction with

solid wedge and flanged ends.

Alarm Check Valve

Cast Iron body, Flap type construction with flanged/grooved ends, metered bypass with ball

valve for pressure maintenance flow, test and alarm flow arts, bolted access cover, pressure

gauges, pressure switch at inlet and outlet etc. UL listed & FM approved



Page 181/231

Test And Drain Valve

All bronze, angle valve with screwed ends complete with metering orifice, discharge turn

dish etc.

Alarm Test Valve

All bronze, multi port plug valve with screwed ends, operating lever, engraved position

indicator attached to body.

Strainer

All bronze, Y type strainer with screwed ends, screwed cover and 30 mesh stainless steel

screen for alarm supply line.

Water Motor Alarm

All bronze construction of through the wall type with threaded inlet and outlet connections,

wall sleeve, drive shaft and bell.

Pressure Switch

Normally closed, pressure switch with contacts rated for 5amps. The unit shall be fully

enclosed with tapped conduit entry.

Flow Switches

Provide vane type flow switches with volt free, normally open contacts rated for 5amps and

enclosure with tapped conduit entry. The flow switch shall be adjustable, to give contact at

flow equal to that of one sprinkler. The unit shall be complete with pipe size saddle, clamp,

sealing gasket etc.

4.2.10 Sprinklers


Concealed fast response type with chrome plated cover for front of house areas as indicated

on drawings.


All sprinkler indicated on the drawings as concealed type shall be of a decorative style flush

with the ceiling with ceiling plate cover. The visible parts shall be of satin finish chrome.

The deflector and retaining parts shall be concealed in the sprinkler body.

All sprinklers indicated on drawings as pendent, upright and side wall, concealed shall be of

the fusible solder fast response type constructed of high quality bronze with ½" male

threaded inlet and standard ½"

Return bends arrangement to be followed for any Pendent sprinkler installation

Sprinkler Material:

Body: Brass

Body cap: Brass

Deflector: Copper



Sprinkler selection, type, temperature shall comply with NFPA 13. Sprinklers shall be

pressure rated to suit the selected fire pump’s shut off head



Page 182/231

Sprinkler guards shall be provided to sprinklers located with in escalators and locations

where there are possibilities of mechanical damage to the sprinkler

Sprinklers shall be UL listed, FM approved & approved by Saudi Civil defence

4.2.11 Fire Pumps

The fire pump shall be of the base mounted, single stage, centrifugal type; horizontal split

case directly connected to an electric motor through a heavy duty flexible coupling for main

pump & diesel engine for stand by pump. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common

cast iron base plated provided with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole. The

fire pump unit shall be supplied complete with pump, driver, and accessories as described

below. The pumping unit (Pumps, drives, controllers, couplings, etc) shall be listed by

Underwriters Laboratories and FM approved shall meet all requirements of the National Fire

protection Association, 20, 2007 Edition. The pump capacity and pressure shall be as shown

on the Drawings. The pump shall deliver, not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure

not less than 65% of rated pressure. The shut-off pressure shall not exceed 120% of rated

pressure.

The pump casing shall be of cast iron having a minimum tensile strength of 35,000psi and

shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psig and hydrostatically tested at the factory

to not less than 250 psig. Bearing housing supports and suction and discharge flanges shall

be integrally cast with the lower half of the casing. Removal of the upper half of the casing

shall allow removal of the rotating element without disconnecting the suction and discharge

flanges.

The impeller shall be of the enclosed type and shall be of vacuum cast bronze. It shall be

dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft sleeves. The shaft sleeves shall extend the entire

length of the seal boxes to protect the shaft and shall be key locked and threaded so that they

tighten with the rotation of the shaft.

Teflon gaskets shall be provided between the impeller hub and the shaft sleeves to protect

the pump shaft. The pump shall be equipped with renewable casing wear rings which shall

be locked by dwelling to prevent rotation.

The pump rotating element shall be supported by two heavy duty grease lubricated ball

bearings mounted in machined moisture and dust proof cast iron housing and bolted to the

pump casing with register fits to ensure permanent alignment.

Grease seals and water stingers shall be provided to protect the bearings from contamination.

Bearing housings shall be so designed as to flush lubricant through the bearing. Easily

accessible grease fittings shall be provided for positive bearing lubrication. The pump shaft

shall be of high strength steel accurately machined to give a true running rotating element.

The shaft shall be sealed by split packing glands designed for easy removal for inspection

and maintenance. The packing shall consist of INTERWOVEN, GRAPHITED asbestos,

diagonally cut packing rings with lantern ring connected to the pressure side of the pump by

a cored passage in the parting flange of the pump.

The electric motor shall be of the drip-proof, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently

lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed shall not exceed 3600 rpm. The pump shall

be provided from the factory with lifting lugs, coupling guard and tapped holes in the suction

and discharge flanges for pressure gauge connections.

The fire pump unit shall be supplied complete from the factory with the following

accessories: -



Page 183/231

Suction and discharge pressure gauges, not less than 3½" dial, reading in P.S.I. and

having arranged equal to twice the rated design working pressure of the pump

complete with gauge valves.

Main relief valve, size 3" minimum, factory set to open at a pressure slightly

greater than the rated design working pressure of the pump with capacity to pass

all the water discharged by the pump without developing excessive pressure on the

system.

Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of the pump when operating at

shutoff, factory set to open just higher than the rated design working pressure of

the pump and lower than shut-off discharge pressure

Automatic air release valve on the casing vent.

Suction and discharge matching flanges

Each fire pump unit shall be supplied from the factory with controller, for floor mounting, of

water tight construction and marked Fire Pump Controller.

The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic, across-the-line type and shall

contain the following: Externally operable disconnect switch, circuit breaker with an

interrupting capacity to suit the motor magnetic starter, pressure switch, pilot lamp to

indicate circuit breaker closed and power available, ammeter test link, voltmeter test studs,

and a two position selector switch marked automatic and non automatic.

The controller shall be completely assembled, wired and tested at the factory, ready for

installation and operation with simple external electrical connections. The controller shall

comply with the requirements of NFPA 20 & NFPA 70

Fire Pump controllers are to be located within the Fire pump room which is to be sprinklered,

hence the controllers shall be drip proof as well

The pump shall be given a complete performance test at the factory with positive suction

pressure and with a 15 foot suction lift.

NPSH shall be calculated and considered for designing the pump.

All fire pumps shall be designed to be suitable for the prevailing climatic conditions in Saudi

Arabia. Factory visit shall be provided by the contractor at no extra cost to the client for

employer’s representative/s to witness the factory testing with performance of fire pump sets

before shipment to the project site.

A diesel tank confirming to the requirement of NFPA 20 & Saudi Civil Defence shall be

provided for each engine driven fire pump. The material of construction, piping, level

indicators, connections shall confirm to the requirements of NFPA 20. Diesel tank shall have

a vent connection which shall terminate to atmosphere.

4.2.12 Jockey Fire Pump

The Jockey fire pump shall be vertical multi stages stainless steel construction.

The electrical motor shall be close-coupled to the pump and shall be of the drip-proof,

squirrel cage induction type with permanently Lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor

speed shall not exceed 3450 rpm.

The pump shall be provided from the factory with one suitable starter of the totally enclosed,

wall mounted, direct on line type with low volt and overload protection in each phase and

suitable for automatic operation.



Page 184/231

4.2.13 Sprinkler Piping

No pipe serving automatic sprinklers shall be less than 1" even if serving only sprinkler. All

connections of sprinkler pipes shall be made to the top of cross mains and feed mains to keep

dirt and sediment out of sprinklers and sprinkler pipe. The ends of all the cross of feed

mains shall be provided with a flush and test connection comprised of 1" gate valve and 1"

hose adapter to allow fitting a 1" rubber hose for manually discharging the water to the

nearest bathroom of sanitary fixture. No test outlet shall be made less than 1" in order to give

a test flow equivalent to the flow from one sprinkler.

A Hydraulic Calculation to be submitted by the specialised contractor complying with NFPA

13 & 14.

4.2.14 Hangers and Supports

Horizontal pipes shall be supported by hangers of the universal pipe loop type. The hangers

shall have rods that are adjustable in length and washer type ceiling plates. The hanger shall

be attached to the concrete of the ceiling by means of expansion shields of size to suit the

hanger rod size.

The hangers shall have the thickness and width of flat steel and the size of hanger rod as

given in the following table: -

Pipe Dimensions Size of Rod

Size of Flat Steel

1" - 2" 1/16" x 5/8" 3/8"

2 1/2" & 3" 3/32" x 3/4" 1/2"

4" & 5" 1/8" x 3/4" 5/8"

6" 1/8" x 1" 3/4"

All pipe sizes shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 metres. Cross mains of

automatic sprinkler piping shall be supported independently of the branch line hangers.

One hanger shall be provided on each length between branch lines. Hangers shall be

installed without regard to the locations of pipe sleeves through walls. The pipe shall be

centred in the sleeve and not supported by it. Vertical pipes shall be supported at every floor

by means of clamps bolted around the pipe with legs on both sides that rest on the concrete

floor.

4.2.15 Standpipe

Standpipes shall be UL listed oblique pattern globe type with non-rising bronze spindle,

fitted with a leather strap and padlock with two keys. The hand wheel shall be marked to

show direction of rotation and the valve shall be complete with blank plug and chain. Inlet

size shall be 40mm for stations & EEP (SCD requirement) and 65mm for depot buildings

and the outlet 40mm for stations & EEP (SCD requirement) and 65mm for depot buildings

both female threaded outlet. The Standpipe shall include an adjustable pressure-reducing

device to ensure an outlet pressure of 6.9 bar (100 psi) for 65mm outlets and 4.5 bar (65 psi)

for 40mm outlets, as per NFPA requirements (as acceptable to the Saudi Civil Defence).

4.2.16 Automatic Hose Reel

The swing type automatic Fire Hose Reels shall be designed and manufactured as per

EN671-1. Hose Reel drums shall be made of 1.2mm thickness pre-treated electro-

galvanised steel sheet, painted with electrostatic powder coating confirming to RAL 3001

and oven baked at 180º. Hose Reel drum shall have additional ribs to give extra strength

and avoid twisting, Hose used has three ply with two synthetic rubber layers and a textile



Page 185/231

reinforcement approved to BS EN-694:2001 with working pressure 12.1 bar (175 psi).

Every unit has hydrostatically tested to 18 bar pressure. Hose Reel valve shall open

automatically within three revolutions of the reel. There shall be a pressure reducing valve

installed in the piping connecting the hose reel which shall restrict the pressure to 175 psi.

4.2.17 Breeching Inlets

Breeching Inlets shall be UL listed and of vertical or horizontal pattern having a 150mm

flanged outlet and four 65mm instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains.

Breeching inlets shall be equipped with a 25mm drain valve to drain the riser. The entire

breeching inlet shall be enclosed in a suitable flush mounted box with a labelled wired glass

door.

Breeching Inlet location for stations shall be placed diagonally at 2 locations along the

perimeter of the premises and the location shall be not more than 30.5mtrs from the fire

brigade hard standing location.

4.2.18 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided as required by NFPA 10, 2007 Edition. The

stored pressure extinguishers shall be 4.5 kg, ABC dry powder or 5 kg carbon dioxide type

or 2 kg ABC dry powder. The extinguisher shall include a gauge for indication of pressure.

Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed at a suitable height and in the hose cabinets.

Where fire extinguishers are installed on the wall, they shall be complete with wall mounting

brackets.

The fire extinguishers shall be designed and constructed as per the latest BS 5423, shall be

UL/FM approved.

All the equipments used in fire fighting system shall be UL/FM approved & shall also be one

approved by local authorities.

Pipes, fittings and all the valves, sprinklers, equipments used in Fire fighting system shall be

pressure rated to suit to the operation of shut of pressure of the pumps

4.3 PRE ACTION FOAM WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM

Pre action Foam water Sprinkler System shall be of Double knock type confirming to the

requirements of NFPA 11, 2007 Edition, NFPA 13, 2007 Edition & NFPA 16, 2007 Edition

Foam concentrate shall be of 3% AFFF. Water for the foam water sprinkler system shall be

drawn from the sprinkler network. Deluge valve shall be provided with pneumatic head with

trim assembly. Isolation valves shall be provided at downstream & upstream of the deluge

valves. By pass valve (isolation valve) for Deluge valve shall be provided

Bladder type Foam tank shall be located near the deluge valve with foam proportioner. The

foam proportioner shall be suitable for proportioning 3% of foam concentrate. A foam

concentrate sensing line shall be there in the foam proportioner to monitor the flow of foam

concentrate & to avoid the flow of water alone into the area being protected. Downstream of

the deluge valve shall be normally filled with Compressed air.

Foam concentrate carrying pipe shall be of stainless steel SS 316. All fittings & valves used

in foam concentrate network shall be of stainless steel SS 316

Double knock system shall be with 1) sensing of heat (bulb fuses) by the sprinkler & 2)

detection of smoke / fire through detectors

Bladder tank size & foam concentrate quantity shall be as referred by NFPA 11 & shall

include 100% standby reserve for operation of the system. In addition to that the suitable

DATE:20th

April 2010 J091205FF

Madinah Office: Tel no.: 04-8361943 Fax: 04-8361943

Riyadh Office: Tel no.: 01-2061939 Fax: 01-4787603

Tel. : 691-5777 Fax : 683-3632

P.O. Box 40388 Jeddah 21499 K. S. A.

(Power Automation & Safety System)

AL-MADAR Co.

In the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

Submitted To :

At

MAKKAH

Submitted by:

Dammam Office: Tel no.: 03-8678233 Fax: 03-8678266

CLIENT :AL-MADAR Co. DATE: April 19th ,2010


1 Specification and Compliance statement

1.1 Specification (MMMP-SL-EMDD-GEN-GEN-DSP-D-3003-A01) Dated: 27-10-2009

1.2 Compliance statement

2 Sprinkler System Components

2.1.1 Extended Coverage Ordinary sprinkler (ECOH) Extended Coverage Light Hazard sprinkler (ECLH) (Model JL112& J112 –Upright)

2.1.2 Quick Response Concealed Automatic Sprinkler (Model: G4A)

2.1.3 Extra Large Orifice Sprinkler (Model: G XLO)

2.2

Sprinkler Guard

Model C

Model D

2.3 Water Flow Detector (WFD) -WFD30-2

2.4.1 Alarm Pressure Switches (EPS10-1 & EPS10-2)

2.4.2 Supervisory Switch (Model: OSY2)

2.5 Valves

2.5.1 High Pressure Alarm Check Valve (E3)

2.5.2 Iron Body Check Valves (500 PSI WWP)

2.5.3 Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm (Model C)

2.5.4 Ductile Iron Body Swing Check Valves (Class 150)

CLIENT :AL-MADAR Co. DATE: April 19th,2010


________________________________________________________________________________________________

2.5.5 Iron Body Check Valves (175 PSI WWP)

2.5.6 Butterfly Valves (300 lb. WWP)

2.5.7 Gate Valve (Model-18)

3 Strainers

3.1 H Style Strainer (X43H)

3.2 UL Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Strainer (Model: 911U)



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section 1

Specifications and Compliance statement



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-1.1

Specification MMMP-SL-EMDD-GEN-GEN-DSP-D-3003-A01



Page 1/245

Date:27/10/2009

Materials & Workmanship Specification For Mechanical, Fire, Plumbing & Drainage Services

Document Number

MMMP-SL EMDD GEN GEN DSP D 3003 A01

Project Originator Discipline Location Doc Type Stage Doc. Number Revision

�A Mashaaer Al Mugaddassah Metro Project


Page 3/245

Table of Contents

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL, FIRE, PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE SERVICES................................................................................................ 15

1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS…………… .……………………………………………...15

2.0 MECHANICAL SERVICES AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.............................. 21

2.1 FANS……………………………………………………………………………………..21

2.1.1 General ..................................................................................................................................21

2.1.2 General Requirements for Centrifugal Fans .........................................................................23

2.1.3 General Requirements for Axial Fans...................................................................................25

2.1.4 Wall Mounted Fans ...............................................................................................................27

2.1.5 Propeller Fans........................................................................................................................28

2.1.6 Window/Wall Fans................................................................................................................28

2.1.7 Smoke Extraction and Pressurization Fans...........................................................................28

2.1.8 Fan Coil Unit Fans ................................................................................................................30

2.1.9 General Technical and Installation Requirements ................................................................30

2.1.10 Installation .............................................................................................................................31

2.1.11 Standards ...............................................................................................................................31

2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS………………………………………………………………...32

2.2.1 Cooling Coils.........................................................................................................................34

2.2.2 Technical and Installation Requirements ..............................................................................35

2.2.3 Installation .............................................................................................................................36

2.2.4 Filters General .......................................................................................................................37

2.2.5 Filters Technical and Installation Requirements...................................................................38

2.2.6 Washable Air Filters (Washable, Aluminium Filter Media and Frame) ..............................39

2.2.7 Panel Type Air Filter.............................................................................................................39

2.2.8 Bag Type Air Filters..............................................................................................................40

2.2.9 Return Air Plenum.................................................................................................................41

2.2.10 Installation .............................................................................................................................41

2.3 AIR – COLLED CHILLER………………………………………………………………42

2.3.1 General Requirements ...........................................................................................................42

2.3.2 Casing and frame...................................................................................................................43

2.3.3 Screw compressor .................................................................................................................43

2.3.4 Reciprocating compressor.....................................................................................................44

2.3.5 Evaporator .............................................................................................................................45

2.3.6 Air-cooled condenser ............................................................................................................46



Page 4/245

2.3.7 Refrigerant circuit..................................................................................................................46

2.3.8 Control...................................................................................................................................47

2.3.9 Installation .............................................................................................................................47

2.3.10 Testing and start-up ...............................................................................................................48

2.4 FAN COIL UNITS…………………………………………………………………..........49

2.4.1 General Requirements: Chilled Water Fan Coil Units .........................................................49

2.4.2 Filter and Grille .....................................................................................................................50

2.4.3 Fan and Motor .......................................................................................................................50

2.4.4 Coils.......................................................................................................................................51

2.4.5 Drain Pans .............................................................................................................................51

2.4.6 Casings/Plenums ...................................................................................................................52

2.4.7 Casing/Plenum Insulation .....................................................................................................52

2.4.8 Fresh Air Connection ............................................................................................................53

2.4.9 Installation .............................................................................................................................53

2.5 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV) AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM……54


2.5.2 Cabinet construction..............................................................................................................55

2.5.3 Refrigerant system.................................................................................................................55

2.5.4 Safety device and control ......................................................................................................56

2.5.5 Installation .............................................................................................................................56

2.6 AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT (SPLIT-TYPE)…………………………...………………57

2.6.1 General ..................................................................................................................................57


2.6.3 Compressor............................................................................................................................58

2.6.4 Refrigerant circuit..................................................................................................................58

2.6.5 Evaporator coil ......................................................................................................................58


2.6.7 Filter.......................................................................................................................................59

2.6.8 Electrical accessory and control ............................................................................................59

2.6.9 Condensate drain pan ............................................................................................................59

2.6.10 Installation .............................................................................................................................60

2.7 ROOF TOP SELF-CONTAINED UNIT…………………………………………………60

2.7.1 General ..................................................................................................................................60


2.7.3 Compressor............................................................................................................................61

2.7.5 Evaporator coil ......................................................................................................................62



Page 5/245


2.7.7 Evaporator fan and motor......................................................................................................63

2.7.8 Condenser fan and motor ......................................................................................................63

2.7.9 Filter.......................................................................................................................................63

2.7.10 Electrical accessory and control ............................................................................................63

2.7.11 Condensate drain pan ............................................................................................................64

2.7.12 Installation .............................................................................................................................64

2.8 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING(CRAC) UNITS…………………………..65

2.8.1 General ..................................................................................................................................65

2.8.2 Blower and Motor .................................................................................................................65

2.8.3 Filter.......................................................................................................................................65

2.8.4 Refrigeration System.............................................................................................................66

2.9 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNITS..…………..67

2.10 DESERT COOLER………..……………………………………………………………..68

2.10.1 General ..................................................................................................................................68

2.10.2 Type of Desert Cooler ...........................................................................................................70

2.10.3 Interconnecting Pipes ............................................................................................................72

2.10.4 Painting..................................................................................................................................72

2.10.5 Testing ...................................................................................................................................72

2.11 CHILLED WATER PUMPS……………………………………………………………..72

2.11.2 Standards ...............................................................................................................................72

2.11.3 Constructional Requirements ................................................................................................73

2.11.4 Performance...........................................................................................................................74

2.11.5 Pump Installation...................................................................................................................75

2.11.6 Pump Set Auxiliary Equipment ............................................................................................76

2.11.7 Shaft Coupling Alignment ....................................................................................................77

2.11.8 Type of Shaft Misalignment:.................................................................................................77

2.12 DUCTING AND FITTINGS………..……………………………………………………78


2.12.2 Hangers and Supports............................................................................................................81

2.12.3 Flexible Duct Joints...............................................................................................................82

2.12.4 Flexible Ductwork.................................................................................................................82

2.12.5 Access Doors.........................................................................................................................83

2.12.6 Grilles and diffusers ..............................................................................................................84

2.12.7 4 way Blow Ceiling Diffusers...............................................................................................84

2.12.8 Control Dampers ...................................................................................................................86



Page 6/245

2.12.9 Damper Components.............................................................................................................88

2.12.10 Butterfly and Multi Leaf Dampers........................................................................................88

2.12.11 Self-Closing (Non-Return) Dampers ....................................................................................89

2.12.12 Fire dampers ..........................................................................................................................90

2.12.13 Motor Operated Dampers (MOD).........................................................................................91

2.12.14 Motorized Smoke and Fire Dampers (MSFD) .....................................................................93

2.12.15 Test Points .............................................................................................................................94

2.12.16 Fire Rated Ductwork .............................................................................................................94

2.12.17 Turning Vanes .......................................................................................................................95

2.12.18 Ductwork Installation............................................................................................................96

2.12.19 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Installation .........................................................................96

2.12.20 Cleaning of Air System.........................................................................................................97

2.12.21 Access Panel..........................................................................................................................97

2.12.22 MOD and MSFD Installation................................................................................................97

2.13 THERMAL INSULATION.……………………………………………………………...98


2.13.2 Application – Ductwork and Air Handling Plant .................................................................99

2.13.3 Application – Chilled Water Pipe work and Equipment ....................................................100

2.13.4 Vapour Barriers ...................................................................................................................101

2.13.5 Identification of pipework...................................................................................................102

2.13.6 Identification of ductwork...................................................................................................103

2.13.7 Identification of valves........................................................................................................103

2.13.8 Labels ..................................................................................................................................103

2.14 PAINTING………………………...…………………………………………………….104

2.14.1 General requirements ..........................................................................................................104

2.14.2 Ferrous Surfaces ..................................................................................................................105

2.14.3 Copper Surfaces ..................................................................................................................105

2.14.4 Insulated Surfaces................................................................................................................105

2.15 PIPE WORK…………………………………………………………………………….106

2.15.1 General ................................................................................................................................106

2.15.2 Standards .............................................................................................................................106

2.15.3 Protection and Storage.........................................................................................................108

2.15.4 Cutting and Handling of Pipe..............................................................................................108

2.15.5 Installation General .............................................................................................................108

2.15.6 Cleaning Procedures............................................................................................................110

2.15.7 Installation ...........................................................................................................................111



Page 7/245

2.15.8 Expansion Bellows..............................................................................................................111

2.15.9 Jointing – general requirements ..........................................................................................111

2.15.10 Jointing of Welded Steel Piping..........................................................................................113

2.15.11 Screwed Steel Joints............................................................................................................114

2.15.12 Jointing of Copper Piping ...................................................................................................114

2.15.13 Flanges.................................................................................................................................114

2.15.14 Gaskets ................................................................................................................................115

2.15.15 Pipe work Hangers and Supports ........................................................................................115

2.15.16 Protective Coatings and Linings - General .........................................................................119

2.15.17 Protective Coatings and Linings - Particular ......................................................................119

2.15.18 Pipe work Insulation............................................................................................................119

2.15.19 Welding ...............................................................................................................................120

2.15.20 Brazing of copper tubing.....................................................................................................120

2.15.21 Testing .................................................................................................................................121

2.15.22 ECS Pipe work ....................................................................................................................121

2.15.23 Hanger rods .........................................................................................................................124

2.16 PIPELINE EQUIPMENT……………………………………………………………… .125

2.16.1 General Requirements .........................................................................................................125

2.16.2 Standards .............................................................................................................................126

2.16.3 Globe Valves .......................................................................................................................127

2.16.4 Isolation Butterfly Valves ...................................................................................................127

2.16.5 Isolation Gate Valves ..........................................................................................................128

2.16.6 Check Valves.......................................................................................................................129

2.16.7 Balancing Valves.................................................................................................................130

2.16.8 Motorized Control Valves...................................................................................................131

2.16.9 Automatic Air Relief Valves...............................................................................................132

2.16.10 Ball Float valves..................................................................................................................133

2.16.11 Expansion Tank...................................................................................................................133

2.16.12 Strainers...............................................................................................................................133

2.16.13 Pipework Cleaning Procedures ...........................................................................................134

2.16.14 Gauge Cocks........................................................................................................................134

2.16.15 Dirt Pockets .........................................................................................................................135

2.16.16 Drain Cocks.........................................................................................................................135

2.16.17 Safety and Pressure Relief valves .......................................................................................135

2.16.18 Escutcheons .........................................................................................................................136

2.16.19 Thermometer .......................................................................................................................136



Page 8/245

2.16.20 Pressure Gauges ..................................................................................................................136

2.16.21 Pipe Sleeves.........................................................................................................................136

2.16.22 Expansion Loops .................................................................................................................136

2.16.23 Expansion Joints..................................................................................................................137

2.16.24 Pipe Anchors .......................................................................................................................137

2.16.25 Pipe Guides..........................................................................................................................137

2.16.26 Installation of Equipment ....................................................................................................137

2.16.27 Anchoring and Grouting Equipment...................................................................................138

2.16.28 Levelling and Aligning........................................................................................................138

2.16.29 Lubrication ..........................................................................................................................139

2.16.30 Service Penetrations through Building Fabric ....................................................................139

2.17 WATER TREATMENT……...…………………………………………………………140


2.17.2 Water Treatment for ECS Water Systems ..........................................................................140

2.17.3 Chemical Treatment to prevent Corrosion and Algae Formation.......................................141

2.17.4 Chemical Feed Pump ..........................................................................................................141

2.17.5 Chemical Tank ....................................................................................................................142

2.17.6 Liquid Level Switch. ...........................................................................................................142

2.17.7 Miscellaneous......................................................................................................................142

2.17.8 Installation ...........................................................................................................................142

2.17.9 Field Quality Control Chemical tests..................................................................................143

2.18 VALVES………………………………………………………………………………...144

2.18.1 Pressurisation Unit ..............................................................................................................147

2.19 NOISE CONTROL………………………………………………………………………148


2.19.2 Standards .............................................................................................................................149

2.19.3 Materials and Construction .................................................................................................150

2.19.4 Quality Control....................................................................................................................150

2.19.5 Noise – Design Data............................................................................................................151

2.19.6 Commissioning....................................................................................................................151

2.19.7 Noise Measurement.............................................................................................................151

2.19.8 Duct Internal Lining ............................................................................................................151

2.19.9 External Duct Acoustic Lagging.........................................................................................152

2.19.10 Acoustic Lagging. ...............................................................................................................153

2.19.11 Sound Attenuators and Acoustic Louvres...........................................................................153

2.19.12 Installation ...........................................................................................................................155



Page 9/245

2.19.13 Acoustic Performance .........................................................................................................156

2.20 VIBRATION CONTROL……………………………………………………………….156


2.20.2 Pipe work Vibration Isolation .............................................................................................156

2.20.3 Ductwork Vibration Isolation..............................................................................................157

2.20.4 Flexible Connectors.............................................................................................................157

2.20.5 Flexible Metallic Hose ........................................................................................................158

2.21 MOTORS………………………………………………………………………………..158

2.21.1 General ................................................................................................................................158

2.21.2 Standards .............................................................................................................................160

2.21.3 Technical and Installation Requirements ............................................................................160

2.22 MOTOR STARTING……………………………………………………………………162

2.22.1 Above 0.37kW ....................................................................................................................162

2.22.2 Below 0.37kW.....................................................................................................................162

2.22.3 Control Gear General ..........................................................................................................162

2.22.4 Enclosures............................................................................................................................162

2.22.5 Contactors............................................................................................................................163

2.22.6 Overloads.............................................................................................................................163

2.22.7 Fuses ....................................................................................................................................163

2.22.8 Isolators ...............................................................................................................................163

2.22.9 Indicating Lamps.................................................................................................................163

2.22.10 Terminations and Wiring ....................................................................................................164

2.22.11 Control Gear ........................................................................................................................164

2.22.12 Control Circuits ...................................................................................................................165

2.23 CONTROL SYSTEM…………………………………………………………………...165


2.23.2 Control Equipment Features................................................................................................166

2.23.3 Ancillary Items ....................................................................................................................166

2.23.4 Additional Features .............................................................................................................166

2.23.5 Sensors.................................................................................................................................166

2.23.6 Controllers and Switches.....................................................................................................168

2.23.7 Actuators..............................................................................................................................169

2.24 BMS CONTROL SYSTEM……………………………………………………………..170

2.24.1 General ................................................................................................................................170

2.24.2 Local Area Network……………………………………………………………………..170

2.24.3 Main Control Panel .............................................................................................................170



Page 10/245

2.24.4 Main Machine Interface……………...................................................................................171

2.24.5 Fail Safe...............................................................................................................................171

2.24.6 Power Supply ......................................................................................................................171

2.24.7 Remote I/O Outstation Panel...............................................................................................171

2.24.8 Outstation Interfaces with sensors and Operating Devices.................................................172

2.24.9 Transmission System...........................................................................................................173

2.24.10 Power Failure – Alarms and Restoration ............................................................................173

2.24.11 Plant Start/Stop Programme................................................................................................173

2.24.12 Interlocking..........................................................................................................................173

2.24.13 Sensors…………………………….....................................................................................174

2.24.14 Control Valves.....................................................................................................................174

2.24.15 Damper Motors…………………………….. ....................................................................174

2.24.16 Control Functions................................................................................................................175

2.24.17 Control Panel.......................................................................................................................175

2.24.18 Fire Alarm Interlocks…………………………………......................................................175

2.24.19 Interlinks with other Systems…………...............................................................................176

2.25 INSTRUMENTATION…………………………………………………………………176


2.25.2 Pressure Gauges ..................................................................................................................176

2.25.3 Thermometers......................................................................................................................177

2.25.4 Airflow Measurement Grids ...............................................................................................177

2.26 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING………………………...………178

2.26.1 General………………………………………………………………………………...178

2.26.2 Testing and Commissioning - Definition……………………………………………...179

2.26.3 Testing and Commissioning - General………………………………………………...180

2.26.4 Off-Site Tests…………………………………………………………………………..180

2.26.5 Site Tests……………………………………………………………………………….181

2.26.6 Inspection and Testing During Construction Period…………………………………..181

2.26.7 Documents and Data Requires for Hand-Over Meeting………………………………182

3.0 FIRE SERVICES SYSTEMS General Requirements .................................................. 183

3.1 FM 200 GASEOUS FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM…………………………..……...183

3.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................183

3.1.2 Design..................................................................................................................................184

3.1.3 System Parameters ..............................................................................................................185

3.1.4 System Type and Configuration..........................................................................................185

3.1.5 Gas Release Panels..............................................................................................................186



Page 11/245

3.1.6 Manual Gas Release Points.................................................................................................187

3.1.7 Hold Off Button...................................................................................................................188

3.1.8 Interface Units .....................................................................................................................188

3.1.9 Gas Cylinder Installation.....................................................................................................189

3.1.10 Power Supplies ....................................................................................................................189

3.1.11 Installation ...........................................................................................................................190

3.1.12 Pipework..............................................................................................................................190

3.1.13 Control.................................................................................................................................191

3.2 WET FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM………...……………………………………………193

3.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................193

3.2.2 Standpipe System ................................................................................................................194

3.2.3 Sprinklers;............................................................................................................................194

3.2.4 Codes and Standards; ..........................................................................................................195

3.2.5 Pipe Work;...........................................................................................................................195

3.2.6 Valves ..................................................................................................................................195

3.2.7 Fire Fighting Water Piping – General.................................................................................196

3.2.8 Sprinkler System Description..............................................................................................197

3.2.9 Fire Protection Specialties...................................................................................................198

3.2.10 Sprinklers.............................................................................................................................199

3.2.11 Fire Pump ............................................................................................................................199

3.2.12 Jockey Fire Pump................................................................................................................201

3.2.13 Sprinkler Piping...................................................................................................................201

3.2.14 Hangers And Supports ........................................................................................................202

3.2.15 Standpipe .............................................................................................................................202

3.2.16 Breeching Inlets...................................................................................................................202

3.2.17 Portable Fire Extinguishers .................................................................................................203

3.3 PRE-ACTION FOAM WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM..……………………………..203

3.4 INDENTIFICATION…………………………………………………………………..203

3.5 FLUSHING………………………………………………………………………….....203

3.6 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING………………………………………….............204

3.6.1 Factory Tests and Off-site Tests………………………………………………..............204

3.6.2 Visual Inspection and Checking………………………………………………………..204

3.6.3 Setting to Work, Safety and Quality Tests……………………………………………..204

3.6.4 Commissioning, Regulations, Tuning and Adjustment…………………………………205

3.6.5 Functional Tests…………………………………………………………………………205

3.6.6 Performance Tests………………………………………………………………………206



Page 12/245

3.6.7 Final Mock-up Tests…………………………………………………………………...210

3.6.8 Statutory Tests & Inspection…………………………………………………………..210

3.7 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR COMPLETION & HANDLING OVER..210

3.7.1 General…………………………………………………………………………………211

3.7.2 Test Certificates………………………………………………………………………..211

3.7.3 Installation Completion, Testing & Commissioning Certificates……………………...211

3.7.4 As Built Drawing………………………………………………………………………211

3.7.5 Operation and Maintenance and Services Manuals……………………………………211

3.7.6 Manufacturer's Name Plate…………………………………………………………… 211

4.0 PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICES………………………………………………………..212

4.1 DRAINAGE……………………………………………………………………………. 213

4.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................213

4.1.2 Excavations & Backfilling for Drainage Works.................................................................214

4.1.3 Supports for Excavation ......................................................................................................216

4.1.4 Trench Widths .....................................................................................................................216

4.1.5 Excavations in Rock............................................................................................................217

4.1.6 Pipe Materials......................................................................................................................218

4.1.6.1 General ................................................................................................................................218

4.1.6.2 Schedule of Pipe Materials..................................................................................................218

4.1.7 Pipe Laying..........................................................................................................................218

4.1.8 Refilling Excavations containing Pipe work.......................................................................220

4.1.9 Underground Drainage Identification Caution Markers.....................................................220

4.1.10 Testing and Inspection of Drainage Works.........................................................................221

4.2 HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES………………………………………………..222

4.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................222

4.2.2 Cutting and handling of pipe and accessories.....................................................................223

4.2.3 Protection and storage of pipe and accessories ...................................................................223

4.2.4 Schedule of Pipe work Materials ........................................................................................223

4.2.5 Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe work.........................................................224

4.2.6 Pipe Erection .......................................................................................................................224

4.2.7 Air Vents and Drainage.......................................................................................................224

4.2.8 Unions..................................................................................................................................225

4.2.9 Flanges.................................................................................................................................225

4.2.10 Flexible Connections...........................................................................................................226

4.2.11 Anchors................................................................................................................................226

4.2.12 Guides..................................................................................................................................226



Page 13/245

4.2.13 Expansion Joints..................................................................................................................226

4.2.14 Pipe Sleeves.........................................................................................................................227

4.3 VALVES……………………………………………………………………………….. 227

4.3.3 Valve and Strainer Schedule ...............................................................................................228

4.3.4 Gate Valve;..........................................................................................................................228

4.3.5 Ball Valve;...........................................................................................................................229

4.3.6 Butterfly Valves; .................................................................................................................229

4.3.7 Check valve; ........................................................................................................................229

4.3.8 Float Valves.........................................................................................................................229

4.3.9 Strainers...............................................................................................................................229

4.3.10 Automatic Air Vents; ..........................................................................................................230

4.3.11 Gauge/Test Cocks ...............................................................................................................230

4.3.12 Gland Cock;.........................................................................................................................230

4.3.13 Drain Tap;............................................................................................................................230

4.4 PIPE WORK SUPPORT………………………………………………………………..230

4.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................231

4.4.2 Testing of Hot and Cold Water Services.............................................................................232

4.4.3 Sterilization of Hot and Cold Water Services .....................................................................233

4.5 RAINWATER, SOIL, WASTE AND VENTILATING PIPEWORK………………….234

4.5.1 General ................................................................................................................................234

4.5.2 Schedule of Pipework Materials .........................................................................................235

4.5.3 PVC – U Pipework..............................................................................................................235

4.5.4 Galvanized Mild Steel Pipes ...............................................................................................236

4.5.5 Rainwater Goods .................................................................................................................236

4.5.6 Pipe work Supports .............................................................................................................237

4.5.7 Testing .................................................................................................................................238

4.5.8 Gutters .................................................................................................................................238

4.5.9 Pumping Mains ...................................................................................................................238

4.5.10 Test Certificate ....................................................................................................................238

4.5.11 Sanitary Appliances.............................................................................................................239

4.6 PLUMBING FIXTURES………………………………………………………………..240

4.7 REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK……………………………………….....240

4.8 PUMPS…………………………………………………………………………………. 240

4.8.1 General ................................................................................................................................240

4.8.2 Water Booster Pumps……………………………………………………………………241

4.8.2.1 Anti Vibration Mounts and Isolation ..................................................................................241



Page 14/245

4.8.2.2 Controls ...............................................................................................................................242

4.8.3 Dewatering Sump Pumps………………………………………………………………..243

4.9 ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS……………………………………………………244

4.10 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION………………………………………………………….244



Page 15/245

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL, FIRE, PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE SERVICES

1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS

Reference Codes and Standards;

NFPA-130 NFPA Standard for Fix Guide way Transit and Passenger Rail System, 2007 Edition

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

API American Petroleum Institute

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

ANSI American National for Standards Institute

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

AGA American Gas Association

AWS American Welding Society

BS British Standards Specifications

AWWA American Water Works Association

DIN Deutsches Institute for Normalisierung

ISO International Standards Organization

FM Factory Mutual

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NBS National Bureau of Standards

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code

CIBSE Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers



Page 16/245

API 5L Specification for Line Pipe

ASTM A47 Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A181 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping

ASTM A216 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service

ANSI B 16.9 Factory made Wrought Butt Welding Fittings

BS 21:1985 Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads (metric dimensions)

BS 143:2000 Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron and cast copper alloy.

BS 381C:1996 Specification for colours for identification, coding and special purposes

BS 499-2C:1999 Welding terms and symbols, European arc welding in chart form

BS 970-1:1996 Specification for wrought steels for mechanical and allied Engineering purposes. General inspection & testing procedures & specific requirements for carbon, carbon manganese, alloy and stainless steels.

BS 1452:2000 Plastic piping systems for water supply. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U)

BS 1449:1991 Specification for steel plate (not exceeding 5⁄16 in.) sheet and strip. Specification for cold rolled narrow strip supplied in a range of conditions for heat treatment & general engineering purposes.

BS 1560:1989 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (Class designated). Steel, cast iron and copper alloy flanges. Specification for steel flanges

BS 1663:1998 Prevailing torque type hexagon nuts with flange (with non-metallic insert)

BS 1710:1984 Specification for identification of pipelines and services

BS 1965 Butt welded fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general use

BS 2494:1990 Specification for elastomeric seals for joints in pipe work and pipelines

BS 2633:1987 Specification for Class I arc welding of ferritic steel pipe work for carrying fluids

BS 2879:1980 Specification for draining taps (screw-down pattern)



Page 17/245

BS 2971:1991 Specification for class II arc welding of carbon steel pipe work for carrying fluids

BS 3601:1987 Specification for carbon steel pipes and tubes with specified room temperature properties for pressure purposes

BS 3941:1975 Specification for voltage transformers

BS 4147:1980 Specification for bitumen-based hot-applied coating materials for protecting iron and steel, including suitable primers where required

BS 4190:2001 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification

BS 4293:1983 Specification for residual current-operated circuit-breakers

BS 4504:1989 Flanges and their joints

BS 4772:1988 Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories

BS 4872:1982 Approved testing of welders when welding procedure is not required.

BS 4999:2004 Specification for General Requirement for Rotating Electrical Machines

BS 5000:1997 Specification for Rotating Electrical Machines

BS 5045-2:1989 Transportable gas containers. Specification for steel containers of 0.5 L up to 450 L water capacity with welded seams

BS 5150:1990 Specification for cast iron gate valves

BS 5153:1974 Specification for cast iron check valves for general purposes

BS 5154:1991 Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gate valves

BS 5306:2003 Fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises. Guide for the selection of installed systems and other fire equipment

BS 5316-2:1977 Specification for acceptance tests for centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps – Class B Tests

BS 5423:1987 Portable fire extinguishers.

BS 5445:1977 Components of automatic fire detection systems. Heat sensitive detectors - point detectors containing a static element

BS 5486:1990 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies. Requirements for type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies

BS 5643:1984 Glossary of refrigeration, heating, ventilating and air conditioning terms.



Page 18/245

BS 5839:2008 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings. Code of practice for system design, installation and servicing.

BS 6266:2002 Code of practice for fire protection for electronic equipment installations

BS 6387:1994 Performance requirements for cable required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions.

BS 7076:1989 Dimensions of gaskets for flanges to BS 1560. Specification for non-metallic flat gaskets

BS 7211:1998 Specification for thermosetting insulated cables (non-armoured) for electric power and lighting with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire

BS 7273:2006 Code of practice for the operation of fire protection measures, electrical actuation of gaseous total flooding extinguishing systems.

BS 5720:1979 Code of practise for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings.

BS EN15423:2008 Ventilation for buildings. Fire precaution for air distribution systems in buildings.

BS 7350:1990 Double Regulating globe valves and flow measurement devices in heating and chilled water.

BS 7874:1998 Method of test for microbiological deterioration of elastomeric seals for joints in pipe work and pipelines.

BS EN 54-1:1996 Fire detection and fire alarm systems. Introduction

BS EN 287-1:2004 Approval testing of welders for fusion welding. Steels

BS EN 287-2:1992 Approval testing of welders for fusion welding. Aluminium and aluminium alloys

BS EN 499:1995 Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels. Classification

BS EN 545:2006 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water pipelines. Requirements and test methods

BS EN 593:2004 Industrial valves. Metallic butterfly valves

BS EN 598:2007 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage applications. Requirements and test methods

BS EN 681:1996 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in water and drainage applications. Vulcanized rubber



Page 19/245

BS EN 837-1:1998 Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions, metrology, requirements and testing

BS EN 877:1999 Cast Iron Pipes And Fittings, Their Joints And Accessories For The Evacuation Of Water From Buildings - Requirements, Test Methods and Quality Assurance

BS EN 969:1996 Specification for ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for gas pipelines. Requirements and test methods

BS EN 970:1997 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual examination

BS EN 1092-2:1997 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges

BS EN 1435:1997 Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic examination of welded joints

BS EN 1461:1999 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specifications and test methods

BS EN 1514:1997 Paints and varnishes. Standard panels for testing

BS EN 1561:1997 Founding. Grey cast irons

BS EN 1562:1997 Founding. Malleable cast irons

BS EN 1975:2000 Transportable gas cylinders. Specification for the design and construction of refillable transportable seamless aluminium and aluminium alloy gas cylinders of capacity from 0,5 litre up to 150 litre

BS EN15243:2007 Ventilation for buildings. Calculation of room temperatures and of load and energy of buildings with room conditioning systems.

BS EN 1886:2007 Ventilation for buildings. Air handling units. Mechanical performance.

BS EN 1982:2008 Copper and copper alloys. Ingots and castings

BS EN 10255:2004 Non-Alloy Steel Tubes Suitable For Welding And Threading - Technical Delivery Conditions

BS EN 13280:2001 Specification For Glass Fibre Reinforced Cisterns Of One-Piece And Sectional Contruction, For The Storage, Above Ground, Of Cold Water

BS EN 5135:1984 Acoustics. Determination of sound power levels of noise from air-terminal devices, air-terminal units, dampers and valves by measurement in a reverberation room

BS EN 60529:1992 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)



Page 20/245

BS EN 80416:2003 Basic Principles For Graphical Symbols For Use On Equipment - Part 1: Creation Of Symbol Originals

ISO 2531 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water or gas applications

ISO 2857 Ground thread taps for ISO metric threads of tolerances 4H to 8H and 4G to 6G coarse and fine pitches -- Manufacturing tolerances on the threaded portion

ISO 2858 End-suction centrifugal pumps (rating 16 bar) -- Designation, nominal duty point and dimensions

ISO 4633 Rubber seals -- Joint rings for water supply, drainage and sewerage pipelines -- Specification for materials

ISO 7005-2 Metallic flanges -- Part 2: Cast iron flanges

ISO 7005-3 Metallic flanges -- Part 3: Copper alloy and composite flanges

ISO 7240-1 Fire detection and alarm systems -- Part 1: General and definitions

ISO 7483 Dimensions of gaskets for use with flanges to ISO 7005

ISO 14520 Gaseous Fire-Extinguishing Systems - Physical Properties and System Design

NFPA-10 NFPA Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, 2007 Edition

NFPA-11 Standard for Low-, Medium-, and High-Expansion Foam, 2007 Edition

NFPA-13 NFPA Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2007 Edition

NFPA-14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems, 2007 Edition

NFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems, 2007 Edition

NFPA-20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, 2007 Edition

NFPA-22 NFPA Standard for Water Tank Sizing, 2007 Edition

NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances, 2007 Edition

NFPA 25 Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems, 2007 Edition

NFPA 37 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, 2007 Edition



Page 21/245

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, 2007 Edition

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, 2007 Edition

NFPA-70D NFPA Standard for Warning Sign and it's Color code & Size, 2007 Edition

NFPA-72D NFPA Standard for Fire Detectors and Alarm System, 2007 Edition

NFPA-101 NFPA Standard for Life Safety, 2007 Edition

NFPA-2001 NFPA Standard for Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System, 2007 Edition

NFPA 90A NFPA standard for the installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2007 Edition

NFPA 92A Standard for smoke Control systems using barriers and pressure difference, 2007 Edition

NFPA 92B Standard for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria and Large spaces, 2007 Edition

NFPA 204M Guide for Smoke and Heat Venting, 2007 Edition

2.0 MECHANICAL SERVICES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 FANS

2.1.1 General

The ductwork system external total pressure resistance figures specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings are based on design drawings and, as such, are calculated on assumed resistance figures of equipment. When selecting fans, the Contractor shall include for any “System Effects” at the fan inlet and discharge which may affect the fan aerodynamics and vender catalogue performance data inaccurate for the actual installation. The exact fan total pressure based on the Contractors installation drawing duct run and the offered equipment shall be carefully checked and re-calculated, including the additional of the selected fan outlet dynamic / velocity pressure for each fan system before ordering the equipment.

All fans shall be selected with appropriate speeds and outlet velocities of not higher than 14.5 m/s unless otherwise specified to keep the noise level to a minimum.

Proprietary bell mouth and wire guard shall be provided for fans without ductwork connection.

Fans shall be axial/wall mounted/centrifugal flow types as indicated in the Equipment Datasheets.

Fans shall be designed and constructed in accordance with BS 848 Part 4/AMCA 99-3001/N type tested as per ISO 5801/BS 848 Part 2/AMCA 210/N and capable of handling the



Page 22/245

specified air flow rate, taking into account all pressure losses in the corresponding louvres, grilles, air duct and fitting etc. which are to form a complete and workable ventilation system.

All fans should be constructed to a fully developed design and shall be capable of withstanding the pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. Additionally, all belt driven fans shall be capable of running continuously at ten per cent in excess of the selected duty speed.

Where specified, fans shall be fitted with variable inlet vanes, which shall be matched to the fan performance to give stable control. Vanes shall be closely interlocked to ensure movement in unison. Operation shall be manual or automatic as specified. Where manual control is specified, the operating device shall facilitate positive locking in at least five different positions. Vane blades shall not vibrate or flutter throughout their operational range.

The shaft and impeller assembly of all centrifugal, axial flow and roof extraction fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. All propeller fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced where the impeller diameter is 750 mm or greater. Limits of vibration severity shall be in accordance with BS 7854 Part 1 or suitable equivalent.

Fan bearings shall be of a type suitable for the installed attitude of the fan. They shall be grease/oil ball and/or roller type or alternatively oil lubricated sleeve type. All bearing housings shall be precision located in position and arranged so that bearings may be replaced without the need for re-alignment. Bearing housing shall be protected against the ingress of dust and, where fitted with greasing points, they shall be designed to prevent damage from over-greasing. For grease lubricated systems the bearings shall be provided with grease in amount and quality recommended by the bearing manufacturer. For oil lubricated systems the housings shall provide an adequate reservoir of oil and shall include a filling plug and be oil tight and dust proof. Systems other than total loss types shall include an accessible drain plug. All bearing lubricators shall be suitably located to facilitate maintenance.

Fans shall be installed using bolts, nuts and washers with all `as cast' bearing surfaces for bolt heads and washers counter faced. Holding-down bolts for fans and motor shall be provided with means to prevent the bolts turning when the nuts are tightened. Anti-vibration mountings shall be provided.

V-belt drives shall comply with BS 3790 and shall be capable of transmitting at least the rated wattage output of the motor with one belt removed. Unless otherwise specified not less than two belts per drive shall be used. Pulleys shall be exactly aligned. Any holding down bolts grouted in are positioned to ensure correct alignment. Provision shall be made for positive adjustment of the tension in V-belt drives.

Wire mesh guards shall be provided for all open unprotected intakes to centrifugal flow fans; for unprotected intakes to exhausts from axial flow fans; for open, unprotected and easily accessible intakes to and exhausts from propeller fans; for V-belt drives; for drive couplings and elsewhere as specified.

Unless otherwise specified, all fan speeds shall not be higher than 1800 rpm.

Drive shaft shall be designed such that the first critical speed of the shaft shall be not less than 130% of the nominal fan speed.



Page 23/245

Motors shall be TEFC, cast iron or steel round frame, induction type, continuous duty, and variable torque. The fans, motors and components shall be capable of withstanding sudden temperature changes as a result of fire between the extremes of ambient and plus 250 °C in 20 seconds. Fan-motor unit performance shall be rated for the airflow and total pressure at a maximum air density of 1.2 kg/m3. Bearings shall have a minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours.

Fans shall be capable of continuous operation at specified design points. During continuous operation, motors shall be insensitive to line voltage variation of 10% above or below the rated voltage and to normal frequency variation. Fan rotating components shall be designed such that no measured or calculated stress level shall exceed 60% of the components materials yield strength at design temperature. Blades shall be manufactured of a homogeneous material and shall have no cast-in or embedded materials. Lifting eyes shall be provided on each fan assembly heavier than 25 kg.

Electrical power input required by the fans shall not exceed the nameplate kilowatt rating of the motors at any point on the fan performance curve. The motor nameplate kilowatt rating shall be the actual continuous brake kilowatts developed. Motors shall be able to accelerate to full speed at rated load with starting voltage (dip) of 25% below rated voltage of the motor.

The motor shall be designed for accelerating the fan impeller from standstill in not more than 15 seconds to operating speed without exceeding the rated temperature rise of the unit.

2.1.2 General Requirements for Centrifugal Fans

Provide forward/backward curved fans as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings. Backward curved type shall be non-overloading.

• Centrifugal fans more than 15kW in power shall have backward inclined airfoil

blades • Forward inclined airfoils fans shall be limited to 1200rpm while backward inclined

fans shall be limited to 2000rpm Centrifugal fans shall be backward bladed type, having a fan total efficiency not less than 65%.

Fan casings shall be constructed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan installation. Fans other than those in factory constructed air handling units shall, unless otherwise specified, be provided with flanged outlet connections and spigoted inlet connections suitable for flexible joint connections except that for negative pressures greater than 500 Pa inlet connections shall be flanged.

Fan casings shall be heavy gauge GSS. All fan casings of 1200 mm dia. or greater shall be provided with removable access panels which shall incorporate purpose made air seals. The sizes of access panels shall enable visual checking of the impeller.

Permanent indication shall be provided to show the correct direction of rotation of the fan impeller.

Impellers shall be of mild steel welded construction, with spiders or hubs of robust design, and shall be capable of running continuously at ten per cent in excess of normal operating speed.



Page 24/245

Impellers shall be keyed to a substantial mild steel shaft and the impeller complete with shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced plus tested for satisfactory overspeed performance before leaving the maker's works.

Shaft bearings of belt driven single inlet fans shall be truly aligned and rigidly mounted on a pedestal common to both bearings. Double inlet, double width fans shall have a pedestal mounted bearing at each side of the fan. Fan bearings shall be ring oiling sleeve bearings, or ball or roller type. Where silence is important the bearing pedestal shall not be attached to the fan casing also the ring oiling type sleeve bearings shall be supplied.

Unless otherwise specified centrifugal fans shall be driven by electric motor through V-belt drives having a minimum of two matched belts and rated at not less than 150% of the actual full load capacity. Unless otherwise specified, fans shall be driven by totally enclosed fan squirrel cage induction motors of IP 44 or better.

Unless otherwise indicated, centrifugal fans consuming more than 7.5 kW at the fan shaft shall be of the backward bladed type having a fan total efficiency not less than 65%. Centrifugal fans with shaft power exceeding 15 kW shall be of the aerofoil backward curve type.

Fan Casing

Fan casing shall be of sheet steel construction adequately stiffened and braced and shall be entirely free from vibration or drumming during normal operation.

Drain sockets or holes shall be provided.

Fan casings shall be fitted with flanges on the outlet connection suitable for connection of discharge ductwork and flexible connections as shown on the Drawings.

Where the inlet side of the fan is connected to ductwork, matching flanges for connection of flexible connections shall be provided.

Inspection doors or sight ports to enable direction of rotation to be established shall be provided.

Fan enclosure shall be provided to enclose the entire fan as shown on the Drawings. The construction of such enclosure shall be in accordance with Sections concerned with Acoustic Treatment and Vibration Control of this Specification.

Fan Impellers

Impellers shall be double inlet, double width or single inlet, single width as shown on the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings and shall be mounted on substantial hubs.

Fan impellers shall be backward/forward sloping blades as specified on the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings.

Impellers shall be rigidly fixed to solid bright steel shafts adequately sized and proportioned to ensure that the maximum operating speed is not more than 60% of the first critical speed. The shaft shall be protected by reliable anti-rust coating.



Page 25/245

Impellers shall be of steel, electro-galvanized after fabrication (or aluminium where indicated), of riveted or welded construction, with spiders or hubs, of robust design and shall be capable of running continuously at 15% in excess of normal speed.

All forward curved fans shall be selected for use with speed not exceeding 1200 rpm and backward curved fans shall be selected not to exceed 2000 rpm, unless otherwise specified.

Unless otherwise specified, drive motors to Class F insulation to BS EN 60085 shall be totally enclosed and rated for continuous operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C. Performance and rating shall comply with BS 5000: Part 99.

The fan and motor shall be mounted on rigid galvanized steel channel base. Provide slide rails for adjustable mounting of motors.

The driven V-belt shall be rated at 150% of the operating motor power input. Belt speed shall not exceed 25 m/s.

Type of V-belt shall be in accordance with the "Standards for Light-duty or Fractional-Horsepower V-Belts" of Rubber Manufacturers Association.

Belt guards shall be of heavy gauge steel framing with expended metal. mesh screen.

All belt guards shall have access openings at the shaft ends to enable tachometer readings to be taken.

Vibration isolators shall be provided in accordance with "Acoustic Treatment and Vibration Control" of this Specification.

The shafts shall be carried in ring lubricated self-aligning sleeve bearings for shafts of 150mm diameter and larger. Each bearing shall have large oil storage capacity to ensure efficient lubrication. On shafts of sizes smaller than 150mm diameter, grease lubricated self-aligning ball bearings resiliently mounted to reduce noise transmission shall be used.

The shafts shall be extended beyond the drive-side bearing and keyed for overhung pulley in all cases.

For centrifugal fans used in air handling units (AHUs) and primary air handling units (PAUs), one coat of corrosion-proof coating shall be applied to all non-working surfaces of shafts at the factory.

The average bearing life of the fan shall be at least 80,000 hours.

2.1.3 General Requirements for Axial Fans

Provide axial flow, direct drive aerofoil fans as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.

Axial flow fans shall be of either the single stage type or the multi-stage contra-rotating type with each impeller mounted on an independent motor, and having an overall efficiency of not less than 60%.

Casing shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel stiffened and braced to obviate drumming and vibration. Cast iron or fabricated steel feet shall be provided where necessary for bolting



Page 26/245

to the base or supports. The complete casing shall be hot-dipped galvanized after manufacture. Inlet and outlet ducts shall terminate in flanged rings for easy removal.

The length of the casing shall be greater than the length of the fan impeller(s) and motor(s) in order that the complete section may be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork.

Unless otherwise specified, electrical connections to the motor(s) shall be through an external terminal box secured to the casing. The fan motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cages motors of IP 54 for indoor and outdoor application.

Impellers shall be of steel or aluminium; the blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and the hub shall be formed in one piece. The hub shall be keyed to a substantial mild steel shaft and the whole shall be statically balanced. Blades shall be of airfoil section. Shaft shall be carried in two bearings, which may be ball, roller or sleeve type. Extended lubricators outside the casing shall be provided if sealed for life bearings are not incorporated.

The drive shall be provided inside the fan casing. An access door of adequate size to facilitate inspection, cleaning and other maintenance shall be provided in the air ductwork.

Where axial flow fans of bifurcated type are specified the motors shall be out of the air-stream and shall normally be placed between the two halves of the bifurcated casing in the external air. Where hot gases or vapours are being handled the motor and the bearings shall be suitable for operation at the temperature they may experience and the bifurcated section containing the motor shall be mounted vertically in order to maximise convection airflow over the motor.

Proprietary fan inlets and discharges wire screen guards shall be provided for fans, which are not connected directly to air ducts.

Fan Casing

A casing shall enclose the motor and impeller.

Fan casings shall be fitted with matching flanges on the inlet outlet ends with spigots for attachment of flexible connections.

Inspection doors or sight ports to enable direction of rotation to be established shall be provided.

Terminal boxes welded to the casing shall be provided for electrical connection using metallic flexible conduits to fan motor complying with BS 4999: Part 20 for dust and weatherproof conditions.

Grease nipples shall be brought to the outside of the casing in the most accessible position and fitted with lubrication tube made of copper or other suitable material.

Gasketed access doors shall be provided in each fan housing or connecting ductwork, suitable for access to adjust or replace blades. For smoke extraction fans, the gaskets shall be suitable for continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour.



Page 27/245

Impeller

Impellers shall be of die-cast aluminium alloy.

For hub size of 315 mm diameter and above, blades shall be manual adjustable without removing the wheel.

Positive locking shall be provided for securing the impeller blades into the hub. Spun aluminium hub caps shall be fitted.

The blades and hubs shall have index marks which show the design operating blade setting and a minimum of three increments of stagger angle both larger and smaller than the design operating blade setting and stops at hub to prevent overload of the motor.

The blades shall be counter-balanced and mounted on a thrust bearing.

Except smoke extraction fans and unless otherwise specified, drive motors shall be of class F insulation (BS 4999 and BS EN 60085) totally enclosed type and rated for continuous operation in ambient temperature of 40 °C. Performance and rating shall comply with BS 5000 and IEC 34-1 with protection to IP 54.

Factory bell mouth shall be provided where no duct connection is required. Fans shall be fitted with bell mouth inlets. Flow cores and bell mouth inlets shall be fabricated in steel and provided with flanges drilled and rigidly bolted to the fans.

Provide wire guards on fan outlet/inlet not connected to ductwork and shall be made freely accessible for maintenance.

Fans shall be provided with mounting feet and spring isolators.

The average bearing life of the fan shall be at least 80,000 hours.

Stationary, curved guide vanes shall be located on the outlet side of the fan to straighten the motion of the air leaving the blades to improve operating efficiency if required.

For smoke extraction fan, adequate clearance shall be provided between blade tips and housing at all points to allow for expansion and contraction over a continuous operation in an air stream temperature range from 0 °C to 250 °C without developing interference to the specified flow capacity. The fabrication/shop drawings shall show the clearance at over a continuous operation in an air stream temperature range from 0 °C to 250 °C as well as any point of minimum clearance in between.

2.1.4 Wall Mounted Fans

Impellers shall be of steel or aluminium. The blades shall be fastened to the hub or the blades and hub shall be formed in one piece. The bearings may be ball, roller, or sleeve type. Wall mounted fans may be ring mounted or diaphragm mounted in a casing.

Where wall mounted fans are to be mounted in a casing the casing shall, be longer than the length of the fan impeller and motor. The casing shall be of galvanised steel or aluminium sheet and shall have flanged ends and an inspection door. A terminal box shall be mounted externally on the casing.



Page 28/245

The tip speed shall not exceed 20 m/s. All ring mounted fans which are exposed, i.e. not installed within an air duct or other enclosure shall be adequately protected by guards.

Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be totally enclosed with IP 44 and with permanently lubricated bearings. Louvre shutters shall be fitted to extract fans mounted on external walls. The fan motors shall be capable of continuous operation without overheating or damage under no flow condition.

2.1.5 Propeller Fans

Provide propeller fans as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.

The impeller shall be designed to give maximum volume with minimum noise level and minimum power consumption and shall be made of steel or other suitable material. The hub shall be steel with grey stove epoxy finish. The fan shall be complete with anti-vibration mount.

The motor shall be dust and moisture protected to IP 54 and of a totally enclosed construction with permanently lubricated ball bearings suitable for running in ambient temperatures of up to 50 °C and relative humidity of up to 75%.

Wire guards made of heavy gauge steel wire or rod with all joints and crossings welded and shall be fitted to impeller side or motor side or both where appropriate.

Propeller fans shall be diaphragm mounted on not less than 3mm thick steel mounting plate with stove epoxy grey finishes.

Provided with seal permanently lubricated bearings.

With tip speed not exceeding 17.5 m/s.

2.1.6 Window/Wall Fans

Provide window/wall fans as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.

The fan casing and fan blades shall be of all plastic construction.

All fan motors shall be totally enclosed in aluminium alloy cases and protected by a thermal overload cut-out.

Motor bearings shall be self-aligning oil impregnated porous brushes with an ample oil reserve.

Back draught shutter shall be provided and the fans shall be operated through an ’ON/OFF’ switch.

2.1.7 Smoke Extraction and Pressurization Fans

Smoke exhaust fans in stations shall be of axial flow type. Fans for ancillary areas shall be either axial or centrifugal.



Page 29/245

Characteristic curves

• Performance curves shall ensure that a 15% increase in static pressure (from duty point) will not decrease air flow rate by more than 15%

• A variation of 300 Pa from duty point shall not induce movement of fan operating point along the curve into the region of unstable operation

• Airflow in reverse direction shall be at least 70% of nominal airflow

• The minimum aerodynamic efficiency shall be 70% Impeller

• For fans with a hub size higher than 315mm, blades shall be manually adjustable without removing the wheel

• For fans used in smoke exhaust purpose, a suitable clearance between blades and casing shall be provided for expansion and contraction purpose

• Ratio of hub diameter to fan housing diameter shall not be less than 0.35. Motors

• Motors rating shall be at least 15% more than motor operating point at specified duty

• Motors shall be of Class H insulation, IP 54

• Motors shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%

• Motors shall be 3- phase

• The minimum power factor is 0.85

• Motors shall be capable of withstanding with 6 starting operations per hour

• Miscellaneous performance characteristics

• Accessories used for smoke exhaust purpose shall be fire rated 250°C for 1hour

• Axial fans rpm shall be between 600 and 1800

• Fans shall comply with IEC 34-1,34-5, 34-6, 34-7, 34-8, 34-9, IEC 85, IEC 892 and ISO 281,1680,5135 and 8821 (not exhaustive list) or equivalent and any other relevant Standard.

• Motors shall be directly coupled, in-line, to the fans’ impeller

In addition to the aforesaid requirements, all fans used for smoke extraction and pressurization shall comply with additional requirements specified as below.

Fans for smoke extraction and pressurization systems shall have non-overloading characteristic.

All finishes shall be factory-applied and certified by the respective manufacturer that the finishing materials are capable of withstanding exposure continuously to an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour without producing smoke or toxic fumes.



Page 30/245

Motor winding of smoke extraction fans shall be insulated to permit motor operation at design conditions for continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour. The smoke extraction fans shall be performance tested at factory for the performance and operating condition before delivery. Type test certificates shall be provided.

For duty/standby pressurization fans, devices that sense the effective operation of the pressurization fans shall be provided. An adjustable time delay control in the range of 30 seconds to 2 minutes in steps of 1 second shall also be provided for changeover to standby motor when the duty motor cannot be actuated after a predetermined time interval as governed by the time delay control.

2.1.8 Fan Coil Unit Fans

Fan coil unit fan shall be direct driven of the centrifugal type and forward curved blades fabricated from mild steel treated for corrosion and painted with anti corrosive paint mounted to a solid steel EN8 shaft. Coil fans shall be mounted directly on the extended shaft of the motor with a positive locking arrangement. Fans and fan motors shall be dynamically balanced.

Motor speed shall not exceed 1800 r.p.m. and the motors shall be three speed (low, medium, high) suitable for single phase supply. Motors shall be quiet running and have sleeve bearings factory lubricated for life. Motor windings and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to avoid trouble from condensation

2.1.9 General Technical and Installation Requirements Quality Control

Nameplates: Securely attached on each fan showing manufacturer's name, serial and model numbers and date of manufacture.

Fans shall have non-overloading characteristic, except for forward curved centrifugal, over their entire operating range. The characteristic curves shall be such that the fan operating point falls between the no flow static pressure and the maximum mechanical efficiency. The fan characteristic shall also be such that for a 15% increase in static pressure over the specified value, the fan shall deliver not less than 80% of the specified air volume flow rate. The stability of fan operation shall not be affected under such situation.

Each fan unit including motor and drive shall be supplied from the manufacturer as a completely factory-assembled package and all guarantees and test certificates shall be deemed to apply to the entire assembly.

All fans shall be capable of withstanding the pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at the selected duty. Additionally, all belt driven fans shall be capable of running continuously at 15% in excess of the selected duty speed.

Lifting eye shall be provided on all centrifugal and axial fans.

All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

All centrifugal fan shafts shall have the ends drilled to receive a tachometer.

With the exception of wall mounted fans and unless otherwise specified, motor speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm.



Page 31/245

Nominal motor nameplate rating shall be higher than the peak operating power of the selected fan curve for non-overloading characteristic. The motor rating shall be a minimum of 15% higher than the motor operating point at design conditions unless otherwise specified.

2.1.10 Installation

All belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts shall be adequately guarded so that any person can safely come in close proximity thereto.

Fit fans and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily serviceable.

Provide support beams, support legs, platforms, hangers and anchor bolts required for the proper installation of equipment as shown on the Drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer.

Provide permanently attached lifting eyes of sufficient number for on Site installation and future dismounting of fan units.

Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion resistance materials and installation methods shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against galvanic interaction.

Thoroughly clean the entire system before installing filters or operating the fans.

For systems containing filters, install filters and permanently seal the filter frame air-tight before operating the fans. Replace all dirty filters and filter media before handing over the system to the Employer.

Means of protection against over current in the motor shall be incorporated in the control equipment when the motor rating exceeds 0.37 kW.

A hole in the blanking off plate shall be provided for the cables leading to the fans. The hole shall be sealed around the cables with material suitable for sealing the hole effectively against being continuously exposed to an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour rating, if the fans are used for smoke extraction.

2.1.11 Standards

Reference Codes and Standards

• AMCA Standard 210/N: Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating

• ANSI/AMCA 99-3001/N: Dimensions for Axial Fans

• BS 848: Fans for General Purposes Part 2 Methods of Noise Testing

• BS 848: Fans for General Purposes Part 4 Dimensions

• BS 2757: Method for Determining the Thermal Classification of Electrical Insulation

• BS 4999: General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines



Page 32/245

• BS 5000: Rotating Electrical Machines of Particular Types or for Particular Applications

• BS 5501: Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

• IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines – Part 1: Rating and Performance

• ISO 5801: Industrial Fans – Performance Testing using Standardized Airways

• All fans, drives and accessories shall be designed, constructed, rated and tested in accordance with the recommendations and standards of AMCA.

2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of factory-built air handling units with cabinet, fan, coil and filter sections; and prefabricated insulated casings for building up air conditioning systems.

The construction of AHUs shall comply with ARI 410 and 430.

During parallel operation of AHUs, their fans shall not operate within the stalling range of the fan performance curve.

Each unit shall be designed and constructed for ease of handling and replacement or addition of sections. Where a single air handling unit is serving a particular area, each such AHU shall have twin blower arrangement, with each blower providing 50% of the AHU capacity. For areas served by multiple AHUs, single blower units are acceptable. Each AHU shall have a fan section, coil section, filter section and return air plenum section.

Each section shall be of the same construction type and present a smooth internal appearance to ensure even airflow through the components and prevent dirt build up. The cross section of the unit should be based on the plant room configuration proposed, taking full account of maintenance access requirements. Each section of AHU shall be provided with interior lighting. A micro switch shall be provided in each door/panel to operate the light, when the door/panel is opened.

Prior to despatch each section shall be shrink wrapped, using heavy gauge polythene sheeting to provide protection during both shipment and the erection period.

The unit shall be of framed construction for strength and rigidity. Frames shall be structurally rigid and provided with Galvanised Sheet Steel (GSS) to BS EN 10142 channel bases under all units. These shall be a minimum of 100 mm high, the actual height being individually calculated for each unit to ensure structural integrity during lifting and moving. The frame members shall be of 2 mm thick (min) extruded aluminium. All individual components and sections shall be assembled using proprietary and suitable fastening techniques. Locking devices shall be used with all fastenings that are subject to vibration.

Nameplate: Securely attach nameplate on each unit showing manufacturer’s name, serial/model number and tag no.

Where AHU sizes permit, provide complete factory fabricated assembly including centrifugal fans, coils, filters, cabinet, insulation, drain pan, V-belt drive and accessories. For



Page 33/245

larger units, where installation constraints demand the units shall be delivered to site for final erection. Any defective elements or components shall be replaced with new.

Unit shall be draw-through type unless otherwise specified.

Casing shall completely enclose the coils, fans, filter sections and return air plenum.

Panels shall be removable for access and complete with access door for inspection of the fan, coil and filter.

Galvanized steel bolts, screws and washers shall be used for the assembly of the units.

Fabricate structural frame with members rigidly braced to hold all parts in line and to prevent change in shape when operating.

Unless otherwise specified, structural frame of welded construction shall be painted with two coats of primer, followed by two coats of aluminium epoxy paint.

Finish exterior surfaces with factory applied enamel coating in addition to the standard shop applied paint.

Frame members shall be mechanically fixed and sealed with fire retardant gaskets (Surface spread of Flame Class 1 to BS 476 Part 7) to give the necessary structural strength and air leakage integrity. All metal surfaces must be properly treated and painted in the manufacturer's works as standard provision.

The casing panels shall be of rigid double-skinned modular construction, corrosion resistant and structurally adequately to be free from distortion and drumming in operation. They shall be insulated with polyurethane foam of 38 – 40 kg/m3 density, with 0.6 mm GSS/Aluminium inside and pre coated/powder coated 0.6 mm GSS outside casing. The insulation shall be injected between the outer and inner casing. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity no greater than 0.02 W/mK. Thermal insulation shall be securely fixed to all sections handling cooled air and, where appropriate, a vapour barrier shall be provided. Particular care shall be taken to ensure surface protection of internal insulation in areas where free moisture may be present and to avoid damage in sections having walk-in access. Thermal insulation shall be selected and applied to prevent surface condensation at design conditions and to maximize noise attenuation. Insulation for panels and all structural or reinforced members shall be 50 mm thick. Surface condensation shall not occur even when the AHUs are in operation or are exposed to outdoor ambient temperature and humid conditions. The complete unit design including framework, panels, access door handles, and hinges shall be designed such that there shall be no thermal bridge.

The design of the unit shall be free from cold bridges. There shall be no direct metallic contact between the inside and the outside of the cabinets. Vapour barrier rating shall be 0.015 ng/sm2Pa

Lifting lugs shall be provided such that each unit shall be capable of being lifted as both a complete assembly, and as sub sections to facilitate handling and installation,

Access doors or readily removable panels with air seals shall be provided to facilitate access to be made to upstream and downstream faces and all internal parts such as the cooling coils, drain pans, filter, fan and bearings etc. Floors at all accessible sections shall be designed for a 5 kPa loading The doors/access panels shall be 600 mm (minimum width) and at least 1500



Page 34/245

mm high and shall be secured with a minimum number of fastenings consistent with effective air sealing.

Air handling unit panels shall be protected by galvanizing for anti-corrosion protection or a similar finish in the internal surfaces of the units liable to be affected by any moisture. Corrosion resistant drain trays of adequate size complete with thermal insulation to collect water shall also be provided.

Drain pan under coil section shall be:

• Constructed of 0.8 mm (22G) galvanised steel;

• Insulated internally same as fan and coil sections;

• Complete with copper or galvanised steel connector for connection of condensate drain pipes and able to connect on both sides with drain pipes of adequate size. The material of the condensate drain pipes, insulation material and the corresponding thickness shall be in accordance with the requirements of Sections concerned with “Pipework” and “Insulation” of this Specification;

• Extended over the full width and depth of the coil sections and the coil headers; and

• Of sufficient clearance from the coil header to facilitate maintenance and cleaning.

Provide air handling units in compliance with the specified sensible and latent cooling loads, chilled water flow, water temperature rise/drop, maximum water pressure drop, air velocity and maximum air pressure drop as shown on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.

Fan section shall follow the requirements stipulated in “Fans" of this Specification and shall be mounted on galvanized structural steel base with vibration isolators.

Temporary filters shall be required for testing and commissioning of equipment before site cleaning.

All access doors shall be double wall type which shall be positively closed and seated with mechanical fasteners which do not need tools to remove. Access door shall be hinged with full length zinc plated hinges, brass or stainless pins and fastened with a minimum of two ventlock handles. Handles shall be made of hard nylon and be operated from both inside and outside of the unit.

Factory built capped test holes and other facilities shall be provided to suit testing and commissioning.

2.2.1 Cooling Coils

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of chilled water coils for air handling units and fan coil units.

The resistance to air flow through a cooler battery shall not exceed 250 Pa for AHUs taking into account of wet air condition and the face velocity shall not exceed 2.5 m/s.

Moisture carry over from the coil shall not be permitted.



Page 35/245


• ARI Standard 410: Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils

2.2.2 Technical and Installation Requirements

Quality Control

• Factory test water coils at 1550 kPa for low pressure system as specified for system operating pressure less than 1035 kPa (typically for fan coil units). Factory test water coil at 2100 kPa for system operation up to 1750 kPa (Typically for AHUs).

• Nameplates: Securely attach nameplate on each coil showing manufacturer’s name, serial and model number.

• Seamless de-oxidised 12.5 mm outside diameter copper tubes for AHUs and PACs and 9.5 mm for FCUs with minimum 27 gauge wall thickness brazed copper return bends shall be used.

• Aluminium plate fins mechanically bonded to the tubes or aluminium helical fins mechanically bonded to the tubes shall be used. Minimum thickness of fins shall be 0.16 mm minimum.

• Unless otherwise specified, headers shall be seamless steel or heavy gauge copper tube with supply and return connections, drain and vent on each header.

• Coil casing shall be flanged with minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Top and bottom casing flanges shall be formed into a reinforced galvanized steel channel (for AHUs and PACs).

• Coil having effective height greater than 1.2 m shall be horizontally divided into two sections and an intermediate drain pan with two drop tubes to the main drain pan shall be provided. Coils shall be designed with no bypass between coil sections (for AHUs and PACs).

• Coil with 1 m to 1.8 m tube length shall be provided with one centre tube support. For longer coils up to 3 m tube length, it shall be provided with two intermediate supports and over 3 m long tubes shall be provided with three intermediate supports (for AHUs and PACs).

• Fin spacing shall not be more than 12 fins per 25.4 mm of tube. Coil shall be of 8 rows deep maximum. However, FCU coil shall be of 4 rows deep maximum.

• Unless otherwise specified, water velocity shall be minimum 0.6 m/s and maximum 2.5 m/s throughout the tube length. Chilled water coils shall be selected so that water flow remains turbulent at 40 % of the design flow rate.

• Design shall be with continuous circuit from one header to the second header.

• Coil shall be self-draining type with inter-drain headers.



Page 36/245

• For built-up coil bank, intermediate drain pan and main drain pan shall be galvanized steel. Main drain pan shall be 14 gauge steel sheet all welded construction, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

2.2.3 Installation • Mount and arrange components to permit expansion without strain on tubes, headers or

casing and with all guides and supports necessary to insure proper alignment and unimpaired drainage.

• Do not support piping connection from water coil.

• Make supply and return connections to headers to give counter flow of air and water.

• Coil shall be pitched at 12.7 mm/m towards outlet for drainage.

• For stack coil, separate drain pan below coil shall be provided and condensate shall be drained from upper coil to drain pan below.

• Support stack coils so that each coil can be removed without disturbing the remaining coils.

Cooling coils shall be designed to operate at the design chilled water temperature. Coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes. The tubes shall be expanded to permanently bond them to the fins. Cooling coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. There shall not be less than 4 rows of cooling coils in an air handling unit.

Casings for the air cooling coils shall be of galvanised sheet steel not less than 1.2 mm thick with flanged ends drilled to receive counter flanges on connecting ductwork or other associated equipment. The bottom of the casing shall be made in the form of a watertight drip tray from sheet steel galvanised after manufacture, or be otherwise equally corrosion resistant. Water shall not be carried over from cooling coils into the system and an eliminator section shall be provided where required to prevent such carry over. Each cooling coil shall be fitted with an air vent at the highest point, cocks for pressure gauge connections and drawn outlet at the lowest point.

The cooling coil drip tray shall be extended or a separate tray shall be provided to collect water from an eliminator if installed. Drip trays shall be sloped toward a drain connection and pipe work shall be installed from each connection to the nearest sump or gully. The drain pipe work shall include a water seal of adequate depth to prevent entry or exit of air to or from the system. A separate drip tray shall be provided for each 1.2 m depth of coil. Sealing devices shall be provided at tops and bottoms of coils to minimise air bypass and water carry over.

Cooling coils shall be constructed from copper tubes with aluminium fins. Fins shall be of sinusoidal waveform pattern and shall have extended collars for spacing and bonding mechanically to the tube. Particular care shall be taken to avoid the use of dissimilar metals in the construction of tubes and extended surfaces and to avoid contact between dissimilar metals in the presence of free moisture.

Tube thickness and fin thickness shall be respectively not less than 0.41 mm and 0.16 mm, with fin spacing of 12 fins maximum per 25.4 mm. Coil tubes and extended surfaces shall always be of the same material. The secondary extended surfaces shall be in firm and



Page 37/245

continuous mechanical contact with the primary tubes to ensure maximum heat transfer. The resistance to air flow through cooling coils shall not exceed 250 Pa taking into account of wet air condition and the face velocity shall not exceed 2.5 m/s.

All coils shall be compressed air pressure-tested under water to twice the working pressure, to ensure that they are leak free.

Coil sections shall be arranged to provide removal of coils from the access side(s) of the section. Coils shall be split where necessary to achieve this, with opposite side pipe work connections. Coils shall be mounted on the nylon roller bushes for easy removal. Cooling coils shall be supported such that their weight is not transmitted to ductwork and they can be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork. Headers shall normally be contained within the coil casing. Where this is not the case they shall be contained within airtight and gasketed covers outside the casing.

Drain pans shall be incorporated inside all cooling coil sections and shall extend underneath the headers and beyond the fin block to ensure adequate collection of condensate. They shall be of sloping design. Drain pans shall be manufactured from galvanised steel with 12 mm thick polyurethane foam/polyethylene insulation shall be provided. Drain pans shall be connected via dedicated pipe work to the nearest gully, or sump appropriate for condensate drainage. The drain shall be fitted with a water seal to prevent the ingress and discharge of air to and from the system. The drainpipe shall be discharge into the nearest gully or sump via a U-type trap arrangement. Traps shall be designed, constructed supplied and installed so that they operate correctly during operation of the AHU, taking due account of the internal air pressure of the unit.

2.2.4 Filters General This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of washable air filters, disposable air filters, and auto-roll filters.

Filters shall not be fitted into the filter frames until necessary for commissioning.

All supply air systems shall be provided with a filtering system as shown on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.

Standards

ASHRAE 52.1–1992: Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter

Filters within AHUs shall be of a disposable type. Filter assemblies shall operate with at least the efficiencies specified in this Section. Filters shall be complete with robust enclosure, holding frames and housing constructed of non-corrosive metal or if of mild steel galvanised. The enclosure shall be constructed and assembled in such a manner that a rigid and durable enclosure for the filter pack is affected. The periphery of the filter pack shall be continuously bonded to the inside of the enclosing frame thus eliminating the possibility of air bypass.

Holding frames shall be factory fabricated and shall be equipped with gaskets and a minimum of four heavy duty positive sealing fasteners. The gaskets shall be able to prevent air bypass between the filter and frame, between the adjacent frames and between the frames and housing. The fasteners shall be capable of being attached or removed without the use of tools. All gaskets shall have the same fire property requirements as the air filter.



Page 38/245

The housing shall be factory fabricated and assembled. Type test certificates for each type of filter media intended for use on the installation shall be submitted.

Filter sections shall consist of automatic roll type filters. Dust arrestance of the filter media shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52-1 dust spot test method.

Automatic roll type filters shall be synthetic fibre. The efficiency shall be 85% down to 10 microns. Filter motors shall be of single phase if the capacities of the motors are less than 0.375 kW, otherwise they shall be three phase. All the filters shall be tested as per latest international standards. The test certificates shall be provided along with the filters.

The filter shall comprise the complete assembly of filter frame, motor, drive, pressure differential sensor and filter medium. The filter shall operate automatically to maintain operating resistance within a range suited to the filter medium and the required operating efficiency. Provision shall also be made for manual starting and stopping of the filter movement; automatic movement shall be controlled by the resistance across the filter, unless otherwise specified. Visual or audible warning that the end of the clean filter shall be provided. The driving motor shall be automatically switched off when the end of the filter medium is reached.

The initial (clean) resistance of the filter shall not exceed 100 Pa and a mean of 200 Pa under design operating conditions. The air velocity through the filter medium shall not exceed 4.0 m/s or the manufacturers recommended maximum face velocity.

The motor, drive and associated control equipment shall be accessible for maintenance without disturbing the filter medium or roll. The medium shall be provided with an effective seal to minimise air leakage around it.

2.2.5 Filters Technical and Installation Requirements

Quality Control

Perform the following tests or other equivalent tests at the factory:

• NBS "Dust Spot Test"

• ASHRAE 52.1-1992 "Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter"

• Uniformity of resistance test

• Media compressibility and strength test

• Weight test for quantity of fibre

Nameplates: Securely attached to each major item of equipment showing manufacturer's name, serial and model number.

Filter assemblies shall operate at the efficiencies specified in this Section.

Filters shall be complete with robust enclosure, holding frames and housing constructed of non-corrosive metal or mild steel galvanized in accordance with the Section ‘Painting and Finishes' of this specification.



Page 39/245

The enclosure shall be constructed and assembled in such a manner that a rigid and durable enclosure for the filter pack is affected.

The periphery of the filter pack shall be continuously bonded to the inside of the enclosing frame thus eliminating the possibility of air bypass.

Holding frames shall be factory fabricated and shall be equipped with gaskets and a minimum of four heavy duty positive sealing fasteners. The gaskets shall be able to prevent air bypass between the filter and frame, between the adjacent frames and between the frames and housing. The fasteners shall be capable of being attached or removed without the use of tools.

The housing shall be factory fabricated and assembled by the filter manufacturer. The housing shall incorporate access doors, extruded aluminium tracks and individual holding frames designed to accommodate standard size filters. Efficiency and construction rating shall be as specified for the installation.

All filter sections shall be designed and constructed in such a way that both washable and disposable filters can be used.

2.2.6 Washable Air Filters (Washable, Aluminium Filter Media and Frame)

The washable filter, unless otherwise specifies, shall be fitted for all fan coil units and fresh air intake fans.

Flat panel-type filter units shall be of the cleanable cartridge-corrugated strips of expanded aluminium mesh design.

Maximum air flow through filter shall not exceed manufacturer's published rated capacity.

Design to fit the space available and construct so as to prevent the passage of unfiltered air.

Provide filter box with air-tight access panels for filter replacement, complete with corrosion-resistant steel filter frame, clamps, gasketed and sealed to prevent air bypass.

Face velocity of filters for all fresh air intake fans shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

Face velocity of filters for fan coil units shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.2.7 Panel Type Air Filter The holding frames shall be equipped with fixtures for easy removal of the filter cells without the use of any special tools.

For filter cells installed inside air handling unit, separate housing is not required. However, the holding frames shall be factory mounted in the air handling unit casing and installed to provide service from the air side.

This type of filter shall be constructed of aluminium to withstand washing by water or steam. The filter panel shall be constructed from multiple layers of expanded aluminium mesh with the layers being corrugated or plain and arranged alternately at right angle at one another.



Page 40/245

Filter media shall be supported on both sides with a rigid and thicker aluminium expanded metal mesh.

Filters shall be 50, 25 or 12.5 mm thick with a rolled or extruded aluminium frame. The frame section shall be ribbed for stiffness and its inner edges treated to prevent sharpness and increase strength. Corners shall be mitred and riveted where it is necessary. Folding handles shall be applied to the short side of all washable filter panels for easy removal and cleaning. The filter support frame shall be suitable for the installation of either side.

Filter shall have the minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 and initial resistance at 2.5 m/s face velocity as shown in Table 2.2.7.1 below, unless otherwise specified in the Equipment Schedule. The filter shall operate to a final resistance of 150, 100 or 75 Pa for 50, 25 or 12.5 mm thick panels respectively.

Table 2.2.7.1 MERV and Initial resistance of washable panel filter

Thickness MERV Not Less Than Initial Resistance Not Exceeding

50 mm 5 50 Pa

25 mm 4 30 Pa

12.5 mm 3 25 Pa

Where coated filtration media is specified, each layer of expanded aluminium shall be furnished with a thixatropic flame resistant filter coating before assembly into a pack. The adhesive shall have a flash point exceeding 180°C. Performance data for expanded aluminium filter panels oiled with a thixatropic adhesive shall have the minimum efficiency reporting value by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 and initial resistance at 2.5 m/s face velocity as shown in Table 2.2.7.2 below, unless otherwise specified in the Equipment Schedule. The filter shall operate to a final resistance of 150, 100 or 75 Pa for 50, 25 or 12.5 mm thick panels respectively.

Table 2.2.7.2 MERV and Initial resistance of coated washable panel filters

Thickness MERV Not Less Than Initial Resistance Not Exceeding

50 mm 6 55 Pa

25 mm 5 35 Pa

12.5 mm 4 30 Pa

2.2.8 Bag Type Air Filters

The holding frames shall be equipped with at least four heavy duty spring type positive sealing latches for each filter cell to ensure a positive seal against leakage of unfiltered air.



Page 41/245

For filter cells installed inside air handling unit, separate filter housing is not required. However, the holding frames shall be factory mounted in the air handling unit casing and installed to provide service from the air side.

The air filter shall be of high efficiency, extended area, deep pleated, disposable type. The media shall be of microfine glass fibre and reinforced by a laminated synthetic backing. It shall have a nominal thickness of 600 mm and the minimum efficiency reporting value shall not less than 13 by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 and initial resistance not exceeding 100 Pa at 2.5 m/s face velocity, unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification. The air filter shall be designed for air velocity of 1.0 to 3.5 m/s and shall operate to 250 Pa final resistance.

The filter package shall be factory assembled as a complete set readily for site installation. The filter assembly shall consist of a holding frame, sealer frame, media retainer, and the disposable element.

The sealer frame shall be constructed of galvanized steel of sufficient thickness and equipped with suitable airtight sealing gasket and sealing mechanism on the sealer frame flange. The media retainer shall be designed to match the filter elements to provide sufficient support for the multiple pleats of the filter element against the direction of the airflow. The media retainer shall be suitably coated and designed to totally eliminate the possibility of oscillation and sagging. The bag or packer shall inflate fully, shall not sag or flutter or be obstructed by contact with other filter faces or ductwork surfaces when operating between 60 - 110% of design air volume flow rate for constant volume system.

2.2.9 Return Air Plenum

Each AHU shall be provided with a return air plenum. The plenum shall be of same construction as the AHU. The return air plenum shall be provided with either manually or motor operated dampers suitable for isolation of the unit for maintenance or the like.

2.2.10 Installation

Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily serviceable.

Provide galvanized supporting steelwork, legs, anchor bolts required for the proper installation of equipment as recommended by manufacturer or as shown on the Drawings.

After installation, adjust fans to operate without noticeable vibration.

Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion resistant materials and assembly methods shall be used including isolation of dissimilar metals against interaction.

Where in contact with the air stream, protect insulation against erosion or flaking by a factory applied facing.

Mount grease fittings of copper or other suitable materials directly to bearings unless the latter are not readily accessible. Where equipment bearings are not visible or are inaccessible, provide easily accessible extensions to bearing lubrication fittings.

For systems containing filters, install filters and permanently seal the filter frame air-tight before operating the fans.



Page 42/245

Thoroughly clean the entire system before installing temporary / permanent filters or operating the fans. Temporary filters shall be used for setting to work operation for the pre-commissioning operation.

Replace and dispose of all dirty or temporary filters and filter media before handing over of the system.

Install adequate bracing or supports to eliminate any distortion or vibration when the systems are operating or under tests.

Pulleys shall be concentric.

All penetrations through the casing for sensors, wirings or other accessories necessary to complete the installation shall be provided with proprietary sleeves and caps to prevent air leakage and the whole unit shall be factory finish to the same standard.

2.3 AIR-COOLED CHILLER

2.3.1 General Requirements

Chillers shall be the products of a manufacturer who has made this type of equipment and who can show evidence of having completed at least 10 installation projects of approximately the same capacity that have been in successful operation for at least 5 years.

Refrigerant of zero or low ozone depletion potential, such as R134a or R410a, shall be used.

Each air-cooled chiller shall be a single package type fully weather-proof outdoor unit, suitable for desert climate, completely factory-assembled, piped, wired and charged with refrigerant. The unit shall include compressor(s), evaporator, air-cooled condenser, starters, controls, and weather-tight electrical equipment cubicle all mounted on a continuous structural steel base. Capacities of each unit shall be as specified.

Chillers shall comply with the Specifications of ARI Standard 575, ARI Standard 590, ARI Standard 210, and Codes/Regulations of any authorities having jurisdiction.

Each chiller shall have a nameplate on which the manufacturer's name, serial number, model number, input power and power supply etc. shall be clearly indicated.

The power consumption of the chiller shall not exceed the specified value at full load (and partial load where stated) performance

Certified characteristic curves shall be provided to indicate performance of the chiller over the entire operating range. The performance characteristics shall include chiller noise levels in each of the eight octave bands based on readings taken and reported in accordance with ARI 575 and at 100 % full capacity.

All factory applied acoustic and thermal insulation, including facing and adhesives, shall be fire resistant and shall conform to the requirements of NFPA and the local authorities

Materials of fittings and equipment used on the refrigerant and water circuits shall not corrode or set up corrosion with the respective liquids and/or other materials within the circuits.



Page 43/245

Motors, belts, filters, coils, other components and accessories shall be located so that they are accessible for repair, maintenance and replacement.

Grease fittings shall be mounted directly to bearings unless the latter are not readily accessible. Where equipment bearings are not visible or are inaccessible, easily accessible extensions to bearing lubrication fittings shall be provided.

Bracing and supports specified are the minimum acceptable. Additional bracing or supports shall be installed to eliminate any distortion or vibrations when the systems are operating or under tests.

The chiller electrical power supply shall be suitable for 3-phase, 1-phase, as specified, with declared limits at the consumer mains incoming terminals as follows:

Voltage : ± 6 % Frequency : ± 2 %

2.3.2 Casing and frame

The casing of the chiller shall be constructed of minimum 1.9 mm thick heavy gauge galvanized mild steel panels.

Each panel shall be bonderized to remove grease and dirt after fabrication.

All external parts shall be coated with zinc phosphate and finished with a baked enamel coating in an approved colour.

The coating system shall be UL approved.

Screws and fasteners shall be cadmium or zinc plated.

Panels shall be of interlocking design and shall be securely bolted to the frame and reinforced at the critical points to form a rigid and durable structure.

The structural base frame shall be fabricated with members rigidly braced to hold all panels in place and to prevent any change in shape or deformity when operating.

The structural base frame shall be of welded construction with slag and splatter removed after welding. Welds shall be painted with two coats of an approved primer, followed by one coat of aluminium epoxy paint.

The structural base frame shall support casing panels and all internal chiller components and condensing coils. The base frame shall have provisions for fitting the manufacturer's vibration isolators which shall be supplied with each chiller and shall be suitable for the mounting method and location. The base frame shall have built-in lifting points

2.3.3 Screw compressor

Screw compressors shall be semi-hermetic direct-drive type complying with ARI requirements.

Male and female rotors shall be constructed from ductile cast iron having a tensile strength higher than 60 kg/mm².



Page 44/245

Rotors shall be supported in radial roller bearings. All bearings shall have an average life expectancy of 50 000 hours minimum.

Lubrication shall be provided by a differential refrigerant pressure oil pump with oil separator and filtration devices. The lubrication system shall be arranged to ensure adequate oil pressure at all bearings before the compressor starts. A replaceable or thermostatically controlled oil cooler shall be used to remove the heat gained by the oil in the rotor chamber. The oil sump shall have a thermostatically controlled electric heater which operates when the compressor is at rest.

The compressor shall have a refrigerant gas cooled, hermetically sealed motor with built-in protection against inadequate cooling.

Capacity control shall be provided by slide valves. The compressor shall automatically start in unloaded condition. The refrigeration system shall be capable of modulating down to less than 15 % of full refrigeration load without surge or excessive vibration.

The following safety devices shall be provided:

• High pressure, manual reset pressure cut-out.

• Low pressure, manual reset pressure cut-out.

• Internal high pressure side safety valve.

• Thermal overload protection for compressor motor by solid state sensors located in the discharge side of each compressor to automatically shut down compressor due to high discharge temperature.

• Three leg protection for compressor motor by circuit breakers with manual reset to

guard against single phasing.

• An automatic time delay to prevent compressor short cycling.

• High oil temperature cut-out.

• Low water temperature cut-out. The compressor shall be complete with the following:

• Crankcase sight glass. • Suction and discharge shut-off valves of back seated type. • Suction and discharge refrigerant pressure gauges. • Oil pressure gauge. • Oil temperature gauge. • Refrigerant pressure gauges. • Oil sum or reservoir level sight glass. • Instrument mounting.



Page 45/245

2.3.4 Reciprocating compressor

The casing shall be constructed of high grade cast iron. The entire assembly air tested at 2 270 kPa, and the discharge side shall be further air tested to 3 100 kPa. The bearing, seals and oil pump shall be accessible without major dismantling. Cylinder sections shall have removable cast iron cylinder heads and motor housing.

Reciprocating compressors shall comply with the requirements as to piston speed, rotating speed, pressure tests and all other specifications set out by ARI or a similar authority for manufacture standards.

Lubricating system shall be monitored by self-priming gear type oil pumps. Oil heaters shall be provided to prevent refrigerant migration on shut-down. Oil shall be cooled by refrigerant before lubrication of bearings.

Bearings shall have an average life expectancy of 50 000 hours minimum.

All compressors shall be multi-cylinder, high speed and semi-hermetic drive.

Each compressor shall have built-in suction gas-cooled part-winding start motor and electro-hydraulic capacity control system allowing reduced load start.

The refrigeration system shall be capable of modulating down to 33 % of full refrigeration load without surge or excessive vibration.

For multiple-compressor units, the system shall be such that one compressor can be serviced while the other compressors are operating without shutting down the whole system.

The following safety devices shall be provided:

• High pressure, manual reset pressure cut-out.

• Low pressure, manual reset pressure cut-out.

• Low oil pressure cut-out.

• Internal high side safety valve.

• Thermal overload protection for compressor motor by solid state sensors located in the discharge side of each compressor to automatically shut down the compressor due to high discharge temperature.

The compressor shall be complete with the following:

• Crankcase sight glass. • Suction and discharge shut-off valves of the back seated type. • Suction and discharge refrigerant pressure gauges. • Crankcase heater with automatic control.



Page 46/245

2.3.5 Evaporator

The evaporator shall be matched with all other components for cooling requirements and performance.

The evaporator shall be of direct expansion shell and tube type with two separate refrigerant circuits.

The evaporator outer shell and suction line shall be insulated with minimum 25 mm thick flexible closed cell plastic insulation to BS 476: Parts 5 & 7, of maximum K factor 0.26 W/mK.

The maximum water velocity shall not exceed 3.1 m/s with a fouling factor of 0.088 m2K/kW.

The refrigerant side shall comply with ASME code for pressure vessels of the unfired type for the refrigerant used.

Unless otherwise specified, the water side shall be designed for 1 035 kPa working pressure, and be hydraulically tested to 1.5 times of the working pressure.

Tubes shall be seamless copper tubes rolled into the tube sheets.

One water pass shall be provided on the shell with a series of internal baffles. Each shell shall have a drain connection.

2.3.6 Air-cooled condenser

The air cooled condenser shall be matched with all the chiller component requirements and performance.

The condenser shall be forced or induced draft type by either belt drives or direct drive fans. For belt driver fans, the belts shall be able to withstand twice the operating power.

Coils shall be fabricated of seamless copper tubing with mechanically bonded copper plate fins of 0.12 mm minimum thickness. Maximum fins spacing shall be 473 per metre. Coils shall be complete with sub-cooling circuits.

Coil frames shall be steel, galvanized and shot blasted after fabrication. Frames shall be painted on site with two coats of weather resistant enamel on all exposed surfaces, except the coil, which have been properly cleaned and primed

Fans shall be suitable for outdoor applications with static pressure as specified. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan motors shall be weather-proof of permanently lubricated type.

Bearings shall be selected for average life expectancy of not less than 50 000 hours.

Fan motors shall be sized for a minimum of 25 % greater than the fan shaft power requirements. Motors shall be equipped with built-in automatic reset thermal overheat protection.

Each condenser coil shall be fitted with inlet and outlet shut-off valves.

Condenser coil shall be factory tested at 2 930 kPa air pressure under water.



Page 47/245

The operation of condenser fans shall be interlocked with the compressors such that the condenser fans shall be started before starting the compressors. When cooling demand decreases, condenser fans shall be shut down accordingly.

The whole system shall be dynamically and statically balanced after assembly.

50 mm high efficiency panel filters shall be provided in the air intake areas of chillers.

2.3.7 Refrigerant circuit Independent refrigerant circuits shall be provided for each compressor.

Each refrigerant circuit shall have liquid line solenoid valve, filter-drier, sight glass with moisture indicator, refrigerant charging valve, refrigerant strainer, and electronically controlled thermostatic expansion valve.

Each compressor shall have suction and discharge isolator valves for maintenance purposes.

2.3.8 Control

All chiller operating and safety controls and motor-starter equipment etc. shall be housed within a weather-tight control panel cubicle mounted within the chiller casing. The control panel shall be mechanically interlocked with the power supply so as to ensure that no power will be supplied to the control equipment, accessories and wiring etc. within this control panel cubicle when the control panel is opened.

Thermal overload protection shall be provided for all starter equipment.

Refrigeration circuit controls shall be separated from the power supply. The power supply section shall house the main power supply connection provisions (e.g. isolator and main disconnect switch), starters, non-cycling compressor overloads, and oil pressure cut outs. The refrigeration section shall contain reset relays, compressor service switches, motor protection devices, differential oil pressure control, high low pressure controls, and microprocessor control.

The microprocessor shall control compressor anti-recycle function, compressor lead-lag selection, low water temperature cut-out, loss of refrigerant charge protection, leaving chilled water temperature control, load limiting control, and timed periodic pump down.

Provisions shall be made in the control cubicle for remote sequencing control and monitoring of chiller functions including alarms, the following shall be allowed as a minimum:

• 10 % to 100 % capacity control by sliding valve (for chillers with screw compressors

only) • Chiller on/off control • Compressor trip alarm • Low oil pressure • Low water temperature cut out alarm • Loss of water flow through the evaporator • Leaving chilled water temperature control • Ice cut out



Page 48/245

Chillers shall be started with compressors unloaded unless compressors started at lowest steps or minimum capacities.

The chiller manufacturer's “Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS)” shall be submitted for approval. The chiller shall communicate with BACnet/Enchelon or Enchelon/Enchelon protocol.

2.3.9 Installation

Foundation, platforms and hangers required for the proper installation of equipment shall be provided.

Control panels shall be fitted with factory wire terminals for the remote connection of all alarm functions, set points and start-stop switches.

Belt guards to permit the use of tachometer, oiling and testing shall be arranged with the guards in place.

The proposed method of transporting the chillers to the site including all necessary structural provisions required, loading points etc. shall be submitted for approval.

2.3.10 Testing and start-up

The following shall be supervised by unit manufacturer's representative:

• Charging.

• Start-up.

• Field testing.

Leak test

• Units shall be site tested for leaks.

• Leaks shall be checked with halide testing device.

• Units shall be dehydrated by producing vacuum to 100 microns with high vacuum pump. Vacuum shall then be maintained for 4 hours. At end of 4 hour period, the pump shall be stopped. Vacuum shall be maintained in the refrigeration unit for 24 hours without losing more than 50 microns.

• The tests shall be certified, and 6 copies of the certificates shall be submitted before acceptance.

Field refrigerant piping test

• Field test shall be in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction and Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, ANSI B-9.1.



Page 49/245

• The manufacturer shall submit certification to certify completion of charging, start-up and field testing, and that the unit is ready for proper operation.

Safety device

All safety devices for all chillers shall be tested and certified during the commissioning period.

2.4 FAN COIL UNITS

2.4.1 General Requirements: Chilled Water Fan Coil Units


• ARI Standard 440: Room Fan-Coil and Unit Ventilators

• ASHRAE 52.1-1992: Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter

• BS 476: Part 6: Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures, Method of test for ignitability of products by direct flame impingement.

• BS 4856: Methods of Testing and Rating Fan Coil Units; Unit Heaters and Unit Coolers

• NFPA 90A: Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating System

• UL 883: Fan-Coil Units and Room Fan-Heater Units

• All capacity and noise data shall be noted in accordance with ARI Standard 440.

Fan coil units shall have casings manufactured from powder coated steel sheet of thickness not less than 1.2 mm (bottom) and 0.7 mm (all other sides). All casing joints shall be sealed. Casings shall be suitably stiffened to minimise drumming and vibration and shall be protected against corrosion and finished inside and outside with stoved primer. All corners shall be without sharp edges. Casing shall be properly sized to house all components and shall include space for pipework connections and valves. Access panel shall be provided to the fan and motor, filter, damper, drain pan, pipework connections and valves, for maintenance purposes. The outside air spigot shall be located between the coil and filter sections.

Fan coil units shall be standard products supplied by the same manufacturer and rated in accordance with ARI Standards 410 and 430. Fan coil units shall each be complete with a rigid casing, cooling coils, fan(s), motor(s), condensate drip tray, air filter, electric heaters where specified and all necessary control and accessories to from a workable unit to cool the return and outside air, and to deliver the supply air to the air conditioned area.

The thermal, volumetric and acoustic performance of fan coil units shall meet the requirements of this specification, and testing and rating shall be in accordance with BS 4856 or other equivalent standard.

Fan coils are to be controlled through locally set thermostat, and via four position controller (off, low, medium, high speeds) within the room served.



Page 50/245

Nameplate: Securely attach on each fan coil unit showing manufacturer name, serial, model number.

Provide complete factory fabricated fan coil units complete with fans, coils, motors, insulated condensate drain pan, manual air vent and accessories. Provide also factory fabricated cabinet and insulated return air plenum with air filter.

Units shall be horizontal furred-in recessed blow-through type, unless otherwise specified.

All fan coil units shall be selected based on performance of the units at medium fan speed and the required external static pressure.

In selecting fan coil units, the resistance imposed on the air flow of the units due to ducts and special grilles shall be allowed for.

All fan coil units shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation. Should the vibration and noise level be excessive and not within the acceptable standards, provision of adequate vibration isolation and sound attenuation shall be provided.

All fan coil units shall be of the highest commercial standard and the noise level shall be rated and tested by a suitable authority.

The maximum sound power level (dB) of the fan coil units at high and medium speed reference 10-12 W shall be not more than 70 dB at a distance of 1 metre from the unit.

All fan coil units shall be demountable from the ceiling void for maintenance purposes without causing damage to the associated ductwork and insulation.

All fan coil units shall be selected to suit the limited space within the false ceiling with due considerations to access for maintenance and servicing. Coordinate with all involved parties on Site for the provision of maintenance access panels for the units mounting inside false ceiling.

Fans shall be direct driven centrifugal forward curved type. Fan wheels and housings shall be of metal construction, statically and dynamically balanced.

2.4.2 Filter and Grille

• The filter shall be at least 5 mm thick, permanent, flameproof, dry type, washable, expanded aluminium foil filter or synthetic non-woven.

• The filter shall have a minimum average arrestance efficiency of 60 % to ASHRAE 52.1 -1992. Initial air resistance shall not be more than 15 Pa at fully rated flow condition.

• Exposed type fan coil units shall be complete with the manufacturer’s standard air filters.

• The return grille shall be of hinged type with the air filter clipped to the grille using quick release fasteners of an suitable type.

2.4.3 Fan and Motor

• The fan shall be constructed with double inlet double width, forward curved centrifugal aluminium blades mounted to a solid steel shaft and shall be direct driven designed for



Page 51/245

smooth and quiet operation. The fan motor shall have sleeve or ball bearings factory lubricated for life.

• Fan motor shall be suitable for single phase electricity supply.

• Motor shall be resiliently mounted to the fan tray or scrolls. Motor and fan assembly shall also be resiliently mounted to the casing structure.

• Motor shall be capable of providing at least 3 fan speeds (‘LOW-MEDIUM- HIGH’) and shall be of adequate capacity to prevent over-loading at any speed and duty of the fans. Each fan coil unit shall be equipped with a three-speed fan switch (‘LOW-MEDIUM-HIGH’) and ON/OFF switch for the fan control.

• Motor shall be of the permanent split-capacitor type for direct-on-line starting, and factory wired to a terminal block inside a factory installed junction box. Motor shall be provided with thermal overload protection if necessary. Motor windings and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to avoid trouble from condensation.

• Connection unit or socket outlet shall be provided near each fan coil unit. Location of these electrical power points shall be coordinated so that the connection unit or socket outlet shall be positioned within 1 m from the fan coil unit.

• Electrical wiring connection including cables and wiring accessories between the connection unit or socket outlet and the fan coil unit shall be provided.

• Electrical cables or wirings installed outside the casing and inside the air stream shall be protected by metallic flexible conduit.

2.4.4 Coils

• Coils shall be constructed from seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminium fins.

• Coils shall be as described in the chilled water cooling coils section of this Specification.

2.4.5 Drain Pans

• Every fan coil unit shall be provided with a drain pan which shall be situated beneath the coil and arranged so that all moisture will be collected in the pan. The pan shall project under the entire length and width of the coil including all headers and bends.

• Drain pans shall be constructed from galvanised steel of not less than 0.8 mm thick and insulated with manufacturer’s standard to prevent any condensation.

• Each drain pan shall be fitted with an insulated drain pipe which shall be connected via suitable runs correctly laid to fall to the drainage system as shown on the Drawings. Drain pans shall have copper or galvanised steel male connectors for connection to the condensate drain pipes.

• Drain pans shall be large enough to collect all condensate from the coils, return bends and pipework connections. For units catering for load including a high proportion of



Page 52/245

latent heat, the size of the drain connection shall be adequate to deal with the condensate.

• The pan shall be removable and have a slight fall towards the drain connection.

• Double drain pans shall be provided for each fan coil unit installed inside electrical plant rooms and on top of electrical equipment within non-plant room areas.

2.4.6 Casings/Plenums

• Each unit shall be complete with plenum and factory manufactured casing to enclose the entire coil, fan, motor, and filter sections. Casings shall include space for pipework connections and valves, and shall allow easy access to the fan, motor, filter, damper, drain pan, pipework connections and valves for maintenance purposes. Supply and return air plenum casing shall be provided for concealed ceiling type fan coil unit.

• Casings/plenums shall be provided with supply and return duct connections unless otherwise specified. The casing/plenum shall be of galvanized steel construction of at least 1.2 mm thick for the bottom and 0.7 mm thick all around. Corners shall be without sharp edges.

• Return air duct connections shall be provided at the rear or the bottom of the unit to suit the installation. The design and construction of the plenum shall be such that the bottom and rear panel can be interchanged to facilitate duct connection at Site. Sufficient access doors shall also be provided for filters, coils and fans. Access to filters for cleaning shall generally be achieved by opening the hinged central core of the return air grille. A mounting frame shall be provided for the grilles for fixing the filter.

• Where mounted above false ceiling and in other areas concealed from view, fan coil units shall be of galvanized mild steel and shall be corrosion resistant. All edges of the casings/plenums that have been cut during its manufacture shall be wire brushed and cleaned free from rust, and given one coating of chromate oxide paint.

• Where mounting in a position exposed to view in non-plant room areas, fan coil units shall generally be as specified above but finished with an suitable decorative casing and neatly painted with at least one coat of anti-rust paint and two top coats. All painting shall be factory applied. Standard decorative casing as per manufacturer’s standard.

• Exposed fan coil unit shall be complete with factory manufactured supply and return air grilles.

• Provisions for hanging the fan coil units shall be provided by slots in the top wrap of the basic housing.

• The motor and fan shall be mounted on a detachable mounting plate that can be removed from the fan coil unit enclosure as one assembly. The cable connections to the fan motor shall be of sufficient length to facilitate the mounting plate and the assembly shall be opened up for cleaning the fan and motor. It shall also be possible to remove the fan impeller scroll casing in order to clean the fan blades.



Page 53/245

2.4.7 Casing/Plenum Insulation

• The interior of casings/plenums shall be thermally insulated with minimum 10 mm coated fibre glass in compliance with NFPA 90A and BS 476: Part 6 requirements and shall be sealed to prevent any condensation. The fibre glass shall have a maximum K-factor of 3.5x10E-2 W/m °C at 25 °C mean temperature and minimum density of 48 kg/m3. The fibre glass shall be surface treated to prevent erosion due to air movement and the surface colour shall be black.

2.4.8 Fresh Air Connection

• A single blade regulating damper shall be installed in the insulated fresh air duct connected to each fan coil unit. The damper shall be adjustable to give up to 25% of the fan capacity drawing from the fresh air source.

2.4.9 Installation

• Fit equipment and appurtenance to the space provided and make readily serviceable.

• Provide hangers required for the installation of equipment.

• Do not support piping connections from water coil.

• Make supply and return connections to headers to give counter flow of air and water.

• Provide filters as specified in other sections.

• A thermostat complete with Fan Only-Off-Cooling switch and Low-Medium- High switch shall be positioned in a suitable location enabling on, off, low, medium and high fan speed and temperature to be selected. For unmanned plant rooms the thermostat/temperature controller shall be placed on the return air ducts connecting directly to the unit and the three position selector switch (Fan Only-Off-Cooling) shall be placed at an accessible level.



Page 54/245

2.5 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV) AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM


The VRV air-conditioning system shall be of multi-zone modular split type. Each zone shall consist of one air-cooled outdoor condensing unit with plural indoor fan coil units in one single refrigerant circuit. Each fan coil unit shall be capable of independently serving and controlling the air conditioning load as required by the room space.

The air-conditioner shall employ R410a as refrigerant and shall be of "Inverter" type to allow variable refrigerant volume for energy saving capabilities.

The refrigerant piping shall be capable of extending up to 500 m length with 50 m level difference without any oil trap and with 40 m level difference in the case where the outdoor unit is to be located below the level of the indoor fan coil unit. The total allowable refrigerant pipe length shall be up to a minimal of 150m.

Fan coil units shall have sizes vary from 2.5 kW to 25kW for selection.

The outdoor unit shall have two hermetically-sealed reciprocating type compressors, at least one of which shall be incorporated with inverter control to achieve the optimum flow of refrigerant in response to the actual load requirement of the individual fan coil unit in the system. The outdoor unit shall be controlled to operate within 15-100 % in 21 steps.

Compressors shall be provided with high/low pressure cut-outs with manual reset.

Compressor motors shall be protected by overload relays, internal winding thermostats, and low oil pressure contacts.

Each condensing unit shall be provided with a weather-proof type emergency stop device of stay-put type installed adjacent to the unit and in a conspicuous location.

The outdoor unit shall be capable of being connected up to eight numbers of fan coil units in one refrigerant circuit having a total capacity up to 130 % of nominal capacity of the outdoor unit.

The fan coil unit shall be operational at least at two speeds, of in- ceiling type, and suitable for concealed installation.

Fan coil units shall have sufficient pressure to deliver the required amount of air into the air-conditioned spaces via delivery ducts, filters, coils and diffusers as specified.

All necessary control circuits and associated wiring shall be provided and installed in concealed conduit system including fan selector switches, temperature sensors, controllers and respective metal enclosures as specified.

Insulated drain pipes shall be connected from each fan coil unit to the main drain system. An insulated corrosion resistant galvanized steel drain pan shall be properly installed to each fan coil unit for collection of possible drain. VRV air-conditioning systems complete with all necessary accessories shall be supplied by a single proprietary manufacturer who has proven record for its products.



Page 55/245

2.5.2 Cabinet construction Indoor evaporator unit

• The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge or heavier, die-formed, electro-galvanized

steel. External surfaces of the cabinet shall be treated to prevent surface condensation. • The cabinet shall include junction boxes, polarized sockets and plugs for chassis electrical

connection. • Front panels and return air grilles shall be assembled to be removable for cleaning and

access. • The cabinet shall be finished with a high quality baked-on enamel paint in an approved

colour. Proper primer and undercoat shall be applied prior to applying finish coats. • Removable panels or access doors shall be provided for access to all accessories. Outdoor condensing unit • The cabinet shall be of weatherproof type suitable for outdoor installation. • The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel. • Exterior surfaces shall be painted with weather-resistant enamel coating. • Removable panels shall be provided for access to all accessories. • Galvanized screws, bolts and nuts shall be used for panel fixing.

2.5.3 Refrigerant system

The refrigerant circuit shall include a factory-assembled accumulator, plural electronic expansion valves, one or two oil separators, a receiver and liquid shut-off valves, filter drier(s) and crankcase heater(s). The indoor fan coil unit shall be equipped with an electronic control to regulate the refrigerant flow individually.

Pipe work for the refrigerant system shall be of copper pipes and refrigeration quality (i.e. material C106 to BS 2871: Part 2 Table 2), and internally degreased and cleaned. Joints in copper pipes shall be flared or brazed up to the requirements of the HVCA Code of Practice.

Refrigerant piping shall be arranged and sized as recommended by manufacturer, and all joints and headers with insulators in the system shall be factory supplied.

After completion, the refrigerant pipe work shall be pressure tested by nitrogen gas in two or more steps up to 2 800 kPa and then maintained for at least 24 hours. Prior to charging any additional refrigerant as necessary into the system, it shall be properly vacuum dried. All these tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer’s representative and shall be certified as satisfactory by the manufacturer before charging refrigerant.



Page 56/245

The system shall be equipped with an effective oil recovery system to automatically control the return of refrigerant oil due to the significance of long refrigerant piping and plural fan coil units.

For systems with two compressors, an oil equalized system shall be equipped with the outdoor unit to avoid any unbalance between them.

2.5.4 Safety device and control

The system shall incorporate safety devices including high pressure switches, compressor safety thermostats & over current relays, fan motor safety thermostats, inverter overload protectors, and fusible plugs.

The VRV-System shall be equipped with computerised PID control and a self-diagnosis circuit to accurately maintain individual room temperature and facilitate inspection of function mode and maintenance service.

Each fan coil unit shall be equipped with a microprocessor thermostat and an electronic expansion valve to control the room temperature and fan speed.

The remote controller for the fan coil unit shall be of liquid crystal display (LCD) type, with an on-off switch, operational features such as fan speed selection, timer setting, temperature setting, and self-diagnosis function.

A control circuit shall be provided to achieve the following:

• The system operates only at an outdoor temperature lower than a preset value which can be adjusted from 10 °C to 50 °C.

• Fan coil units can be automatically restarted, with time delay, after power

surge.

• The system can be energised/shut off by manual override devices.

• Status of power supply to the system can be indicated. Control wiring between the outdoor unit and each indoor fan coil unit shall be of a 2-wire multiplexed signal system, such that a single wiring link is connected to the first indoor unit from the outdoor unit, then each additional indoor unit is connected only to the one before in this address setting to distinguish between indoor units in the same system to be automatic. Control wiring shall be of twin-core sheathed cords or cables with cross-sectional area of 1.5 mm² minimum, and shall be subject to approval.

Inter-unit control wiring shall be kept away from power cables to prevent electrical noise.

2.5.5 Installation

Hangers and supports shall be provided for the proper installation of equipment.

After completion of testing on piping and accessories, the system shall be charged with refrigerant in accordance with the manufacturer's published data.

The unit shall be adjusted so that it will operate without noticeable vibration after installation.



Page 57/245

2.6 AIR-CONDITIONING UNIT (SPLIT-TYPE)

2.6.1 General

This Section specifies the requirements of split-type air-conditioning units.

Units shall be designed for operation single phase or 3-phase power supply. All accessible metal parts together with the casings and cores shall be earthed.

Split-type air-conditioning units shall consist of indoor evaporator units, filter sections, outdoor air-cooled condensing units, control and interconnecting wiring, piping and accessories.

Units shall comply with ARI Standard 210.

Units shall be provided as a package completely piped, wired, charged, and factory tested.

Units shall have the specified design capacities. The evaporator units shall be completely matched with the condensing units.

All components shall be dehydrated, sealed and shipped with holding charge/refrigerant.

Belts, pulleys, chains, gears and other rotating parts shall be properly guarded so that any persons can safely come in close proximity.

Units shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation. If these are excessive and not within normal acceptable standards, adequate vibration isolation and sound attenuation shall be provided.

All accoustic and thermal insulation including facings and adhesive shall be fire-resistant and conform to the requirements of the local authorities

2.6.2 Cabinet construction

• The cabinet shall be of weather-proof type suitable for outdoor installation.

• The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel.

• Exterior surfaces shall be painted with weather-resistant enamel coating.

• Removable panels shall be provided for access to all accessories.

• Galvanized screws, bolts and nuts shall be used for panel fixing.

• Intake filters shall be provided for condensing units located in dusty station public areas.

• Drain pans shall be installed below condensing units located in station public areas to collect condensate from suction pipes next to compressors which are not normally properly insulated and to collect water during coil cleaning.



Page 58/245

2.6.3 Compressor The compressor shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Reciprocating or scroll type, hermetically sealed, refrigerant cooled, suitable for operation with R-410a or other approved environmentally friendly refrigerant.

High/low pressure cut-outs with manual resets.

Compressor motor protected by means of overload relays and internal winding thermostat and low oil pressure contact.

Mounted on rubber isolated spring mountings.

2.6.4 Refrigerant circuit

The refrigerant circuit shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Thermostatic expansion valve and remote bulb for direct expansion coil.

Dryer-filter.

Sight-glass and moisture indicators which shall be installed at outlet of dryer-filter, and expansion valve.

2-way, normally-closed solenoid valve with manual stem.

Isolation valves at both sides of the refrigerant circuit, namely the condenser and evaporator, for ease of isolation during maintenance.

Charging valve installed at suction side.

2.6.5 Evaporator coil

The evaporator coil shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Direct expansion type, fabricated of seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to tubing.

Minimum fin spacing of 12 fins per 25.4 mm.

Factory-installed thermal expansion valve for refrigerant control.

Tested for leakage at minimum 2500 kPa gas pressure with all devices isolated


The air-cooled condenser coil shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Air-cooled type fabricated of seamless copper tubing with mechanically bonded aluminum plate fins.




Page 59/245

Capable of a total heat rejection based on condensing temperature and ambient temperature of 52°C and 43.8°C respectively.

Tested at minimum 2 500 kPa pressure with all devices isolated.

Epoxy coating for condenser fins and coil.

2.6.7 Filter

Air Filters shall unless otherwise specified be of the washable panel type. The filter performance shall be referred to filter section of this specification. Higher filter efficiency shall be adopted to meet with the IAQ objective designed.

2.6.8 Electrical accessory and control

The electrical accessories and controls shall conform to and be provided with the following:

• Factory installed and wired.

• Unit equipped with compressor and fan contactors.

• Unit equipped with compressor motor running and start contactors and start relay.

• Manual changeover selector switch for either ventilation or air conditioning with high/medium/low position switch.

• Multi-position thermostat for desired temperature setting.

• Interlock air-cooled condenser unit and evaporator unit with compressor circuit.

• Overload protection for motors.

• Internal motor winding thermostat.

• Refrigerant high pressure and low pressure protection.

• Low oil pressure failure protection.

• Motor cycling preventor.

• Temperature controller.

Auto restart control with adjustable time delay of 0-5 minutes after power surge shall be provided for air-conditioning units without remote control in the Main Control Room.

2.6.9 Condensate drain pan

Drain pans shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets to form inner and outer pans with a continuous blanket of fibreglass insulation between them.



Page 60/245

Drain pans shall be extended under complete coil sections. For short coil sections, drain pans shall be extended under complete fan and coil sections.

Drain pans shall be constructed from 18 gauge galvanized steel together with the following:

• Insulated with 25 mm (minimum) thick fibreglass insulation faced with additional aluminium foil vapour barriers.

• Both internal & external pan surfaces and joints shall be coated with corrosion-resistant elastomeric base materials.

• Joints shall be brazed water-tight.

• A 25 mm diameter (minimum) drain coupling shall be brazed onto the drain pan if the size is not specified by the manufacturer.

The drain pan shall be installed in a pitch position towards the drain coupling.

The drain pipe shall be of minimum diameter 25 mm if size of pipe is not specified by the manufacturer and shall be connected to the nearest suitable floor drainage system.

2.6.10 Installation




2.7 ROOF TOP SELF-CONTAINED UNIT

2.7.1 General

This Section specifies the requirements of Rooftop self-contained air-conditioning units.


Units shall be self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired consisting of a cabinet and frame, supply fan, control, air filter, refrigerant cooling and compressor, condenser coil and fan.

Units shall comply with ARI Standard 210.

Units shall be provided as a package completely piped, wired, charged, and factory tested.

Units shall have the specified design capacities.

The evaporator units shall be completely matched with the condensing units.



Page 61/245

All components shall be dehydrated, sealed and shipped with holding charge/refrigerant.

Belts, pulleys, chains, gears and other rotating parts shall be properly guarded so that any persons can safely come in close proximity.


All accoustic and thermal insulation including facings and adhesive shall be fire-resistant and conform to the requirements of the local authorities.

2.7.2 Cabinet construction

• The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge or heavier, die-formed, electro-galvanized steel. External surfaces of the cabinet shall be treated to prevent surface condensation.

• The cabinet shall include junction boxes, polarized sockets and plugs for chassis electrical connection.

• Front panels and return air grilles shall be assembled to be removable for cleaning and access.

• The casing shall be provided with condensate drain pan insulated with minimum 25 mm thick fibreglass insulation faced with aluminium foil vapour barrier with 25 mm drain.

• The interior casing shall be lined with moisture, vermin and rot-proof mat-faced minimum 25 mm thick fibreglass or approved equivalent.

• The return air grille shall be constructed in louvre form with frame for holding filters. In case of ducted return systems, the filter holding frame with permanent washable filter externally to the units shall be provided, the details of which shall be submitted for approval.

• The cabinet shall be finished with a high quality baked-on enamel paint in an approved colour. Proper primer and undercoat shall be applied in the factory prior to applying finish coats.

• Removable panels or access doors shall be provided for access to all accessories.

2.7.3 Compressor

The compressor shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Reciprocating or scroll type, hermetically sealed, refrigerant cooled, suitable for operation with R-134a or other approved environmentally friendly refrigerant.

High/low pressure cut-outs with manual resets.



Page 62/245

Compressor motor protected by means of overload relays and internal winding thermostat and low oil pressure contact.

Mounted on rubber isolated spring mountings.

2.7.4 Refrigerant circuit

The refrigerant circuit shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Thermostatic expansion valve and remote bulb for direct expansion coil.

Dryer-filter.

Sight-glass and moisture indicators which shall be installed at outlet of dryer-filter, and expansion valve.

2-way, normally-closed solenoid valve with manual stem.

Isolation valves at both sides of the refrigerant circuit, namely the condenser and evaporator, for ease of isolation during maintenance.

Charging valve installed at suction side.

2.7.5 Evaporator coil

The evaporator coil shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Direct expansion type, fabricated of seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to tubing.


Factory-installed thermal expansion valve for refrigerant control.

Tested for leakage at minimum 2 500 kPa gas pressure with all devices isolated.


The air-cooled condenser coil shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Air-cooled type fabricated of seamless copper tubing with mechanically bonded aluminum plate fins.


Capable of a total heat rejection based on condensing temperature and ambient temperature of 52°C and 43.8°C respectively.

Tested at minimum 2 500 kPa pressure with all devices isolated. Epoxy coating for condenser fins and coil.



Page 63/245

2.7.7 Evaporator fan and motor

The evaporator fan and motor shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Centrifugal fan constructed of minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel sheet.

Fan wheels dynamically and statically balanced.

Fan and motor having permanently lubricated type ball bearings with average life expectancy of 50 000 hours.

Motor mounted on adjustable base.

Motors equipped with built-in automatic reset device for protecting against overloading and overheat.

Other requirements of centrifugal fans stated in fan section.

2.7.8 Condenser fan and motor

The condenser fan and motor shall conform to and be provided with the following:

Direct-drive propeller type fan of galvanized steel construction.

Fans dynamically and statically balanced.

Fan protected with heavy gauge welded wire fan guards galvanized after fabrication for split type air-cooled units.

Other requirements of propeller fans stated in fan section of AHU.

2.7.9 Filter

Filters shall be permanent washable type as specified in filter section.

2.7.10 Electrical accessory and control

The electrical accessories and controls shall conform to and be provided with the following:

• Factory installed and wired.

• Unit equipped with compressor and fan contactors.

• Unit equipped with compressor motor running and start contactors and start relay.

• Manual changeover selector switch for either ventilation or air conditioning

with high/medium/low position switch.

• Multi-position thermostat for desired temperature setting.

• Interlock air-cooled condenser unit and evaporator unit with compressor circuit.



Page 64/245

• Overload protection for motors.

• Internal motor winding thermostat.

• Refrigerant high pressure and low pressure protection.

• Low oil pressure failure protection.

• Motor cycling preventor.

• Temperature controller.

Auto restart control with adjustable time delay of 0-5 minutes after power surge shall be provided for air-conditioning units without remote control in the Main Control Room.

Pressure gauges for the refrigerant circuit shall be provided for packaged air-conditioning units.

2.7.11 Condensate drain pan

Drain pans shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets to form inner and outer pans with a continuous blanket of fibreglass insulation between them.

Drain pans shall be extended under complete coil sections. For short coil sections, drain pans shall be extended under complete fan and coil sections.

Drain pans shall be constructed from 18 gauge galvanized steel together with the following:

• Insulated with 25 mm (minimum) thick fibreglass insulation faced with additional aluminium foil vapour barriers.

• Both internal & external pan surfaces and joints shall be coated with corrosion-resistant elastomeric base materials.

• Joints shall be brazed water-tight.

• A 25 mm diameter (minimum) drain coupling shall be brazed onto the drain pan if the size is not specified by the manufacturer.

The drain pan shall be installed in a pitch position towards the drain coupling.

The drain pipe shall be of minimum diameter 25 mm if size of pipe is not specified by the manufacturer and shall be connected to the nearest suitable floor drainage system.

2.7.12 Installation






Page 65/245

2.8 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING (CRAC) UNITS

2.8.1 General

(a) The unit shall be self-contained, factory assembled and tested, arranged for down flow air delivery with return air grilled panel at the top / front of the unit.

(b) The cabinet of the unit shall be constructed based on a frame and panel principle with removable panels for maximum service access.

(c) The framework shall be fabricated by 16 gauge cold-formed steel to provide maximum strength.

(d) All panels shall be formed and welded from 18 gauge steel and insulated with 25mm (1") thick, 24kg/m3 (1.5 lb/ft3) density fiber-glass insulation.

(e) All service panels shall be hinged and locked with 1.-tur captive fasteners to facilitate quick and easy internal access.

(f) The entire unit shall be finished with epoxy powder paint to ensure proper surface adhesion.

2.8.2 Blower and Motor

(a) The unit shall have twin blower operating at a speed below 1150 rpm to deliver airflow rate as specified m the equipment schedule.

(b) The blower shall be the double inlet, double width, forward cure, centrifugal type dynamically and statically balanced.

(c) All parts of the fan shall be painted, galvanized or corrosion treated.

(d) The fan bearings shall be of a pillow block type having a minimum life span of 100,000 hours.

(e) The fan shall be belt driven by dual drive belts which are sized for 200% of the motor horse power.

(f) The speed of the fan shall be adjustable by means of a variable pitch motor pulley.

(g) The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type having class F insulation, IP54 standard.

2.8.3 Filter

(a) The filter chamber shall be an integral par of the system, located at the entrance of return air path and should be serviceable from the top of the unit for down flow configuration and from the front for up flow configuration.

(b) The filters shall be a standard capacity, 100mm (4") deep, pleated type having a 25-30% efficiency, 90-92% arrestance to ASHRAE 52-76.

(c) The filters shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories as class 2.

(d) The filter chamber shall have the provision to house l52mm (6") high efficiency filters.



Page 66/245

2.8.4 Refrigeration System

2.8.4.1 General

(a) The unit shall have dual refrigeration circuit designed for operation on non-ozone depleting refrigerant, such as R407C, R410A & R134A.

(b) Each refrigeration circuit shall have the following components:

(i) Thermal expansion valve with external equalizer

(ii) Refrigerant distributor

(iii) Liquid line pump-down solenoid valve

(iv) Liquid line sight glass

(v) Liquid line filter-drier

(vi) Liquid line shut-off valve

(vii) Low pressure cut-out switch

(viii) High pressure cut-out switch

(c) All refrigeration circuits shall be pre-piped and leak tested ready for field connection.

(d) All refrigerant piping shall be of type L copper pipe.

(e) After completion of testing on piping and accessories, the system shall be charged with refrigerant m accordance with the manufacturer's published data.

(f) A refrigerant charging valve shall be installed at the suction side of the compressor.

2.8.4.2 Compressor

(a) The compressor shall be of the scroll type. Compressors casing shall have no gaskets or seals to eliminate the possibility of refrigerant or oil leakage into the critical facilities.

(b) Each compressor shall be equipped with the following items

(i) Suction rotolock valve

(ii) Discharge rotolock valve

(iii) Gauge ports

(iv) Internal thermal overload

(v) Vibration isolators

(c) The compressor shall be located in a separated compartment apart from the air path, so they may be serviceable without disturbing the operation of the unit.



Page 67/245

(d) An automatic compressor lead/lag sequencing feature shall be provided to equalize the rug time of the two compressors.

(e) Compressor positive start feature shall be provided to avoid compressor short cyc1ing and low pressure lockout during winter star-up.

2.8.4.3 Direct Expansion (DX) Evaporator Coil

(a) The coil shall be of A-frame configuration with galvanized steel end plates and ½" OD copper tubes expanded into aluminium fins.

(b) The coil shall be split to allow for a rapid dehumidification cycle when required.

Two stages of rapid dehumidification shall be provided.

(c) The coil shall have a sufficient face area in the direction of the airflow and have a maximum face velocity of 2.5 m/s.

(d) The refrigerant shall be distributed over the entire face of the coil from either refrigeration circuit.

(e) A stainless steel, corrosion free condensate drain pan shall be provided under the coil.

2.8.4.4 Air-cooled Condenser

(a) The air-cooled condenser shall be low-profiled and constructed of heavy gauge aluminium.

(b) The condenser shall be factory-matched to handle the heat rejection of each compressor at 43.8°C ambient temperature.

(c) The condenser shall be constructed of aluminium fins and copper tubes staggered in direction of airflow and arranged for vertical air discharge.

(d) The winter control system for the air cooled condenser shall be variable speed control, refrigerant temperature actuated. The variable speed control system shall be complete with dual input speed controller to vary fan speed via refrigerant pressure.

(e) The air cooled condenser shall be suitable for 380V/3/60Hz power supply.

2.9 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) TERMINAL UNITS

(a) Unit shall be rated in accordance with ASHARE Standard 70-2006 and Air Diffusion Council Test Code 1062R4. The performance data shall be certified by a recognized laboratory. The casing of the VAV terminal unit, bypass box with balancing damper and multi-outlet box shall be manufactured from galvanised steel sheet of thickness comply with DW/144:1998.

(b) Unit shall be of the pressure independent type throughout the entire range and shall be capable of resetting the air flow to ±5% of the nominal air flow regardless of the change in the system pressure.

(c) The unit shall be capable of being reset to any airflow between zero and the rated air volume automatically to compensate for duct pressure fluctuation.



Page 68/245

(d) The air velocity sensor shall measure the true velocity across the inlet of the unit and be unaffected by changes in duct air temperature and humidity. The sensor shall be field replaceable without opening the associated ductwork.

(e) The entire package shall be calibrated and factory-set for the maximum and minimum flow rates as specified but shall be capable of easy re-adjustment in the field. Each terminal box shall be provided with factory-calibrated, direct reading air flow indicator. Separate gauge taps shall be provided for field re-calibration and commissioning.

(f) The velocity controller and the damper actuator shall be of an integral unit directly mounted onto the damper shaft. The actuator shall be capable of operating in the stalled position without overheating or mechanical damage. Mechanical limit switch will not be accepted. The damper shall remain in a fixed position when electrical power source is interrupted. The control equipment must be easily accessible through an access door provided with quick-release fasteners.

(g) The damper shall be made of heavy gauge galvanized steel with peripheral gasket, pivoted in self-lubricating bearing. In the fully closed position air leakage past the closed damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal rating at 250 Pa inlet static pressure.

(h) VAV terminal unit shall be pneumatic, electronic or DDC controlled as specified. One thermostat shall be provided for each VAV terminal unit unless otherwise specified. The thermostat offered shall match the unit and include temperature set point and velocity adjustment point located inside. The thermostat shall have a calibrated scale showing set point temperature with a constant approximately 1 oC proportional band regardless of minimum and maximum velocity settings. Air flow set point shall be adjusted by screw and voltmeter tap in the thermostat or by other approved means for both high and low air volume limits. The location of the thermostat shall be determined on site.

(i) VAV terminal unit shall be suitable for 220V/1/60Hz power supply.

(j) VAV terminal unit shall be a single duct pressure dependent air terminal unit. Temperature control is achieved by supplying enough conditioned air to the space to satisfy room thermostat demand. Excess air is bypassed directly to the return air duct. Airflow to each occupied zone will vary on thermostat demand, from full flow to shut-off or to a mechanically set minimum air volume. A by-pass box handles a constant supply of primary air through its inlet and uses a diverting damper to bypass part of the supply air into the return air duct. The damper is directly controlled by the room thermostat in the occupied space to provide the volume of air required to meet the thermal demand. The pressure requirement through the supply air path to the conditioned space is set with an inlet balancing damper. A second manual balancing damper in the bypass is field adjusted to match the resistance in the discharge duct in order to minimum airflow to the space, maintain supply air from the primary system at a constant volume and ensure smooth modulation of the supply airflow volume.

(k) The unit shall not be selected at the top of the catalogue range in order to ensure it meets with the specified room noise level requirement.

2.10 DESERT COOLER

2.10.1 General This Section specifies the requirements of Desert Cooler units.



Page 69/245

Desert Coolers shall be of the industrial, heavy duty type. A single type shall be used for every zone of the station.


Units shall comply with the standards as follow;

ASHRAE 52.2 (2007; Addenda B 2008) Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size

ASHRAE 55 (2004; Interpertation 1: 2005; Errata 2006; Interpertation 2:2007; Errata 2007; Addendas a & B 2008) Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy

ASHRAE 62.1 (2007; INT 2007; INT 2-15 2008; Errata 2008; Addenda a, b, e, f and h 2008) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

ASTM A 123/A 123M (2008) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A 653/A 653M (2008) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B 117 (2007a) Standing Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM D 1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

ASTM D 202 (2008) Sampling and Testing Untreated Paper Used for Electrical Insulation

ASTM D 374 (1999; R 2004) Thickness of Solid Electrical Insulation

ASTM D 374M (1999; R 2005) Thickness of Solid Electrical Insulation (Metric)

ASTM E 2129 (2005) Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control Equipment

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial Controls and Systems Enclosures

NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors and Generators

NFPA 70 (2007; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition

NFPA 90A (2008) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible

TAPPI T403 OM (2002) Bursting Strength of Paper



Page 70/245

TAPPI T404 CM (1992) Tensile Breaking Strength and Elongation of Paper and Paperboard (Using Pendulum-Type Tester)

TAPPI T410 OM (2008) Grammage of Paper and Paperboard (Weight Per Unit Area)

TAPPI T456 OM (2003; Corrected 2005) Wet Tensile Breaking Strength of Paper and Paperboard ("Wet Tensile Strength")

TAPPI T487 PM (1999) Fungus Resistance of Paper and Paperboard

Evaporative pads shall meet a minimum saturation effectiveness of 80%.

Units shall have the specified design capacities.

Units shall be Fill Type or Spray Type as indicated on drawings and identified in the Equipment Schedule.

Unit casing shall be made of stainless steel.

It is preferable that cooled air is discharged from the desert cooler’s bottom.

Water connections shall be in accordance with Local Regulations.


All accoustic and thermal insulation including facings and adhesive shall be fire-resistant and conform to the requirements of the Local Authorities.

2.10.2 Type of Desert Cooler

Fill Type Desert Cooler

The Desert Cooler shall be draw through type with minimum 80% saturation efficiency with imported cellulose paper pads.

Unit housing shall be double skinned panel with 23mm thick made of stainless steel, pressure injected with foam insulation (density 40 kg.m3) with K factor not exceeding 0.02 watt / M Deg C shall be fixed to 2.5 mm thick aluminium alloy twin box section structural framework with stainless steel screws. Alternatively rigid board insulation shall also be accepted with prior approval by the Engineer. Outer sheet of panels shall be made of stainless steel of minimum 1.2 mm thick, and inner sheet shall be made of stainless steel of minimum 0.6 mm thick.

The entire framework shall be mounted on an aluminium alloy channel base. The panels shall be sealed to the framework by heavy duty ‘O’ ring gaskets held captive in the framed extrusion. All panels shall detachable or hinged. Hinges shall be made of die cast aluminium with stainless steel pivots, handles shall be made of hard nylon and be operational from both inside and outside of the units. Units supplied with various sections shall be suitable for on site assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing and gaskets shall be concealed.



Page 71/245

Units shall have hinged quick opening access door in the fan and filter section. Access doors shall be double skin type.

Recirculation tank shall be fabricated from 18 gauge stainless steel sheet with all corners weld and fibre-reinforced-plastic lined.

Fill shall be of imported cellulose paper pads and of cross fluted configuration assembled in self-supporting pads in a light weight construction. The pads shall be able to redistribute the water and shall be impregnated with insoluble antirot salts, rigidifying saturants and wetting agents with built in eliminators. The velocity across the fill shall not exceed 1.8 m/s and shall not allow carry over of water. Minimum thickness of fill shall be 200 mm and minimum efficiency of pads 80%.

A fibre-reinforced plastic distributor shall evenly distribute water on the fill.

Filter section shall incorporative synthetic washable filters of at least 50mm thickness in suitable aluminium frame. Velocity of air across the filters shall not exceed 1.8 m/s.

Spray Type Desert Cooler

The Desert Cooler shall be with spray nozzles, draw through opposed type with minimum 80% saturation efficiency.

Unit housing shall be double skinned panel with 23mm thick made of stainless steel, pressure injected with foam insulation (density 40 kg.m3) with K factor not exceeding 0.02 watt / M Deg C shall be fixed to 2.5 mm thick aluminium alloy twin box section structural framework with stainless steel screws. Alternatively rigid board insulation shall also be accepted with prior approval by the Engineer. Outer sheet of panels shall be made of stainless steel of minimum 1.2 mm thick, and inner sheet shall be made of stainless steel of minimum 0.6 mm thick.

The entire framework shall be mounted on an aluminium alloy channel base. The panels shall be sealed to the framework by heavy duty ‘O’ ring gaskets held captive in the framed extrusion. All panels shall detachable or hinged. Hinges shall be made of die cast aluminium with stainless steel pivots, handles shall be made of hard nylon and be operational from both inside and outside of the units. Units supplied with various sections shall be suitable for on site assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing and gaskets shall be concealed.

Units shall have hinged quick opening access door in the fan and filter section. Access doors shall be double skin type.

Recirculation tank shall be fabricated from 18 gauge stainless steel sheet with all corners weld and fibre-reinforced-plastic lined.

(Distribution Plate shall be 24 gauge galvanized sheet distribution plate with hot dipped galvanized angle iron frame and minimum 50% free area shall be provided on intake side of the desert cooler.

Spray washer shall be 2 banks air washer with 3mm bore bronze nozzles shall be 1 per sqft face area. Face velocity not to exceed 2.5 m/s.

Eliminator plates shall be bend made from 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel or PVC.



Page 72/245

2.10.3 Interconnecting Pipes

Desert Cooler shall be complete with interconnecting GI piping from pumps to desert cooler, valves, gauges, fitting, strainers…etc. as per the installation detail drawing.

2.10.4 Painting

Shop coats of paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, than coated with paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop painted surface.

2.10.5 Testing

Efficiency of desert cooler shall be computed from the measurements of the air flow and dry and wet bulb temperature of air entering and leaving the desert cooler and ambient temperature.

2.11 CHILLED WATER PUMPS

2.11.1 General

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of water pumps.

Pump performance requirements for the chilled water pumps shall be as indicated in the Equipment Datasheets.

Provide pumps with duties, quantity and types as shown on the Drawings and/or Equipment Schedules.

The pump heads specified on the Drawings and/or Equipment Schedules are for guidance and information only, and are calculated based on assumed equipment pressure drops. The exact pump head based on the pipe run and the offered equipment shall be carefully checked and re-calculated for each pump before ordering the equipment.

Pump sets shall each be complete with pump casing, impellers, electric motors and all necessary accessories to form a complete installation. The pump and motor shall be direct coupled and mounted on a substantial machined base plate of cast iron or of fabricated mild steel. Couplings shall be flexible pin and bush type, accurately aligned, and fitted with guards.

2.11.2 Standards

• BS 599: Methods of Testing Pumps

• BS 970: Wrought Steels for Mechanical and Allied Engineering Purposes

• BS 1400: Copper Alloy Ingots and Copper Alloy and High Conductivity Copper Castings

• BS 1452: Flake Graphite Cast Iron

• BS 3100: Steel Castings for General Engineering Purposes

• BS 4504: Circular Flanges for Pipes, Valves and Fittings.



Page 73/245

• BS EN ISO 9906: Rotodynamic pumps. Hydraulic performance acceptance tests. Grades 1 & 2.

• BS EN ISO 5198: Centrifugal, Mixed Flow and Axial Pumps- Code for Hydraulic Performance Tests- Precision Class.

• Pumps shall be ‘type-tested’ in accordance with the requirements of, BS EN ISO 9906, BS EN 5199 and BS EN ISO 5198 or equivalent IS code.

2.11.3 Constructional Requirements

Pumps shall be complete with all necessary water seal connections, vents, drains and priming plugs, and all installation materials including foundation bolts and anti-vibration mountings. Drain pipe work shall be in galvanized iron and shall be run to a nearby drain gully or as directed on site.

Pump installations shall be complete with adequate facilities for maintenance and future replacement of plant. Lifting eyes shall normally be provided upon pumps, motors over 25 kg. Details of any requirements for overhead run-ways, hoist, etc., required for installation and maintenance shall be submitted.

The pumps shall be capable of providing the full range of duties required. The selected operating point shall be at a position on the pressure volume curve such that stable operation is achieved and no undue fluctuation of flow quantity is experienced for small pressure changes. The efficiency at the operating point shall be within 5% of maximum efficiency.

Pump sets must be complete with baseplate shall be mounted upon a floating reinforced concrete inertia block supported on suitable spring-type isolation mountings. The inertia block shall have a minimum thickness of 150 mm and a minimum weight of 1½ times that of the pumpset. In the case of engine driven pumps the inertia block and its mountings shall be of design approved by the manufacturer.

Alignment: At the time of start-up, using dial indicator with accuracy of plus or minus 0.05 mm.

All pumps and motors shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during operation so as to meet the respective noise criteria as specified in this Specification.

Pipes and conduits to the plant mounted as above shall include suitable flexible connection arranged so as to permit freedom of movement.

Pumps shall be suitable for the operating temperatures and pressures of the system on which they are to be incorporated and the environment to which they will be exposed.

Each pump unit including motor and drive shall be supplied from the manufacturer as a completely factory-assembled package. Otherwise all guarantees and test certificates shall apply to the entire assembly.

All pumps shall be factory painted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Any damage to finishes shall be made good in the manner recommended by the manufacturer.

Pump casings shall be close grained cast iron grade 180. Impellers shall be of cast iron. Impeller shafts shall be of stainless steel grade 316 statically and dynamically balanced after



Page 74/245

assembly to BS ISO1940 or other equivalent. Impeller rings shall be of cast iron and renewable secured from relative movement by stainless steel end rotation ring.

Pump seals shall be of the mechanical type with rubber “O” ring, carbon seal, SS thrust ring and spring. Mechanical seals shall be rated for 1.5 times the working pressure of the pump. Glands shall be of cast iron or bronze. Bearings shall be of ball or roller type having an adequate safety factor to ensure long life. Housing shall be easily removable for servicing. Grease nipples shall be provided on the pump casing adjacent to each bearing for lubrication of the bearings.

Pump case shall be designed for minimum 1000 kPa working pressure or the figure specified in the Drawings which ever is the greater, tested and guaranteed to withstand 1.5 times the specified working minimal bore as the pipe work in which they are installed.

If for any specific application stuffing box type of shaft seal is proposed, it shall be of appropriate depth to prevent leakage. Low pressure stuffing boxes shall be water sealed.

Pumps shall be finished painted at the supplier’s works in accordance with the operating requirements of this specification.

Nameplate: each pump and motor shall have an identification plate showing the code number and a specification plate showing full details of the pump size, rated speed, rated kW, class of insulation, impeller diameter, lubricants, pump characteristics, flow and any other pertinent information required by NFPA or local authorities.

2.11.4 Performance

For pumps in parallel operation at any particular time, the pumps selected shall have a steep characteristic. For single pump operation at any particular time, the pumps selected shall have a flat characteristic. Pumps with curves indicating excessive shut off head shall not be used. The maximum speed shall not exceed 1800 rpm for chilled water and condenser water pumps, or as specified in this Specification, Particular Specification and/or on the Drawings.

Capacity of each pump and motor shall not be less than that specified, and designed for parallel operation. Each motor shall be of sufficient capacity to operate over the head capacity of its respective pump without exceeding the nameplate power rating.

Pump characteristic curves shall rise continuously from maximum capacity to shutoff. Shutoff head shall be approximately 20% greater than the design head. Pumps shall operate at or near point of peak efficiency and shall permit operation at capacities of approximately 25% beyond design capacity without exceeding break ff point. The diameter of impeller shall not exceed the 90% point of difference between minimum and maximum of impeller diameters published for the respective pump.

Enclosed impeller shall be statically, dynamically and hydraulically balanced, non-overloading and correctly designed for all conditions of service. Impeller shall be machined to a high degree of surface finish and shall be securely fixed to the shaft and protected by shaft sleeves of compatible materials.

Renewable shaft sleeves shall be suitable for use with mechanical seals.

Bearings shall be self-aligning, radial thrust type and oil lubricated. The bearings for chilled water pumps shall be rated at L10 life of not less than 50,000 hours. Bearing housings shall be



Page 75/245

separated from the pump case and bolted and dowled to the pump case. Top half of bearing housing shall be removable. Bearing housings shall incorporate overflow holes to prevent flooding of bearings. The bearing shall be packed in the factory with high-quality grease on lithium-soap base, free of resin and acid, not liable to crumble or be brittle.

Mechanical seals shall be specifically designed for pump working pressures and shall be of stainless steel construction with stainless steel springs and tungsten carbide seats. Provide one extra set in accordance with BS 21.

Flexible spacer coupling if applicable shall be self-aligning, all metal type, of suitable design, between pump and motor, to enable removal of impeller without disturbing the drive motor or its mountings.

The casing feet shall be integrally cast with the lower casing and be immediately adjacent to suction and discharge flanges in order to transmit pipe loads to the base and foundations.

2.11.5 Pump Installation

Pumps shall consist of :-

Casing with suction and discharge connections

Drive motor

Impeller

Drive shaft

Coupling and coupling guards

Drive shaft seal

Fabricated base plate mounting

Each pump shall be provided with the following fittings:

• Butterfly valves on suction and discharge sides.

• Not-return valve on the discharge.

• Air and drain cocks.

• Pedestal of base plate drain arranged to discharge over a protected tundish.

• Anti-vibration protection between motor and pump

• Drive guards.

• Greasing/lubrication points.

• Flexible connections at pump inlet and outlet at line size.

• Dial type pressure gauges on suction and discharge.

• Flow indicator at the outlet of each pump.



Page 76/245

• Y strainer on suction side

Closed type expansion tank shall be provided on suction side of the pump header of suitable capacity. This system is used for maintaining constant water flow in the system. Long life membranes shall separate the pressurising part of the system. The closed expansion tank shall be installed in chilled water plant room.

Air separator of suitable capacity shall be provided on suction header of the chilled water pumps for removing air in the system. Float vents shall be provided on the air separators for removing air collected. Drain valve shall be provided on the bottom of the tank for removing impurities.

A coupling shall be provided between the pump and motor, and shall be semi-flexible, of steel pin/rubber bush type and accurately aligned.

The coupling shall be provided to reduce shock to the bearings and not to compensate for misalignment. The pin and bush coupling require the same accuracy of alignment as rigid couplings. Demonstrations of correct alignment shall be provided.

2.11.6 Pump Set Auxiliary Equipment

• Each pump set shall be provided with the following auxiliary equipment.

• Discharge and suction pressure gauges each complete with isolating cock.

• Drains, vents, primary plugs, all necessary water seal connections and all installation materials including fixing bolts and anti-vibration mountings.

• Emergency stop push button shall be provided for each pump.

• Strainers shall be installed at suction side as shown on the Drawings.

• Pressure gauges tappings at suction and discharge pipe works shall be provided.

• Fit pumps and appurtenances to the space provided and make readily serviceable.

• Provide hot-dipped galvanized steel framework, hangers, anchor bolts and vibration isolators for pumps except vertical multi-stage pumps where heavy duty neoprene pad shall be provided for vibration mounting purposes. Vertical split casing pumps shall be directly mounted on concrete. Unless otherwise specified, inertia blocks with mass concrete shall be provided.

• Provide flanges and flexible pipe connectors to the suction and discharge connections of pumps.

• Each pump shall be fitted with air cocks, drain plugs and a pressure gauge on both suction and discharge sides of the pump. The pressure gauges shall be installed on the suction and discharge lines. Suitable permanent labels in English shall be affixed to each pressure gauge to indicate its function.

• Except in the case of glandless pumps, provision shall be made for collecting gland leakage via a galvanised steel pipe fitted from the pump to the nearest gully or drain point. A tundish shall be used to collect the drips at the gland packing.



Page 77/245

• Pump installations shall be complete with adequate facilities for maintenance and future replacement of plant. Lifting eyes shall be provided for pumps and motors.

• Pipe connections to the pump should not impose any load on the pump which is liable to disturb shaft and bearing alignment. The pump/pipe work connection ends shall be of final closure joints, and thus ensuring the pipe work is independently supported.

• Demonstration of free pump rotation before and after pipe connection shall be provided.

• All necessary steps shall be taken to ensure that noise and vibration are not transmitted from any part of the installation to any part of the structure at such a level as deemed to be objectionable.

• Equipment shall be selected for minimum noise and vibration, and rotating machinery shall be fully statically and dynamically balanced.

• Pumps shall be isolated from their associated pipe work by means of flexible pipe work vibration isolators, of suitable stiffness, and mounted with the isolators axis at right angles to the direction of maximum vibration amplitude. These isolators shall be mounted as close as possible to the pump, and as such may be used as the final closure joint. However, the isolators should not be used to compensate for misaligned pipe work.

• Automatic priming equipment shall be included where necessary to ensure that the pumps are primed at all times.

• Long radius reducing elbows or reducers at the locations where pipe size decreases shall be provided. Provide support to pipe work adjacent to pumps such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line of 100 mm diameter and over.

• The straight pipe length for the suction side shall be a minimum length of 5 diameters of the suction pipe work size.

• Motor starter for all pumps shall be provided as specified.

2.11.7 Shaft Coupling Alignment

• Carefully and accurately align shafts of all machinery, utilizing shaft couplings between drivers and speed reducers and the equipment. Test the direction of rotation of the driver before final shaft coupling connection is made.

2.11.8 Type of Shaft Misalignment:

• All necessary corrections to eliminate both types of shaft mis-alignment defined as below.

• Angular Misalignment - Shafts having axis concentric but not parallel.

• Parallel Misalignment - Shafts having axis parallel but not concentric.



Page 78/245

2.12 DUCTING AND FITTINGS


This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of ductwork, diffusers, registers, grilles, dampers, guide vanes, cleaning of air system, access panels and accessories.

All ductwork and distribution accessories delivered to Site shall be new and indelibly stamped to identify different grades, materials and manufacturers.

All materials used including ductwork, insulation, adhesives, flexible connections gaskets, sealant and fibreglass boards shall fully comply with the following standards:

• HVCA, DW/143: A Practical Guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing.

• HVCA, DW/144: Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork, Low, Medium and High Pressure/Velocity Air Systems.

• HVCA, DW/151: Specification for Plastic Ductwork.

• BS EN 10142: Continuously Hot-Dip Zinc Coated Low Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip for Cold Forming-Technical Delivery Conditions.

• BS 476: Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures.

• BS 5669: Part 1: Particle board. Methods of Sampling, Conditioning and Test.

• DETR Building Regulations 2000 Fire Safety.

• UL 555: Fire Dampers.

• UL 555S: Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.

• NFPA 90A: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (Note: NFPA Standards shall be applied only if any part of the duct installation standards are not covered by DW/144 or DW/151).

• SMACNA: HVAC Duct Construction Standards, metal and Flexible and Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards (Note: SMACNA Standards shall be applied only if any part of the duct installation standards are not covered by DW/144 or DW/151).

• SMACNA: HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual (Note: SMACNA Standards shall be applied only if any part of the duct installation standards are not covered by DW/143, DW/144 or DW/151).

Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be selected to meet the requirements of noise control as described elsewhere in this Specification.

The ECS ductwork layout shall form a complete air distribution system. Ductwork layout is indicated on the Working Drawings and the Equipment Datasheets.

The ducts that are used for normal air conditioning and ventilation system are termed non-fire rated ducts. Ducts used for both normal air conditioning/ventilation and smoke extraction



Page 79/245

purpose are termed fire rated ducts. Such ducts shall be exposed to airflow at 250 °C for 1 hours. Where such ducts form part of a fire compartment or pass through a fire wall, the fire integrity shall be at least equal to the wall/compartment. Fire rating shall be in accordance with BS 476 Part 24 and should follow the ISO time-temperature curve. This shall be achieved by the use of fire rated materials or some form of composite system using Building Regulations Class O faced mineral/fibre glass fire resistant cladding. The support arrangements for fire rated ducts shall also be fire rated.

Ductwork shall be manufactured from GSS of lock forming quality to BS EN 10142. The zinc coating shall not be damaged during fabrication and installation. The construction shall comply with DW 144 or latest international standard. For fire rated ducts testing shall be comply with BS 476 part 24, ISO 6944. The ductwork at some places is of RCC/builders work construction as indicated in drawings. Where any part of the installation is not covered by the above then the recommendation of the latest edition of “Low Pressure Duct Construction” and “High Pressure Duct Construction” standards issued by SMACNA shall be applied. Bends and branch vanes, dampers etc. shall be of the same material as used for the ducts and/or of heavier gauge, securely mounted.

Fire dampers shall be installed where ductwork penetrates fire compartment walls or floors. Fire rated ductwork, or any enclosure provided, should be rated such that the external temperature of the installation shall not pose a risk of flashover. Insulation breakdown shall be considered to have occurred when the spot and average surface temperature exceed ambient plus 180 °C and 140 °C respectively. Ductwork local to fire dampers shall be installed and jointed so that structural failure of the duct results in breakage of the duct away from the fire damper and leaves intact the union of the fire damper and the fire-rated wall.

All duct sections shall be joined as per DW/144 and SMACNA requirements. All nuts and bolts, washers shall be galvanised. Duct sizes shall be selected on the basis of maximum pressure drop of 1.25 Pa/m of duct. The recommended maximum velocity in ducts is 7m/s in public area. The maximum air velocity in duct near the AHU (but excluding the public area) is 14.5 m/s

Air intakes and outlets, such as supply registers, diffusers and transfer grilles, shall be sized for throw and noise criteria based on the net area. The maximum face velocities at the louvres and grilles shall be as in the table below;

Air intake & outlets Maximum Velocity (m/s)

Intake louvers 2.6

Discharge louvers 2.6

Transfer louvers 1.3

Exhaust grilles 2.6

Supply & written grilles 2.6

Transfer grilles 1.3

All air ductwork passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be sleeved and packed with a sound absorbent material to eliminate noise transmission to and from the structure and from room to room.



Page 80/245

All air conditioning ductwork shall be insulated to control condensation. RCC/builders work t be insulated.

The ducts shall be properly and correctly constructed with all necessary accessories to minimise waste of energy and pressure losses due to eddies, vortices etc. and shall not create, amplify or transmit any noise or vibration. Any necessary sound attenuators to reduce noise transmission shall be provided in accordance with the requirements in this Specification.

Internal roughness and obstructions to air flow (other than dampers, splitters, vanes etc.) shall not be accepted for ductwork constructed from sheet materials. Sharp edges or corners on the outside of ductwork, fittings and supports shall not be accepted.

At each point where a duct passes through a roof or external wall, a weather `cravat' or other purpose made arrangement shall ensure a waterproof and weatherproof fixing.

Duct connections between individual components of an air handling assembly and connections between an assembly and a ductwork system shall be made with angle flanged joints. All curves and elbows in ducts shall have as large a radius as conditions permit. Full cross sectional areas of ducts shall be maintained.

All joints shall be lapped, creased, and secured for air tight connection. All slip-joints shall be lapped in direction of air flow. Joints in air chambers and plena shall be caulked air tight. Bottoms of all such air chambers resting on a masonry floor shall be gasketted or caulked to prevent air leakage.

Ducts containing air exhausted from toilets, where located in return air spaces or masonry return air risers, shall have all joints and seams soldered air tight. Where ductwork is spot welded, all welds shall be wire brushed and the prepared surface shall be treated with cold galvanizing paint.

On bends and offsets, the centre line radius shall be 1.5 times the duct width unless space considerations preclude this. Where long radius bends are not possible turning vanes or splitters shall be fitted. Similarly, square bends and splitters shall be used where desirable for sound attenuation or space saving purposes. Branches shall generally be taken at 45° from the side of the main duct with taper connection.

All sheet metal ducting shall be constructed to the recommendations of DW/144. The pressure class rating shall also be in accordance with DW/144.

Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets to BS EN 10142 Grade DX51 D+Z275, coating type as specified in DW/144 and of minimum thickness complying with standards as listed above.

Steel metal duct sizes shown on the Drawings are clear internal dimensions and allowance shall be made for insulation where applicable.

Provide splitter dampers, complete with adjusting handle or similar device to all branches of the supply air ducts to regulate air flows along the main duct and the branch ducts, whether they are specifically shown on the Drawings or not.

Provide opposed blade type volume control dampers to all branch ducts where indicated on the Drawings or not.



Page 81/245

Provide fire dampers as indicated on the Drawings. Fire damper construction shall comply with the requirements of NFPA and local authorities.

Provide flexible connectors of not less than 100 mm long between air handling units/fans and related ductwork or where shown on the Drawings to prevent transmission of vibration to adjacent elements. Flexible connectors shall also be provided at building/station expansion and movement joints as indicated on the Drawings.

The material used for the flexible connections shall withstand the specified conditions of temperature and air pressure, and shall comply with the standards of air-tightness. The material shall be fire resistant and comply with the requirements of local authorities.

Provide access doors in ducts where required to gain access to fans, silencers, dampers, filters or controls for cleaning and future maintenance.

Access doors and panels in ductwork shall be quick release type with handles. The doors shall be of air-tight construction with gasket mounted on the periphery of door frame.

Provide flanged joints to plant and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate maintenance.

All flanged joints in ductworks shall be made up with rubber gaskets or suitable mastic material in accordance with local authorities requirements.

Apply sealant, adhesives, tapes to joints for sealing. All such material shall comply with the requirements of DW/144 and local authorities.

Balancing dampers of appropriate types shall be provided for air balancing whether shown on the Drawings or not.

Short radius rectangular and square elbows in air ducts shall be equipped with double thickness turning vanes. Long radius elbows shall be used wherever possible.

Circular and oval ductwork shall be spirally wound galvanized steel.

Only standard proprietary fittings shall be used with circular and oval ductworks.

The use of heat or adhesive applied sealing tapes shall not be permitted.

2.12.2 Hangers and Supports

All ductwork shall be securely supported by hangers, brackets and other appropriate forms of support according to the HVCA publications. Noise and vibration must not be transferred to the structure or any other element through hangers and brackets.

Supports shall be located close to all dampers, diffusers and other in duct equipment.

Duct supports shall be provided with rubber gaskets to thermally isolate support frames.

All hangers and supports shall be clear of duct insulation.

During construction the duct openings shall be temporarily closed with covers to avoid debris entering ducts.



Page 82/245

2.12.3 Flexible Duct Joints

Flexible joints shall be provided on all in line fan inlet and outlet connections and elsewhere on ductwork where specified. Flexible joints shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the mating fan inlet/outlet or duct section. The centre lines of flexible joint connections shall be coaxial.

Flexible ducts shall be jointed either by circular plain or flanged spigot ends. Joints shall restricted to between 50 mm to 250 mm maximum length. When installed in fire rated ducts, the flexible joint must provide the same level of fire resistance as the duct itself to BS 476 Part 24.

Flexible joints shall consist of, or be externally protected by, material which shall comply with DW144 Class B and/or BS 476 Part 7 Class 1 (surface of very low flame spread).

Under no circumstances shall materials containing asbestos fibres be used.

2.12.4 Flexible Ductwork

Where flexible ductwork is specified, or required between rigid ductwork and items of equipment, the internal diameter of the flexible duct shall be equal to the external diameter of the rigid duct and equipment spigot. Flexible ductwork shall be kept to a minimum length and shall not be used between rigid sections of ductwork to change direction. The maximum length of any individual flexible duct shall not exceed 1500 mm.

The flexible duct shall have a liner and a cover of tough tear-resistant fabric. The fabric shall not give off any toxic smoke or fumes and should be reinforced with a bonded galvanised spring of stainless steel or other suitable wire helix between the liner and the cover. An outer helix of glass fibre cord or equal shall be bonded to the cover to ensure regular convolutions. Flexible ductwork without a liner may be used subject to compliance with all other appropriate requirements of this Section.

Alternatively, flexible ductwork shall consist of flexible corrugated metal tubing of stainless steel, aluminium, tin plated steel or aluminium coated steel. The metal surface(s) may be coated with a plastics material.

Flexible ductwork used on tempered air systems shall be insulated where the conventional steel ductwork used for the same purpose is insulated.

Joints at flexible duct connections shall be made with a sealant which permanently retains adhesion and elasticity throughout the design working temperature range. The sealant and method of application shall be in accordance with the ductwork manufacturer's recommendations. Flexible ductwork up to and including 140 mm diameter shall be secured with a worm drive type hose clip complying with BS 5315. Ductwork over 140 mm diameter shall be secured with a band clip.

The frictional resistance to air flow per unit length of flexible duct shall not exceed 150% of the frictional resistance per unit length of galvanised steel duct of similar diameter.

The radius ratio R/D for bends shall be not less than 2, where R is the centre line radius and D is the diameter of the flexible duct.



Page 83/245

The leakage from any section of flexible duct shall not exceed 1% of the local design air flow rate at the local maximum static pressure.

Flexible ductwork shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of -5 °C to 90 °C and shall comply with DW144 Class B and/or BS 476 Part 7 Class 1 (surface of very low flame spread).

Provide flexible ducts where required or shown on the Drawings. Flexible ducts shall be neatly fixed and adequately supported.

Flexible ducting used to connect the air distribution accessories and main ductworks as indicated on the Drawings shall comply with Part 7 of DW/144.

Flexible duct shall not be used for any system which is designed for handling smoke or being part of a smoke control system.

2.12.5 Access Doors

Access doors shall be installed at every air chamber, filter section, fire damper, automatic damper, valves, temperature control equipment, filters, fan bearings, entering side of cooling coils, to permit inspection operation and maintenance.

Access holes for pitot tubes shall be provided at each fan suction and discharge at each main branch take off, wherever it is necessary to measure performance. Such holes shall be located to enable accurate measurements to be taken.

Access doors required in building construction shall be shown on shop drawings.

Access doors in ductwork, casings, or sheet metal partitions shall be of double construction with insulation of the same general character as adjacent sections of ductwork, of not less than 22 gauge sheet metal and shall have not less than 12 mm wide fire resisting neoprene gaskets around their entire perimeter. All fittings and screw shall be made of brass or galvanised steel.

Access doors in sheet metal ducts shall be hung on heavy brass flat hinges and shall be secured in the closed position by means of hard chromium wedge type fasteners. All hinges shall be placed to enable the doors to remain open without additional support.

All doors shall be hinged with two hinges, and two latches shall be used on doors over 450 mm x 450 mm or larger. Where it is impractical to use hinged doors, such as in false ceiling spaces, access doors shall be fixed in position with hard chromium wedge type fasteners on opposite sides. A minimum of 4 catches shall be used to 450 mm x 450 mm access doors and 2 catches for 350 mm x 350 mm access doors.

Access doors providing entry to interior of air conditioning unit casings or through sheet metal partitions shall open against air pressure and shall be secured by two heavy chromium plated refrigerator door type catches with internal and external handles, and joined by a metal handle. Adequate stiffening shall be provided in metal partitions where securing hinges.

In no case shall any access door require the removal of nuts, bolts, screws, wing nuts, wedges or any other screwed or loose device. Access doors shall have a fire rating equivalent to that required for the adjacent construction when located in such construction. Unless otherwise specified, access door sizes shall not be less than 450 mm x 450 mm or 50 mm narrower than the duct whichever is smaller.



Page 84/245

2.12.6 Grilles and diffusers

All grilles and diffusers shall be designed and rated in accordance with ASHRAE 32-7.

All grilles and diffusers shall be of dry powder coated aluminium unless otherwise specified.

All supply, return and exhaust diffusers shall be complete with opposed blade dampers, suitable for mounting with appropriate diffuser and shall be fitted with concealed adjustment devices. Straightener grids are required before diffusers except for the last diffuser on the route. Each supply air grille shall be complete with an opposed blade multi-leaf damper. One set of tools for every 10 grilles or diffusers shall be provided for volume adjustment.

The inside of all components and surfaces of all diffusers and grilles shall be painted matt black. The drawings show provisional locations of diffusers and grilles but in each instance outlets shall be installed in accordance with the final detail drawings and reflected ceiling plans.

Velocities, net airways and distribution patterns shall give satisfactory air distribution and temperature equalization, be free of draughts, stratification or noise nuisance. Make final adjustments to air patterns when balancing.

The sizes of grilles (including linear grille) indicated on drawings imply the neck sizes of the fittings, whereas the sizes of ceiling diffusers on drawings imply overall external dimensions.

2.12.7 4 Way Blow Ceiling Diffusers

• Diffusers constructed of extruded aluminium shall be powder coated.

• Diffusers with removable cores shall have square necks or alternatively round necks. Diffuser sizes are shown on the Drawings.

• Provide aluminium or steel opposed blade volume control dampers of black colour with concealed adjustment lever. In general, dampers will not be required for fan coil unit system having single supply diffuser.

• Provide galvanized steel sheet painted black at the front view to seal off the dummy part of diffuser.

• Diffusers rings or frames shall be compatible with the ceiling construction in which they are installed. A transition piece shall be provided to connect the diffuser to the duct. All edges exposed to view shall be rolled or otherwise stiffened and rounded. Internal parts shall be removable to permit cleaning of the diffuser and provide access to the duct.

• Baffles, turning vanes or other devices shall be provided for the required air distribution pattern. Equalizing grids shall be provided for ceiling diffusers.

• Volume control damper shall be equipped and factory fabricated by the diffuser manufacturer. The adjustment position shall be easily accessed.

Supply and Transfer Air Grilles and Registers for General Use

• Double deflection supply air grilles/registers shall be tapped from side or bottom of ducts with provision for tamper-proof adjustment of air pattern spread along its width.



Page 85/245

Adjusting tool shall be provided by the manufacturer. Grilles/registers shall have a minimum of 80% free area.

• Provide grilles/registers to meet the size and capacities as shown on the Drawings. Provide gaskets to obviate air leakage.

• Provide transition pieces as shown on the Drawings required to connect ducts to grilles and registers.

• Grilles and registers shall be factory assembled with opposed blade volume control dampers operable through the grille face. The adjustment shall be by a key through the face of the register and the volume control damper shall be group-operated or opposed blade type. The operating mechanism shall not project through any part of the register face.

• Diffusers constructed of extruded aluminium shall be powder coated.

• All grille cores shall be capable of being removed easily from the ductwork for access to dampers.

• All edges exposed to view shall be rolled or otherwise stiffened and rounded. All edges shall be equipped with airtight, non-combustible neoprene, or sealing strips to prevent leakage. The register rings or frames shall be compatible with the ceiling construction in which they are installed.

• Multiple-blade volume extractors shall be of the air-deflecting and air straightening type with blades spaced a maximum of 50 mm apart.

Return/Exhaust Grilles and Registers for General Use

• Grilles shall have single set of fins which shall be vision-proof to effectively mask the return opening. Grilles shall have 45o inclined fins spaced approximately 19 mm apart.

• Free area of grille core shall be at least 80%.

• Grilles and registers shall be fixed type.

• Return air diffusers shall match the supply diffusers in appearance and shall be constructed of the same material and identical in surface finish.

• Register rings or frames shall be compatible with the ceiling construction in which they are installed.

Linear Air Diffusers

• Each diffuser shall be of single/multi-slotted vertical/horizontal discharge, ceiling mounted type fitted into a field-insulated boot with spigot for receiving supply air duct as detailed on the Drawings.

• Diffusers of extruded aluminium shall be powder coated.



Page 86/245

• Number of slots and lengths of diffuser and capacity shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

• Provide air boot to the diffusers as shown on the Drawings. Air boot casing shall be constructed of 0.6 mm thick galvanized steel with interior surfaces insulated to prevent erosion. Insulation and air boot shall be extended to cover the collar of diffuser. Volume control damper shall be provided in the air boot spigot.

• Subject to the ceiling panel design, the flanges of the diffusers shall be designed to support ’drop in’ ceiling panels.

• Provide suitable support points independent of the suspended ceiling for the air boots and the associated diffusers.

• Air boot spigot location and dimensions shall generally be as indicated on the Drawings.

• Provide galvanized steel sheet painted black at the front view to seal off the dummy part of diffuser.

Nozzle/Jet Diffusers

• Nozzle/Jet diffuser assembly shall consist of round diffuser elements which shall be fitted to square or rectangular back plate, opposed blade volume control damper and duct collar.

• Each nozzle/jet diffuser assembly shall consist of the diffuser element and shall be compatible with the architectural design in which they are installed.

• Individual diffuser element shall be capable of adjusting the air deflection up to 30o from any plane perpendicular to the face. Adjustment shall be accomplished from front or back of the diffuser without tools.

• Volume control dampers shall be provided for the diffusers.

2.12.8 Control Dampers

The control dampers to be used for the ECS system are included in this section of the specification.

All ECS supply and return air ducts shall be provided with dampers arranged to close when the systems are shut down and to divert and control airflow dependent on the required configuration of the system.

The respective functions, types and general constructional requirements of dampers shall be in accordance with the HVCA ductwork specification DW/144 unless otherwise specified. Sufficient dampers shall be provided to regulate and balance the system. Dampers on grilles or diffusers shall be used for fine control. All dampers shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent fluttering. Unless otherwise specified the air leakage past dampers in the fully closed position shall not exceed 5% of the maximum design air flow in the duct. All manually and automatically operated dampers shall include a means for indicating externally the position of the blades. Manual dampers shall include a device for positioning and locking the damper



Page 87/245

blades. The positions of all dampers `as-set' after final regulation shall be indelibly marked at the adjusting device.

Each air volume control damper in the ductwork shall be marked to which the damper has been closed in order to achieve the design or actual air flow.

Damper casings shall unless otherwise specified, quadrants and operating handles shall be of die-cast aluminium with the works “OPEN” and "SHUT" cast on the quadrant.

Quadrants shall be securely fixed and the damper spindles shall be close fitting in the quadrant hubs to prevent any damper movement when the damper levers are locked.

Access opening with readily removable air sealed covers shall be provided adjacent to all dampers. Subject to limitations of duct size the dimensions of access openings shall not be less than 300 mm x 300 mm and they shall be located so as to afford easy access for inspection and maintenance.

Damper types shall be as indicated on the Working Drawings and as indicated in the Equipment Datasheets. The dampers are categorised according to their functional requirements.

• Motorised Smoke Fire Damper (MSFD): These dampers shall be installed in ductwork to configure ducts for smoke extraction and isolate vulnerable equipment from the smoke path during smoke extraction. They shall generally be multi-leaf motorised type. Any part of the damper or its actuator/spring return mechanism that is exposed to the smoke shall be rated for 1 hr at 250 °C. The material of construction shall be Galvanised Sheet Steel (GSS). If this damper is provided in fire compartment wall, then compliance with BS 476 Part 20 is required. Leakage rates shall comply with UL 555S for low leakage classification.

• Motor Operated Damper (MOD): These dampers shall be installed in ductwork to configure ducts for different operational modes of the ECS and to isolate ECS equipment, but where the location of the dampers shall not be exposed to hot gases during smoke extraction operations. The material of construction shall be GSS.

• Volume Control Dampers (VCD): Volume control dampers shall be provided to enable the air conditioning and ventilation sections of the ECS system to be effectively balanced. Volume control dampers shall be of manually operated type. On rectangular section ductwork volume control dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with double skin aerofoil section blades being of the low leakage type with seals on the tips and jambs of the blades. Manual adjustment or operation shall be from outside the duct. All dampers shall be fitted with position indicators. The material of construction shall be GSS.

• Smoke Exhaust Volume Control Dampers: The application and material of these dampers is similar to VCD, but shall be installed in those ducts which are required to carry smoke. The damper temperature rating shall be 1 hr at 250 °C.

• Fire Dampers (FD): Fire dampers shall be installed wherever ducts pass through fire compartment walls, ceilings and floors. Fire dampers shall be fusible link type. They shall be supplied and built into the walls with installation frames as recommended by the damper manufacturer and with adequate access for resetting and for inspection. Fire dampers shall close off the duct at 68 °C air temperature / local authorities approved temperature limited. Fusible link type fire dampers shall be arranged such



Page 88/245

that the airflow assists the closing of the damper. All dampers shall be grouted in a separate duct section stiffened for mounting of the damper. The material of construction shall be GSS. These dampers shall comply with UL 555/DW142/BS 476 Part 20.

• Manual Dampers (MD): These dampers are to be placed in non-fire rated ducts. These are parallel blade type of GSS construction.

2.12.9 Damper Components

Dampers shall be provided complete with damper mounting frames for each damper module including all operating components, all structural support elements and hardware required for installation of the damper modules into composite damper units. Damper casings shall fabricated from GSS not less than 1.6 mm thick.

Each damper module shall be factory assembled complete with frames, blades, shafts, bearings, seals, linkage, and all accessories required to erect the modular panels into composite damper units.

Motorised dampers shall be electric motor operated to two blade positions of either fully open or fully closed. Each damper shall be furnished complete with electric actuators of sufficient number and capacity to actuate all modular panels in a damper unit in unison. Dampers shall be suitable for continuous operation in either open or closed position.

Motor actuators shall be installed on a rigid GSS mounting plate fixed outside the damper casing clear of the air stream. Motor actuators for smoke control duties shall be suitable for continuous operation for 1 hr at 250 °C.

Each motorised damper module shall be provided with two blade-mounted limit switches for remote indication of the damper position, one for fully open position and one for fully closed position. Switches shall be provided with independent contacts mounted to positively detect fully open and fully closed positions.

In the case of multiple module composite dampers, and dampers that operate in a group, limit switches shall be wired in series to provide a common open or closed indication for each composite damper unit, or damper group.

2.12.10 Butterfly and Multi Leaf Dampers

Butterfly dampers shall be used for air dampers up to a width 200 mm in the plane of rotation. Each damper shall consist of two plates, edge seamed, of at least the same thickness of material as that from which the associated duct is made, and rigidly fixed to each side of a like steel operating spindle, the ends of which shall be turned and housed in non-ferrous bearings.

Multi-leaf dampers shall be used for air dampers for width larger than 300 mm in the plane of rotation. Each leaf shall be streamlined and rigidly constructed of galvanised sheet steel of not less than 1.6 mm thickness free of all buckles. Each leaf shall be fitted with a 15 mm bright steel spindle at each end, carried by sealed ball bearing or other suitable type bearing. Bearing shall be accessible for cleaning and lubrication purposes and shall be mounted in a rigid galvanised frame.

Each leaf shall be linked inside by a rigid linkage or externally by gear wheels which shall ensure complete closing of all blades in unison.



Page 89/245

The maximum length of each leaf without a central bearing shall be 1,000 mm. The maximum width of each leaf shall be 225 mm.

Extension shaft which pass through ducting and/or the vapour seal shall be carried in neat holes in the ductwork. Where ductwork is externally insulated and not metal sheathed a 1.3 mm galvanised steel plate shall be fitted of sufficient size to prevent damage to the insulation vapour seal.

Automatic dampers shall have an operating spindle or linkage for connecting to the automatic control mechanism. Special care shall be taken to ensure that all automatic dampers are airtight on shut-off and that three is no slack or spring in any of the linkage.

Saw marks shall be made in spindle ends indicating blade positions.

Construction shall be such as to eliminate air noise or rattling in the closed or nearly closed position and blades shall be fitted with felt seats or "U" shaped rubber sections.

Automatic dampers shall be sequence operated so that the air volume is under positive control at all times.

Automatic damper section shall not be greater than 3.2 m² and the selection of damper motors shall be considered when sizing each damper section.

Dampers shall be opposed counter-rotating type if used for volume control. Volume control dampers shall be of the opposed blade, multi-leaf type with overlapping blades. Single blade volume control dampers may be used for duct smaller than 300 mm by 300 mm.

All dampers shall be constructed with no vibration or rattling under all operating conditions.

The setting of the damper shall be clearly indicated and marked permanently after the system has been regulated. The lever shall be aligned with the damper.

Dampers shall be capable of being held in position by means of a Butterfly nut to fix the position of the lever after regulation.

The air leakage through the dampers shall not be more than 5% at the maximum system pressure when fully closed.

Provide suitable seals between damper spindles and casing.

2.12.11 Self-Closing (Non-Return) Dampers

Self-closing dampers shall present a minimum resistance to air flow under running conditions and take up a stable position in operation. Maximum resistance shall be presented under reverse air flow conditions such that they shall be forced to close and remain so. Resilient strips or other purpose made devices shall be provided to prevent the damper rattling and as an aid to air sealing under reserve flow conditions.

Blades shall be rigidly constructed of steel or aluminium sheet of not less than 0.8 mm and shall be free of all buckles. Blades less than 300 mm in height shall be fitted with a 6 mm bright steel spindle at each end. Blades 300 mm in height and over shall be fitted with a 8 mm bright steel spindle at each end.



Page 90/245

Spindles shall be carried by sealed ball bearings or other suitable type bearing. Bearing shall be accessible for cleaning and shall be mounted in rigid galvanised steel frames.

The maximum length of each blade without a central bearing shall be 1,000 mm.

Either the edge of the frame or the damper blade shall have continuous felt seats and leakage through or around the damper when closed shall not exceed five percent of the maximum air flow. All blades shall be effectively counterbalanced.

2.12.12 Fire dampers

Fire dampers shall be provided in air ducts in the following locations:

• Wherever a non-fire rated duct passes through an element which is expressly built for the purpose of preventing the spread of fire.

• Wherever a non-fire rated duct passes through an element which is expressly built for the purpose of preventing the spread of smoke (i.e. smoke barrier).

• Other locations as specified.

Fire dampers used singly or in combination shall have an overall fire rating not less than that as required and certainly not less than that for the wall or floor slab in which they are located. Fire dampers shall be constructed of either a corrosion resistant material such as stainless steel or be galvanised or otherwise treated to minimize corrosion. The dampers shall be housed in a corrosion resistant casing constructed to avoid distortion due to stress in fire conditions. Provision shall be made to accommodate expansion of the damper blade(s) within the casing in fire conditions. A fire damper installation frame shall also incorporate provision for expansion within the surrounding structure together with masking flange for building into the structure.

Each fire damper casing shall be clearly marked with a permanent indication of the correct fixing attitude of the damper, the direction of air flow and the side at which the access/maintenance opening is located.

The folded continuous interlocked blade type of damper may be used for vertical or horizontal duct applications. The closing force for these type of dampers shall be provided by a stainless steel spring or springs. An automatic locking device shall be provided to ensure that the blades are held in the closed position after release. Spring actuated pivoted single blade or multi-bladed dampers may be used for vertical or horizontal duct applications. Multi-bladed dampers shall be provided with a means to ensure that all the blades close simultaneously.

Gravity operated multi-bladed fire dampers shall not be used in vertical ducts. Gravity operated single bladed dampers may be used for horizontal ducts provided means, which ensure reliable and positive closure when operating in maximum air flow rate conditions, are incorporated.

Where gravity acting off-centre pivoted dampers incorporate spindle bearings long term corrosion effects shall be minimised by choice of materials and bearings shall be sealed or capped to excluded dirt and dust. Damper blades shall close to comply with the stability and integrity requirements of BS476 Part 8.

For high velocity air systems fire dampers shall be of the type where damper blades, in the open position, give minimum interference with the air flow.



Page 91/245

Unless otherwise specified, each fire damper shall be held in the open position by a corrosion resistant retaining device incorporating a fusible element which shall operated at a temperature of 68 °C. Fire dampers shall be located in such a position and be of a type which facilitate periodic manual release and re-setting for test purpose. Provide fire dampers in air ducts where ducts penetrate fire compartments as shown on the Drawings.

Fire dampers shall fully comply with the requirements of local authorities and DW/144.

Fire dampers shall be constructed to the same standards of air tightness as the rest of the ducting system.

Fire damper casings shall be flanged to suit the ductwork which they are fitted and the cross-sectional area shall not be less than that of the ductwork.

Blade and fusible link shall be accessible for servicing through air-tight inspection doors placed upstream or downstream of the air path whichever provides the better access.

Provide suitable fusible link set at 68 oC to all fire dampers unless otherwise specified. Fusible link shall be arranged in an exposed position and at upstream of the damper.

Proprietary fire dampers shall be local authorities approved.

Install thermal heat sensor type fusible link in suitable locations as specified on the Drawings. The bare wire link shall be provided adjacent to the damper unless otherwise indicated.

Provide all necessary fixing frame work for the installation of fire dampers.

Provide fire rated material to seal off the clearance between the fire dampers and wall.

2.12.13 Motor Operated Dampers (MOD)

All motor operated dampers shall be suitable for installation in either a vertical plane or a horizontal plane as shown on the Drawings.

The dampers shall be operated by electric actuators as shown on the Drawings and shall be readily assembled on Site from modular panels. Each motor operated damper panel shall be of the multiple-parallel-blade type, with an independent channel frame; and shall be factory-assembled complete with frames, blades, shafts, bush, seals, linkage, and all accessories required to erect the panels into composite dampers. Motor operated dampers shall be provided with all structural support members and hardware required for installation as indicated on the Drawings with additional framing or trims as required to complete the installation.

Motor operated damper shall be arranged for motor operation to two (2) blade positions (fully open and fully closed) or more than two (2) positions, or modulating, as indicated on the Drawings.

Motor operated damper actuator shall be mounted outside of the damper frame.

Spring-return type damper actuator shall be provided either to open or close damper as required in the event of power failure. The position of each damper on power failure is indicated, as applicable, on the Drawings.



Page 92/245

All motor operated dampers shall be the product of a single manufacturer; and all like components shall be provided by a single supplier.

Motor operated damper module assembly shall have a net free face area of not less than 80% measured to the inside of the frames.

Dampers shall be based on standard air having a density of 1.2 kg/m3. This shall apply to MOD and MSFD/MFD.

The motor operated damper manufacturer shall carry out factory test to verify that when the dampers are fully-closed and holding against a differential pressure of 500 Pa, air leakage through the damper shall to UL 555S, class III.

When the dampers are in the fully-open position and air is flowing across the damper at a uniform velocity of 10 m/s and the static-pressure drop across the damper shall not exceed 38 Pa.

The motor operated dampers and their associated structural-supporting systems shall, when the dampers are in the fully-closed position, be capable of withstanding a differential pressure across the dampers of not less than 1.5 kPa.

The motor operated damper blade and shaft assemblies shall be supported at each end by means of heavy duty, permanent self-lubricating bronze or stainless steel bush.

All motor operated damper-blade seals and damper-frame seals shall be fabricated of a flexible material suitable for the specified operating conditions. The seals shall be factory-installed in dove-tail grooves incorporated for this purpose in the design of the blade and frames to facilitate a tight closure between the blades, and between the blades and frame. All seals shall sit securely in the closed damper position. Noise due to resonance of spring-type seals or any other source shall be rejected.

Each module of damper with only two operating positions should have one limit switch with two contacts to monitor its open/closed status. If any one module of the damper fails to operate, the damper shall be considered not functioning properly. For each module of damper with three operating positions, two or more limit switches shall be provided.

Motor operated damper linkage shall consist of MS chrome plated rods not less than 6.4 mm in diameter, extending through bush inserted in brackets fabricated of galvanised steel. The linkage bearings shall be fabricated from bronze or other material suitable for the specified operating conditions. The linkage brackets shall either be attached to the damper-blade shafts or be side-mounted and mechanically inter-connected with the shafts. Set screws shall not be used in the linkage assembly.

Motor operated damper frames shall be a channel cross-section with not less than a 100 mm web and 50 mm flanges, and shall be fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel plate to BS EN 10142 extruded to a minimum thickness of 1.6 mm. Reinforcing bosses and dove-tail grooves for mounting frame seals shall be integral parts of the channel configuration. The corners of the frames shall be either welded or reinforced by means of riveted gusset plates.

All screws, bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors, and/or other hardware required to complete the installation shall be fabricated from galvanised steel, and all intermediate supports, framing members, and hardware required for assembly/installation of the damper shall be fabricated hot-dipped galvanized steel to BS 729.



Page 93/245

The motor operated dampers shall be installed using fastening devices and structural support elements herein specified, and in accordance with the published instructions of the damper manufacturer.

Motor operated damper blades shall have an aerofoil cross-section, and shall be fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel plate to BS EN 10142 to a minimum thickness of 1.6 mm. The width of the blades, measured in the direction of airflow shall not be less than 100 mm and shall not be greater than 250 mm (as per manufacturer standard).

Motor operated damper-blade shafts shall be fabricated of MS chrome plated, and shall not be less than 6.4 mm in diameter. The design of the shafts shall incorporate the devices required for securely locking the blades onto the shafts.

2.12.14 Motorized Smoke and Fire Dampers (MSFD)

MSFD ventilation and smoke extract dampers shall comply with the following: -

• Motor operated damper module assembly shall have a net free face area of not less than 80 % measured to the inside of the frames.

• When the dampers are in the fully-open position and air is flowing across the damper at a uniform velocity of 10 m/s, the static-pressure drop across the damper shall not exceed 38 Pa

• The motor operated dampers and their associated structural-supporting systems shall, when the dampers are in the fully-closed position, be capable of withstanding a differential pressure across the dampers of not less than 1.5kPa.

• Motor operated dampers shall be so designed that the dampers will be fully operational in accordance with the performance requirements specified herein after exposure to an air stream temperature of 250 degrees C for one hour

• Dampers and components shall be capable of withstanding the stresses caused by pressure transient pressures from train piston action, and by reversal of airflow and thermal shock caused by temperature changes of from 0 to 250 degrees C

• The width of the blades measured in the direction of airflow shall not be less than 150 mm and shall not be greater than 300 mm.

• The motor operators shall be capable of actuating the dampers as specified herein against differential pressure of 2500 Pa across the dampers

The operators shall be capable of changing the position of the dampers from fully closed to fully open, or from fully open to fully closed within a period of not more than 30 seconds

MSFD shall comply with local authorities requirements and as specified above for MOD, with the following additional requirements:

MSFD frames and other components made of steel shall be hot-dipped galvanized to BS EN 10142 and shall not be painted. Damper blades shall be fabricated of galvanized steel to BS EN 10142. All unprotected edges shall be touched up with a suitable paint-on type zinc-based protective coating.



Page 94/245

MSFD shall comply with BS 476: Part 20 or UL 555 and Class III to UL 555S. MSFD shall be tested in accordance with the procedure specified in UL 555S with respect to the requirements of elevated temperature and air leakage of the MSFD.

MSFD shall have a minimum fire rating to match with the FRP requirement of the structural elements where the MSFD is mounted.

All materials used for the construction of the MSFD shall be so selected and all components and accessories of the dampers shall be so designed that the dampers will be fully operational in accordance with the performance requirements specified when fully exposed in an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour. Accessories shall include electrical actuators, limit switches and any other damper status sensing devices.

Actuator shall be of sufficient torque to ensure tight closure of the damper, and shall be capable of being detached with ease to allow manual operation of the damper. The actuator shall be provided with spring return to close or open as required by the design in case of power failure.

The actuator linkage shall be capable of being adjusted so as to allow the damper to function as a volume control damper.

The entire damper and associated actuator shall meet local authorities requirements and be of fail safe type. The fail safe positions of the dampers shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

2.12.15 Test Points

Provide test points for measuring air flow at the following locations: at all fans (in the straight section of duct near to the outlet); at main branches after the regulating dampers, at cooling coils, (both before and after the coil), and any other position as indicated on the Drawings.

On insulated ductwork these holes shall be boxed out for the thickness of the insulation.

Test holes shall be 25 mm diameter and fitted with an effective removable seal of a suitable proprietary type.

After balancing, the insulation shall be fitted to the test hole positions.

2.12.16 Fire Rated Ductwork

Where shown on the Drawings, fire rated ductwork or equipment enclosure shall be fabricated from fire rated material to the requirements of local authorities, BS 476 or relevant UL standards.

All the ducts used for smoke exhaust purpose shall comply with the following requirements: -

• They shall be provided with a fire shutoff rating of 2 hours

• The ducts used shall have a max thickness of 40 mm, consisting of self-supporting panels of mineral material: -

− either based on mineral binders and synthetic fibre,

− or based on silicate and glass fibre



Page 95/245

• Particular attention shall be paid to the assembly mode of the panels, their joints and their supports.

The fire rated ductwork shall follow the latest Code of Practice (DW/144) of Fire Resisting Construction.

The construction of the ductwork or enclosure shall take into account the structural strength, noise isolation as required and the requirements of Class B duct in accordance with DW/144.

All necessary supports, cover strips, aligning strips and other accessories required for the complete installation of fire rated ductwork shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the duct sheets and shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation to the required fire rating and complying with local authorities requirements. Approval letter regarding the construction details and test certificates from a recognized laboratory shall be submitted.

The fire rated ductwork system shall be made up of sheet metal duct or fire rated board, thermal insulation (if required), and fire resistant to BS 476: Part 24, for both vertical and horizontal duct arrangement, inside and outside fire exposures. Restriction of the duct due to twisting or buckling after the fire test shall not cause 25% or more reduction in cross-sectional duct area.

Whether BS 476 thermal insulation criterion is applicable or not, fire rated air-conditioning supply, return, and exhaust ductwork shall be complete with thermal insulation and aluminium foil vapour barrier not lower than the standard as specified in Section of this Specification concerned with thermal insulation.

The fire resistant board shall not attract pests and shall not rot or support the growth of mould.

All fire resistant ductwork or enclosure, apart from its fire resisting quality, shall be capable of resisting accidental damage and shall require to pass the hard body impact test section of BS 5669: Part 1 with the weight being dropped through not less than 1 m.

Fire resistant and acoustically sealed access panels shall be provided in the above-mentioned enclosures for the access and maintenance of equipment and fire dampers.

2.12.17 Turning Vanes

Turning vanes shall be provided as required to maintain an acceptable system pressure loss.

All blanking plates and sealing plates shall be provided for a complete installation.

Vanes, supports, stiffeners, flanges, washers, bolts and welding filler shall be of galvanized steel and constructed to the recommendations of DW/144.

Vanes shall be of continuous seam screwed construction, except for stiffening ribs, which may be stitch welded. Welding shall be in accordance with relevant British Standards.

Curved sections shall be rolled or alternatively formed by a series of creases in a break press as long as the creases are closely spaced, not obstructive and form a smooth profile of air flow.



Page 96/245

2.12.18 Ductwork Installation

Provide complete ductwork systems and ensure that the installation can be adjusted to the designed flow rates.

Check all the Drawings provided in regard to structural requirements and other finishes before detailing the ducting system. Allowance shall be made for the detailed development and on Site coordination.

Duct sizes given on the Drawings are clear internal dimensions and allowance shall be made for insulation where applicable.

Replace damaged ductwork and other appurtenances.

Provide hangers and supports, fabricated of hot-dipped galvanized steel, for the proper installation of ducts in accordance with DW/144. Hanger rods shall be 10 mm or 13 mm in diameter, depending on size of duct. All such hangers shall be provided with screwed lengths on lower end for adjustment of ducting runs to level. All nuts shall be provided with washers and with lock-nuts, and projecting ends of bolts shall be cut off.

Supports shall not be riveted or bolted to the air ducts.

Install dampers and splitters in a manner so that they can be adjusted at any time after completion of the work.

Install dampers without strain or distortion of any part of the dampers.

Adjust moving parts to move freely without binding.

Adjust dampers and splitter adjusting rods to operate freely, between the open and closed position.

Install flexible connections in accordance with Part 7 of DW/144.

All ductwork shall be manufactured according to the dimensions taken on Site. Provision shall be allowed to accommodate any discrepancies between the Drawings and the Site dimensions.

All branches and openings in ducts shall be purpose made prior to erection of the ductwork.

Cross-breaking shall be permitted on low velocity ductwork only and in no case where rigid external insulation shall be applied.

Internal roughness, sharp edges or obstructions to air flow shall not be allowed.

External edges and corners formed from cleated joints shall be neatly dressed down with air tight joints.

Provide at least 75 mm clearance from ductwork to walls, ceiling and obstructions where a high standard of cleanliness shall be maintained.

2.12.19 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Installation

Install diffusers, registers and grilles so that they can be key adjusted from the face directly without special tools.



Page 97/245

Unless otherwise specified, install vanes, volume control dampers and multiple-blade extractors so that they can be removed through the diffusers and registers for access to the duct.

Install diffusers, grilles, registers and louvres with frame connected to the ductwork and provide soft gaskets inserted under the frame or otherwise so arranged so as to avoid air leakage around the diffusers and grilles.

2.12.20 Cleaning of Air System

Cleaning of air systems shall be by means of industrial type vacuum cleaners to effectively remove dust and foreign material from surfaces swept by the air stream. Cleaning shall be carried out in sections as the installation progress.

Clean exposed ductwork and leave in satisfactory condition, free from dust, grease, oil or foreign material for application of insulation or finish painting.

2.12.21 Access Panel

Each change of direction (90o or greater) shall be provided with an access panel at the turning elbow of air ducts for ductwork maintenance where shown on the drawings.

For every 15 m of straight air duct, where there is no air grille, one access panel shall be provided. The openings in ductwork for air grilles can be utilised for gaining access.

Access panels shall be provided in the inlet and/or discharge side(s) of equipment.

Generally access panels shall be of size 450 mm by 450 mm and shall be provided in an accessible horizontal position.

2.12.22 MOD and MSFD Installation

Each damper shall be installed so as to provide smooth operation, opening and closing without shock in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Undue flexing or bending of connecting rods and linkage will not be acceptable. Such connecting rod or linkage shall be replaced with either a corrected design, higher strength material or increased size of such a component.

Dampers shall be supported independently of the ductwork.

Wall and floor mounted dampers: All slight, unavoidable spaces and purpose-provided spaces between the damper frames and the structure shall be sealed as required. Blanking-off plates for such purpose shall be considered as part of the damper assembly and shall be provided.

Damper module installations shall be fully sealed by gaskets between the module frame and the mounting frame. The gasket material for MSFD shall meet the continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250oC for not less than one hour criteria and shall be subject to local authorities approval if required.

Identification of damper position is required on easy visible and accessible position, and the damper setting position after balancing shall be marked in a permanent manner.



Page 98/245

2.13 THERMAL INSULATION


Thermal insulation shall be provided for all air conditioning ductwork and chilled water pipe work (including valves, flanges, strainers), refrigerant pipe work, chilled water pumps, expansion tanks and condensate drain pipes. Thermal insulation materials shall not contain asbestos. Thermal insulation shall comply with the requirements of BS 476, BS 874, BS 4370, BS 5422 and BS 5970.

Thermal insulation materials shall conform to the fire property requirements of one of the following standards: -

• Flammability – BS 476 Part 4 - Non-combustibility test for materials.

• Flammability – BS 476 Part 6 - Method of test for fire propagation for products and BS 476 Part 7 - Method of test to determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products. criteria, Class 1.

• Smoke emission – BS 6853 1999; Annex D and Toxicity – BS 6853 1999; Annex B - NF X 70-100-1 & -2 - Analysis of pyrolysis and combustion gases or prEN 2826 - Aerospace series - Determination of gas components in the smoke.

Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proof against rotting, mould and fungal growth and attack by vermin, be non-hygroscopic and in all respects be suitable for continuous use throughout the range of operating temperatures and for the environment conditions.

All insulation shall be applied so as to give an acceptable looking smooth surface of uniform thickness. All insulation material shall be fitted tight to the surfaces to which it is applied, and edges or ends of sections shall butt close to one another, being mitred, chambered or shaped as necessary. Any minor interstices left in insulation shall be filled with granules embedded in a suitable and adhesive compound.

Insulated pipes and ducts shall be supported on the outside of the insulation, with load spreading metal plates of suitable size and thickness between the insulation and supports to prevent the insulation being crushed. The insulation at the support points shall be of heavy density load bearing form in pre-formed or slab sections made to the same thickness and external finish as the adjacent pipe or duct insulation. At all points of support, both insulation and outer covering shall be continuous and shall not be punctured or fouled by the supports. The insulation at supports shall be material of sufficient compressive strength to take the loads transmitted to the supports. The load-bearing insulation shall be extended on each side of the supports.

Where ductwork insulation material is hardboard, moulded section or slab type, the insulation material shall be provided with factory backed vapour barrier of aluminium foil. Where the insulation material is the soft type, a separate vapour barrier of aluminium foil and aluminium cladding shall be provided. In plant rooms all pipe insulation material shall be provided with a vapour barrier and aluminium cladding.

Split boxes type arrangement shall be provided for easy removal /access to the valves, flanges etc with out damaging the general run of insulation. Special arrangements shall be made at chilled water pumps for easy access and maintenance.



Page 99/245

2.13.2 Application – Ductwork and Air Handling Plant

All ductwork (including recirculation air ductwork) conveying chilled air through unconditioned spaces or the open air shall be insulated. Distribution systems conveying untreated fresh air and exhaust air through conditioned spaces shall be insulated to prevent condensation or heat gain to the space.

Pre-formed slab/blanket type thermal insulation shall be applied to air distribution ductwork and to components within distribution systems such as fans, heater and cooler casing which convey conditioned air within plant rooms and up to and including all terminal points in the system.

Fixing methods for insulation shall provide a minimum of direct metal paths, which thermally bridge the insulation. At all points of support the insulation, vapour barrier, al. cladding/ foil shall be continuous and shall not be pierced or fouled by the supports. The insulation shall be fastened to the duct using adhesive spread over the entire surface in combination with piercing fasteners finished flush with the insulation surface. All circumferential and longitudinal joints sealed with the same material of highly compatible with the main insulating facing. After fixing the insulating material, vapour barrier, and al. foil/ cladding, they shall be wrapped with adhesive tapes or plastic fabric.

Flexible connections on air conditioning air ducts shall be insulated with flexible blanket type non-inflammable material with attached vapour barrier facing. The blanket shall be wrapped around the flexible connection, overlapped and secured in place by metal bands at both ends to the rigid ducts. Flexible insulation shall have all circumferential and longitudinal joints sealed with tape of the same material of highly compatible with the main insulation facing. The external surface of the insulation shall be wrapped and galvanised wire netting of 25 mm mesh, 1 mm diameter, and the netting joints shall be secured with a lacing of 1 mm galvanised wire. Care shall be taken to ensure that the insulation material is not crushed during this application.

Insulation on the fan casings and ductwork shall be neatly finished around access doors. Access doors shall be separately insulated. Unless otherwise specified, the thermal insulation should comply with BS 476, BS 874, BS 4370 and BS 4522 and be of minimum thickness 30 mm and minimum density 50 kg/m3, maximum thermal conductivity 0.020 Kcal/hr to 0.038 Kcal/hr at 25 °C mean temperature and maximum moisture absorption 2% by volume. External duct insulation may be of hard (i.e. rigid lining boards), or soft (i.e. blankets).

All air handling units which are of double skin modular construction shall be insulated with internal thermal insulation which shall have a thickness not less than 25 mm with density of minimum 32 kg/m3 to 40 kg/m3. Facing used on insulation materials to provide vapour barrier shall be not more than 0.8 mm thick, and Class 1 for very low surface spread of flame when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 7.

Thermal insulation shall be applied to the insides of ductwork only where specified on the Working Drawings. The insulation material shall be cut to accurately fit the internal duct surfaces. The insulation shall be fastened to the duct using adhesive spread over the entire surface in combination with piercing fasteners finished flush with the insulation surface. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the edges of all internal insulation materials, whether exposed or butted against similar edges, are sealed and secured to the internal surfaces of the duct. They shall be protected with channel sheet metal of not less than 0.8 mm thickness and 13 mm width. Alternatively they may be provided with other suitable means of protection to prevent erosion, peeling and delamination up to maximum duct air velocity of 20 m/s.



Page 100/245

Where internal thermal insulation is required, it shall have a minimum acoustic performance as follows: -

Mid-0ctave frequency / Hz Absorption coefficient

63 0.05

125 0.10

250 0.35

500 0.60

1,000 0.70

2,000 0.75

4,000 0.80

8,000 0.75

At insulated duct entries /exits through an external building the insulation shall be weatherproofed for a distance not less than 100 mm beyond the outer face of the wall and be sealed watertight.

2.13.3 Application – Chilled Water Pipe work and Equipment

Thermal insulation shall be applied to chilled water pipe work and condensate drain water pipe work. Thermal insulation shall also be applied to pipe work for refrigerant except that on the high pressure side located in unconditioned space.

Segmental sections of insulation shall be applied which shall fit closely to the pipe work and other surface without gaps between joints. Each section of the pre-formed insulation shall be secured to the pipe by means of adhesive and over the insulation circumferential bands of non ferrous metal, plastic fabric or adhesive tape. Where more than one layer of insulation is required the joints shall be staggered.

Pipe work insulation shall comply with BS 476, BS 874, BS 4370 and BS 5422 and shall be rigid pre-formed section with integral reinforced aluminium foil laminated vapour barrier jacket, of suitable internal size to match the external dimension of piping to be insulated. It shall be capable of accommodating the temperature range for the system without structural failure of the fibres or the bonding agency. The insulation shall have a minimum density 64 kg/m3, a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.04 W/mK at 20 °C mean temperature. and a maximum moisture absorption 2% by volume.

Pumps, valves, flanges, strainers, glands, etc. shall be provided with insulation of similar type to that employed on rest of system (if appropriate to this purpose). These shall be fitted into aluminium sheet split boxes arranged for easy removal so that access to the pumps, valves, removable sections of insulated equipment etc., can readily be gained without damaging the general run of insulation.

Special arrangements shall be made at pumps and similar places so that easy access can be obtained for maintenance without damaging the insulation. Such removable covers shall be



Page 101/245

separately secured and two vapour barriers shall be provided, one to totally enclose the main insulation and the other to cover the removable insulation.

Flanges and other protrusions shall be insulated by fabricating oversize pre-formed sections ordered to suit the diameter of the flange or adjacent pipe insulation whichever is the greatest. The oversized section shall overlap on to the adjacent pipe insulation by a minimum of 75 mm on each side.

Insulation of pipe work in plant room shall be treated with two coats of an elastomeric polymer-based heavy duty mastic with reinforcing membrane to give a weather resistant finish. The approximate dry film thickness should not be less than 1 mm. Water vapour permeability should not be higher than 0.02 perms to ASTM E-96, Class 1 surface spread of flame to BS 476 Part 7.

Pre-formed slab materials shall be secured to chilled water containers and flat surfaces in the same manner as specified for ductwork

At insulated pipe work entries/exits into external buildings the insulation shall be weatherproofed for a distance not less than 100 mm beyond the outer face of the wall and be sealed watertight.

2.13.4 Vapour Barriers

Where thermal insulation is applied to the outside of piped and ducted services, equipment and plant used to convey, store and generate fluids or gases at temperatures lower than the design ambient dew point temperature, a water vapour barrier shall be provided. The separate type vapour barrier where employed shall be applied such that it is continuous and gives protection to the whole surface of the insulation which it protects.

It shall not be pierced or otherwise damaged by supports, or by the application of external cladding. The insulation on continuous pipe and duct shall be sectionalized by vapour barriers to be applied at, say, 5 m intervals to isolate condensation problems caused by perforation of external barrier to the affected section.

Unless otherwise specified the vapour barrier shall have a permeance value not exceeding 0.05 g/(MNs).

The material chosen for the vapour barrier and its method of application shall be as specified and compatible with the thermal insulation which it is to protect.

Where the vapour barrier is not specified the following may be used:

• Metal foil used alone or laminated to building paper, building sheet or plastics film with all joints adequately lapped and continuously vapour sealed,

• Elastomer sheets with all joints adequately overlapped and continuously sealed,

• Polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyisobutylene or other plastics tapes or sheets,

• Epoxide and polester resins,

• Sheet metal with all joints adequately overlapped and continuously sealed to a vapour-tight condition,



Page 102/245

• Wet-applied vapour barriers of the cut-back bitumen type, bitumen emulsions with or without elastomer latex, vinyl emulsions and solvent based polymers.

Facing materials used on insulation materials to provide vapour barrier shall be not more than 0.8 mm thick and of class 1 surface spread of flame when tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 7.

2.13.5 Identification of pipework

Identification coding for pipe work, including thermal insulation shall be in accordance with BS 1710. The colour specification for the paints shall be selected from the range of colours contained in BS 4800.

Insulated and uninsulated pipework that is painted or unpainted shall be identified by bands at least 25 mm wide or colour equilateral triangles of at least 150 mm side. The bands or triangles shall be placed and located to permit ready identification as follows: -

• At 8m intervals on straight runs,

• at all changes of direction,

• within 300 mm of all valves,

• within 300 mm of all equipment items,

• at all junction points and branches (unless end of branch is visible from junction),

• on all lines passing through walls and floors where lines are accessible and not visible from an identified main.

In addition to colour bands or triangles all pipe work and duct work in plant rooms and service areas, whether insulated or not shall be legibly marked with black or white letters and triangles to show the type of service and the direction of fluid flow. Direction-of-flow arrows and graphical symbols shall be stencilled in black on a regular white background.

Services shall be shown as follows:

• Chilled Water Supply CHWS

• Chilled Water Return CHWR

Closed circuit condenser cooling and chilled water pipes shall be prefixed with S and R to indicate 'SUPPLY' and 'RETURN' as applicable.

Letters and symbols shall be pipe nominal bore or 50 mm in height, whichever is the lesser.

Symbols shall conform to the legend on the Working Drawings

Identification colour schemes and a pipework service schematic shall be included in the O&M manuals

Pipework identification banding shall be applied after covering and/or protective and decorative painting is complete.



Page 103/245

2.13.6 Identification of ductwork

Identification coding for ductwork including thermal insulation shall be in accordance with DW/144. The colour specification for the paints shall be selected from the range of colours contained in BS 4800.

Insulated or uninsulated ductwork that is painted or unpainted shall be identified by bands at least 25mm wide or colour equilateral triangles of at least 150mm side. The bands or triangles shall be placed and located to permit ready identification of the airflow particularly adjacent to equipment positions, and at service junctions and wall penetrations. in a similar manner to pipework.

In addition to colour bands or triangles all pipe work and duct work in plant rooms and service areas, whether insulated or not shall be legibly marked with black or white letters and triangles to show the type of service and the direction of fluid flow. Direction-of-flow arrows and graphical symbols shall be stencilled in black on a regular white background.

Services shall be shown as follows:

• Supply Air SA

• Return Air RA

• Fresh Air FA

• Exhaust Air EA

• Smoke Extract SE

Ductwork shall be prefixed with S or R to indicate 'SUPPLY' and 'RETURN' as applicable.

Symbols shall conform to the legend on the Working Drawings

Identification colour schemes and a airflow schematic shall be included in the O&M manuals

Ductwork identification banding shall be applied after covering and/or protective and decorative painting is complete.

2.13.7 Identification of valves

All valves, except where adjacent to draw-off points, shall be fitted with a 60 mm diameter 'Traffolyte' disc. This shall either be arranged to fit above the hand wheel held in place with a locknut for all wheel operated valves or/and, in the case of plug cocks and other types of valves, attached to the valve by means of a brass chain or ring. The disc shall be engraved as required for coding purposes, the engraving being black on a white background.

Schedule a list of valves numerically.

2.13.8 Labels

Provide labels for marking all valves, pipework, dampers, fuses, terminals, lamps, switches, handles, keys, instruments, gauges, control and other equipment, etc. and elsewhere to facilitate maintenance with engraved multi-layer Formica or similar labels.



Page 104/245

The labelling shall include instructions for oiling and/or greasing of all bearings, motors, etc. which shall be attached to the relevant greasing or oiling point.

All labels shall be of adequate size to give clearance between lettering and fixings so as to ensure an aesthetic arrangement on completion. Pipeline labels shall generally be not smaller than 100 mm x 20 mm.

Where applicable, labels shall be fixed utilising C.P. brass round head bolts and nuts or woodscrews. Adhesives or P.K. screws are not acceptable.

For pipelines or valves where applicable, labels shall be fixed by means of a key ring in each upper corner suspended from chain loops over the relevant pipe.

All lettering used on labels shall be "Helvetica Bold" capitals (except where indicating metric units or directed) with black letters on white labels for normal purposes. Where special colours or details are required these will be particularly specified or directed.

All lettering shall be in English. Heights of lettering shall be as follows:

• Pipelines, valves, motor valves, doors, etc 8 mm

• Greasing instruction for motors, bearings, etc 6 mm

• Sensors, pressure gauges, general instructions, etc 4 mm

For electrical panels or other items lettering shall be black on white for normal purposes, red letters on white where connected to essential supply or green letters on white where operated by direct current.

For electrical components the lettering heights shall be as follows:

• Identifying equipment in cabinets 4 mm

• Door cabinets 8 mm

• Switches & indicators on panel faces 3 mm

Where proprietary rail mounted terminals are utilised in electrical cabinets the manufacturer’s standard "clip-in" identification tabs shall be used.

2.14 PAINTING

2.14.1 General requirements

All pipes, ferrous supports, gantries, brackets and steelwork in the Contract works other than those indicated to be left as finished such as stainless steel, anodised aluminium etc. shall be painted in accordance with this section of the Specification. All painted surfaces shall receive at least one primer coat and two coats of the finishing colour unless otherwise specified.

Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the use of any product.



Page 105/245

Insulated pipes and ducts concealed in false ceilings or ducts not normally accessible need not be painted but must be colour coded.

Uninsulated pipes, whether concealed or normally visible, must be painted in the appropriate colour code and appropriate colour code bands.

All pipes and ducts supports where not exposed shall be given double coating of primer. All pipes and ducts supports that are exposed and in the plant rooms shall be coated with one under coat of primer and two coats of the finishing colour.

Primer coats shall be brush applied. Topcoats may be brush or roller applied. Due to the nature of the surfaces to be painted, spray painting shall not be allowed unless this is carried out at the works. Any limitations on temperature and humidity for paint application , as advised by the paint manufacturer, shall be adhered to.

Surfaces painted prior to delivery to site shall be repaired as necessary after erection.

Unless noted otherwise, topcoats for all surfaces shall be oil based paint with a semi-gloss finish.

2.14.2 Ferrous Surfaces

Ferrous metals shall be primed before delivery to site. After all welding, drilling and fabrication, but before installation, the surfaces shall be prepared, thoroughly wire brushed to remove all scale and loose rust and painted with one coat of zinc rich primer to BS 4652. After installation the primer shall be touched up, one under-coat and two finishing coats of oil paint shall be applied.

Galvanised surfaces shall be primed using an etch primer suitable for the surface. Painting and preparation procedures shall be as for other ferrous surfaces.

2.14.3 Copper Surfaces

Where exposed copper is specified to be painted, it shall be washed with soap and warm water, rubbed down with coarse emery cloth and one coat of a solution of 1 part acetone to 2 parts benzole shall be applied prior to priming. Unpainted copper surfaces shall be polished bright and coated with a suitable heat resisting clear synthetic varnish.

2.14.4 Insulated Surfaces

Thermal insulation exposed to view (including that within plant rooms) shall be painted except where the insulation is protected by aluminium foil or self coloured sheet, plastic film or a weather-proof finish.

An undercoat and not less than two finishing coats shall be applied. Absorbent surfaces shall also receive an initial coat of priming paint. All paints shall be compatible with the surfaces to which they are applied.



Page 106/245

2.15 PIPE WORK

2.15.1 General

This Section specifies the manufacture, installation and material requirements of pipe work systems.

The scope of the works for the pipe work systems shall include for the design of all elements of the works inclusive of system pressure losses, supports, expansion and structural movement etc.

Areas of commonality to all pipe work systems are described first, followed by the specific requirements for particular pipe work materials and applications.

2.15.2 Standards

• ANSI B16.9: Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings

• ANSI B16.21: Nonmetallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

• ANSI B31.1: Power Piping

• ASME B16.1: Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

• ASME B16.5: Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

• ASTM A234: Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Services

• ASTM A181: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General – Purpose Piping

• ASTM A53: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

• ASTM B16: Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for use in Screw Machines

• ASTM B88: Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

• ASTM D2000: Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

• ASTM F1476-07: Standard specification for performance of gasketed mechanical couplings for use in piping applications.

• ASTM F1548-01(2006): Standard specification for the performance of fittings for use with gasketed mechanical couplings used in piping applications.

• BS 143 & 1256: Malleable Cast Iron and Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Pipe Fittings

• BS 416: Discharge and Ventilating Pipes and Fittings, Sand-Cast or Spun-In Cast Iron



Page 107/245

• BS 437: Cast Iron Spigot and Socket Drain Pipes and Fittings

• BS 476: Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures

• BS 864: Capillary and Compression Tube Fittings of Copper and Copper Alloy

• BS 1387: Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes and Tubulars and for Plained End Steel Tubes Suitable for Welding or for Screwing to BS21 Pipe Threads

• BS 1965: Butt Welding Pipe Fittings for Pressure Purposes

• BS 2494: Elastomeric Seals for Joints in Pipework and Pipelines

• BS 2871 Part 2: Copper and Copper Alloys, Tubes Part 2: Tubes for General Purposes

• BS 3505: Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC-U) Pressure Pipes for Cold Potable Water

• BS 3506: Unplasticized PVC Pipe for Industrial Purposes

• BS 3600: Specification for Dimensions and Masses Per Unit Length of Welded and Seamless Steel Pipes and Tubes for Pressure Purposes

• BS 3601: Carbon Steel Pipes and Tubes with Specified Room Temperature Properties for Pressure Purposes

• BS 3974: Pipe Supports

• BS 4346: Joints and Fittings for use with Unplasticized PVC Pressure Pipes

• BS 4504: Circular Flanges for Pipes, Valves and Fittings (PN Designated)

• BS 4865: Dimension of Gaskets for Flanges to BS 4504

• BS 5255: Thermoplastic Waste Pipe and Fittings

• BS 5422: Method for Specifying Thermal Insulating Materials on Pipes, Ductwork and Equipment (In Temperature Range 40 Degrees Celsius to +700 Degrees Celsius)

• BS CP 2010: Codes of Practice for Pipelines

• BS EN 287: Part 1: Approval Testing of Welders for Fusion Welding: steels.

• BS EN 545: Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings, Accessories and Their Joints for Water Pipelines - Requirements and Test Methods

• BS EN 598: Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings, Accessories and Their Joints for Sewerage Applications - Requirements and Test Methods

• BS EN 1057: Copper and Copper Alloys - Seamless, Round Copper Tubes for Water and Gas in Sanitary and Heating Applications



Page 108/245

2.15.3 Protection and Storage

All ungalvanised steel pipework shall be delivered to site painted with one coat of protective zinc phosphate primer.

All stored pipes shall be properly supported clear of the ground on stable and secure pipe racks and suitably covered to protect them from the weather (vinyl sheet or similar).

No pipe or material of any kind shall be placed inside another pipe or fitting if any lining or coating has been applied to either.

Plastic pipe and components shall be protected from direct sunlight.

Rubber or compound gaskets, sleeves and adhesives not for immediate installation shall be stored in a cool area and protected from direct sunlight.

During storage all pipes shall have end covers fitted to prevent the ingress of any unwanted particles or waste.

2.15.4 Cutting and Handling of Pipe

Transport of pipe lengths to the point of installation shall be so arranged that neither spigots nor socket ends nor flanges become damaged.

Care shall be taken not to damage pipe lining and coatings. Any pipes damaged in cutting or handling shall be rejected. Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the barrel of the pipe. The interior of pipes, valves and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being placed in position and shall be kept clean during laying or fixing operations by plugging or other suitable method.

Cuts in all pipes shall be made square to the axis of pipes and all burrs and other irregularities removed by reaming and filing before fixing.

Pipe cuts at valves and special castings shall be accurately made to bring all valves, castings and other fitments to their correct positions.

At the end of the working day all exposed pipe work ends should be covered or wrapped to avoid the ingress of dust.

Cuts in, or damaged areas of, galvanised pipe work shall be repaired utilising a zinc rich repair procedure.

2.15.5 Installation General

Material specifications and standards for the pipe work for the various parts of the chilled water circuit are contained in the ECS Equipment Datasheets. Design and construction of pipelines shall be in accordance with CP 2010: Part 2 and BS EN14161 or equivalent standard.

All chilled water and condenser pipe work shall be steel pipe jointed as indicated in this specification. Pipe work up to NB 65 shall be to BS 1387 or API 5L. Above NB 65 pipe work shall be API 5L or ASTM A53/A53M.



Page 109/245

All chilled water and condenser pipe work in service trenches shall be galvanised to the same specification. In addition, chilled water pipe work shall be insulated and metal clad (in plant rooms only) after pressure test.

All refrigerant pipe work shall be installed in accordance with the Safety Code of the Institute of Refrigeration. Interconnecting refrigerant pipe work shall be as described in Section of this Specification

The pipe work installation for the ECS system shall be neat and tidy, with adequate spacing between pipes, valves and joints. Pipe work shall be run parallel whether running in straight routes or turning through bends. No formed bends shall be made that shall alter the internal diameter of the pipe.

Particular care shall be taken that all pipe work is erected and secured truly parallel with the building structure, clear of obstructions, preserving head room and keeping passageways clear and that all vertical drops are plumb.

Wherever possible, horizontal pipes shall be fixed to ’fall’ to aid venting and draining down of the pipe work. Eccentric reducing sockets shall be used on horizontal runs of pipe to prevent the formation of air pockets. On vertical pipes, concentric reducing sockets shall be used. Drain outlets shall be provided at low points of the system to enable emptying and to facilitate maintenance and repair of the pipe work.

Automatic air vents shall be provided at each high point of the water line and discharge pipe shall be terminated at 50 mm above floor drain.

Refrigerant suction lines shall be pitched towards compressor.

Traps for all refrigerant line suction risers shall be installed.

All pipes shall be provided with sufficient floor clearance to permit cleaning beneath them. Where pipes pass through walls and floors, sleeves shall be fitted to allow free axial movement of pipes. Sleeve shall be of a material compatible with the pipe.

Pipe runs, where exposed, shall be positioned at least 25 mm from the finished wall surfaces, so as to enable subsequent cleaning and painting of all surfaces. Where pipe runs are installed at an angle, they shall be positioned 40mm from the finished surfaces. Multiple pipe runs shall ensure that adequate access is provided to access flanges and equipment for maintenance.

Accessible pipes shall be flanged or union connected in sections of three nominal lengths of pipe for ease of dismantling. Pipes with screwed joints shall be installed with hexagon unions at suitable positions for easy removal of equipment. All pipe installations shall be provided with removable sections to assist in pipe-cleaning operations.

Where pipes pass through walls and floors, sleeves shall be fitted to allow free axial movement of the pipes. Sleeves shall be of a material compatible with the pipe and of length to finish flush with the finished wall and where passing through floors of a length to protrude 50 mm above and below the finished floor and soffit.

Chromium wall and floor plates shall be fitted where appearance is of importance to provide a neat appearance and close any penetration gaps.



Page 110/245

All pipes passing through the roof shall be provided with 2.24 mm lead flashing sandwiched between the layers of waterproofing roofing membrane, and secured to the pipe with a galvanised spring clip. In the case of pipes passing through external walls and into water-containing chambers, puddle flanges shall be provided with the water bearing side of the flange adequately caulked. Puddle flanges shall also be installed at each end of service trenches.

All site welding shall be carried out with pipe work unrestrained followed by application of appropriate protective coating, externally. Site welding shall be applied with pipework unrestrained and each joint hydraulically tested at 1.5 times working pressure plus 350 kPa for 60 minutes without loss of pressure followed by application of appropriate protective coating, both internally and externally, prior to final installation.

All pipes on straight runs shall be lined up with facilities for pipes to be rotated for the process of welding joints in order to exclude bottom welding as far as possible.

Wherever possible, horizontal pipes shall be fixed to a ‘fall’ to aid venting and draining down of the pipe work. Eccentric reducing sockets shall be used on horizontal runs of pipe to prevent the formation of air pockets. On vertical pipes, concentric reducing sockets shall be used.

Pipe work shall rest freely upon supports and be carefully aligned prior to final connection.

Damage to coatings or linings during material transport or site handling shall be repaired before installation of the pipework and fittings commences. All pipe runs when not buried underground shall be concealed as far as possible by careful positioning or shall be chased into walls, or laid in screeds except inside plant rooms. All pipes which are to be concealed shall be tested before being covered.

All incoming supply water pipes connected to the water supply network shall be provided with an appropriate length of UPVC pipe as specified on the Drawings to isolate stray current being transmitted to other areas.

All overflow and warning pipes of all water storage tanks shall be unplasticized PVC pipe to BS EN1452

2.15.6 Cleaning Procedures

• Precautions shall be taken to avoid introducing foreign matter such as welding beads and slag or dirt into the piping system. Completed welds shall be hammered to loosen debris. Prior to assembly, all piping, valves and fittings shall be internally cleaned of oil, grease and dirt by wire brush and swabs.

• Following fabrication and installation, all piping shall be cleaned by flushing with clean water, run to waste, until thoroughly free of all dirt, oil and cuttings. Generally, each size of pipe shall be flushed separately before being joined with larger size piping.

• All cleaning operations shall be continuous throughout the piping system, except at joints required for final jointing of various sections of cleaned piping. After cleaning and until final joints are made, the end of sections of piping shall be tightly sealed off to prevent any dirt, water and other foreign matter from entering the pipes.

• All strainers shall be inspected and thoroughly cleaned. Temporary strainers shall be provided where required for cleaning and flushing operations.



Page 111/245

• Prior to start-up, final cleaning out of chilled water systems shall be carried out by circulation with chemical solution.

2.15.7 Installation

Steel welded fittings shall be of the same weight as the piping with which they are to be used complying with ANSI B16.9 and ASTM A234. Welded elbows shall be used at changes in the direction of the pipe work. Welded tees shall be used for branches of the same size as the main pipe. Long radius reducing elbows shall be used at pumps. Reducing outlet tees shall be used for branches of smaller size than main pipe. Where the branch size is three or more pipe sizes smaller than the main pipe, steel gussets to provide full pipe strength shall be used. Where a branch is connected to screwed piping, a steel welded threaded socket shall be used. Eccentric welding reducing fittings shall be used at changes in pipe size for horizontal piping, with top level for water piping.

2.15.8 Expansion Bellows

Bellows expansion joints shall be provided for expansion and contraction in the pipe work and also provided where the pipes cross construction expansion joints, construction interfaces such as station/back of house areas and any other construction areas of differential expansion. The expansion joints shall be capable of absorbing axial and lateral movements.

Confirmation shall be obtained from the proposed expansion joint manufacturer on the suitable choice of joints.

Expansion bellows shall be of the axial pattern and shall be provided with screwed or flanged ends as appropriate. They shall incorporate internal liners if required and shall be manufactured from stainless steel or other suitable material appropriate to the duty and shall be designed to withstand the test pressure of the system. Bellows shall be capable of not less than 12,000 complete cycles of movement over the designed working range without failure.

All bellows expansion joints shall be provided with external protection where exposed to damage.

Bellows shall be installed so that they are not subjected to stresses other than those for which they are designed. They shall be installed so that they are in their free position at a temperature midway between high and low limits of normal service.

Articulated joints shall be provided by two sets of bellows with ends joined by hinged links. Linkages shall be free moving and via bushed holes and SS pins/bolts. Articulated joints may be made up of two sets of angular joints with a length of straight pipe in between. Brackets and supports shall be designed to ensure that sufficient movement is provided for the full capability of the joint.

Bellow expansion joints shall be provided for expansion and contraction in the pipe work and also provided where the pipes cross construction expansion joints. The expansion joints shall be capable of absorbing axial and lateral movements.

2.15.9 Jointing – general requirements

Jointing of steel pipes below 65 mm diameter shall be carried out using screwed joints. Welded joints shall be used for steel pipes above 65 mm and welded fittings shall be used for all changes in direction of piping



Page 112/245

Pipes shall be cut in a neat manner without damaging the pipe. Cutting shall be done with a suitable type of mechanical cutter. Wheel cutters shall be used when practicable. Pipe ends shall be reamed to remove burrs.

Joints shall be in accordance with Clause 3.2.3 of CP 2010: Part 2 and BS EN14161 or equivalent standard.

For special applications in which couplings are required for jointing plain end pipes, slip-on-type couplings specified in CP 2010: Part 2 Appendix B or similar couplings shall be used.

Electrically insulated joints shall be provided to all piping entering the stations, connections to the city make up pipes.

Branch connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch outlets.

All pipe jointing systems used shall comply with the requirements of the following clause.

Flanges and bolting for pipes, valves and fittings shall comply with BS 4504: Part 1 PN16, or to other higher ratings as required by the system for which they are used.

Flanges and unions shall be faced true. Flanges shall be provided with suitable gaskets, and made square and tight.

Where flanged joints are required for jointing galvanized steel pipes, galvanized steel screwed boss flanges complying with BS 4504: Part 1 Table 16/4 or galvanized malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges complying with BS 4504: Part 1 Table 16/13 shall be used.

Screw joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut. Joints shall be made tight with a stiff mixture of litharge and glycerine, or polytetrafluoroethylene tape, or other suitable thread joint compound applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up.

Before welding, the component parts to be welded shall be aligned so that no strain is placed on the weld when finally positioned. Align the height so that no part of the pipe wall is offset by more than 20% of the wall thickness. Flanges and branches shall be set true. Alignment shall be preserved during the welding operation.

All defective welds shall be removed and replaced. Repairing of defective welds by adding new material over the defective welds or by peeling will not be permitted.

Electrodes shall be stored in a dry area and kept free of moisture or dampness. During fabrication operations the electrodes shall be stored in a heated container. Electrodes that have lost part of their coating shall not be used.

Joints of the plastic covered pipes shall be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.

Soldered joints, unless otherwise specified shall use, 95-5 solder, and suitable flux.

Refrigerant and control air piping: Silver brazing alloy with suitable flux and AWS, class BCuP-5 shall be used.



Page 113/245

Flanges and unions shall be faced true. Flanges with suitable gaskets shall be provided and made square and tight. Except where copper tubing is used, union or flange joints shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each place of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI B16.21 and ASTM D 2000 or equivalent IS codes.

2.15.10 Jointing of Welded Steel Piping

Welded joints shall be fusion-weld in accordance with ANSI B31.3, unless otherwise stated. Welded fittings shall be used when changing direction of piping. Mitring or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar construction shall not be permitted.

Steel welded fittings shall be of the same weight as the piping with which they are to be used, ANS1, D-16.9 and ASTM, A-234. Welded elbows shall be used at changes in direction of piping. Welded tees shall be used for branches of the same size as the main pipe. Long-radius reducing elbows shall be used at pumps. Reducing outlet tees shall be used for branches of smaller size than main pipe. Where the branch size is three or more pipe sizes smaller than the main pipe, steel gussets to provide full pipe strength, shall be used.

Where a branch is connected to screwed piping steel welded threaded sockets shall be used. Eccentric welding reducing fittings shall be used at changes in pipe size for horizontal piping, with top level to enable adequate air venting of the pipe work.

Field and shop bevels shall be in accordance with the recognized standards and shall be carried out be mechanical means or flame cutting. Where bevelling is carried out by flame cutting, the metal surfaces shall be cleaned of scale and oxidation prior to welding.

Steel piping shall be mill-bevelled on both ends to 37.5° before welding.

Weld spacing on all butt welds shall comply with the following table:

Nominal pipe wall thickness Spacing Bevel

6.35 mm or less 3 mm 37 ½ °

Over 6.35 mm to 19.5 mm 5 mm 37 ½ °

Backing rings shall be used on all butt-welded joints.

Before starting any welding, all corrosion products and other foreign material from surfaces to be welded shall be removed by scraping, brushing, chipping and swabbing as may be required. The component parts to be welded are to be aligned so that no strain is placed on the weld when finally positioned. Align the height so that no part of the pipe wall is offset by more than 20% of the wall thickness. Flanges and branches shall be set true. Alignment shall be preserved during the welding operation.

After deposition, each layer of weld metal shall be cleaned to remove all slag and scale by wire brushing and grinding and chipped where necessary to prepare for deposition of next layer. Welded reinforcement shall be not less than 1.6 mm nor more than 3.18 mm above the normal



Page 114/245

surface of joined sections. Reinforcement shall be crowned at centre and tapered on each side of surfaces being joined. Exposed surfaces of weld shall present workmanlike appearance and be free of depressions below surface to joined members.

Weld metal shall be thoroughly fused with base metal at all sections of weld. Penetration of weld shall include unbevelled portion and extend to inside walls of pipe.

All production welds shall be inspected visually.

Electrodes shall be stored in a dry area and kept free of moisture or dampness. During fabrication operations the electrodes shall be stored in a heated container. Electrodes that have lost part of their coating shall not be used.

2.15.11 Screwed Steel Joints

Screw joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut. Joints shall be made tight with a stiff mixture of litharge and glycerine, or polytetra fluoroethylene tape, or other suitable thread joint compound applied to the made threads only.

2.15.12 Jointing of Copper Piping

Copper tubing shall use union or flange joints in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI B16.21 and ASTM D 2000.

Joints in copper tubing shall be cut square, ends shall be reamed, and all filings and dust wiped from the interior of pipe. Solder joints shall have solder applied and drawn through the full fitting length. Excess solder shall be wiped from the joint before the solder hardens. Soldered joints, unless otherwise specified shall use, 95-5 solder, ASTM B-32, and suitable flux.

Joints for copper piping shall be by lap joints in general, and shall use standard jointing sleeves for pneumatic piping of diameter less than or equal to 9.6mm. There shall be no leakage of fluid at the joint under normal operating pressures.

Unless otherwise specified, soldered joint fittings shall be used on hard-drawn and annealed tubing. Compression or flared fittings shall be used on annealed tubing only.

Joints to copper or steel connections shall be made using the appropriate adapters. Connections between ferrous piping and copper piping shall be electrically isolated from each other with dielectric couplings or fittings.

2.15.13 Flanges

Flanges and unions shall be faced true. Flanges with suitable gaskets shall be provided and made square and tight. Except where copper tubing is used, union or flange joints shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each place of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items. Gaskets shall conform to ANSI B16.21 and ASTM D 2000 or equivalent IS code.

Flanges and bolting for pipes, valves and fittings shall comply with BS 4504-3.1 PN16, an equivalent standard, or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in.



Page 115/245

Flanges and unions shall be faced true. Flanges shall be provided with suitable gaskets, and made square and tight.

Flanged joints for jointing steel screwed pipes, galvanised steel screwed boss flanges complying with BS4504-3.1 Table 16/4 or galvanized malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges complying with BS4504-3.1 Table 16/13 shall be used.

Flanges for welded steel piping shall be steel, welding neck pattern, 150 (1035 kPa) or 300 (2070 kPa) WSP class, ASME B-16.5, ASTM A181, Grade 1, or BS 4504 shall be used.

Flanges and flanged fittings on screwed wrought-iron piping shall be cast iron, standard weight, ASME B-16.1; Extra-heavy weight ASME B-16.2 shall use used.

Flanges for copper tubing shall be copper slip-on flanges for brazing, to BS 4504.

UPVC/ABS piping: complying with BS 4504 or JIS 10K shall be used.

2.15.14 Gaskets

Gaskets shall be suitable for the temperature, service and pressure of system, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Made up flanged joints shall be fabricated from one-piece ring gaskets, 3 mm thick, neoprene rubber.

Flanged joints between dissimilar metals or insulating flange joints: Insulating gaskets, sleeves and washers between flanges, bolts and nuts respectively shall be used. Insulating material: similar to “Teflon” or suitable equal shall be used.

Joint rings and gaskets shall comply with the requirements of BS 2494, BS 10 Table E or BS EN 1514 but other materials may be used if they have been proved to be more suitable for their duty as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.15.15 Pipe work Hangers and Supports

Supports General

• Unless otherwise specified or indicated, all brackets, stays, frames, fixed and roller supports and hangers necessary to carry and support all pipes and valves shall be provided.

• Structural steel required for proper installation shall be provided. All pipe supports shall be steel, adjustable for height and prime coated with rustoleum, except copper tubing which shall have brass or gun metal brackets.

• Piping shall be supported independently from all equipment so that equipment is not stressed by the weight of the pipe or expansion.

• Valves or other heavy items of pipe work equipment shall be fitted as near as practicable to a point of support, or fitted with their own supports.

• In general, all supports, hangers, anchors and fixing accessories shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Galvanized iron bolts and nuts shall not be used for fixing copper flanges.

• Design of the hangers shall be compatible with pipe or tubing to be supported.



Page 116/245

All pipe work shall be supported adequately in such a manner to permit free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction by means of clips, hangers, and brackets, except as otherwise noted on the Working Drawings.

All brackets, stays, frames, fixed and roller supports and hangers, necessary to carry and steady all pipes and valves shall be supplied and installed.

Hanger support intervals not exceed the spacing given in the ECS Equipment Datasheets for pipes and fittings.

All pipes supports shall be steel and coated with zinc rich primer.

Supports shall only be attached to structural framing members. Where supports are required between structural framing members, a suitable intermediate metal framing shall be provided. Piping shall be supported independently from all equipment so that equipment is not stressed by piping weight or expansion. Valves or other heavy items of pipework equipment shall be fitted as near as practicable to a point of support, or fitted with their own supports.

Hangers, supports, guides and anchors all of a design to allow expansion and contraction within stress limits of codes for pressure piping shall be in accordance with Power Piping, ANSI B-31.1. Section 1. Supports shall be located to ensure that pipe work branches of fittings are not restrained by the support during expansion or contraction of the pipe work service.

Contact of dissimilar materials shall be avoided. Mild steel piping shall have steel supporting member actually in contact with the pipe. Copper piping shall have contacts of copper or copper alloy or where mild steel clamp saddles are used, a plastic lining interposed. Copper of copper alloy supporting members having plastic linings. Pipes shall be supported on either side of changes of direction and pipeline mounted equipment.

Vertical piping shall be guided or supported in the centre of each riser with steel to brackets to prevent swaying, sagging, vibration and resonance. Strain that causes lines to snake or buckle between supports or anchors shall be avoided.

Where piping is subject to a vertical movement due to thermal expansion of 3mm or more, hangers shall be of variable spring design. Variations of hanger force during operation shall range between 85% and 120% of actual load.

Pipe work shall be supported so as to permit free movement due to expansion and contraction and also permit piping runs to be readily dismantled. Pipe work supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction. Each support should take its due proportion of the load. The spacing of the supports shall not exceed the centres given.

The pipe work and anchor system shall be designed to resist the maximum stresses including test pressure. The anchor fixing points for steel pipe work shall preferably be welded to the pipe work. Where it is impractical to weld the anchor fixings to the pipe work, cast iron/steel clamps with at least two stirrup bolts shall be provided with sufficient thread to ensure an effective grip on the pipe. The point (building/steelwork) to which the pipe is to be anchored shall be provided with all necessary cleats, brackets and steelwork required for anchor points.

Where there are two or more pipes are to be supported together, the support spacing shall be based on centres required by the smallest bore pipe work. No more than two pipes may be supported from a single drop rod support. Lateral supports to be provided where necessary.



Page 117/245

All supports shall be fixed so that full thickness of lagging can be applied in all places where applicable.

Pipes fixed to walls or floors both vertically and horizontally shall be supported by brackets fixed to walls or supported from the floor.

All pipes in ducts shall rest on rollers and chairs, hangers and as such shall be suitably arranged and supported to allow for expansion and contraction. All supports shall be fixed so that the full thickness of lagging can be applied in all places.

Pipe work supports and hangers shall be generally to BS 3974 Parts 1 and 2. The installer may use a substitute for the described support hangers, a proprietary system of pipe supports and brackets.

Generally, all supports, hangers, anchors and fixing accessories shall be hot-dip galvanised after fabrication and provided. For items which are required to be attached to the surface of the building fabric provide competent labour and suitable equipment for drilling and securing the support of fixing accessory.

Hangers shall be provided with the compatible size, or nearest manufactured size available as the pipe or tubing for which they are to be used.

The supports shall be of sound construction and shall be adequate for the weight to be carried and shall permit free expansion and good appearance and also permit piping runs to be readily dismantled where appropriate.

Insulated pipe shall be supported using galvanized steel half round protective shields. Angle or plate type insulation supports, welded to pipes at approximately 3.5 m intervals for vertical piping 100 mm, and larger, shall be provided. Where hangers and/or supports occur along a run of chilled insulated pipes, a segmental section of hardwood or high density phenolic insulation approximately 100 mm long shall be inserted, the outer diameter being identical to that of the insulated pipe and the ends thereof facing tight to the pipe.

Piping supports shall not exceed the following spacing: -

(a) Steel Pipe

Size of Pipe (mm) Maximum Intervals for Vertical Runs (m)

Maximum Intervals for Horizontal Runs (m)

15 2.5 1.8

20-25 3.0 2.5

32 3.0 2.7

40-50 3.6 3.0

65-80 4.5 3.6

100 4.5 4.0



Page 118/245

(b) Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe



15 2.5 1.8

(c) Copper Pipe (Hot and Cold Water)



22 and below 1.8 1.2

28-35 2.4 1.8

42-67 3.0 2.4

76 and above 3.7 3.0

(d) Copper Pipe (Refrigerant and Compressed Air)




22-28 1.8 1.2

35 and above 2.4 2.5

(e) UPVC or ABS Pipe




25-32 1.1 0.9

40-80 1.4 1.2

100-150 1.8 1.2

225 and above 2.1 1.5

150 and above 5.5 4.5



Page 119/245

2.15.16 Protective Coatings and Linings - General

Buried steel pipes shall be protected against corrosion by treating with two coats of good quality bituminous paint and fully wrapped with a suitable weatherproof tape before laying.

Under special circumstances, such as in ground containing industrial wastes, refuse, ashes, clinker, or in aggressive water-logged clays, additional external protection shall be provided.

After installation, sections of surface mounted pipeline including pipe supports shall be painted in accordance with the Section concerned with Painting of this Specification.

Where the pipeline is intended to convey corrosive liquids, an internal bituminous coating or cement mortar lining shall be provided.

2.15.17 Protective Coatings and Linings - Particular

For buried ductile iron pipes complying with BS EN 545 or BS EN 598, bituminous coating against corrosion shall be provided for the pipes and at joints where steel is used for bolts and nuts.

Pipes and fittings shall be coated by either dipping in a bath containing a composition having a tar base or dipping in a bath containing a cold solution consisting of a mixture of natural bitumen with a suitable hardener and natural asphalt.

Where copper pipe work is required to be chromium plated, such pipe work shall b e sent to a specialist for plating after all pulled bends and soldered joints are completed.

2.15.18 Pipe work Insulation

Insulation for ECS pipe work shall be provided in accordance with the Section concerned with Insulation of this Specification.

Thermal insulation shall be applied to all hot water circulation pipe work and storage heaters.

Dead legs and underground pipe work shall not be insulated.

Insulation shall not be installed on any pipe work prior to pressure testing.

Immediately prior to applying insulation, all pipe work surfaces shall be cleaned free of dust, rust, scale and grease, and then thoroughly dried. Under no circumstances shall insulation be applied to wet surfaces.

Sections shall be butted firmly together at all joints ensuring that fibres in connected sections interlock to form a continuous barrier to heat transmission.

Sections shall be secured to pipe work using aluminium fixing bands. Insulation damaged by cutting or distortion due to being pulled up too tight will be rejected.

The insulation at bends shall be cut into segments and fixed by bandaging with fibreglass scrim glued in position.



Page 120/245

Where valves, flanges or strainers are not insulated, insulation shall be coned down providing sufficient clearance from fixing bolts to permit their removal without damaging the insulation.

For all concealed pipes, the insulation shall be of a non-combustible material in accordance with BS 476 and as follows:-

Flame spread rating not exceeding zero;

Smoke development rating not exceeding zero; and

Fuel contribution rating not exceeding three.

2.15.19 Welding

Preparation for welding shall comply with the following requirements:-

Welding of steel

Backing rings shall be used on all butt-welded joints.

Before starting any welding, all corrosion products and other foreign material from surfaces to be welded shall be removed by scraping, brushing, chipping and swabbing.

Welding process: Welding shall be carried out by either manual shielded metallic arc process or automatic submerged arc process using direct current. All pipeline welding shall conform to Chapter 4, Section VI, "Welding of Pipe Joints", of ANSI Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI B31.1, and in accordance with latest accepted practice applicable to the particular service.

Welding operation: Electrodes, voltage, current, thickness and number of passes or beads, shall be as previously specified. After deposition, each layer of weld metal shall be cleaned to remove all slag and scale by wire brushing and grinding and chipped where necessary to prepare for deposition of the next layer. Welded reinforcement shall be not less than 1.6 mm nor more than 3.18 mm above the normal surface of sections being welded. Reinforcement shall be crowned at centre and tapered on each side of surfaces being jointed. Exposed surfaces of weld shall present workmanlike appearance and be free of depressions below surface of jointed members.

Weld metal shall be thoroughly fused with base metal at all sections of weld. Penetration of weld shall include unbevelled portion and extend to inside walls of pipe.

Inspection: All welds shall be inspected both visually and using water pressure tests.

Certification on the qualification of each welder shall be submitted.

2.15.20 Brazing of copper tubing.

Silver brazed joints for refrigerant and compressed air piping. Nitrogen in tubes shall be used to prevent oxidation during brazing. Joints for other system shall be made with 95-5 tin antimony or 95-5 tin-lead solder.

The outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be tinned at the point of contact before joining. Overheated tubes shall be cleaned and fittings shall not be overheated before



Page 121/245

joining. Solder type valves shall be disassembled before silver brazing and valve bodies shall be kept cool by use of damp cloths.

Refrigerant suction lines shall be pitched towards compressor.

Traps for all refrigerant line suction risers shall be installed.

2.15.21 Testing

At Site after Installation

All pipe work, except chilled water pipe which is specified below, including valves and fittings shall be hydrostatically pressure tested to 1.5 times the duty head of the system or 1.5 times the closed delivery valve pressure of the pump, whichever is the highest. The pressure shall be held for a minimum period of 24 hours.

Hydrostatic testing shall be carried out on all piping. Preliminary tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that the work is satisfactory. Testing shall be carried out before insulating or concealing any piping takes place. Defects disclosed by tests shall be repaired and the complete test repeated. If required tests shall be carried out in stages facilitate work of others.

Unless otherwise specified, chilled water piping shall be tested hydrostatically to 1553 kPa. Tests shall be for a two hours duration, during which time piping shall show no leaks and during which time no sealing of leaks shall be permitted. Equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures shall be isolated. Blind flanges, bypass valves and piping shall be used as required during testing.

Refrigerant pipe work when completed shall be pressure tested by nitrogen gas in two or more steps up to 28 bar and maintained for at least 24 hours. Prior to charging any additional refrigerant as necessary into the system, it shall be vacuum dried. A vacuum test of 1 mm of mercury shall be applied to the pipe work and held for 8 hours. The vacuum shall not rise beyond 2 mm of mercury during the 8 hour test.

2.15.22 ECS Pipe work

The following pipe work material shall be used for systems listed below:

Services Pipe work Class

Chilled/ condenser water pipe work A

Condensate drain, feed & expansion, overflow,

vent, drain pipe work B

Chemical feed pipe work C

Refrigerant pipe work D

Compressed air pipe work D



Page 122/245

Pipe work Material Class

Pipe work Nominal Specification

Class Bore (mm)

A 15-150 Black steel to IS 1239 heavy grade

200 & above Heavy grade, Class C, min. thickness 6mm, IS3589

B 15-150 Galvanized steel to IS 1239 medium grade

C 10-200 Unplasticized PVC to BS EN1452 Class E min

D 6-150 Note 2

Note 1

Black carbon steel manufactured by electric resistance welded (ERW) using 430 MPa grade steel to BS 3600 and BS 3601 for 200 mm diameter to 500 mm diameter; and manufactured by submerged arc welded for 600 mm diameter and above Minimum wall thickness for pipes to BS 3600/3601 shall be:

200-300 mm dia.: 6.3 mm

350-400 mm dia.: 8.0 mm

450-600 mm dia.: 9.5 mm

700-800 mm dia.: 12.5 mm

Note 2

Copper pipe of refrigeration quality to BS 2871: Part 2 table 2 for refrigerant pipe and compressed air/pneumatic control pipe. Main air piping between compressed air plants, electric/pneumatic panels, etc. shall be of hard tempered copper. Pneumatic piping inside E/P panels and for final connection to equipment shall be of soft tempered refrigeration type copper piping. All copper piping for pneumatic control shall have LSHF oversheath for protection against moisture.

The following methods of jointing straight pipe work shall be employed:

Pipe work

Class Joint

A Screwed sockets or welded joints for sizes up to 50 mm. Butt welded joints for pipe work 65 mm and above.

B Screwed socket joint for sizes up to 50 mm. Screwed flanges for pipe work 65 mm and above to BS 4504.

C Solvent cement joints to BS 4346: Part 1, using solvent cement to BS 4346: Part 3.



Page 123/245

D Size up to and including 65 mm shall be of the capillary or compression type to BS 864 Part 2. Size of 76 mm to 108 mm shall be flanged. Size above 108 mm shall be flanged or welded.

Pipe unions or flanges shall be installed to facilitate future removal of pipe work in sections and where connected to fixed items of plant or valve.

Pipe work

Class Joint for Equipment Connections

A Black malleable iron, bronze to iron spherical seat unions for pipe work up to 50 mm diameter.

Black mild steel welding flanges to BS 4504 in accordance with the specified working pressure for pipe work above 50 mm diameter.

B Galvanized malleable iron, bronze to iron spherical seat unions for pipework up to 50 mm diameter. For pipes of 65 mm diameter and above, galvanized malleable iron, bronze to iron spherical seat unions or galvanized steel screwed boss flanges to BS 4504 Part 1.

C Mechanical joints to BS 4346 Part 2.

D As for straight pipe

Pipe fitting shall conform to the following standards:

Pipe work

Class Fittings

A Black malleable iron screwed fittings to BS 143 & 1256 (or equivalent Indian standard), or purpose made heavy weight welding fittings to BS 1965: Part 1 for pipes up to 50 mm diameter.

Purpose made heavy weight welding fittings to BS 1965: Part 2 for pipes 65 mm diameter and above. Thickness and outside diameter of the pipe fittings shall match with the straight pipe.

B Galvanized malleable iron, screwed fittings to BS 143 and BS 1256.

C Injection moulded Unplasticised PVC fittings and solvent to BS 4346 solvent.

D. Silver brazed heavy duty copper capillary fittings to BS 864: Part 2 (or equivalent Indian standard) for pipes up to 54 mm diameter. Silver brazed gunmetal fittings for pipes of 67 mm diameter and above.



Page 124/245

Supports and hangers for ductile-iron pipe shall be placed as close as possible to joints. When hangers or supports are not within 300 mm of a branch line fitting, additional hangers or supports shall be provided at the fitting.

2.15.23 Hanger rods

Steel hanger rods shall be provided, threaded with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.

Except as otherwise noted on the Working Drawings, hanger rods shall be of the following sizes: -

Pipe diameter / mm

Single rod diameter / mm

Double rod diameter / mm

15 to 50 inclusive 10 10

65 and 80 13 10

100 and 125 15 13

150 20 15

200, 250 and 300 22 20

Hanger rods for piping over 300 mm and multiple line supports shall be individually designed using a safety factor of 5, based on the ultimate strength of the material used.

Hangers fixed from concrete work shall have metal inserts cast into the concrete comprising expanding metal sleeves fitted with captive tensioning nuts and loose bolts, or captive bolts with loose nuts. Where inserts are not available attachment by one of the following methods shall be used.

• Anchor bolts to be placed with fast setting high strength grout

• Controlled energy type power actuated fasteners

• Self drilling type anchors

Hangers fixed from steelwork shall be by means of metal clamps, hooks, bolts or equivalent system where the method of fixing does not require any drilling or cutting of the steelwork.

Hanger fixings for light/small diameter pipes to brick or concrete shall be screwed into a plastic or metal expansion plugs drilled in the structure. Fixings to cavity constructions shall be by means of spring toggles, or screwed into expanding rubber sleeves.

Hangers shall be placed close to the point of change of direction of a pipe in either a horizontal or vertical plane.



Page 125/245

2.16 PIPELINE EQUIPMENT


Valves shall be arranged such that they are fully accessible for ease of operation, inspection, maintenance and removal.

Valves types shall be consistent to ensure standardisation of spares holdings.

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of globe valves, gate valves, check valves, butterfly valves, motorized valves, gauge cocks, automatic air valves, strainers, dirt pockets, stopcocks, pressure reducing valves, double regulation valves, drain cocks, ball float valves, safety and pressure relief valves, escutcheons, thermometer, pressure gauges, flow measuring elements, pipe sleeves, expansion loops, expansion joints, pipe anchors, pipe guides and gaskets for pipe separation.

All valves, taps and cocks shall be of the types and working pressures suitable for the systems to which they are connected and shall be of a type approved by the local Authorities. Valves shall be rated to withstand the system hydraulic test pressure.

Brass, bronze or cast iron valves shall generally be of 16 bar pressure rating (test pressure) type. In addition, all valves at discharge side of transfer water pumps shall be of minimum 16 bar pressure rating.

Where valves are provided at the discharge side of 2 or more pumps, each valve shall be so selected to withstand effectively the anticipated system pressure under the worst case scenario.

All valves shall comply with British Standards or equivalent International Standards in respect of tests and working pressures, dimensions and materials of construction.

Wheel head valves shall be arranged for clockwise operation of the handle to close the valve.

Screwed valves shall have taper threads to BS 21. Flanged valves shall have dimensions and bolting in accordance with BS 4504.

Connections shall be made between each valve and the adjoining pipework or equipment with flanges for 65 mm size pipework and above. Flanges shall be selected to suit working pressure and temperature.

Screwed connections shall be made between each valve and the adjoining pipework or equipment for 50 mm size pipework and below. A union shall be fitted on each side of all screwed valves.

All drain outlets and manual air vents shall have connection pipes leading to the nearest drain.

Valve packing shall be suitable for the service intended. Valve packing consisting of asbestos or asbestos based materials shall not be used.

Valves of identical make, size, type and duty shall be fully interchangeable.

Inverted mounting of valves shall not be permitted.



Page 126/245

All valves provided for manual operation shall have a handwheel or other suitable device which shall be fixed to the valve. Handwheels shall be rotated clock-wise to close the valves and shall be clearly marked with the words "OPEN" and "CLOSE" and arrows pointing in the appropriate directions. The rims of handwheels shall be machined to a smooth finish. All handwheels which may be dangerously hot to touch when the system is in use shall be provided with a suitable heat insulation on the rim and spokes.

Chain-operated handwheels shall be provided including rustproof chain and chain guide for valves installed three metres or more above finished floor.

2.16.2 Standards

• ASTM A167: Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium – Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip

• BS 21: Pipe Threads for Tubes and Fittings where Pressure-Tight Joints are made on the Threads (Metric Dimensions)

• BS 699: Copper Direct Cylinders for Domestic Purposes

• BS 759: Valves, Gauges and other Safety Fittings for Application to Boilers and to Piping Installations for and in Connection with Boilers

• BS 853: Calorifiers and storage Vessels for Central Heating and Hot Water Supply

• BS 1010: Draw off Taps and Stopvalves for Water Services (Screwdown Pattern)

• BS 1212: Float Operated Valves (Excluding Floats)

• BS 1400: Copper Alloy lngots and Copper alloy and High Conductivity Copper Castings.

• BS 1452: Flake Graphite Cast Iron

• BS 2456: Floats (Plastics) for Floated Operated Valves for Cold Water Services

• BS 2879: Draining Traps (Screw – Down Pattern)

• BS 3456: Safety of Household and Similar Electrical Appliances

• BS 4346: Joints and Fittings for Use with Unplasticized PVC Pressure Pipes

• BS 4504: Circular Flanges for Pipes, Valves and Fittings (PN Designated)

• BS 4514: Unplasticized PVC Soil and Ventilating Pipes, Fittings and Accessories

• BS 4994: Design and Construction of Vessels and Tanks in Reinforced Plastics

• BS EN 1171: Cast Iron Gate Valves

• BS EN 13789 Cast Iron Globe and Globe Stop and Check Valves for General Purposes



Page 127/245

• BS EN 12288: Copper Alloy Globe, Globe Stop and Check, Check and Gate Valves

• BS EN 593: Butterfly Valves

• BS EN 1074-2 Predominantly Key–Operated Cast Iron Gate Valves for Waterworks Purposes

• BS 7350: Double Regulating Globe Valves and Flow Measurement Devices for Heating and Chilled Water Systems

2.16.3 Globe Valves

• Globe valves generally shall be used on service pipework as specified.

• Globe valves up to and including 50 mm nominal diameter shall be generally rated, manufactured and tested to BS EN 12288. Valves over 50 mm nominal diameter shall be to BS EN 13789. Valves shall be of the same nominal bore as the pipework in which they are installed.

• Bronze bodied valves shall be cast to BS 1400, valves with cast iron bodies shall be made to BS 1452. The bodies shall be of an even thickness throughout, clean and free from scale and flaws. Generally, valves up to and including 50 mm nominal bore shall have bronze bodies and valves of 65 mm bore and larger shall have cast iron bodies, though bronze bodied valves may be used at any size.

• Globe valves when used for circuit regulation shall have characterized plug discs. The discs shall be free to rotate, readily removable from the valve stem and renewable. Discs may be manufactured using proprietary composition type materials if suitable.

• Valves shall have packed stuffing boxes or alternatively shall be fitted with ’O’ rings.

• Valves up to and including 50 mm nominal bore shall have BS 21 taper screwed ends, valves of 65 mm nominal bore and larger shall have BS 4504 flanged connections.

• Regulating valves shall be fitted with a lockable indicator on the spindle to show the proportional opening.

2.16.4 Isolation Butterfly Valves

General:

• 1600 kPa tight closing, wafer type, with resilient seats. Provide seats that cover inside surface of body and extend over body ends; or provide O-rings so that the valve body may be bolted and sealed between raised faced flanges with minimum bolt loading and without additional gaskets; or provide integral pipe ends to suit piping used, with pipe end faces concentrically grooved to seal against concentric protrusions in seat.

• Butterfly valves shall comply with BS EN 593.

• Bodies : Ductile iron, cast steel, aluminium, or cast iron.



Page 128/245

• Seats : EPDM or Buna-N, and shall be suitable for the temperature rating of the systems served.

• Discs : Ductile iron or stainless steel grade 316 for fresh water.

• Shaft Stems : Stainless steel to ASTM A167, Type 304/410 for fresh water.

• Control Handles/Levers : Suitable for locking in any position, or with 10° or 15° notched throttling plates to hold valve in selected position. Provide worm gear operators with large size handwheel for size 200 mm and larger.

• Valves in Insulated Lines : Provide extended necks to compensate for insulation thickness and allow ample clearance for operating handle/wheel.

• A short piece of pipework with flanged ends shall be coupled to the butterfly valve to facilitate future isolation and dismantling of equipment for servicing.

The isolation valves 50 NB and above shall be butterfly type of the wafer pattern in accordance with the dimensions in BS EN 593 and suitable for flanges to BS 4505. The body shall be manufactured from cast steel to ASTMA 216 Gr WPC or SG iron to BS EN 1563. The disc shall be epoxy coated SG iron, EN plated cast iron or stainless steel. The shaft shall be manufactured from 304 stainless steel.

2.16.5 Isolation Gate Valves

Gate valves generally shall be used on service pipework where isolation plant, equipment and system circuits are required, and shall be fitted as necessary. Valves shall be rated, designed and tested in accordance with BS EN 12288 for bronze valves and BS EN 1171 or BS EN 1074-2 for those of cast iron manufacture. Valves shall be of non-rising stems and same size as the nominal bore of pipeline in which they are indicated.

Bronze bodied valves shall be cast to BS 1400, valves with cast iron bodies shall be made to BS 1452. The bodies shall be of an even thickness throughout, clean and free from scale flaws. Up to and including 50 mm nominal bore shall be bronze, 65 mm nominal bore and larger may be bronze or cast iron.

Valve wedges may be of cast iron, bronze, nickel alloy or stainless steel. Cast iron wedges shall have bronze trim and seating, slide valves shall be fitted with stainless steel springs. Wedges shall be renewable and free to rotate on the valve spindle.

Valves shall have packed stuffing boxes, or alternatively shall be fitted with ’O’ rings.

Gate valves of 80 mm nominal bore and above for use in flushing water system shall be of cast iron body with nickel alloy faces and stainless steel spindle or with nitrite resilient facing wedge gate and aluminium bronze stem and shall be entirely suitable for use with sea water. Gate valves of 65 mm nominal bore and below shall be of UPVC, ABS or polyproperlene bodied stopvalves.

Gate valves shall be tested as follows at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch to Site:-

Body Test



Page 129/245

• With both ends closed and the gate in the open position, the body shall be tested to one and a half times the maximum working pressure for a minimum of 30 minutes. There shall be no visible leakage.

Seat Test

• With one end open to the atmosphere and the gate in the closed position, the seat of the valve shall be tested for tightness when one and a half times the maximum working pressure is applied to the other end of the valve for a minimum of 30 minutes. The seat test shall be carried out in both directions. There shall be no visible leakage past the gate.

Isolation valves shall be of the gate type conforming to IS-778 up to 50 NB and conforming to BS EN 1171 above 50 NB. They shall have non-rising spindles and close in a clockwise direction.

The valves shall not contain any brasses more than 5% zinc. They shall incorporate ductile iron bodies and gates fitted with gunmetal (BS EN 1982-LG2) aluminium bronze or nickel copper alloy components. Flanges shall be to BS 4505.

2.16.6 Check Valves

Check Valves shall be installed in the specified locations. Care shall be taken to ensure that the valves provided are suitable for installation in the plant required. In general, non-slam globe type silent check valve shall be used unless otherwise specified. Disc shall be centre guided and operated with stainless steel spring and trim to insure smooth, positive opening and closing of valves with minimal pressure drop. Check valves shall not be installed in vertical pipes with a downward fluid flow. Valves shall be generally rated, manufactured and tested to BS EN 12288 and shall be of the same nominal bore as the pipework in which they are installed.

Check valves generally shall be of 16 bar nominal pressure rating (test pressure).

Bronze bodied valves shall be cast to BS 1400, valves with cast iron bodies shall be made to BS 1452. The bodies shall be of an even thickness throughout, clean and free from scale and flaws. Valves up to and including 50 mm nominal bore shall be of bronze. Valves on 65 mm nominal bore and larger shall be of cast iron.

Valve discs and hinges shall be manufactured from the following materials. Cast iron bodies shall have cast iron discs with bronze faces or be wholly manufactured from bronze. Bronze bodied valves shall have discs of a nickel alloy, bronze, or bronze with a composition face. Disc with nickel alloy faces shall be designed to be easily removed for regrinding. Bronze valves shall have machined and screwed bonnets providing easy access to the operating disc, whilst cast iron valves shall have cast iron covers retained by steel studs or nuts and bolts. A purpose designed gasket shall be located between the cover and the body.

Valves up to and including 50 mm nominal bore shall have BS 21 taper screwed ends. Pipes of 65 mm nominal bore and larger shall have BS 4504 flanged connections.

Check valves shall be tested as follows at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch to Site:-

Body Test



Page 130/245

• With both ends closed the body shall be tested to one and a half times the maximum working pressure for a minimum of 30 minutes. The pressure shall be applied to the inlet side of the body. There shall be no visible leakage.

Seat Test

• With the inlet open to atmosphere, the seat of the valve shall be tested for tightness when one and a half times the maximum working pressure is applied to the outlet end of the valve for a minimum of 30 minutes. There shall be no visible leakage.

Valves of identical make, size, type and duty shall be fully interchangeable.

Inverted mounting of valves shall not be permitted.

Check valves shall be of the wafer type dual plate type and conform to API-594 and tested to API-598.

The valves shall not have any brasses containing more than 5% zinc.

They shall have cast iron bodies to BS EN 1561 / IS 210 Gr. 220.

With the exception of wafer split disc check valves, valves shall be suitable to accommodate between BS 4504 flanges.

The valve design shall ensure closure in the shortest possible time following deceleration of the water column, ideally reaching its seat without slamming at the instant forward motion of the column ceases.

2.16.7 Balancing Valves

Balancing flow control valves shall be of the double regulating two way type conforming to IS-778 Class 1 Edition 1984 with facility for measurement of pressure drop and flow rate. Valves shall be capable of full isolating.

Where valves are used for circuit regulation they shall have characterised plug discs. The discs shall be free to rotate, readily removable from the valve stem and renewable. Valves shall include setting device and indicator. Discs shall be SS with cast steel body plug.

Valves bodies shall be cast iron to BS EN 1561 / IS 210 Gr. 220.

Double regulating valves shall be provided as shown on the Drawings to ensure proper balancing of water circuits.

Balancing is to be carried out to meet specified water flow rate with a tolerance of ±�10 %.

Flow measurement shall be with accuracy better than ±�5% in the normal measuring range of the valve. To enable accurate and practical operation, measurement of flow and differential pressure shall be made with a microprocessor instrument which enables the operator to read the flow directly without the use of diagrams or tables.

Pressure measuring nipples shall be provided for measuring differential pressure and be integral with the valve body and incorporated with suitable means for positive leak tight shut-off when not in use.



Page 131/245

Valves shall be of globe valve design with a profiled plug for improved flow control, to reduce noise and cavitation.

Adjustment and presetting of the flow shall be made with a multi-turn handwheel using a digital scale with a resolution better than 2.5% of the full scale.

The setting shall be lockable with a mechanical stop, which allows the valve to be closed but not to be opened further than to the adjusted value. The mechanical stop shall be concealed from view as far as possible.

Valves shall offer the possibility for water-tight shut-off against the same water pressure as the body pressure rating.

Valves with thread connection in sizes from 10 mm to 50 mm shall be bronze, complete with regulating disc having a logarithmic flow characteristic, position, indicator and reinforced nylon hand wheel. Body pressure rating shall be of at least 20 bar at 150 °C and in compliance with BS 7350, BS EN 12288 and threaded to BS 21.

Valves with flanged connections from size 65 mm diameter and above shall be made of cast iron equivalent to BS 1452 for a body pressure rating of at least 16 bar at 80 °C and in compliance to BS 7350, BS EN 13789 and flanged to BS 4504. The stem, seat and disk ring shall be of stainless steel.

Valves shall be sized to operate in a nominal measuring range of 50 % to 100 % of full opening to ensure maximum accuracy and shall. comply with manufacturers’ recommended valve sizing methods.

One set of measuring instrument shall be provided. The measuring instrument shall be microprocessor based with an accuracy of 1% of displayed value. The computerized balancing instrument shall be powered by re-chargeable Ni-Cd batteries suitable for operation single phase power supply. The instrument shall be user-friendly with self-prompting menu to guide the user. Units of measurement shall be selectable as specified below:

• Differential pressure : bar, kPa, mH2O

• Flow : m3/hr, l/hr, l/s

The instrument shall have memory storage space to store up to a minimum of 200 measured values and a minimum of 400 log values. These stored measured values and log values can be directly viewed from the instrument or printout on a printer or viewed on a computer.

2.16.8 Motorized Control Valves

Three way mixing valves shall be used for controlling the flow of the chilled water to the AHU and fan coil units at 6.67°C supply and 12.22°C return water temperature. Operation shall be via a room return air thermostat through a single phase AC proportional acting actuator with a speed of between 6 rpm to 8 rpm.

Valve body brass for sizes up to 65 mm and cast iron for valves 80 mm and above with stainless steel stem, plug and seat. Flanges shall be BS4505 and an easy to read valve position indicator shall be fitted.



Page 132/245

Provide for each controlled system motorized control valve, as indicated on the Drawings, comprising of a two or three port valve, depending on application, complete with a motorized valve operator, attached to and supported by the valve.

Valve operators shall be mounted at factory or at Site under manufacturer’s supervision.

Provide a large size handwheel for each valve operator, which shall automatically de-clutch when motor is activated.

Motorized valve operator shall be either side or top mounted. The power circuit shall operate on 3 phase power supply while control circuit shall operate on single phase power supply. Motorized valve operator shall consist of motor, magnetic motor controller, control circuit transformer, built-in reversing contactors, opening and closing torque and limit switches, built-in open-close-stop momentary contact pushbuttons and open-closed position indicating lights. Terminal posts shall also be provided for field wiring of remote momentary contact open-close-stop pushbuttons and open-closed position indicating lights. All components shall be factory prewired in single enclosure.

Motor shall be of high speed and high torque type, of adequate capacity, specially suitable for valve operation. Motor winding insulation shall be to IEEE standard Class B. Provide built-in thermal overload protection. Closing time of all motorized valves shall be set with an adjustable timer control which can be set to not less than one minute nor more than two minutes.

Electrical connections, disconnect switches, conduit and power wiring for motors and remote pushbuttons and indicating lights shall be provided.

2.16.9 Automatic Air Relief Valves

Valve body material shall be brass with stainless steel or brass working parts and should be suitable for a maximum temperature of 80 °C and maximum pressure of 10 bar.

These shall be of the single/double orifice type. The large orifice shall work on the aero-kinetic principle and the small orifice shall be float operated. The branch size shall be 20 mm and flanged to BS 4504. The valve shall be supplied with a lever-operated ball valve to enable isolation for maintenance.

Automatic air vents shall be provided as specified and at all high points of the system or as indicated on the Drawings.

Connections to the service pipes shall be made at the highest point to ensure complete venting. Automatic air vents shall be mounted so that the inlet connection is in an exact vertical plane. A lock shield valve shall be located between the service pipe and the automatic air vent.

Automatic air vents for water systems shall have bodies of brass, gunmetal or malleable iron, non-ferrous or stainless steel floats and guides, and non-corrodible valves and rubber seats.

All automatic air vents shall be 20 mm diameter unless otherwise specified and shall be of the single large-orifice type suitable for the release or admission of air during system filling or draining. Automatic air vents bodies shall be constructed of cast iron to BS 1452 Grade 14 and float guides from grade 316 stainless steel. Connections to the pipework shall be via a screwed BSP connection.

Units shall be designed to facilitate dirt removal while in service.



Page 133/245

Automatic air vents shall be designed to open to discharge air or air/fluid mixture and to close firmly against fluid.

2.16.10 Ball Float valves

Level controllers size 15 mm shall be brass bodied float operated valves of the diaphragm type with discharge component to effectively prevent back-siphoning of water, all in accordance with BS 1212 Part 2. Copper floats shall be to BS 1968, and plastic floats to BS 2456 or equivalent.

Valves shall be gunmetal bodies double seat balanced equilibrium type of full bore pattern with inlet screwed end.

A stopcock shall be fitted on the inlet to all ball float valves.

Ball float valves of the delayed action type shall incorporate an equilibrium type ball valve with the float operating in an auxiliary chamber within the storage tank, cooling tower, etc. A second float below the base of the chamber shall operate a quick-operating valve, which shall provide open/shut control.

Ball float valve installations shall be complete with water stilling pipes to minimize the effect of the water inflow on the operation of the floats and the level controllers.

Ball float valves of 50 mm and below shall conform to BS 1212 of appropriate low, medium or high pressure type as specified or in accordance with the calculated system pressure requirements.

Ball float valves of 65 mm and above shall be of cast iron body with nickel alloy and stainless steel working parts. Ball float valves shall be capable of withstanding 1.5 times of the maximum working pressure of the system.

2.16.11 Expansion Tank

The chilled water system shall include for a pressurised closed type expansion tank of 150 litres capacity. The tank shall be rated for a pressure 10bar and a temperature range between 10 °C to 50 °C. The tank shall be fitted with a safety valve

The tank shell shall be heavy gauge carbon steel and the replaceable membrane shall be of butyl/EPDM material.

2.16.12 Strainers

Strainers shall be of the full flow Y type and suitable for the working pressure of the pipeline system in which they are to be installed. The baskets or screens shall be located so as to be fully accessible for inspection and maintenance.

Strainers bodies shall be cast iron with filter material of 3 mm perforated brass sheet with magnetic plug.

Strainers shall be provided in pump suction pipes, water tank outlets and in the locations specified. Strainers shall be of the same nominal bore as the pipeline in which they are fitted. Strainers shall be installed in a plane to ensure that filtered matter is retained within the screen.



Page 134/245

Strainers shall be full line size, "Y" or "BASKET" type as specified and readily removable for cleaning.

Strainers at the pump suction inlet shall be fitted with removable channel magnets, secured to the screen or basket by stainless steel retaining lugs and threaded rods, and placed to provide a continuous magnetic field around the entire circumference of the screen. They shall be fitted with a breech-locking arrangement to maintain the screen in place when removing the cover plate. The screen cover plate shall be bolted using studs with hexagonal headed nuts and shall be fitted with a special hinge. Initially each strainer shall be fitted with mesh lined baskets, reinforced on both sides with an open bottom. After initial cleaning, the baskets shall be replaced with a standard basket, suitable for the service required. All Y type strainers shall be complete with screw plug for drain or blow-off.

Strainers of up to and including 50 mm shall be bronze bodied and have screwed end caps with a brass drain plug. Strainers of 65 mm and over shall be cast iron bodied to the requirements of BS 1452 with cast iron cover and mild steel stud bolts. The cover shall be complete with a 25 mm bronze drain valve, the outlet of which shall be capped with a brass plug.

Strainer connections shall be as for the pipeline in which they are installed.

Screens and baskets shall be of brass or stainless steel to suit the service intended. The total free area of the installed screen shall be not less than 3 times of the internal cross sectional area of the inlet pipe. Openings in the screen or basket shall not be less than 1.2 mm in diameter.

Strainers shall be of adequate strength to withstand the working pressure.

2.16.13 Pipework Cleaning Procedures

Precautions shall be taken to avoid introducing foreign matter such as welding beads and slag or dirt into piping system. Completed welds shall be hammered to loosen debris. All piping, valves and fittings shall be internally cleaned of oil, grease or dirt, prior to assembly by wire brush and swabs.

Following fabrication and erection, all piping shall be cleaned by flushing with clean water, run to waste, until thoroughly free of all dirt, oil and cuttings. Generally, each size of pipe shall be flushed separately before being joined with larger size piping. Brushes and swabs may be used prior to flushing.

All cleaning operations shall be continuous throughout piping system, except at joints required for final joining of various sections of cleaned piping. After cleaning and until final joints are made the end of sections of piping shall be tightly sealed off to prevent any dirt, water or other foreign matter from entering the pipes.

All strainers shall be inspected and thoroughly cleaned. Temporary strainers shall be provided where required for cleaning and flushing operations.

Prior to start-up, final cleaning out of chilled water systems shall be carried out by circulation with chemical solution in accordance with the Water Treatment section of this Specification.

2.16.14 Gauge Cocks

Gauge instruments shall be fitted with a gauge cock between the instrument and the service pipe.



Page 135/245

Gauge cocks bodies shall be constructed from bronze and have a polished finish.

Gauge cocks shall be of the straight pattern ground plug type with lever handle.

All gauge cocks shall be of the 3 port type with the pipe work on the drain/vent port extended to discharge clear of all equipment and insulation.

Gauge cock connections shall be in accordance with BS 21.

2.16.15 Dirt Pockets

Dirt pockets shall be located at the bottom of each chilled water riser. They shall not be smaller than the full size of the riser and shall be approximately 200 mm long.

Isolation valves shall be fitted to the dirt pockets to enable them to be removed for cleaning.

A 20 mm bronze hose gate valve shall be provided at each dirt pocket, with a hose cap and chain for working pressures up to 1035 kPa. For higher pressures, a double 20 mm bronze globe valve with drain piping extended to nearest open drain shall be used.

2.16.16 Drain Cocks

Drain cocks up to 25 mm diameter shall be manufactured from non dezincifiable copper alloy to comply with BS 2879, gland type lockshield pattern. Outlets shall be suitable for hose connection.

Drain cocks of 40 mm and 50 mm diameter shall be key operated gland cock manufactured from non-dezincifiable copper alloy with screwed inlet to BS 21, detachable hose union outlet and bolted bonnet.

2.16.17 Safety and Pressure Relief valves

Safety and pressure relief valves shall be provided for pressure vessels and be located in the positions as indicated on the Drawings or as specified in British Standards or local regulations for pressure vessels.

Valves shall be constructed in accordance with BS 759 and shall have stainless steel trims.

The valve size shall be carefully selected to match the plant and to give the appropriate degree of protection.

Safety valves shall be of the totally enclosed spring loaded type with padlock.

Relief valves shall be mounted with the centre line of the valve spindle in a vertical position to ensure that the valve reseats properly after operation.

Relief pipe connections shall be of equal bore to the vessel connection or as specified.

Relief pipes from valves shall be run in full bore tubing of the same quality as the service vessel or pipeline with which the valve is associated. The piping shall be carried clear of any insulation and arranged to discharge to a visible and safe position.



Page 136/245

2.16.18 Escutcheons

Pipe escutcheons shall be provided at all surfaces where exposed piping, bare or covered, passes through walls, ceilings, floors, or partitions. The escutcheons shall be cast or stamped sheet metal. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe sleeves or to extensions of sleeves without any part of the sleeve or extension being visible; bare pipe shall be held in place by set screws and on covered pipe by internal spring tension.

Where sleeves of fittings project slightly from the walls, partitions, floor or ceiling, special deep-type escutcheons to cover each case shall be provided.

2.16.19 Thermometer

225 mm scale thermometers shall be of the dial type as suitable and shall be provided as indicated in the Particular Specification or on the Drawings. The thermometers shall have V-shape cases, glass fronts, mercury-filled red reading columns, detachable socket connections complete with stainless steel wells and be of an appropriate range for the service intended.

Thermometers shall be installed with the bulb completely immersed in fluid. If necessary, an extension neck shall be provided.

2.16.20 Pressure Gauges

Pressure gauges shall have black enamel iron casing of at least 100 mm in diameter while for using inside chilled water pump rooms and chilled water plants shall be at least 150 mm in diameter, threaded chromium-plated brass ring with heavy glass, bronze spring tube, red pointer, precision movement and micrometer adjustment. Provide pulsation dampeners, steel pipe fittings and shut off cocks of needle point globe type, all brass, for 1035 kPa positive or those negative working pressure as required for the installation. Where gauges are installed on thermally insulated surfaces, stand-off mounting devices shall be provided.

Pressure gauges shall be installed with gauge cocks.

2.16.21 Pipe Sleeves

Provide steel pipe sleeves where pipes pass through walls, floors or as indicated on the Drawings. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to allow free movement of pipes. The space between pipe sleeves and the pipe or insulation shall be completely caulked with a soft, non-setting waterproof mastic compound to give an air tight seal.

Pipe shall be free to move in pipe sleeves which shall not be used as pipe supports.

Where pipes pass through fire compartmentation walls and floor slabs, a fire stop or not-combustible material shall be provided in the annular space between pipe and pipe sleeve.

2.16.22 Expansion Loops

Provide expansion loops of either U or L shape or change in direction of pipe route for allowing expansion and contraction of pipe work wherever possible and necessary.



Page 137/245

2.16.23 Expansion Joints

Provide expansion joint (axial, hinged and gimbal type) wherever expansion loops or change in direction of pipe work expansion and contraction of pipe work where otherwise expansion and contraction of pipe work is not feasible.

Provide expansion joint at all building expansion joints, and wherever else expansion joints are specified, additional allowance shall be made by the provision of stainless steel articulated bellows type expansion compensators complete with all necessary guides as recommended by the manufacturer to give a working life of not less than 25 years. Each compensator shall maintain at least the same cross-sectional area as adjoining pipe work for its entire length.

Ensure the expansion joints are adequately tied, anchored or removed to avoid damage to the bellows during sectional testing.

Expansion joints shall have stainless steel membrane and carbon steel fittings.

Design working pressure shall be as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings while the testing pressure shall be at least twice of the working pressure.

Joint shall be securely held by guides on both sides.

2.16.24 Pipe Anchors

Provide anchor points constructed from channel iron bolted or welded to the building structure.

Anchors shall be positioned in association with pipework change in direction, expansion joints and loops so as to absorb stresses due to pipework expansion and internal pressures by transmission of such forces to the structure at appropriate points.

Anchors shall be constructed to withstand the highest thrust during piping hydraulic pressure testing.

2.16.25 Pipe Guides

Pipe guides shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping for proper control of thermal movement and proper performance of expansion loops and expansion joints.

Spacing for intermediate pipe guides shall be as recommended by expansion joint manufacturers.

2.16.26 Installation of Equipment

Mechanical installation of equipment shall include installing the units of equipment, alignment, shimming as required, grouting and making ready to operate.

Unpacking, assembly and installation of equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s drawings and certified dimension prints and any instructions of the equipment manufacturer.

All lifting and handling shall conform to the manufacturer’s instructions or the instructions printed on the shipping container. All handling and positioning techniques employed, including lifting, skidding, and jacking, shall be performed in a manner that will avoid subjecting the



Page 138/245

equipment to undue flexure and stress. Hooks and slings shall not be attached in any manner that may result in bending, damaging, or breaking any part of the equipment. Pallets, cradles, and skids shall be used wherever necessary to safely handle equipment. Lifting eyes and lugs provided on equipment shall be used when lifting the equipment. Saddles, spreader beams or other special lifting equipment required shall be used.

2.16.27 Anchoring and Grouting Equipment

Bolts shall be plumb, aligned and securely anchored to foundations, the floor or other supports. Where grouting is required the equipment shall be carefully aligned on shims and grouted in accordance with the following clauses:

2.16.28 Levelling and Aligning

• Location levelling and aligning shimming shall be carried out with a minimum number of blocks and shims. The number of blocks and shim packs, their size and location shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturers’ requirements. Levelling blocks and shims, if required, shall be placed on each side of anchor bolts and at locations where the base could sag.

• Blocks and shim stocks shall be of mild carbon steel, saw cut or sheared with all burrs and rough surfaces removed by filing. Wedges for shimming are not acceptable.

• Equipment with levelling screws shall have a steel levelling plate under each levelling screw. Plates shall not protrude beyond the edge of the equipment base. When levelling screws are used, equipment shall be shimmed or blocked to relieve the load on the screws prior to grouting. The equipment shall then be lowered making the adjustments with the levelling screws.

• Equipment without levelling screws shall be placed with rectangular steel levelling blocks on the foundation bolts. Additional steel levelling blocks shall be placed under all parts of the bases which carry direct heavy loads. Levelling blocks shall be placed close enough to give uniform support, to avoid projecting excessively beyond the edge of base. With the unit resting on levelling blocks, the unit shall be adjusted to establish alignment and elevation. The level shall be checked in both directions. Shims shall be installed as required to maintain even weight distribution on all levelling blocks. If wedges are temporarily used in adjusting elevations, the base shall be supported in the final level position entirely by the levelling blocks and not partially by wedges. Grout pads may be substituted for steel levelling blocks. Levelling blocks and shims shall not be positioned in a manner that will interfere with the placing of grout.

Grouting shall be as follows:-

• Preparation of Surfaces: All loose or defective concrete, dirt, oil, and grease shall be removed from the foundation by "bush" hammering or chipping until sound, clean concrete is exposed. All caking and dirt shall be removed from the anchor bolt sleeves where provided for freedom of movement. Surface of the foundation shall be cleaned with water before grouting. There shall be no free water remaining on the surface, in the bolt holes, or in the bolt sleeves before grouting. No adjustment shall be made to anchor bolts. Prior to positioning the equipment on the foundation, the underside of the equipment shall be cleaned of all dirt, oils, grease, rust and loose material.



Page 139/245

• Placing: Grout shall be rodded and worked whilst being placed to insure complete filling of cavities, elimination of air pockets, and in full contact with the supported surfaces of the base plate. All nearby equipment causing vibration shall be shut down until the grout has initially set. Grout shall be placed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

• Finishing: After grout has initially set between the base plate and the foundation, a shoulder if required, shall be constructed.

• Final Alignment: After the grout has set for a minimum of five days, the equipment shall be checked and adjusted for level and alignment as necessary. Where practicable, shims shall be installed as required for adjustments between component parts of the equipment without disturbing the bond between the grout and the underside of the equipment base. Where the necessary level and alignment adjustments require breaking of the bond between the equipment base and the grout, remove the original grout and regrout the base after completion of levelling and alignment.

• The foundation bolt nuts shall be securely tightened after confirmation or correction of equipment level and alignment on the seasoned grout. Levelling screws shall be backed off at this time so that equipment will be supported on the grout.

• After the equipment has been lubricated, the rotating parts of the equipment shall be slowly turned and carefully checked for clearances and improper alignment which shall be corrected. After final alignment is achieved, the equipment shall be operated for a period of time in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation and operating instructions and the alignment re-checked and adjusted if necessary.

2.16.29 Lubrication

• All machinery and equipment shall be lubricated prior to running the machinery and equipment. The lubricants and hydraulic fluids shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be used in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

• Bearings shall be protected at all times against the possible entrance of foreign matter. Bearings into which foreign matter has penetrated shall be thoroughly cleaned with kerosene and re-lubricated.

2.16.30 Service Penetrations through Building Fabric

Where pipework penetrates the building fabric the penetration shall be prepared as follows:-

• An oversize sleeve shall be built into the construction leaving a consistent clearance of 15 mm to 25 mm all round the pipe when installed. This gap shall be packed carefully with 80 kg/m3 mineral wool and the ends of this packing are to be caulked using a non-settling sealant.

• Where the piped service is to be thermally insulated, the insulation shall terminate at both ends of the sleeve and a seal between the surface of the thermal insulation and the end of the sleeve shall be provided by the use of a single bellows arrangement using a flexible material having a minimum surface weight of 5 kg/m2.



Page 140/245

• All PVC-U pipes passing through fire rated walls and floors shall be fitted with an intumescent pipe sleeve. Full details shall be submitted to The Engineer prior to the commencement of works.

2.17 WATER TREATMENT


The precise form of water treatment at each station shall depend on analysis of the particular borehole water supply and the minimum specified requirements of the equipment and materials manufacturer with which the treated water will be operational.

Water treatment for the water circulating systems shall be provided to control corrosion and algae. Chemical cleaning of the systems shall comply with the requirements of the BSRIA Application Guide.

This Section specifies the furnishing and installation of complete and operable water treatment for ECS water systems.

The water treatment plant shall consist of chemical solution tanks, mixers, solution pumps, foot valves, check valves, strainers, injection nozzles, solution tubing and PVC drain valves for condenser water systems. Fine strainers shall be provided before the chemical dosing pumps. The tanks shall be supported on concrete plinth 100 mm above floor level. Drain pipes shall be extended to the nearest gully. The total tank capacity shall be sufficient to hold a 10 day supply of chemical solutions.

Make Up Water used in the systems shall be supplied from raw water mains and local bore wells shall be used for making up the ECS water systems.

Chemical Quantity Requirements

Submit calculations showing total quantities of various chemicals required for 12 months operation of the water treatment system.

The quantity of chemicals shall be based on 7,000 hours of operation per annum for chilled water plant.

Supply the quantity of chemicals adequate for one (1) year’s consumption from the issuance date of the Certificate of Completion.

Chemicals used shall be compatible and neutral to piping and other in-line accessories materials and equipment.

2.17.2 Water Treatment for ECS Water Systems

The pre-cleaning and flushing out of the ECS water systems shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements given for Testing and Commissioning. However the following sections are indicative of the procedure required:-

Pre-cleaning and Flushing Out Operation

The ECS water systems shall be flushed out using appropriate chemical dispersant, detergent and defoamer of type and strength recommended by a chemical water treatment specialist.



Page 141/245

The chemicals shall remain in the system for 72 hours including a minimum of 24 hours with the pumped circulation in operation, unless otherwise recommended by the specialist.

The system shall then be completely drained and flushed until tests at all drain point’s show that traces of suspended matter have been substantially removed.

After the completion of initial cleaning and flushing, the system shall be refilled with clean water and shall be chemically treated immediately.

2.17.3 Chemical Treatment to prevent Corrosion and Algae Formation

Water treatment systems shall be provided by a water treatment specialist in the supply, installation, maintenance and monitoring of water conditioning equipment and programmes to control corrosion and algae.

The electrical conductivity of the re-circulated water shall be used to control the cycles of concentration and chemical feed.

Chemicals used for water conditioning and the methods to store and feed the chemicals shall comply with local Municipality by-laws and applicable health regulations. The chemical agent employed shall be a combination of chemicals that will provide corrosion protection, and microbiological inhibition to the metal pipelines and the construction material forming the complete installations.

The agent shall be a liquid chemical such as molybdate, a phosphate-based agent blended with anti-foulant and amine based biocide or a nitrite based agent blended with corrosion inhibitor that can provide such protection to the metal of closed circuit pipelines, system and equipment.

Chemicals used for the water conditioning shall have no detrimental effect on non-metallic materials, such as elastomeric or plastic products used in the system. Chemicals shall be low toxicity, non-flammable, suitable for the application and the system operating conditions.

Where applicable, chemicals shall be injected into the system by means of flexible plastic piping and an injector fitting.

Chemicals shall be fed to circuits requiring continuous make-up by automatic proportional feeding devices.

Overall corrosion rate shall not exceed 5µm per year for steel components of the circuit in continuous contact with the conditioned water.

Care shall be taken to ensure that the water treatment provided does not form deposits on the heat transfer surfaces which cannot be removed during periodic flushing

2.17.4 Chemical Feed Pump

Feed pumps shall be of positive displacement diaphragm type providing fully adjustable output capacity over the operating range.

Pump housings shall be of corrosion resistant glass reinforced polypropylene and all electrical/electronic components shall be encapsulated. If necessary, anti siphon/pressure release valve mechanisms shall be provided to ensure anti-syphon protection and easy priming, even under pressure.



Page 142/245

The pumps shall have acrylic moulded pump head, PVC/polypropylene fittings, Teflon seal rings and spring anti-syphon mechanism. The discharge tubes shall be 10 mm internal diameter and of suitable PVC to transport the solutions involved.

The pump suctions shall be mounted into the tank using a PVC suction tube assembly. The end of the pump suction tube shall not extend beyond the bottom of the PVC tube shield.

Pumps shall be driven from a single phase, 220 V, 60 Hz AC motor.

Pumps shall be timer controlled and programmed to provide required dosage to the system.

2.17.5 Chemical Tank

Each chemical tank shall be ultra violet resistant round moulded fibre glass or polyethylene chemical mixing tanks with a capacity sufficient for not less than 10 days operation.

The tanks shall be complete with cover of high rigidity fibre glass or polyethylene having a suitable moulded recessed or other suitable arrangement to support mountings of a metering pump.

The tanks shall be suitable for mixing the chemicals specified. Although the tanks normally operate at about ambient plant room temperatures they shall be suitable for solutions at temperatures of up to 52 °C.

Each tank shall have a strong flat bottom providing adequate support when the tank is full such that the perimeter of the tank shall not be forced by water pressure causing the bottom to bulge.

2.17.6 Liquid Level Switch.

Provide a suitable liquid level switch into each tank cover in order to prevent the feed pump from running should the mixing tank become empty.

It shall be suitable for the combined current of the pump and shall interrupt the power supply to both through direct switching or by relay.

The liquid level switch shall be contained in a corrosion resistant assembly of glass reinforced polypropylene. It shall have PVC float tube, foamed polypropylene float and encapsulated reed switch.

In each case, there shall be a float protector to prevent false actuation due to turbulence. A 12 V transformer shall be incorporated to provide the supply to the level switch for safety.

The liquid level switch casing shall be manufactured from non-ferrous metal or otherwise be protected against corrosion.

2.17.7 Miscellaneous

Provide all power and control cables complete with isolating switches to all equipment.

2.17.8 Installation

Fit equipment and appurtenances to space provided and make readily available.



Page 143/245

Provide waste connections for all water treatment equipment.

All chemical diffusers shall be suitable for removable or installation without interruption.

2.17.9 Field Quality Control Chemical tests

Perform chemical analysis of all the systems at the time of start-up.

Determine the chemical status of the water with respect to the requirement of the water treatment specialist.

Analyze the solution at the end of the 48 hour operation and provide corrective action if required.



Page 144/245

2.18 VALVES

Valves shall generally be provided as detailed in the schedule below: -

Application Size MM Specification Isolating 15-50 PN16 gate valve or to other higher ratings as

required by the system that they are used in and to be kite marked to BS EN 12288. Body and stem in DZR style copper alloy. Threaded to BS21.

15-50 PN16 nickel plated ball valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and in DZR style copper alloy. Ball to be Teflon coated. Seat material PTFE. Threaded to BS 21 lever handle As above but with extended shank lever handle to allow for insulation.

65 and above Gate valve to conform to BS EN1171. Cast iron body with gun metal seating faces. Flanged to BS 4505 PN rating to suit design pressures

Isolating Flow Measurement

15-50

PN16 isolating gate valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and kite marked to BS EN 12288 close coupled to a flow measuring device to be kite marked to BS 7350. Manufactured in DZR style copper alloy. Fitted with two double action pressure test points. Threaded to BS 21.

65 and above PN16 isolating cast iron gate valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and to BS EN1171 close coupled to a stainless steel flow measuring device to conforming to BS 7350. Fitted with two double action pressure test points. Flanged to BS 4504.

Flow Measurement

15-50 PN16 flow measuring device or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with integral orifice. To conform in principle to BS 7350 in body material of DZR style copper alloy. Fitted with two double action isolating test points and threaded to BS21.

65 and above PN16 water pattern flow measuring device or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with integral orifice. One piece stainless steel to BS 970 316/S31 and supplied with double action isolating test points. For fitting between BS 4504 mating flanges. To conform to



Page 145/245

Application Size MM Specification BS 7350.

Double Regulating Only

15-50 PN16 oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with a characterised disc to be kite marked to BS 7350. Body material DZR style copper alloy with DZR stem. Threaded to BS21.

65 and above PN16 oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and cast iron body with characterised disc and gun metal seating faces. To conform to BS 7350. Flanged to BS 4505 PN20.

Double Regulating Variable Orifice Measuring Valve

15-50 PN16 oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with a characterised disc to be kite marked to BS 7350. Body material DZR style copper alloy with DZR stem. To be complete with two double action isolating test points. Threaded to BS21.

65 and above PN16 oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and cast iron body with characterised disc and gun metal seating faces. To conform to BS 7350. Flanged to BS 4505 PN20. To be complete with two double action isolating test points.

Commissioning Sets

15-50 PN16 commissioning set to comprise of an oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with characterised disc to be kite marked to BS 7350 close coupled to a flow measuring device fitted with two double action isolating pressure test points. Material to be in DZR style copper alloy. Threaded to BS21.

65 and above PN16 commissioning set to be comprised of a cast iron oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with characterised disc conforming to BS 7350 and close coupled to a BS 970 316/S31 stainless steel wafer pattern flow measuring orifice also to BS 7350 and supplied with two double action isolating test points. Flanged to BS 4504 PN20.

Strainers 15-50 PN16 ‘Y’ type strainer or to other higher ratings as



Page 146/245

Application Size MM Specification required by the system that they are used in and body gun metal. Fitted with stainless steel basket to 20 mesh screen. Threaded to BS21.

65 and above PN16 ‘Y’ type strainer or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and body in cast iron. Fitted with stainless steel basket to 0.8mm - 1.2mm screen. Flanged BS 4504 PN20.

Non Return Valves 15-50 PN16 swing pattern non return valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and to BS EN12288. Body in gun metal. Threaded to BS21.

65 and above PN16 swing pattern non return valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and to BS EN12334. Cast iron body with metal faces. Flanged to BS 4504 PN16 or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in.

Drain Cocks for major plant and plant rooms generally

15-50 Hose union straight pattern gland cock in gun metal. Threaded to BS21 and complete with captive cap.

General location drain tap

15 Drain tap to BS 2879 type 2. Body DZR material. Threaded to BS21. Lock shield pattern.

Fan Coil Units

Application Size MM Specification Isolating 15-20 PN16 DZR copper alloy gate valve or to other

higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and kite marked to BS EN12288. Compression ends to BS 864/2.

Isolating Flow Measurement

15-20

PN16 isolating gate valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and conforming to BS EN12288 close coupled to a flow measuring device to BS 7350 principles. Manufactured in DZR style copper alloy. Fitted with two double action pressure test points. Threaded inlet compression outlet.

Flow Measurement 15-50 PN16 flow measuring device or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with integral orifice. To be kite marked to BS 7350 in body material of DZR style copper



Page 147/245

Application Size MM Specification alloy. Fitted with two double action isolating test points and threaded to BS21.

Double Regulating 15-50 PN16 oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with a characterised disc to be kitemarked to BS 7350. Body material DZR style copper alloy with DZR stem. Threaded to BS21.

Double Regulating Variable Orifice Measuring Valve

15-50 PN16 oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with a characterised disc to be kitemarked to BS 7350. Body material DZR style copper alloy with DZR stem. To be complete with two double action isolating test points. Threaded to BS21.

Commissioning Sets

15-50

PN16 commissioning set to be comprised of an oblique pattern double regulating globe valve or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and with characterised disc conforming to BS 7350 close coupled to a flow measuring device fitted with two double action isolating pressure test points. Material to be in DZR style copper alloy. Threaded to BS21.

By-Pass Regulation 15-20 PN16 Allen key operated nickel plated regulating valve in DZR material. Ends threaded to BS21 but capable of using Kombi compression couplings.

Strainers 15-20 PN16 ‘Y’ type strainer or to other higher ratings as required by the system that they are used in and body in bronze fitted with stainless steel 20 mesh basket. Threaded ends.

2.18.1 Pressurisation Unit

The system pressurisation unit shall consist of a break tank complete with a lid and ball valve to BS 1212, twin system pressurisation pumps (duty/standby) controlled by low pressure and high pressure control switches, system high pressure and low pressure alarm pressure switches, pump starter complete with o/loads, system pressure gauge, indicating lights showing status of plant, No Volt contacts to give the facility for remote indication of plant status to an Building Management System.

All of the above shall be complete with all interconnecting pipe work and electrical wiring and shall be contained within a purpose-made sheet metal casing. All electrical connections shall terminate at a numbered terminal strip within the cabinet; all wiring shall comply with the requirements of the current Electrical Regulations and Local Authorities’ requirements.

All gauges and plant status lamps shall be mounted on the front panel.



Page 148/245

A “quick fill” connection shall be install.

A system expansion vessel shall be installed. The vessel shall consist of an enclosure with domed ends and be complete with either brackets for wall mounting or feet for floor mounting.

A flexible diaphragm shall be fitted within the vessel to separate the cooling system fluid from the air, on the air cushion side of the vessel, a valve shall be fitted to enable the air pressure to be raised, lowered, or replaced as required by the system design. The air pressure initially shall be set by the manufacturer to suit the requirements of the system fill and operating pressures.

The vessel shall be of the same manufacture as the system pressurisation unit, the pressure switches on the pressurisation unit shall be set to match the operating conditions stated above.

Interconnection pipework shall be as required by the manufacturer of the equipment, an anti-syphon loop complete with AAV shall be installed between the equipment and the system return header.

2.19 NOISE CONTROL


This Section specifies the requirement of the noise control materials, their use and installation and sound attenuation equipment.

All equipment selected shall meet the sound level requirements. Noise calculations for all fans, AHU’s pumps, compressors, fan coil units, split type A/C units and equipment.

The total noise level resulting from the simultaneous operation of all systems, including regenerated noise, breakout noise, structure-borne noise shall generally meet the requirements specified here in.

The sound attenuators, acoustic louvers and other noise treatment materials selected shall be suitably matched to the system and shall present as little resistance as possible to the air system. Sound attenuators with pressure drops exceeding 80 Pa at normal system duty shall not be used. The geometry of selected sound attenuators shall not result in requirements for sharp transformations in adjacent ductwork, shall not interfere with adjacent services including reasonable access to services and shall not affect adversely the aerodynamic performance of the system or encourage regeneration of noise local to the sound attenuator.

Deliver acoustic equipment and materials securely wrapped, packaged and labelled for safe handling.

Label each item with manufacturer’s name, brand, and equipment designation number, the reference specification and characteristics of application.

Store equipment and materials in dry and dust free areas, within a secure storage facility, to avoid caulking of the infill. The material and products shall be free from scratch or corrosion.

Noise generated from the selected and installed equipment together with the air ducts, louvers and silencers shall not exceed the permitted noise level nor contribute towards a combined noise level which exceeds the permitted noise level.



Page 149/245

The acoustic treatment for the ECS system shall follow the principles outlined in the ASHRAE Applications Handbook 1999 Chapter 46, 1-36

Supply and install sound attenuators in air distribution ductwork and noise enclosures as required to ensure that the noise due to the operation of the mechanical equipment and systems shall not exceed the noise criterion levels as stipulated below:

ITEM CRITERION MAX. SPL

1. Maximum noise in the station concourse and platforms

1a. In normal operation 55 dB (A)

2. Maximum fan noise in tunnels during emergency and congested operation

80 dB (A)

3. Maximum external noise

3c. Other plant noise at nearest property boundary – Urban, residential

50 dB (A)

3d. Other plant noise at nearest property boundary – Urban, mixed

55 dB (A)

3e. Other plant noise at nearest property boundary – Urban, non-residential

65 dB (A)

3f. Other plant noise at nearest property boundary – Urban, industrial

65 dB (A).

2.19.2 Standards

• ASTM C423: Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

• ASTM E90: Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

• ASTM E413: Rating Sound Insulation.

• ASTM E477: Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers.

• BS 476: Fire tests on Building Materials and Structures.

• BS 2750: Measurement of Sound Insulation in Buildings and of Building Elements.

• BS 4718: Methods of Test for Silencers for Air Distribution Systems.

• BS 5588: Part 9: Fire Precautions in the Design and Construction of Buildings Part 9: Code of Practice for Ventilation and Air Conditioning Ductwork.



Page 150/245

• BS 8313: Code of Practice for Accommodation of Building Services in Ducts.

• BS EN 20354: Acoustics-Measurement of Sound Absorption in a Reverberation Room.

• IEC 60651: Sound Level Meters

• NFPA 90A: Installation of Air-Conditioned and Ventilating Systems.

2.19.3 Materials and Construction

Rectangular or square type attenuators shall be installed using perforated internal splitter elements in common plenum /ducts / shafts at either end of the ECS equipment fans.

The sound attenuators shall be designed in conjunction with the particular supplier(s) of the fans to ensure that the sound generated by the fan-motor unit and the dynamic insertion losses achieved by sound attenuators meet the sound level requirements under all operational conditions/equipment combinations. Maximum face velocity shall not exceed 8.0 m/s.

The internal baffles or splitters shall be not less than 0.5 mm thick galvanised perforated steel having a nominal open area of 30%.

All internal components shall be spot welded in place with welds on centres not exceeding 100mm. All spot welds shall be treated after with anti-corrosive epoxy resin or other coating. Alternatively, support channels may be secured with nuts bolts and (lock) washers.

Manifold silencers shall be installed with continuous metallic nosing crimped in place. Nosing pieces and tails shall be as per supplier’s design. The silencer shall be leak-proof at a differential air pressure of 2 kPa.

Acoustic fill material for silencers shall conform to the fire property requirements of one of the following standards: -

• Flammability - BS476 Part 4 - Non-combustibility test for materials.

• Flammability - BS476 Part 6 - Method of test for fire propagation for products and BS476 Part 7 - Method of test to determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products. criteria, Class 1.

• Smoke emission - BS6853 1999; Annex D and Toxicity - BS6853 1999; Annex B - NF X 70-100-1 & -2 - Analysis of pyrolysis and combustion gases or prEN 2826 - Aerospace series - Determination of gas components in the smoke.

2.19.4 Quality Control

Conduct tests for sound attenuators on dynamic insertion loss performance in accordance with BS 4718 or ASTM-E477 “Duct to Reverberation Room” method with air flowing through the sound attenuator at rated capacity, with forward and reverse flow direction. The test section shall be in the middle of a long straight duct run to reduce the effect on random incidence of the sound wave and to obtain a more reliable pressure loss rating of the air downstream of the attenuator.



Page 151/245

Conduct tests for acoustic materials including sound transmission loss performance and sound absorption coefficients in accordance with ASTM E90, E413 and ASTM C423 as appropriate.

2.19.5 Noise – Design Data

Detailed breakdown of the calculation of the following shall be provided:

Predictions of the exterior noise levels at noise sensitive receivers and local to the Station and Ancillary Buildings on individual octave ban pressure levels and the A weighted overall sound pressure level, and

Predictions of the interior noise levels on individual octave band for comparison with noise criteria.

A brief description of the prediction method and how the predictions were carried out including any assumptions made shall be submitted.

2.19.6 Commissioning

Initial checks on noise levels internally and externally.

Adjustments and modifications to acoustic treatment/plant as requested to achieve acceptable noise limits.

2.19.7 Noise Measurement

Measurements of plat noise on the platform and concourse levels shall be made at 3 m from each end of the platform and 1 m from the platform edge. The microphone shall be 1.5 m above finished floor level.

Four (4) additional measurements along the platform shall be made under the diffusers where possible.

The resultant noise levels shall be calculated as the logarithmic average of all six (6) measurements. Corrections shall be made for background noise effects where appropriate.

Noise levels in areas other than concourse and platform shall be measured in the centre of the room at 1.5 m above finished floor level. At least two measurement locations shall be taken in rooms of more than 8 m in any one plan dimension, the logarithmic average of these measurements shall be compared with the criteria. All measurements shall be made with the system operating at design flow conditions, with additional tests at emergency flow conditions as required. The measurements shall be made with all final finishes in place.

2.19.8 Duct Internal Lining

Acoustic duct internal lining shall be provided where shown on the Drawings, called for elsewhere in this Specification or where necessary. The material used for acoustic duct internal lining shall be incombustible, non-hygroscopic, vermin proof and moisture proof. Fibre erosion shall not occur with air velocities upto 30 m/s. The material shall not impart any odour to the air stream. The absorbent media shall be faced with a permeable covering such that no fibre erosion occurs at the rated air velocities, and shall have minimum density



Page 152/245

of 48 kg/m3 and minimum thickness of 50 mm. The lining materials shall provide minimum random incidence sound absorption coefficients to BS EN 20354 or ASTM C423 as follows:

Octave Band Centre Freq (Hz)

Frequency (Hz)

125 250 500 1k 2k 4k

SOUND ABSORPTION COEFFICIENTS

0.22 0.79 0.99 0.99 0.85 0.97

The lining shall comply with BS 476 Part 6 and the requirements of Local Authorities, including the associated fastners, adhesives, tapes etc.

Where duct internal lining is provided, the lining shall be applied to all internal surfaces of the ductwork. The duct internal lining shall be fixed to the duct with 100 % coverage of fire-resistant adhesive. The liner shall also be additionally secured with mechanical fastners on maximum 400 mm centres on all sides. Mechanical fastners which pierce the ductwork will not be accepted.

The leading edge of the lining exposed to the air stream shall be sufficiently protected to prevent erosion. All other ends of the duct internal lining shall be coated before assembly with cementing material that will prevent de-lamination, leakage or erosion.

No damaged materials shall be used.

For duct bends installed with internal lining, the lining shall be a minimum of 25 mm thick, 48 kg/m3 fibreglass with protecting surfaces. The duct lining shall extend for at least 3 m on both arms of the elbow.

The external thermal insulation to internally lined ductwork may be omitted, provided that the seams and joints if the internally lined ducts are sealed with a fire resistant sealant, and the thermal insulation effect of the lining is equal to or exceeds the insulation effect specified for external thermal insulation.

2.19.9 External Duct Acoustic Lagging

External duct acoustic lagging shall be provided where identified on the Drawings or when necessary to avoid break-out or break-back of noise through ductwork. The lagging shall take the form of either:

Construction using a minimum of 50 mm thick (density 80 kg/m3) mineral wool covered by a sound barrier material of adequate surface weight to resist the level of break-through envisaged, using dry construction techniques, or

Construction of a separate enclosure whereby a support is taken from the ductwork and the surface weight is adequate to resist the expected break-through.



Page 153/245

2.19.10 Acoustic Lagging.

The external duct acoustic lagging shall be fixed to the duct wall using 100% coverage of fire retardant adhesive. The lagging shall additionally be fixed using GI steel bands at not less than 600 mm centres. No pin type fastners linking the external layer of the lagging to the duct wall shall be used. No fixings which pierce the duct wall shall be used.

The fire rating of the lagging shall comply with BS 5588 Part 9 and BS 8313. The lagging inside A/C plant rooms and that exposed indoors shall have BS 476 Class 1 surface spread of flame rating.

2.19.11 Sound Attenuators and Acoustic Louvres

Provide and install where necessary sound attenuators and acoustic louvers to obtain, over the full range of system operation and within the space allocated, dynamic insertion losses sufficient to ensure that the noise criteria specified is not exceeded, without detriment to the system performance and with due attention to the contribution from other services noise.

The selected acoustic specialist manufacturer shall be provided with full certified details of air handling plant, sound power spectra and copies of installation drawings giving final routing for ductwork and grill schedules sufficient to permit the specialist manufacturer to confirm the compatibility of attenuator and acoustic louver performance with the design noise criteria.

Sound attenuators shall be located such that noise break-in to ductwork on the ‘quiet’ side of the attenuator or duct breakout between the noise source and the attenuator is adequately controlled. Where this is not achievable, the affected duct ductwork shall be acoustically lagged to control noise breakout/break-in.

The steel sheet for the outer casing and the perforated sheet of the splitters shall be made from continuous sheet. No joining in any way of the steel sheets will be permitted.

Internal stiffners shall be provided according to manufacturer’s recommendation and shall be made of not less than 0.8 mm diameter spaced at 4.8 mm staggered centres.

The inlet and discharge ends shall be bell mouth shape with the intake bell mouth made from not less than 0.8 mm galvanized steel, properly jointed to the perforated sheets.

The splitters shall be attached to the casing with reinforcement such that any part of the splitter shall not vibrate nor detach from the casing during operation. The perforated sheet shall be properly stiffened to avoid deformation due to weight of other splitter modules.

The air passage shall be straight so that the rated pressure drop and insertion loss rating will not be exceeded.

All cut surfaces of the sheet metal and welded spots shall be coated with zinc rich paint.

All seams of the sound attenuators shall be ‘lock-formed’ and sealed with a duct sealing compound or mastic and shall be air tight when operating at 1.2 kPa and shall be suitable for 250 °C for not less than one hour for use in smoke extraction system.

The design for pressure drop shall not exceed nominal pressure drop and insertion loss shall be equal to or greater than specified.



Page 154/245

In cases where the sound attenuators are built from modules, the attenuators shall be fixed according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

All splitter sound attenuators shall be designed with splitters standing vertically and forming a tight fit within the casing. The splitters shall incorporate faired leading edges.

Should the sound attenuation be used in smoke extraction system, the entire units including the infill shall be suitable for continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than 1 hour at the rated capacity.

The sound attenuators shall be specially treated/designed with appropriate coating to suit corrosive or explosive environments.

Sound absorbent materials used within sound attenuators and acoustic louvers shall be inert, non-hygroscopic, incombustible, rot proof and vermin proof, and shall be capable of carrying passage velocities of up to 25 m/s without surface erosion or other forms of material migration. The infill shall be of minimum 40 kg/m3 and packed under not less than 10% compression to eliminate voids due to settling. Splitter and the lower face of acoustic louver blades shall be faced with perforated post galvanised steel sheet of not less than 0.6 mm thickness.

The fire rating of the filler material, membranes and sealants shall comply with BS 5588 Part 9 and BS 8313 or equivalent IS codes.

Sound attenuators and acoustic louvers shall be adequately protected during delivery, storage and installation. This shall include delivery to Site with blocked ends. The direction of air flow through each sound attenuator and acoustic louver shall be clearly labelled and marked with the reference number and supplier’s type number.

The sound absorbent materials in silencers and acoustic louvers used as part of an extract system for food preparation areas shall be bagged in an imperforate material and shall be capable of being regularly cleaned by steam or otherwise without causing any damage.

Acoustic louvers shall be tested to BS 2750: Part 3. Surface finish shall be constructed from aluminium or painted.

Acoustic Panels and Enclosures

Acoustic enclosure panels shall be constructed of a material suitable for use in the environment in which they are installed. The materials used for the panel structure shall be adequately stiffened to avoid damage during all weather conditions and by personnel walking on the roof of the enclosure. The materials used shall have a sound transmission loss of not less than:

Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)

125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K

MIN SOUND TRANSMISSION LOSS OF PANELS (DB)

23 30 42 51 59 58 58



Page 155/245

The enclosure panels shall have an outer skin of galvanized steel of minimum 1.2 mm thick suitably reinforced and internally lined with inert, non-hygroscopic, non-flammable glass or mineral fibre of minimum 40 kg/m3, stabilized by bonding with resin. The surface of the fibres shall be protected with a smooth layer of woven or tissue faced fibreglass or mineral wool and a layer of perforated galvanized mild steel having a thickness of not less than 0.8 mm, and an open area of at least 35%.

Where applicable, panels constructed around compressors shall be easily demountable to enable the compressors to be serviced. Precautions shall be taken to avoid the panels becoming contaminated with oil.

Enclosures shall be provided with a minimum of two access doors. The acoustic properties of these doors shall be compatible with the enclosure panels. All doors shall be fitted with a latching mechanism to ensure the airtight seals are correctly compressed when closed.

Any windows provided in the enclosure shall incorporate multiple glazing or laminated glass design that will not degrade the overall sound insulation performance of the enclosure.

Provision shall be made for the drainage of any rain water that could enter the enclosure and any condensate. The drainage provided shall not degrade the acoustic performance or vibration isolation provided by the enclosure.

The enclosure panels shall be demountable and capable of being used for installation in other locations.

Panels joining method shall be either tongue-and-groove construction, or with panel joiners of sufficient strength and shaped to prevent direct leakage of sound.

Roof channels, apron and corner joiners shall be made of minimum 1.5 mm thick galvanized steel formed to prevent a direct path for sound and air leakage. Floor panels shall be made of 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel. Panel joiners shall be formed from 1.0 mm galvanized steel.

2.19.12 Installation

Sound attenuators shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

Sound attenuators shall be installed in the space available without restricting the flow.

Sheet metal transitions, suspensions, vibration isolators or supports and concrete pads shall be provided as necessary.

Duct internal lining shall be provided where specified or required for proper installations.

If any leakage of acoustic energy through any sound attenuator casing is found to degrade the performance of the sound attenuator, the sound attenuator shall be coated with plaster at least 25 mm thick.



Page 156/245

2.19.13 Acoustic Performance

Silencer ratings shall be determined in a duct-to-reverberant room test facility which provides for airflow in both directions through the test silencer in accordance with ASTM Specification E 477. The test set-up and procedure shall be such that all effects due to end reflection, directivity, flanking transmission, standing waves and test chamber sound absorption are eliminated. Acoustic ratings shall include dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels both for forward flow (air and noise travelling in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise travelling in opposite directions).

2.20 VIBRATION CONTROL


The vibration isolation treatment for the ECS system shall follow the principles outlined in the ASHRAE Applications Handbook 1999 Chapter 46, 37-48. The minimum equipment deflections shall not be less than those indicated in Table 45 of this Handbook.

All dynamic machinery, pipework and ducting shall be isolated from the building structure by vibration isolators and/or vibration isolation materials which shall be specifically selected for the application. Where mat type isolation materials are used, care shall be taken to ensure that they are correctly positioned and installed. The inlet and outlet connections of all vibrating equipment shall be fitted with either flexible connectors or flexible hoses as appropriate.

Vibration from all equipment shall comply with ISO 1940 Parts 1 and 2 for mechanical vibration.

All horizontal and vertical pipework throughout the building that has connection to vibrating equipment shall also be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports. All piping located in equipment rooms and connected to vibrating equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers for a distance of at least 15 m or 100 times the pipe diameter from the vibration equipment, whichever is the greater.

All piping to be isolated shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping, and a clearance of 10 mm to 15 mm around the outside of the piping shall be maintained. This clearance space shall be packed with insulation material and sealed airtight after installation of piping. Alternatively, factory fabricated split wall/floor seals may be used.

2.20.2 Pipe work Vibration Isolation

Where horizontal pipe isolation is required, the first three pipe hangers in the main line near the mechanical equipment shall be of pre-compressed spring hangers and the hangers for the horizontal run in all other locations shall be of spring hangers or spring and double deflection neoprene hangers.

Pre-compressed spring hangers shall have the same static deflection as that of the mountings under the connected equipment. Spring hangers and spring and double deflection neoprene hangers shall have a minimum deflection of 20 mm.



Page 157/245

Where pipe riser isolation is required, the pipe risers to be isolated shall be suspended from pre-compressed spring hanger or supported by restrained spring mountings and anchored with pipe anchors or guided by pipe guides. Steel spring deflections shall be a minimum of 20 mm except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load changes to plus or minus 25% of the initial stress.

2.20.3 Ductwork Vibration Isolation

Flexible connections shall be provided between the vibrating equipment and the ductwork and shall be made of suitable materials such as lead vinyl or similar of minimum surface density of 1.5 kg/m² and installed such that airflow is not obstructed. The material used must be in compliance with local statutory requirements for fire retardant period but this period shall not be less than 2 hours.

Unless otherwise specified, all discharge duct runs for a distance of 15 m from the connected vibrating equipment which has a discharge pressure of 1 kPa or above shall be isolated from the building structure by means of spring hangers. Spring deflections shall be a minimum of 20 mm.

Except in the case of ducts passing through compartment walls requiring a fire damper, all ductwork to be isolated shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of ductwork, and a clearance of 20 mm to 32 mm around the outside surface of the ducts shall be maintained. This clearance space shall be packed with insulation material and sealed airtight after installation of the ductwork.

In cases where a fire damper is required, ductwork to be isolated shall be fitted with a flexible joint on the side of the fire damper from where the vibration originates.

2.20.4 Flexible Connectors

Flexible connectors shall be fitted to the inlet and outlet connections of all pumps, and any other vibrating equipment.

Flexible connectors shall be the full line size of the equipment connection and fitted as close to the source of vibration as is practical. Straight connectors shall, where practical, be installed in a position that is parallel to the equipment shaft, as equipment vibration tends to be most severe in a direction radial to the shaft.

Flexible connectors shall consist of a single or twin-sphere body manufactured with reinforced rubber, the ends of which are raised and wire reinforced to form the cuffs for sealing purposes. The cuffs shall be backed by floating steel flanges.

For use in water, the rubber type shall be EPDM. For other duties, a suitable rubber shall be selected in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

Flexible connection shall be installed at all fancoils, AHU’s, fans and from duct branch takeoffs to risers in platform area.

Straight connectors shall be of single or twin-sphere construction whilst elbow connectors shall be of single-sphere construction.



Page 158/245

Straight connectors connected to resiliently supported equipment must be equipped with acoustic control cables to prevent excessive elongation of the connectors if the system operating pressure is in excess of the value recommended by the manufacturer for use without control cables.

Acoustic control cable assembly shall consist of four large triangle anchor plates, two control cables with large swaged-on end fittings and 13 mm thick acoustic washer bushings of sufficiently large load bearing area to isolate the end fittings, axially and laterally.

2.20.5 Flexible Metallic Hose

For higher operating temperatures and pressures, vibration movement generated by pumps, air handling units and the like shall be accommodated by nitrile rubber flexible connections having single elbows and tee rods.

2.21 MOTORS

2.21.1 General

This Section specifies the manufacture and installation of motors for Building Services and ECS equipment.

All motors shall respectively comply with BS 5000 Part II as appropriate. The motors shall be wound for the declared supply voltage and shall be capable of developing full load torque at the required speed.

Motors shall be of the totally enclosed pattern unless otherwise specified. Class E insulation shall be used throughout and all windings made damp proof.

Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall be of the totally enclosed fan-cooled type with Class F insulation to BS 4999 and BS 2757, impregnated with non-hygroscopic oil-resistant insulating varnish. Motors for fire services pumps shall be of class H insulation and of IP 54 construction. Motors designed for continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250°C for not less than one hour shall be totally enclosed squirrel cage induction, fan cooled guarded to IP54 as defined in BS 4999: Part 20 with Class H insulation to BS 4999 and BS 2757, impregnated with non-hygroscopic oil-resistant insulating varnish. Insulation materials shall be suitable for the climatic conditions.

Motors shall be adequately rated to meet the service demands of associated driven units under all conditions and as limited by electrical and mechanical protective devices. The cooling fan of the motor shall be aluminium and protected by a metal fan cover.

Motors powered by AC shall comply with BS 4999 and BS 5000: Part 99 and shall be of squirrel cage, induction type. Unless otherwise specified motors shall be suitable for direct-on-line starting at full voltage. Motors shall be suitable for single phase or 3 phase power supply.

The starting current shall not exceed 5 times of the full load current when direct-on-line starting at full voltage is applied.

All motors shall be capable of accelerating the driven plant from standstill to rated speed with a terminal voltage of 80% of the nominal supply voltage at 60 Hz in less than 15 seconds. All motors shall be capable of operating continuously or, for short-time rated



Page 159/245

motors, for the duration of the short-time period, at rated torque at any supply voltage between 90% and 106% of the nominal supply voltage at 60 Hz. They shall be capable of delivering the rated torque when running at 70% of the nominal voltage for a period of 10 seconds without injurious overheating and under these conditions the slip shall not exceed 10%.

All motors shall be capable of operating continuously without injurious effect and capable of driving the driven units at their rated output at any voltage between 90% and 106% of the nominal voltage.

Vertically mounted motor shafts shall be supported by suitable thrust bearings.

All bare steel internal parts except bearings shall be painted unless otherwise protected against corrosion.

Motors shall be designed for low shaft current and shall have adequate provision to prevent bearing damage by shaft current.

An auxiliary marshalling box, electrically and mechanically separated from the power supply terminal boxes, shall be securely mounted on the motor frame for marshalling all small wiring for motor control or monitoring.

For axial fans, external copper grease leads shall be provided for lubrication of motor bearings unless totally sealed bearings are used.

The maximum motor efficiency shall be at the normal operating condition. Motors in all cases shall be entirely suitable for the duty intended. A margin of not less than 5% for compressors, 15% for fans and 10% for water pumps shall be provided for equipment over the continuous rating of the motor (without over-loading) under the normal operating condition unless otherwise specified. The motor efficiency at normal condition shall be greater than 85% for motor rating below 15 kW and 90% for motor rating of 15 kW and above.

The power factor of motors shall not be less than 0.85 lagging at the operating condition. Otherwise suitable power factor correction facilities shall be provided to improve the power factor. For two-speed fans, the requirement shall be achieved at both high speed and low speed operating condition.

Motors for smoke extraction equipment shall be capable of continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour without electrical, mechanical or structural failure, where specified on the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings. All steel works, supporting brackets and members which are required for the pump motor installation shall be hot-dipped galvanized to BS 729. Motors shall be factory-painted to the appropriate finish. The paint used shall be capable of withstanding continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour without emitting smoke or toxic fumes. Motor bearings for fans shall be of the self-lubricated type and suitable for continuous operation at an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour.

Motor bearings for smoke extraction equipment shall be of precision grade anti-friction type, packed at the factory with special lubricant designed for maximum radial and thrust loads and to permit continuous operation in an air stream temperature of 250 °C for not less than one hour.



Page 160/245

In normal ambient conditions bearings shall be designed for, unless otherwise specification in this Specification, 50,000 hours operating service (L10 life, Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association) and provided with a grease outlet connection for in service lubrication. Grease fittings shall be brought to outside of fan housing and provided with covers which shall effectively exclude water and dirt.

Motor terminals shall preferably be of the stud type, totally enclosed both from atmosphere and from the motor winding and be fully insulated from the frame. Rubber insulation shall not be used for connections between the windings and the terminals.

Each motor terminal box shall be fitted with sealing chamber, conduit gland or adaptor plate, as required, together with the necessary fittings to suit the cable entry. Terminal markings and rating plates shall be in accordance with BS 4999. The terminal box shall be large enough for the specified cable sizes of the respective motor.

2.21.2 Standards


• BS 729: hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles

• BS 2757: method for determining the thermal classification of electrical insulation

• BS 4999: general requirements for rotating electrical machines

• BS 5000: rotating electrical machines of particular types or for particular applications

• BS EN 60034-9: rotating electrical machines part 9: noise limits

2.21.3 Technical and Installation Requirements

Motors of intake and exhaust fans of the axial type taking in 100% outside air shall be suitable for operation in atmosphere of up to 75% RH.

Noise level shall meet BS EN 60034-9.

The degree of protection of the motors shall conform to IP54 defined in BS 4999: Part 20 with the following additional requirements:

• Motor frames shall be steel or aluminium alloy for motors inside station areas as appropriate.

• Motor frames shall be cast iron for motors in tunnels and Ancillary Buildings.

• Earthing terminal shall be provided.

• Unless otherwise specified, red oxide zinc chromate primer with two finish coats of grey paint shall be painted.

• All motors shall be squirrel type and shall be suitable for DOL or reduced voltage starting as specified on the Equipment Schedules and/or Drawings.



Page 161/245

Termination boxes of adequate size shall be die cast aluminium alloy or cast iron diagonally split type and suitably gasketed to prevent ingress of moisture and dirt with the following additional requirements:

• Rotatable in any of the four 90o positions;

• Threaded holes suitable for mounting brass cable glands;

• Stud type terminals for terminating electric cables as specified; and

• Internal wiring connections to the main terminal boxes and auxiliary marshalling boxes.

• Bearings shall be double shields and have the following additional requirements:

• Ball or roller bearings with grease fittings and minimum pressure relief fittings for in service lubrication.

• Lifting eyes shall be provided for motors with a weight of 20 kg and above.

Tests shall be carried out before shipment to demonstrate that the equipment complies fully with specified requirements.

Type tests shall, as defined in BS 5000: Part 99, be carried out on the first motor of each type and rating supplied. For motors of the same type having different ratings but identical in all essential details, motors with the highest rating shall be subject to type tests whereas the remainder shall be subject to routine tests.

If tests to determine the starting current are under-taken at reduced voltage, due allowance shall be made for the effects of saturation and the estimated value of starting current at full voltage shall be stated on all test certificates.

Two-speed Motors For Fans

Where two-speed motors are specified, they shall be in compliance with the following requirements:

• The two-speed motor shall conform to all other requirements where appropriate as specified in this specification.

• The motor shall be of variable torque and horsepower. Rating shall be assigned for each of the two-speeds.

• The motor shall have speed ratio as shown on the Equipment Schedule and/or Drawings, regulated by pole-changing of the stator winding.

• The motor shall be suitable for Star Delta or DOL starting at 3 phase power supply, and for frequent speed switching.

• The motor shall have six terminals properly accommodated within the terminal

box.



Page 162/245

Installation

• Motors shall be installed as required by the driven equipment.

• Lifting equipment shall be provided for the installation of motors.

• The frames and supports shall be accurately set and levelled.

• Each motor shall be provided with an emergency stop push button except single phase in the immediate vicinity of the associated motor drive at a suitable location. For outdoor installation, all emergency stop push buttons shall be of weatherproof type.

• All moving or rotating parts of motors which can be accessed by personnel shall be properly covered by steel wire mesh guards.

2.22 MOTOR STARTING

2.22.1 Above 0.37kW

Unless otherwise specified, motors at or above 0.37kW shall be 3 phase continuous rated and controlled by suitable triple pole contactor starters with fuse protection and single phase operating coils.

Starters shall be as follows:-

• Up to and including 5.0 kW direct on line type

• Up to and including 10 kW star delta type

• Above 10 kW electronic "soft start" type with energy optimisation circuitry

2.22.2 Below 0.37kW

Unless otherwise stated, motors below 0.37kW shall be 220 volt, single phase, protected by fuses and controlled by suitable switch, minimum rating 15 ampere.

2.22.3 Control Gear General

All control gear shall comply with the appropriate BS Specifications where applicable, and in particular with the following:-

• BS EN 60947 Part 4.1 (starters and contactors)

• BS EN 60947 Part 2 (circuit breakers)

2.22.4 Enclosures

The motor starters/control units shall unless otherwise specified be an integral part of the equipment and shall be of the totally enclosed dust protected pattern (IP54).



Page 163/245

2.22.5 Contactors

All contactors shall be of the Block Pattern to BS EN 60470. The minimum size of contactor shall be rated at 3.7kW. Auxiliary contacts shall be fitted to suit the control system employed.

2.22.6 Overloads

Each contactor for controlling a motor shall have a suitably rated thermal overload device of the hand reset pattern with ambient temperature compensation and inherent single phasing protection.

2.22.7 Fuses

Each starter or circuit shall be protected by suitably rated HRC fuses to BS 88 Class Q1. Control circuits shall be protected by a separate HRC fuse.

2.22.8 Isolators

All starter/control units shall be provided with a fully interlocked isolator with padlocking facilities in the "Off" position. Operation of the isolator shall remove all incoming supplies from the equipment.

A positive mechanical interlock shall be fitted to prevent access to live terminals when the isolator is in the "On" position.

2.22.9 Indicating Lamps

Indicating lamps and lamp holders shall be arranged so that replacement of lamps and the cleaning of glasses and reflectors employed can be readily effected.

A lamp test switch shall be provided to control panels.

To reduce heating and fouling of the panels, lamps which are continuously alight shall have the minimum consumption consistent with good visibility of indications in a brightly lit room.

Indicating lamp glasses on control and relay panels shall conform to the following standard colour code.

Colour Operating Scale Example of Application

Red Danger

Abnormal condition

Thermal overload of circuit

Abnormal circuit condition

Plant, instrument or other equipment in alarm state

Yellow Attention or caution Some value (current, voltage, frequency, temperature, pressure, etc) is approaching its



Page 164/245

(Amber) permissible maximum or signal for an automatic cycle.

Green

(Clear)

Circuit live

Normal operation

Isolator, circuit breaker switch or contactor closed, motor starter on. Individual drives or auxiliary equipment in operation.

Blue All functions not covered above

Indication of remote control, selector switch in "set up" position.

All indicating lamps, instruments and controls shall be, as far as is practicable of the same manufacturer and style to provide uniformity of appearance and to facilitate maintenance. Externally visible equipment shall be flush mounted with minimum protection and fixed securely to the front panels or other members. Internal equipment shall be secured to purpose made rails or mounting bars. All fixings shall incorporate shake proof washers or other vibration resistant fastenings.

Indicator lamps shall be 24volt 8watt with MES clear and shall be supplied from a 6 volt output transformer complying with BS 3535. Glasses of not less that 25mm diameter shall be fitted. Indicator lamps shall be clearly labelled. All indicator lamps shall be suitably shrouded.

2.22.10 Terminations and Wiring

All electrical wiring within equipment shall be of stranded copper halogen free cable colour coded as required by the IEE Regulations, 16th edition. All wiring required for connection to external services shall terminate on a suitable connector block. Each connection shall be numbered. A suitable gland plate shall be provided.

Where circuits of different potentials are connected to adjacent connectors a suitable insulated partition shall be provided and warning labels fitted. All wiring shall be LSF type.

2.22.11 Control Gear

All materials used for the work under this Specification shall be of the highest grade of their respective.

All materials, sub-assemblies, etc not otherwise specified shall be in accordance with British Standards Specification where such exists.

Panels, cases, covers and all other main ferrous, components shall be manufactured from zinc plated and passivated sheet steel.

The frames shall be constructed from folded sheet angles and reinforced with horizontal and vertical folded channels and gusseted at the corners where necessary. Alternatively angle iron framing of adequate size may be used. In either case the cubicles shall be self-supporting, rigid and free from any whip.

Front, rear and covers shall be "dished" or otherwise reinforced to provide extra rigidity.



Page 165/245

The panel shall be complete with anti-vermin screens at cable entry points to be cut to suit the installation.

2.22.12 Control Circuits

Control circuits shall be configured so that failure of the control results in the equipment maintaining its operation unless it is unsafe for it to continue running without its protective devices. Restoration of the supply shall result in the re-starting of plant, automatically if previously stopped.

The control circuit design shall incorporate the necessary relays, lamps and ancillary equipment to give alarm and control facilities as detailed elsewhere in this Specification.

Where control is by a remote device, facilities shall be provided for manual operation under emergency conditions.

Control relays shall be of the plug in type, robust in type, robust in construction and mounted on a terminal base. Relays and their bases shall be located in a separate compartment of the control panel. Each relay shall have its coil rated for the control voltage, and with the number of contacts commensurate with the duty it is to perform.

2.23 CONTROL SYSTEMS


All station central air conditioning systems shall be provided with control systems which as a minimum shall indicate and annunciate normal/abnormal operating conditions in the local control panels, including temperature (supply, return, outdoor), humidity, and pressure (system or filters).

All items of control equipment for the station air conditioning system shall be compatible with, and interface with, other associated control systems on the project.

The control system to be provided for the ECS, Chilled Water and Condenser Water systems shall preclude the concurrent starting of all large motors above 20 kW installed for these systems. A 15 second delay shall be provided between the starts of such motors.

All controllers shall be mounted in a stand alone cabinet in each plant room near the electrical switchboards and have a face mounted readout panel to monitor all equipment in that plant room. The panels on each level shall allow communication between each monitor to any item of equipment for that level.

Furnish all necessary items to make the installation complete in every respect and safe and ready for regular operation and use.

All items of control equipment shall wherever possible be compatible within any system and between systems.

The sitting of items of control equipment shall always be such that access for adjustment and maintenance purposes is not impeded. However, where items of control equipment are mounted in accessible positions in normally occupied areas these control items shall be provided with means to discourage unauthorised interference.



Page 166/245

Construction and material of the control equipment shall be compatible for use in the environmental conditions that the equipment encounters.

2.23.2 Control Equipment Features

All sensors and switches, unless otherwise specified, shall be selected so that the set point of the variable being controlled or measured falls within 50% to 75% of the full scale reading.

Basic adjustments for original setting (such as control characteristic, wind and sun effect settings, set-back, boost etc) shall be concealed and tamper proof and housed within lockable panels. Temperature setting scales shall be clearly marked in degrees Celsius.

Wherever specified, the signals from the controlled devices with unfiltered and unregulated power supplies shall be filtered. Shielded cable shall be used when it is necessary to install DC signal leads in the same conduit with other types of wiring.

The control system to be provided for all the ECS systems shall preclude the concurrent starting of all large motors above 20 kW installed on these systems. A 15 second delay shall be provided between motor starts of such motors.

2.23.3 Ancillary Items

When items of equipment are installed as listed below the following ancillary items shall comply with the following criteria: -

External Mounting: All devices exposed to the elements are to be suitably weatherproofed to IP 65.

Pipe work immersion: Corrosion resisting pockets of a length suitable for the complete active length of the device, screwed ½” or ¾” BSPT suitable for the temperature, pressure and medium.

Duct Mounting: Mounting flanges, clamping bushes, couplings, lock nuts, gaskets, brackets, sealing glands and any special fittings necessitated by the device.

2.23.4 Additional Features

All two position switching devices shall have concealed adjustment unless there is a specific requirement for a ‘Hand Reset’ feature.

All accessible live parts shall be shrouded to IP 2X and an earth terminal provided.

2.23.5 Sensors

Control and measuring devices shall have the following limits of accuracy:

• Temperature: ±0.5 °C

• Pressure: ± 1% of full scale reading

• Humidity: ± 5% RH



Page 167/245

Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor (NTC) type with a high linear resistance change versus temperature change to insure good resolution and accuracy. Sensors shall be available for room, duct or well mounting. Sensors shall connect to remote controller by means of a suitable cable. Room type sensors shall be available with a built-in set point potentiometer. Sensors shall be available in various ranges to properly suit the application.

Elements sensing liquid temperature in pipe work shall be:

• Provided with means for withdrawal for calibration, servicing, etc, without the need for draining the system;

• Positioned so that the active part of the element is wholly within the liquid.

• Positioned so that the element is not less than 10 pipe diameters downstream from a point of mixing, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

• Elements sensing the temperature of air in a duct shall be positioned so that:

• The element is not subjected to thermal radiation;

• Temperature stratification is accounted for, (i.e. positioning for low temperature limit sensing, positioning for high temperature limit sensing, positioning for average temperature sensing);

• If of the capacity averaging type, it is installed on a suitable framework and is suitably arranged for servicing;

• If used for determining the dew point, the air adjacent to the element is known to be saturated within acceptable limits.

Elements sensing the temperature of a solid surface shall be positioned and fixed so as to give good thermal contact.

Elements sensing the temperature of a room or other such space shall be in a representative position.

Elements sensing the temperature of air external to a building shall be positioned generally as indicated and away from the influence of direct solar radiation and local heat gains. Where special requirements are indicated (e.g. the determination of solar gain, and/or wind influence), the control sensor manufacturer’s recommendations for positioning the elements shall be followed.

Humidity sensors shall be of the solid-state type sensing element. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a change in relative humidity. Sensor shall be available for room or duct mounting. Sensors shall connect to remote controller by means of a suitable cable. Room type sensors shall be available with built-in set point potentiometer.

Humidity sensing element positions shall be:

• Representative of the space in which the humidity is being measured;

• Such that the air velocity is within the range required by the sensing element;



Page 168/245

• Arranged to ensure that the air reaching the element is free from airborne contaminants;

• Arranged to give convenient access for servicing the element.

Combination temperature and humidity sensors shall have elements mounted in a common enclosure. Sensors shall connect to remote controllers by means of a cable.

Absolute humidity (dew point) sensors shall utilise an active element to sense the actual quantity of water vapour per volume of dry air when the relative humidity is from 10% to 100%. The sensor shall be highly repeatable and change resistance with a change of moisture content in the air. The sensor shall connect to the controller by means of a suitable cable.

Duct mounted averaging capillary type temperature sensors shall utilise a nickel resistance-sensing element. The sensor shall vary the output resistance with a change in temperature. The sensors shall connect to the remote controller by means of a suitable cable.

Differential pressure sensors shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. The sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of a suitable cable.

Outdoor air sensors shall be of the thermistor (NTC) type with a high resistance change versus temperature change. The sensors shall be suitable for outdoor or duct mounting and shall connect to remote controllers by means of a suitable cable.

Contamination sensors shall vary the conductivity as the degree of gas or smoke concentration changes. The sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of suitable cable.

Air velocity sensors shall be capable of linear indication of the velocity of air in a duct from 0 m/s to 15 m/s, and shall vary its output voltage with a change in air velocity. The sensor shall have range selection for low velocities. The sensor shall connect to the controller by means of a suitable cable. Accuracy shall be ±0.15 of range and reproducibility shall be ±0.1% of range.

Air velocity sensors shall be:

• A sensor tube made of stainless material carrying a scale to indicate the immersion length and;

• the location and immersion length shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

2.23.6 Controllers and Switches

Pressure switches for pipe work shall be bellows operated, the bellows being suitable for the medium and the working temperatures and pressures. The pressure switch shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 2 times the working pressure. Connections shall be made with 8 mm OD. copper tube

The set point shall fall within 30% to 70% of the scale range.

They shall have differentials adjustable over 10% to 30% of the scale range.



Page 169/245

Pressure switches for air systems shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied with air connections permitting their use as static or differential pressure switches.

Airflow switches shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting attitude and shall be suitable for mounting in any plane.

Where special atmospheric conditions are detailed in the Equipment Schedules the parts of the switches shall be suitably coated or made to withstand such conditions.

Water flow switches shall be selected for the correct water velocity and pipe size and mounting attitude.

Level switches shall be selected for the fluid type, system pressure and have adjustable differentials. They may be:

• Conventional float type;

• Capacitance type;

• Conductivity type.

Where conductivity types are offered they shall include all probes (including earth).

2.23.7 Actuators

Actuators shall have a sufficient torque to open and close valves and dampers against the maximum pressure drop across then and shall be complete with position indicators.

All actuators shall be electric suitable for single phase AC supply.

Control damper actuators shall be of the type where the damper spindle passes through the actuator and is secured by a U clamp. Each damper shall be capable of closing against a differential pressure of 400 Pa.

Actuators for two hour-rated fire and smoke dampers shall be of three-position (open, closed and normal) operation. The complete damper and damper actuator assembly shall comply with local statutory requirements.

Actuators shall have the additional features described below where applicable:

• Auxiliary switches for modulating motors shall have auxiliary switch packs containing at least two electrically independent switches, one for each end of the motor travel, adjustable for operation over at least half the motor travel. Auxiliary switches for two-position motors shall have one electrically independent switch. In each case, the switch shall have changeover contacts having a minimum rating of 5 A resistive.

• A feedback potentiometer the resistance of which varies proportionally with the actuator travel,

Both fail-safe devices shall have sufficient torque to open or close valves and dampers against the maximum pressure drop across them.



Page 170/245

2.24 BMS CONTROL SYSTEM

2.24.1 General

The BMS control system shall be provided for all plant and equipment, the system shall consist of a Main control panel housing redundant PLCs and distributed I/O Outstation panels I/O linked to the SCADA network through an open protocol interface. Other applications may utilise DDC controller.

The BMS control system at this section provides a description of the general system requirement. The detail BMS control system will be defined and specified in the detail design documents and drawings. The final installation shall be durable, cost effective and provide an aesthetically pleasing engineering solutions that will provide and maintain the environment and service requirement of the building.

2.24.2 Local Area Network

In general a single LAN shall be provided to all stations, the exception being for fire related items, which shall have a dual LAN, in this case the failure of one LAN shall not affect the operation of the plant and equipment.

2.24.3 Main control Panel

The MCP shall house the BMS controllers, the controller shall be programmed using software based algorithms, to achieve on/off, proportional plus integral plus derivative control loops. The software shall be capable of sustaining control at all times. The control parameters shall be adjustable by keyboard entry at the central control station and locally at the outstation either via an integral keyboard or a portable plug in keyboard. Motor control panels shall include panel mounted keyboards and the installation shall have a plug for a portable lap top computer.

Within the MCP the controllers shall be configured as hot standby to ensure system reliability. Failure of one unit shall still permit the plant and controls associated with the BMS to continue to operate normally with all outstations continuing to communicate with one another.

The controller shall contain sufficient resident software and data storage capability to fulfil the operational functions detailed in the Specification. The MCP shall contain all the interfacing equipment between plant and equipment such that the outstation software is fully compatible with any such plant and equipment.

The controller shall be provided with capacity and memory for future additions of at least 20% of which a minimum shall be 5% of each type of point. The memory shall be sufficient to allow all programmes associated with these points to be run in the outstation.

The controllers shall be provided with their own internal battery back up power supply capable of maintaining the memory for not less than 100 hours. Should the outstation go off line for any reason this shall be reported immediately.



Page 171/245

2.24.4 Man Machine Interface (MMI)

A BMS MMI shall control and monitoring the MEP systems and provide the operator with sufficient functions and features to fully maintain the BMS. The MMI shall be fully interactive and totally graphic and icon based and include but not limited to Dynamic Graphical displays, Dynamic objects, icons and text, User Security, Navigation keys, Alarm & Events, Trending, Database and Data log and archiving. The MMI shall run on an industrial standard desktop computer with flat screen monitor and laser printer located and.

2.24.5 Fail Safe

The system shall be designed to fail safe in the event of power failures and incorporate memory backup of software.

2.24.6 Power Supply

The equipment supplied shall be suitable for operation on single phase power supplies.

In order to avoid the corruption of the ECS equipment operation by electrical interference, all wiring shall be installed to minimise coupling of electromagnetic and electrostatic interference to low voltage signal and data wiring. The preferred method of achieving this shall be by ensuring a physical separation of greater than 50mm between the power supply cables and the signal and data cables. Where mixed wiring is unavoidable, braided screen mains cable, dressed close to metalwork is preferred but the tender shall clearly specify the methods by which he intends to eliminate any such interference with his signal and data transmission.

The BMS shall be protected from interference by the operation of hand held radio transmitters, radio pagers etc within 1m of the equipment.

2.24.7 Remote I/O Outstation Panel

Outstations are distributed around the station and contain the BMS remote I/O modules. They are intermediate units in the BMS control system providing the major interface between plant and equipment. The outstations collect and transmit data from the plant and equipment.

All outstations having a command or control function shall have a standalone capability such that a failure of any one unit shall still permit the plant and controls associated with the outstations to continue to operate normally with all outstations continuing to communicate with one another.

New outstations shall be provided to house all the decoding devices, interface relays where required, transducers and reset devices.

New outstations shall be able to provide the central control station with status information concerning their internal operations. This information shall include but not be limited to:-

• Data transmission conditions and verification.

• Internal status.



Page 172/245

• Battery condition where applicable.

The outstation shall be capable of accepting digital and analogue, pulse and pulsed inputs and providing digital and analogue outputs. The outstation shall also perform as follows for:-

Pulse Input The status of a pulse input shall be maintained by the outstation until 'read' by the outstation even though the equipment generating the input has returned to its previous state.

Digital Inputs Shall monitor the change of state and volt free contact.

Pulsed Inputs Pulses originating from flow meters and electrical kWh or kVA meters shall be accumulated into registers readable by the relevant outstation. The registers shall be capable of counting pulses into the main register and transferring its contents, as a result of an external contact closure (such as a demand period timing pulse), to back up register. The outstation shall have the capability of reading and resetting either register.

Digital Outputs The output signal shall operate as a result of ON or OFF command from the outstation or the outstation software.

Analogue Inputs Analogue to digital (A to D) conversion of inputs originating from process parameters shall be accomplished and stored within outstations.

Analogue Outputs The signals may be generated as a result of a command by the outstation software. Digital to analogue (D to A) conversion shall be performed by the outstations. Any equipment necessary for the conversation of the output signal to the required process level shall be provided.

Each outstation shall be provided with capacity for future additions of at least 20% of which a minimum shall be 5% of each type of point. The memory shall be sufficient to allow all programmes associated with these points to be run in the outstation.

The outstations shall be enclosed within the floor or wall mounted control panels. These panels shall meet IP55 specification and comply with the Control Panel Specification. The cabinets shall be provided with a key lock and all cabinet locks shall use the same key numbers.

2.24.8 Outstation Interfaces with Sensors and Operating Devices

Digital Inputs Electrical power for contacts shall be provided by the outstation.

Digital Outputs The contact output signals rated at 2A inductive shall be suitable for operating remote devices with 220V 60Hz coils.



Page 173/245

Analogue Input Outstations shall be able to accept standard input ranges (4-20mA, 0-10 volts DC). Any transducers required to produce suitable signals shall be provided and installed. Conversion to engineering units and alarm levels shall be provided by the system software in the outstation. Overall resolution between sensors and outstations shall be better than + 1% of the input range span of the sensor transducer combination.

All analogue temperature sensors shall have a resolution not exceeding 0.25oC accuracy better than + 0.5oC and a stability at least equal to platinum resistance thermometers.

Analogue Outputs Output signals shall be either (4-20mA, 0-10 volts DC).

2.24.9 Transmission System

The transmission system shall be configured to provide the lowest possible communication times between the outstations.

2.24.10 Power Failure – Alarms and Restoration

Switching back up power supply by any unit in the system shall initiate a critical alarm. Recovery from a power supply failure to any part of the system shall be fully automatic and a return to normal indication reported to the operator's terminal.

2.24.11 Plant Start/Stop Programme

The software shall permit each new item of plant or new plant system where applicable to be assigned individual start/stop times, as a result of time or interlock sequences.

At the request of the operator a system summary of all programmed points shall be obtainable with status conditions. It shall be possible to obtain summaries for individual systems or all systems displayed on either the VDU or the printer.

2.24.12 Interlocking

All plant interlocking with the exception of safety interlocks shall be achieved through software. In the case of safety interlocks these shall be carried out via hard wiring and also through software to prevent 'mismatch' alarms. It shall be possible to change the interlocking scheme via the operator keyboard at any time via password access. The interlock chain for each device shall be displayed in a simple and easily understood format so that the method of control of that device may be understood by reading the VDU.

2.24.13 Sensors

Temperature sensors shall be generally of the NTC (thermistor) type for 2 wire unscrewed connection to the controllers. They shall not be susceptible to interference even when run alongside lighting or power cables.



Page 174/245

Combined temperatures and humidity sensors shall plug into a common base plate. To achieve minimum susceptibility to dust the actual sensing of the relative humidity shall be mechanical rather than electrical.

Temperature, pressure and humidity sensors shall be capable of set point adjustment over their full range.

Sensors in water systems shall be of the immersion type and shall be mounted in a stainless steel pocket inserted into the pipework of sufficient length to ensure complete immersion of the sensing element.

2.24.14 Control Valves

Control valves shall be of the plug and seat type with spring return and fast variable speed response. Valves shall have linear characteristics and a turn down ratio of not less than 100:1. Plant valves are all to be provided with a hand wheel for manual override for testing and balancing purposes on start up. Connection between the valves and the controllers shall be 2 wire unscreened interference free.

Valves shall be screwed up to and including 50mm nominal diameter and flanged BS 4504 65mm diameter and above.

Control valves for chilled water systems shall be suitable for a working pressure condition of 4 bar.

Under power failure conditions three port valves shall cycle to the full bypass position.

2.24.15 Damper Motors

Damper motors shall have linear action with simple mounting brackets and linkage for connection to modulating dampers. Connection to the controller shall be 3 wire unscreened and interference free. The movement of damper motors shall be a function of the output signal from the controllers irrespective of the friction and hysteresis of the damper itself of air pressure on the blades. Maximum stroke time shall be not more than two minutes.

All the control equipment shall require no preventative maintenance and shall not be susceptible to drift.

All metal equipment shall be bonded to the system earth.

2.24.16 Control Functions

The BMS control system shall provide control and monitoring of the following MEP devices:-

Dessert Cooler Control & Monitor Packaged Roof Unit Control & Monitor Air Handling Unit Control & Monitor Closed Control Unit Control & Monitor Packaged Evaporating Unit Control & Monitor Packaged Condenser Unit Control & Monitor Return Air Fan Control & Monitor



Page 175/245

Exhaust Air Fan Control & Monitor Supply Air Fan Control & Monitor Gas Purge Fan Control & Monitor Motorized Smoke Fire Damper Control & Monitor Motorized Damper Control & Monitor Variable Air Volume Monitor Room Temperature Sensor Monitor Drainage Sump Pump Monitor Drainage Sump Level Sensor Monitor Escalator Sump Pump Control & Monitor Lift Sump Pump Control & Monitor Booster Pressure Pump Monitor Cold Water Circulation Pump Monitor Air Circuit Breakers Monitor Main Circuit Breaker Monitor Digital Multifunction Meter Monitor Uninterruptible Power Supply Monitor Central Battery System Monitor Generator Monitor Foh Lighting System Control & Monitor Main Fire System Monitor Fire Alarm Zone Monitor Fire & Jockey Pump Monitor Fire Water Compartment Level Switch Monitor Gas Release Panel Monitor

2.24.17 Control Panels

Motor control centre panels shall be provided as detailed on the drawings and generally as follows: -

• MCC 1

• MCC 2

• MCC 3

2.24.18 Fire Alarm Interlocks

Fire alarm interlocks shall be provided to each control panel to shut down equipment as required.

Gaseous fire suppression clearance panels

Gas clearance panels shall be supplied and installed to all rooms with fire suppression. The panels shall display the following: -

• Extract fan status Run/Trip/Off

• Supply air damper status Open/Closed



Page 176/245

• Extract air damper status Open/Closed

• Exhaust damper Open/Closed

2.24.19 Interlinks with other systems

The BMS control systems acts as an interface with the data transfer system to the SCADA. The Term SCADA refers to the main Rail control system used for control and monitoring all rail and sub-systems across the railway. The BMS shall interface with the SCADA at each station using a modbus TCP/IP protocol. The BMS interface shall provide SCADA with MEP monitoring & alarm points and remote control of the station lighting and ventilation modes.

The BMS system shall be complete with the appropriate interfaces to accommodate the above data transfer systems.

2.25 INSTRUMENTATION


All instrumentation shall be mounted such that it can be read from a normal access position. Orientation and sizes of gauges etc. shall be such that the readings can be observed from normal standing position at floor level or fixed walkways etc. Where this is not possible due to mounting height or congestion of services, remote gauges shall be used, mounted in groups on a panel and clearly labelled to identify the function and location of the sensor etc.

Instrumentation shall not be installed in any location that protrudes into designated access ways, restricts access, and becomes a tripping or snagging hazard.

2.25.2 Pressure Gauges

Pressure gauges shall be installed at the locations indicated on the Working Drawings or at all major pieces of equipment in the chilled water plantroom such as chilled water pumps, condenser pumps and headers.

Gauges installed on chilled and condenser water piping shall be provided with a gauge cock of straight pattern, ground plug type with lever handle. Gauges installed adjacent to pumps or other locations where rapid pressure fluctuations are likely, shall be fitted with pressure snubbers to limit oscillations of the needle and prolong the life of the gauge.

The pressure gauge range shall be chosen in such a way that the indicator will be situated near a middle position during normal operating conditions. The gauge shall have an adjustable pointer.

Gauges shall be Bourdon tube type to BS EN 837-1 or equivalent standard 100 mm diameter, except those installed in plantrooms, which shall be 150 mm diameter. Gauges shall have enamelled mild steel case with chrome bezel, substantial glass face, and phosphor bronze Bourdon tube. Dial face shall be white with black scale graduations and numbering.

Gauges shall have overall accuracy of ±1% of scale range and shall comply with the following requirements: -



Page 177/245

Pressure (bar) 10 4.5 3.0 2.5 1.5

Gauge range (bar) 0 - 20 0 – 10 0 - 6 0 - 5 0 – 3

Figure intervals (bar) 2 1 1 1 0.5

Intermediate intervals (mbar)

500 100 100 100 100

2.25.3 Thermometers

Thermometers shall be provided and installed in pipeline services in the locations indicated on the Working Drawings or at all major equipment points in the chilled water plantroom on condenser water, chilled water headers, and each chilled water heat exchanger flow/return.

Thermometer pockets shall be located and shall be of sufficient depth to ensure a true reading of the fluid temperature. Pockets shall be filled with oil or special conducting paste and the thermometers fixed so that the tails are truly subjected to the temperature to be measured. Pockets shall be installed in wall plantroom equipment (pumps etc) and at all AHU coils, etc.

No thermometer pocket shall be fitted to pipework less than 50mm diameter. If required in smaller pipes, the pipe shall be enlarged and a straight section of 50mm diameter pipe fitted to take the thermometer pockets shall be screw fixed to a box in the pipeline to enable them to be removed for cleaning.

Right angle or obtuse angle thermometers shall be provided for fitting to vertical faces.

Thermometers fitted more than 1,500 mm above floor level shall be the 100 mm diameter dial type, having brass/SS304 cases with polished and lacquered finish. Thermometers fitted below 1500 mm above floor level shall be of the Mercury/Alcohol in Glass type complete with a protective mild steel powder coated case.

All thermometers shall be calibrated in degrees Celsius and be suitably labelled to fully identify its function.

2.25.4 Airflow Measurement Grids

Where specified, airflow measurement grids shall be installed in the ductwork. Airflow measurement grids shall be of the multiple sampling type measuring total and static pressures with all points connected to a common header thus enabling the air velocity to be measured. Airflow measurement grids shall be located in a straight length of duct free from any obstructions with a minimum of 5 times the largest duct dimension of straight duct upstream and 2 times the largest dimension downstream.

Airflow measurement grids shall be as the Cambridge Airflow Measurement Station or equal. An alternative will be the Wilson Flow Grid, but suitable tappings to enable static pressure readings to be taken shall be provided upstream of the grid.



Page 178/245

2.26 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

2.26.1 General

Throughout the execution of the installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with the Local Regulations and shall notify CRCC of any infringement which directly or indirectly detracts from the safe and satisfactory operation of the installation(s) whether or not such infringement relates to the works covered in the Contract or to those associated with others.

2.26.1.1 Standards and requirements for the testing and commissioning works are listed should be in accordance to:-

(a) Statutory Obligations and other requirements, Specifications in other parts of this document and Government Standards specified by Local Authorities; (b) Manufacturers’ recommendations and specifications.

2.26.1.2 The Contractor is required to appoint a competent and experienced testing and commissioning engineer responsible for the overall planning, organizing, coordinating, supervising and monitoring of the testing and commissioning works and also certifying all results and reports from the testing and commissioning works. The Contractor shall submit, at the commencement of the Contract, information detailing qualification and experience of the testing and commissioning engineer for CRCC approval.

2.26.1.3 It is necessary to require the Contractor to provide, at no cost to the Employer, all necessary equipment, apparatus, tools and materials for carrying out of testing and commissioning works.

(a) Master Programmed of Testing and Commissioning Works The Contractor is required to submit a programme for testing and commissioning works shall be submitted at the commencement of the Contract, usually within the first three months. The programme shall indicate the tentative dates of all tests and commissioning works that will be carried out throughout the whole contract and all necessary submissions and approval relating to testing and commissioning and ensure that the testing and commissioning programme matches the master programme for construction and that all testing and commissioning works are complete before the completion date of the Contract. (b) Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Methods and Procedures The Contractor is required to submit detailed inspection, testing and commissioning methods and procedures together with report formats for reporting inspection, testing and commissioning results for CRCC approval at least four months before commencement of testing and commissioning works, or four months after the commencement of the Contract, whichever is earlier. (c) Labor and Materials The Contractor is required to be responsible for provision of all labour and both consumable and non-consumable materials for carrying out testing and commissioning works at their expenses. Electricity supply, water and LP gas and town gas for carrying out of testing and commissioning works shall also be arranged and provided by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer.



Page 179/245

(d) Supply of Inspection, Measuring and Testing Equipment The Contractor is required to supply the calibrated equipment and instrument for testing and commissioning works. (e) Readiness for Commissioning and Testing The Contractor is required to check the completion of the works to be tested or commissioned, the associated builder’s works and the associated building services installations to ensure that testing and commissioning can be proceeded in a safe and satisfactory manner without obstruction. (f) "Type-test" Certificate "Type-test" for equipment shall be carried out at the manufacturers’ works or elsewhere appropriate in order to demonstrate their compliance with the Local Regulation or requirements. "Type-test" certificates together with the corresponding drawings, sketches, reports and any other necessary documents shall be submitted to the CRCC for approval before delivery of the equipment.

2.26.1.4 The Contractor is required to provide advanced notice for inspection, testing and commissioning works as follows:- (a) Off-site Inspection and Testing An advanced notice of at least one week before commencement of the inspection or test shall be provided. (b) On-site Inspection, Testing and Commissioning An advanced notice of at least 4 calendar days before commencement of inspection, testing or commissioning shall be provided.

2.26.6 Documentation and Deliverables The Contractor shall record all commissioning information and testing results at the witness of CRCC or his representatives. Commissioning and testing record shall be properly checked and certified by contractor‘s Testing and Commissioning Engineer and signed by the CRCC or his representative who has witnessed the testing or commissioning before submission to CRCC. The Contractor shall submit full commissioning and testing report to CRCC within 14 calendar days after completion of commissioning and testing of the installation.

2.26.2 Testing and Commissioning – Definitions

For the purpose of this Specification the following definitions shall apply:-

2.26.2.1 Commissioning: the advancement of an installation from the stage of static completion to full working conditions and to meet the specified requirements. This will include setting into operation and regulation of the installation.

2.26.2.2 Setting to work: the process of setting a static system into motion.

2.26.2.3 Off-site Tests: tests carried out on items of equipment at manufacturer’s works or elsewhere to ensure compliance with the requirements of Specifications and/or relevant Standards or Codes of Practice (or other standards specified).



Page 180/245

2.26.2.4 Site Tests: tests on static plant and systems (e.g. inspection and testing of welds, hydraulic testing of pipe work, etc.) to ensure correct and safe installation and operation.

2.26.2.5 Regulation: the process of adjusting the rates of fluid flow and heat transfer in a distribution system within specified tolerances as stated in the relevant CIBSE Commissioning Code.

2.26.2.6 Performance Testing: the measuring and recording of the performance of the commissioned installation.

2.26.3 Testing and Commissioning – General

2.26.3.1 Any defects of workmanship, materials and performance, maladjustments or other irregularities which become apparent during commissioning or testing shall be rectified by the Contractor at no cost to CRCC and the relevant part of the commissioning or testing procedure shall be repeated at the Contractor’s expenses.

2.26.3.2 The entire testing and commissioning procedure shall be undertaken by the Contractor’s own competent specialist staff or by a competent Independent Commissioning Specialist nominated by and acting for the Contractor and approved by CRCC.

2.26.3.3 The Contractor shall nominate a competent independent Specialist to conduct commissioning work.

2.26.3.4 At the appropriate time in the Contract, usually within the first three months, the Contractor shall furnish the Provisional Testing and Commissioning Programme, methods, procedures and formats of test records to CRCC. This shall be updated as the work progresses towards completion.

2.36.3.5 Unless otherwise indicated, all electricity, main water and other fuels, such as town gas, necessary for the operation of the plant during preliminary runs and for full adjustments and commissioning tests will be provided at no cost by the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Contract.

2.26.3.6 If considered appropriate, the Contractor shall be required to carry out demonstration to dismantle those parts/components of the installation which are considered difficult/impossible for maintenance access. The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all necessary modification work at no extra charge to the Employer to alleviate the difficulties associated with dismantling or maintenance access.

2.26.4 Off - Site Tests

Where the specified Standards or Codes of Practice stipulate, "type-tests" on items of equipment to demonstrate compliance shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works or elsewhere as appropriate. In all cases, "type-tests" Certificates shall be submitted in duplicate to CRCC. Cases where appropriate, "type-tests" Certificates will be accepted are as follows:-

2.26.4.1 Fans: "type-tests" Certificates showing fan characteristic curves (ISO 5801:1997), "type-tests" Certificates for sound power levels (ISO 5136:2003), fan dynamic balancing test Certificates completed with a method of statement from manufacturer on testing to Grade 2.5, 4 & 6.3 on appropriate fan types in accordance with ISO 1940-1:2003 and ISO 1940-2:1997.



Page 181/245

2.26.4.2 Pumps: "type-tests" Certificates for head, discharge, speed and power input (BS EN ISO 9906:2000 as appropriate).

2.26.4.3 Electric motors: "type-tests" Certificates in accordance with BS EN 60034-1:2004 and/or IEC 60072-1:1991, IEC 60072-2:1990 & IEC 60072-3:1994.

2.26.4.4 Low voltage starter switchgear and control gear assembly : "type-tests" Certificates for starter (e.g. auto-transformer) and control panels assembly as a whole in accordance with BS EN 60439-1:1999.

2.26.4.5 High voltage switchgear and motor control switchboard : "type-tests" Certificates for high voltage switchgear and switchboard in accordance with IEC 62271-100:2006.

2.26.4.6 Other electrical equipment, such as air heaters (but excluding thermostatic control equipment): "type-tests" Certificates in accordance with BS EN 60335-1:2002, BS EN 60669-1:2000, BS 5733:1995 and BS 6220:1983 as appropriate.

2.26.4.7 Refrigeration plant: "type-tests" Certificates for hydraulic and air pressure testing at works in accordance with BS EN 378-1:2000 to BS EN 378-4:2000.

2.26.5 Site Tests

2.26.5.1 The Contractor shall carry out "on-site" tests in respect of all static systems to ensure safe and proper operation as conforming to the design intent. Such tests shall include test of welds and pressure tests on the hydraulic systems.

2.26.5.2 On completion of cleaning operations described in other parts of this document of the T&C Procedure for Air-conditioning, Refrigeration, Ventilation and Central Monitoring & Control Systems Installation each water distribution system shall be re-charged with clean water. Any items of equipment set to operate at or below the test pressure shall be isolated or removed prior to applying this test.

2.26.5.3 All ductwork shall be tested for air leakage in accordance with DW/143 - A Practical Guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing.

2.26.6 Inspection and Testing During Construction Period

2.26.6.1 Periodic Site Tests Site inspections of "work in progress" will be made by CRCC or the representative from time to time. The Contractor shall keep such inspection record for checking from time to time. Works to be permanently covered up shall be subjected to inspection and test before cover up. During the inspection, if the CRCC discovers any work that has been covered up before inspection and testing, this work shall be uncovered for inspection and testing to CRCC. The cost involved in uncovering the work, inspecting, testing and re-concealing the work together with any consequential losses shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.

2.26.6.2 Tests at Factory The Contractor shall note that CRCC may require to witness tests and inspections of locally and/or overseas manufactured equipment during construction at the manufacturer’s works. Where this requirement is indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall allow



Page 182/245

for making the necessary arrangements; including and indicating the CRCC travel and subsistence expenses in the Bill of Quantities.

2.26.6.3 Factory Test Certificates Certificates of all hydraulic and other manufacturers" tests carried out at the manufacturers" works shall be forwarded in duplicate to CRCC for approval. This approval shall normally be required before the materials or apparatus are dispatched from the manufacturer’s works. Where specified, the Contractor shall subject certain materials and equipment to be tested by the recognized institutions or laboratories and submit the type test certificates to CRCC for approval.

2.26.7 Documents and Data Requires For Hand-Over Meeting

2.26.7.1 General The Contractor shall note that the system cannot be handed over until all the foregoing requirements (where applicable) have been carried out to the satisfaction of CRCC.

2.26.7.2 Test Certificates Before the handover inspection, the Contractor shall provide the follow test/record certificates where applicable:-

(a) Copies of manufacturer’s works tests/record certificates on plant items comprising heat

generating plant, heat exchangers, chillers units, packaged air conditioning units, tanks, vessels, motors, fans, pumps, etc.;

(b) Copies of hydraulic and pressure test/record certificates for works carried out on site; (c) Copies of boiler and/or refrigeration plant efficiency test/record certificates; (d) Copies of Registered Surveyor’s test/record certificates for pressure vessels (if any); (e) Copies of all performance test/record certificates including water balancing, air

balancing, room conditions, etc. These certificates shall be accompanied with all appropriate chart sand diagrams; and

(f) Copies of all noise test/survey records on every noise emitting plant and machineries, individual room/space and a statement of compliance with the statutory requirements under the current Local Ordinance.

2.26.7.3 "As-built" Drawings All necessary copies of "As-built" drawings as detailed in the Contract Documents and this General Specification. (*settings of all the sensors are to be indicated)

2.26.7.4 Operation Maintenance and Services Manuals All necessary copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals as detailed in the Contract Documents and associated documents. The Contractor shall include functional spare parts and contact lists of the suppliers in the manual. (*settings of all the sensors are to be indicated)

2.26.7.5 Manufacturer’s Name Plate



Page 183/245

Every item of plant supplied by a manufacturer shall be fitted with a clearly engraved, stamped or cast manufacturer’s name plate properly secured to the plant item and showing :- - Manufacturer’s Name; - Serial and/or Model No.; - Date of Supply; - Rating/Capacity; and - Test and Working Pressure (where applicable).

2.26.7.6 Labels and Related Instructions All labelling and the related equipment user instructions shall submit to CRCC for approval.

3.0 FIRE SERVICES SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1 FM 200 GASEOUS FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

3.1.1 General

Automatic standalone gaseous fire suppression system design and installation shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 2001

Each room protected with gas suppression system shall have its own cylinder with the agent within the same room it is protecting.

The installation and design shall be made in strict accordance with the drawings, specification and applicable standard stated below. All mechanical equipment shall be manufactured under ISO 9001 approval.

The system shall be installed by a local civil defence accredited company.

Provide control and indication equipment.

Provide audible alarms and visual alarms, distinct from the building main fire alarms, to achieve the required sound levels.

Provide integral control facilities and effect interfaces with the fire alarm systems and other systems including the ECS, Ventilation Control and Smoke Damper Control Panel.

The battery capacity shall be designed for the 24 hours operation of the panel & the system during the non-availability of main power source and a 30 mins alarm period as required in NFPA72.

Ensure that all components are of the same manufacture and are fully compatible with the Fire Alarm System.

Provide dedicated power supplies to the Fire Suppression Control Panels including independent standby battery-charger facilities.

Undertake all testing and commissioning of the system in accordance with standard and regulatory criteria, and to the specialised manufacturers standards and to the satisfaction of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, as required. Undertake all testing and commissioning to



Page 184/245

an integrated programme with other systems to ensure that all necessary power supplies are available, and that the correct operation of all interfaces with ancillary systems can be proved.

Provide full record information, including testing results, operational and maintenance manuals, record drawings, zonal designations and certificates. The operational and maintenance manuals shall explain any special knowledge or tools the owner will be required to employ, and all spare parts that needs to be readily available.

Provide information outlining the warranty of each component or device used in the system.

Employ an independent testing company to undertake a room integrity pressure test of each of the gaseous fire suppression protected rooms.

3.1.2 Design

Provide a gaseous fire suppression system complying with the following relevant standards (use latest edition):-

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, 2007 edition

BS 5445 Components of automatic fire detection systems.

NFPA 2001: Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.

2007 edition.

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, 2007 edition

BS 5839:

Pt1 2002

Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings-

BS 6266: 2002 Code of practice for fire protection for electronic data processing installations.

BS 6387 Specification for performance requirements for cables required to maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions.

BS 7273:

2000 Pt 1

Electrical & Mechanical Actuation of Gaseous Total Flooding Extinguishing Systems

BS 7846: 2000 Electrical cables – 600/ 1 000 V armoured fire-resistant cables having thermosetting insulation and low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire.



Page 185/245

The equipment shall be provided by a local civil defence accredited company.

3.1.3 System Parameters

The gaseous fire suppression system shall be a total flood scheme, clean agent, designed and installed with a flooding factor to provide uniform concentration in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the standards listed above for the protected areas. For rooms indicated on the schedule as ‘dedicated’ cylinder banks and manifolds shall be provided for each room and dedicated to that room. For the rooms indicated as ‘central bank’ these shall be fed from a single set of cylinders, located generally in the position indicated on the drawings, and each protected space shall be fed through a directional valve fitted on to the common manifold and separate pipework shall feed to the protected space from that point.

3.1.4 System Type and Configuration

The gaseous fire suppression system is to comprise at least the following items:-

• Gas Release Panel (GRP). Alarm circuits connected to audible, visual or combined alarms such as the beacon, the sounder (siren) and the bell. Manual control facilities.

• Distribution pipework.

• Discharge nozzles.

• Storage cylinders with electrically operated discharge actuator.

• Mounting brackets

• Automatic detection providing co-incident zone activation.

• Control devices.

• Auxiliary circuits connected so as to automatically interface with other systems such as air conditioning.

• Local Manual Actuator.

• Horn Strobe

• Flasher

BSISO 14520 Gaseous Fire Fighting – Physical Properties & System Design.

NFPA 130 STD for Fixed Guideway Transit & Passenger Rail Systems, 2007 Edition

Manufacturer Relevant Design Manual



Page 186/245

• Signage

• Low Pressure switch for each cylinder

• Discharge pressure switch

• Abort switch

The Fire Suppression System is to form a totally separate element from the total building fire alarm system.

The provisional location for over pressure relief dampers is indicated on the tender drawings.

3.1.5 Gas Release Panels

Provide Fire Suppression analogue addressable multizone main control and indicator panels located at the entrance to the protected spaces as indicated on the tender drawings. The panel should be of rigid construction and shall be either surface mounted or semi-recessed.

The panels are to incorporate the following features as a minimum:

Liquid crystal display, back-lit, providing up to 80 characters per alarm condition, to enable all alarm and fault conditions to be reported. A “help” button should be available to further detail the text displays.

All necessary control cards for the number of loops required.

Lamp/LED indications for the following:-

• Mains on

• Trouble

• Zone 1 Fire

• Zone 2 Fire

• Gas discharged

• Power supply failure

• Battery healthy

• Hold Activation

Key enabled user controls to:-

• Set the Room Gas Extinguishing System Automatic or Manual.

• Disable links to other systems for test purposes.

• Zone identification, where required.



Page 187/245

• Supervisory buzzer.

• Integral battery/charger power supply.

• Audible and visual alarm circuits.

• Visual warning sign circuits to control entrance into the protected space.

Interfaces for the external monitoring of the following conditions (to be made available in station/depot MAIN FIRE ALARM panel):

• Actaution of first point detector (i.e. ‘first knock’)

• Actuation of second point detector and commencement of gas release sequence (i.e. ‘second knock’)

• Gaseous fire suppression system released

• Gaseous fire suppression system control panel set for ‘Manual’

• Gaseous fire suppression system control panel common failure or fault condition

• Cylinder pressure low

There shall be a selector switch provided for Manual mode / Automatic Mode for the actuation of the Gas. Even while the system is in Manual mode the detection & alarm system shall function without any interruption

There are standard signals to be transferred already available in the panels. Any additional selected interfaces requires a bespoke unit.

• Interface for the activation of the damper control panel to shut down the external air supply and extract paths prior to gas release.

• Pull down push button for manual extinguisher release.

• The electrical release on the panel, and the mechanical release lever on the cylinder.

• Field Devices.

3.1.6 Manual Gas Release Points

Provide manual gas release points made of polycarbonate/moulded ABS material and finished in yellow. Install the release point with a suitable lift off protective cover to prevent accidental operation.

Install addressable gas release points at each exit from the protected space and at the Main Control panel located at the entrance to the protected space. The manual release point may be incorporated into the status indicator panel. A manual release warning sign shall be provided and displayed next to each fire suppression release unit. Manual release points should be outside of the room.



Page 188/245

3.1.7 Hold Off Button

An addressable hold-off push button shall be located on the inside of the protected area near each exit. This switch type shall be of dead man switch type.

3.1.8 Interface Units

The interface units are to be of the addressable type connected to the local loop circuit and are to provide the required inputs and outputs for control or indication functions.

Each input/output way is to be fully programmable from the control panel and be fully monitored for open and short circuit conditions.

Bells are to be of the underdome type with a fully enclosed operating mechanism. Bells are to be of nominal diameter 150mm or 200mm. Bells are to be polarised to suit monitored sounder circuit wiring and, where appropriate, an end of line device is to be fitted to the terminals of the last sounder on the circuit.

Sounders are to be electronic two-tone, red coloured, with an output frequency of 500-1000Hz, providing a sound level of not less than 104 dBA at 1 metre and to have adjustable volume control. Ensure that the number of sounders on any one circuit does not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended maximum. Ensure these units are polarised and suppressed as a standard. Supply complete with centre disc bearing the legend “Fire” in black.

Red flashing beacons are to operate at all times on second stage alarm warning of impending gas discharge.

Provide manual delay timer buttons made of polycarbonate/moulded ABS material and finished in green.

Install the delay timer buttons at each exit from the protected space and at the main control panel located at the entrance to the protected space.

Provide status indicator units adjacent to each secondary entry point into the protected space to give visual indication of the system status. The signals shall include system on automatic, system on manual and gas discharged.

Analogue addressable ionisation and optical type smoke detectors shall be located as indicated on tender drawings. Detectors shall be connected together within each space to provide protection.

Total flood type discharge nozzles shall be provided for the system to disperse the extinguishing gas. The specialist shall determine the final discharge nozzle size and orifice code by computer hydraulic analysis, prior to mechanical installation. The discharge nozzle shall be installed and co-ordinated so they stay clear of all other objects and throw the gas in the direction required.

A large sign shall be displayed informing the occupants and emergency services of the type of gas to each of the entrance doorways in the protected areas.

The rooms dedicated for fire suppression shall be sealed to avoid any leakage of the gas to adjacent rooms at both high and low level.



Page 189/245

A fireman’s switches on the control panel shall operate the exhaust fan from the fire-compressed rooms.

The fresh air make-up being supplied to the rooms with fire suppression must have a damper fitted, which is controllable via the fire panel. This damper shall be normally open, and close automatically in the event of fire.

Wherever multiple cylinders are used for single system, master & slave logic shall be used. Agent design concentration & fill density to comply with UL, FM, NFPA & local authority requirements. Signage & flasher to be provided at the room entrance to restrict people entering the room when gas discharge occurs.

3.1.9 Gas Cylinder Installation

• The cylinders shall be manufactured from steel, in accordance with EN 1964-2. Each cylinder shall be pressure tested and fitted with a pheumatically actuated quick action discharge vale and a dual feed pressure gauge.

• Cylinders shall be floor mounted and securely fastened back into purpose made racking and braced installation.

• Each cylinder shall be provided with a certificate provided by the company who charged the vessel with the gaseous fire suppression system gas mixture. The certificate shall be secured around the cylinder with a chain fastener.

Each cylinder shall be fitted with a dial faced type pressure gauge.

Each cylinder shall be interconnected with a galvanized steel manifold. Each branch connection from the manifold to a vessel shall be fitted with a brass non-return assembly.

3.1.10 Power Supplies

Provide separate power supplies to each item of equipment, as required, comprising a primary mains single phase. supply, and a secondary/back-up D.C. power supply unit, incorporating a battery charger, for the specified system operating voltage. Power supplies are to comply with BS EN 54-2: 1998, BS EN 54-4: 1998 and BS 5839 : Part 1. Power supplies are to be provided for the following items:-

• Gas Release Panel (GRP), including ancillary control and indication equipment.

• Interface Units

• Other ancillary items requiring power.

Provide fault monitoring and alarm indication for:-

• Mains power failure

• Battery power failure

• Charger output failure



Page 190/245

Connect each supply to equipment via a local unswitched fuse connection unit, suitably labelled. Final connection to the equipment is to be in heat-resistant LSF cable of a suitable rating enclosed within steel conduit. Label fuse connection units with details of equipment served and include wording ‘Fire Alarm - Do not switch off’.

Ensure each supply is dedicated to particular equipment item (and does NOT feed any non-fire alarm device).

Label appropriate MCB’s in Distribution Boards to emphasise supplies are serving Fire Alarm Equipment. The power supplies shall be taken from the distribution equipment detailed in the electrical specification.

The secondary power supply is to comprise a fully encapsulated low maintenance type NiCad or sealed lead acid battery to BS 6290. The battery must be able to sustain full system operation for 24 hours in quiescent mode, and thereafter operate sounders in all zones for 30 minutes continuously in the event of mains failure.

Where power supply units are required for sounder circuits, ensure that they are suitably sized to cater for any reasonable future requirements. Ensure that the units are in full compliance with the requirements of B.S. 5839. It should be noted that loop powered devices are the preferred option.

Battery chargers shall be high quality constant potential type, with temperature compensation. Charging voltages and currents are to be checked and recorded during commissioning.

Do not take delivery of any batteries until the complete system is ready for test. The intention is to ensure that the batteries do not degrade during the construction stage of the works.

3.1.11 Installation

Ensure that the installation and wiring requirements referred to in that document are observed in connection with all installation and wiring of the alarm and detection elements of this installation.

All system wiring shall be carried out in mineral insulated copper cable with FP 400/600, fixed to medium duty cable tray and/or clipped direct to the building structure with metallic plastic coated cable clips. Where ever possible cabling shall be concealed from normal view, run within ceiling voids and floor voids, where applicable.

3.1.12 Pipework

Provide all pipework and nozzles to ensure total gas flood discharge at the required concentration and maintained in the space for 10 minutes minimum to the room space of each protected areas. Ensure that nozzles are directed to minimise damage to the building. Pipework routes and sizes shall be designed to achieve the gas conditions and concentration required to extinguish the fire and in accordance with the gas manufacturers recommendations.

All pipes shall be to ASTM A 106 Schedule 80 SEAMLESS painted to RAL 3001. Fittings used shall be # 300 rating complying with ASTM / ASME B16.3 for fittings 50mm & below



Page 191/245

and fittings 65mm and above shall be wrought iron butt welded complying with ASTM / ASME B16.9.

Comply fully with all aspects of the manufacturers design manual in respect of pipework and nozzle arrangements.

No room shall be exposed to an over pressure of more than 250 Pascals. Each room shall be studied by the specialist to establish it’s suitability to withstand the internal pressure without damage and identify any changes necessary. If it is not possible for the room to withstand the stated pressure then dampers which will limit the pressure to a satisfactory value shall be provided. In the calculation of the required damper sizes it shall be presumed that the natural leakage from the room will be zero. This will ensure that any improvements made to the integrity of the room subsequent to the completion of this installation will not adversely effect the ability of the over pressure dampers to achieve their objective.

The number, size and location of dampers necessary to achieve a satisfactory relief of over pressure shall be detailed on drawings and schedules and shall be issued to all interested parties for agreement prior to ordering materials or commencing work. The dampers shall be issued to a designated person for building in to the construction but full technical information and designs shall be provided by the specialist on how this work is to be carried out.

In the event that a room can not be relieved directly to the atmosphere, the following options to be applied:

• another adjacent room, which is at least the same size if not larger than and does not have any fire suppression equipment.

• Fire ducted to external.

3.1.13 Control

The system shall incorporate two modes of operation, manual and automatic, controlled from a key switch located on the main panel. The status of the system (i.e. automatic/manual) shall be indicated at the entrance to every internal entry point into the space.

When on automatic the system shall follow the control sequence detailed below:-

‘First knock’ of Detection Activated on Panel

i) Device/area affected is indicated gaseous fire suppression system control panel and the main fire alarm panel.

ii) Distinctive ‘First Stage’ gaseous fire suppression system alarm sounded by a bell in the protected area.

iii) Operate auxillary relays for shutdown of air conditioning to protected areas.

iv) Upon the control panel receiving an alarm condition from a point detection device on an area/device, the following shall be initiated.



Page 192/245

‘Second knock’ of Detection Activated on Panel

i) Area/device affected is indicated on the gaseous fire suppression system control panel and the main fire alarm panel.

ii) Silence fire alarm bells in the affected protected area.

iii) Second stage distinctive klaxon alarm sounded complete with Xenon beacons visible throughout room. Second stage alarm signal sent to fire and smoke dampers control panel to shut all ductwork dampers and respective fans.

iv) Operate auxiliary relays for shutdown of automatic ventilation dampers to affected protected areas.

v) Operate auxiliary contacts for emergency power off of all electrical equipment (excluding lighting and emergency circuits for life safety.)

vi) Adjustable 0-30s countdown timer proceeds to discharge on completion. At end of time delay the electronic sounder becomes continuous.

Note a): Gaseous fire suppression system discharge countdown to be interruptible by escaping persons at delay buttons by each exit door to re-set the time delay countdown to zero.

Note b): Status indication to be provided in space via lamps and sounders and Xenon beacons.

Provide the following visual indication in the space and external to each access door from the building area:-

• Stage 1 alarm

• Stage 2 alarm

• Gas Release

• Automatic/Manual Status

Provide audible alarm in the space as follows:-



Page 193/245

• General Building Alarm

• Stage 1 alarm

• Stage 2 alarm

All sounds are to be distinctive, separate noises with the general building alarm being common to the other areas of the buildings.

Each room shall be fire rated and air tight from other room. The room integrity test shall be conducted for each room protected with FM200 complying with the requirements of NFPA 2001.

Fire detection actuation & alarm system provided for each gas suppression system shall be standalone. Min.2 no of detectors with a combination of ionisation & optical type smoke detectors shall be provided with actuation for gas release shall be based on 23 sq.m / detector.

There shall be a maximum time delay of 60 seconds for the discharge of gas from the time of double knock of detectors. However this time delay shall be decided by the operatives

Where the rooms have raised floor or raised ceiling, the volume of these shall be considered for calculating the gas quantity. There shall be dedicated detectors & nozzles for these area and all the design requirements shall be the same as described former part of the sub section. Response indicators shall be installed & connected at room level for the detectors installed in raised floor or raise ceiling for monitoring the detector status.

Gas shall be discharged within 10 seconds after the actuation of the solenoid valve. Piping shall be designed accordingly.

A specialised fire contractor approved by the authorities having jurisdiction for design, supply, install & commissioning of the system shall submit a flow calculation for FM 200 system. The software used for the calculation shall be UL listed & shall be approved by AHJ.

3.2 WET FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS

3.2.1 General

Wet fire fighting systems shall comprise the following:

• Water tank.

• Standpipe system

• Sprinkler system.

• Foam – water sprinkler pre-action system

• Pumps and motors.

The complete system shall be in accordance with the requirement of Saudi Civil Defence (SCD).



Page 194/245

Whenever the word "provide" is used it shall mean "furnish, install, test & commission complete and ready for use".

Equipment capacities and performance requirements shall be as listed in the schedule of Equipment shown on the Drawings.

The proposed fire fighting system as shown on the drawings or the one to be provided shall be submitted for approval to SCD.

3.2.2 Standpipe System

Standpipe systems shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 14, 2007 Edition.

Standpipe system water shall be supplied from the fire water storage tanks. Fire pumps shall supply the water to supply the standpipe outlets and hose reels.

Civil Defence inlet breeching pieces shall be provided at each station for the use of the Saudi Civil Defence to pump water into the system.

The location of the breeching inlet shall not be more than 30.5m from the hard standing location. Hard standing location shall be designed by the Architect considering the road accesses with appropriate turning radius as required by NFPA and local authorities.

3.2.3 Sprinklers;

The installation shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 13 ordinary hazard 2 and shall comprise of an incoming water main to a storage tanks, duty and standby sprinkler pumps, Installation control sets, distribution pipe work, control valves and sprinkler heads.

Fire water reserve shall be maintained for one hour operation of fire pump as required by NFPA.

Centrifugal pumps arranged as duty and standby each designed to cater the 100% demand of the fire protection system. Each fire pump shall have its own dedicated controller located at fire pump room. Duty fire pump shall be of electrical motor driven & standby fire pump shall be of diesel engine driven with a diesel storage tank located within the fire pump room. The fuel capacity shall be as required for 8 hours operation of the fire pump. The requirements of electrical & equipments shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20, 2007 Edition & NFPA 70, 2007 Edition. The system pressure shall be maintained by jockey pump. Jockey pump capacity shall be 5 – 7% of the main fire pump

The entire assembly & components in the fire pump room like but not limited to pressure relief valve with waste cone, flow testing arrangements, venturi, shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20

Diesel tank shall be located with in a bund wall & the bund wall shall be sized for 110% of the fuel tank capacity. Diesel storage tank shall have level indicators to monitor the fuel level in the tank

Diesel tank area shall be provided with a modular type foam water sprinkler pre action system complying with NFPA 16



Page 195/245

3.2.4 Codes and Standards;

The works described in this section shall comply fully with the requirements of the applicable “Code and Standards” section of this specification.

3.2.5 Pipe Work;

Potable pipe and fittings shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Pipe work” section of this specification

Pipes used in Fire Portection system shall be Hot dip galvanised SEAMLESS steel pipe confirming to ASTM A53, Grade B

3.2.6 Valves;

Valves shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Valves” section of this specification (2.16.3 through 2.16.17).

Fire protection valves shall all be UL listed and or FM approved with 1380 kpa (200 psi) minimum pressure. Valve shall have 2070 kPa pressure rating if valves are components of high pressure piping system.

Valves controlling water flow in fire protection piping shall be O.S&Y-Outside Screw and Yoke type, except as noted, and shall be UL Listed, FM approved.

Gate valve shall be OS& Y type as indicated in the drawing. Sizes up to 50 mm and below shall be threaded type. The valve body shall be cast bronze and wheel shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL listed and rated for 1380 KPa (200 psi) working pressure.

Sizes 65 mm and above shall be Cast Iron OS&Y Gate valves where indicated. The valve body shall be cast iron with grooved or flanged ends. The valve shall be UL / FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure (or 1725 KPa where required).

Use class 1725 KPa OS&Y gate valves where required. The valve body shall be cast iron and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA standards.

OS & Y gate valves have a tamper switch & shall be monitored electrically through a supervisory switch in the fire alarm panel.

Supervision switches shall be installed for all fire protection valves. The devices shall be electrical; single pole, double-throw; with normally closed contacts and include design that signals controlled valve is in other than normal position

Check valves shall be swinging type or split clapper type with flanged / grooved ends. The valve body shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL / FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure (or 1725 KPa where required).

Use class 1725 / 2070 KPa check valves where required. The valve body shall be cast steel and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA standards.

Butterfly valves shall be Grooved type with tamper switch. The valve body shall be made of ductile Iron coated with nylon-11. The valve shall be UL / FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure.



Page 196/245

Y–Type Strainer: Y Type Strainer consist of Ductile Iron Body , ASTM A-536 grade 65-45-12 , Type 304 Stainless Steel cylindrical removable baskets with 1/16” perforations and 41% open area for 2-3” strainer size. 1/8” (3.2mm) diameter perforations and 40% open area 4”-12” strainer size.

Riser Check Valve : Grooved Riser check valve Black Enamel Painted, Ductile Iron Body to ASTM A536 grade 65-45-12 4”-8”, Grade E EPDM encapsulated Ductile Iron disc, stainless steel spring and shaft, rated to 300psi (1370kPa). Suitable for Anti Hammer service and horizontal or vertical installation. Provided drilled, tapped and plugged stream for 2” drainage outlet and ½” pressure taps both upstream and down stream of disc. UL Listed and FM approved.

Flexible Joints: Flexible Couplings in series shall be installed near the pumps to reduce the noise and Vibration if recommended by the pump manufacturer

Building Expansion Joints: Flexible couplings shall be used to accommodate any movement in the pipe due to Building expansion or contraction. A proper study and calculation needs to provide by the Manufacturer.

Hangers and Supports;

Hangers and Supports shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Hangers and Supports” section of this specification (2.15.15 and 2.15.23).

Pipeline Identification and Labeling;

Pipelines and equipment shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Pipeline Identification and Labeling” section of this specification (4.16).

3.2.7 Fire Fighting Water Piping – General

All pipes used for fire fighting water distribution shall be hot galvanized steel iron seamless schedule 40 confirming to ASTM A53 Gr. B assembled with GI threaded fittings for pipe sizes 2" and smaller and with grooved mechanical fittings for pipe sizes 2½" and larger.

The fire fighting water piping system shall be provided with valves on all mains and branches for sectionalizing the system for maintenance and operation.

All valves used in the fire fighting water piping system (Pump Suction, Discharge, Risers) shall be of the rising stem type to clearly indicate whether the valve is in the open or closed position. All these valves shall be provided with tamper switch with and shall be monitored through fire alarm system. All valves in the zone control valve shall be butterfly valve with supervisory switch and shall be monitored through fire alarm system. The valves shall conform in all other respects to the specifications given under Valves.

All over ground pipe fittings up to 50mm shall be of malleable iron threaded joint confirming to ASTM / ASME B16.3 & piping of 65mm and above shall be of mechanical grooved type confirming to ASTM F1476 & ASTM F-1548

A 2" drain valve of the globe type shall be provided at the base of every riser as referred in NFPA13 & 14. Piping shall be sloped not less than 2% towards the drain valves.

The fire fighting water pipes shall not be used in any way to supply water for other purposes.



Page 197/245

All valves shall be supervised electrically in the Fire Alarm Panel.

3.2.8 Sprinkler System Description

Installation of sprinkler systems shall comply with NFPA 13, standard for the installation of sprinkler system, or as directed by the civil defence authorities.

The installation shall be a Wet Sprinkler System and the flow of water to the sprinkler pipe work shall be controlled by installation control valves.

The system shall be charged with water under pressure up to the sprinkler heads so that when one or more of the sprinkler heads operates the wet alarm valve is actuated allowing water to flow from the open sprinkler heads.

The water from the storage tank shall be used as the suction supply for the electrically driven pumps. Pumps shall be automatic in operation and shall be designed to comply with the performance characteristic of automatic pumps as specified in the relevant section of the NFPA Rules.

A jockey pump shall be installed to maintain pressure in the system pipe work.

The fire water storage tanks shall be located as shown in drawings. The tanks shall be of concrete construction as detailed on the structural drawings. High grade corrosion resistant hot deep galvanized steel puddle flanged sleeves shall be used and the velocity in the suction pipe shall not exceed 4.57m/s.

Water tightness is to be assured by caulking the space between the two pipes. Provide caulking rings on the inner pipe.

The water tanks shall be lined with a laminated non toxic plastic liner or equivalents, factory made, with all necessary pipe openings ready formed. The liner material shall be approved by water authorities for the storage of potable water.

The sprinkler system shall be zoned & each zone shall be provided with an isolation valve supervised electrically, flow switch (connected to the fire alarm system) test and drain valve, pressure gauge, etc to comply with NFPA 13. The outlet of the drain valve shall be connected to the nearest floor drain.

Each sprinkler riser shall be connected with an alarm check valve & isolation valve. The zoning of the sprinkler system shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 13.

Alarm check valve shall be provided with pressure switches to monitor the pressure drop in the downstream. An alarm motor gong shall be connected to the alarm check valve which shall generate mechanical alarm upon flow across the alarm check valve. The location of the gong shall be near to the location of breeching inlet.

Sprinklers shall be provided at the escalators truss with dedicated isolation valve (with supervisory switch) & flow switch to monitor in the Fire alarm panel. A drain valve shall be provided at the lower most level of the fire pipe network.

Where the void height exceeds 800mm above the false ceiling shall be considered as a separate zone and shall be provided with sprinkler system.



Page 198/245

All the isolation valves shall be provided with a supervisory switch which shall be electrically supervised in the Main fire alarm panel. There shall be an individual address for each isolation valve.

Provide fire alarm panel to indicate all sprinkler zone control valve - monitoring , solenoid valves, FM 200 gaseous fire suppression system and flow switches. The alarm panel shall be prepared to be connected to the fire alarm panel of the station or the concerned building (if any).

3.2.9 Fire Protection Specialties

Installation Control Valves

Both the wet and dry type CVs shall have the following components. Select the trim as appropriate.

System Isolation Valve

Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), Outside Screw and Yoke (O.S&Y) construction with solid wedge and flanged ends.

Alarm Check Valve

Cast Iron body, Flap type construction with flanged/grooved ends, metered bypass with ball valve for pressure maintenance flow, test and alarm flow arts, bolted access cover, pressure gauges, pressure switch at inlet and outlet etc.UL listed & FM approved

Test And Drain Valve

All bronze, angle valve with screwed ends complete with metering orifice, discharge turn dish etc.

Alarm Test Valve

All bronze, multi port plug valve with screwed ends, operating lever, engraved position indicator attached to body.

Strainer

All bronze, Y type strainer with screwed ends, screwed cover and 30 mesh stainless steel screen for alarm supply line.

Water Motor Alarm

All bronze construction of through the wall type with threaded inlet and outlet connections, wall sleeve, drive shaft and bell.

Pressure Switch

Normally closed, pressure switch with contacts rated for 5amps. The unit shall be fully enclosed with tapped conduit entry.

Flow Switches



Page 199/245

Provide vane type flow switches with volt free, normally open contacts rated for 5amps and enclosure with tapped conduit entry. The flow switch shall be adjustable, to give contact at flow equal to that of one sprinkler. The unit shall be complete with pipe size saddle, clamp, sealing gasket etc.

3.2.10 Sprinklers


Concealed fast response type with chrome plated cover for front of house areas as indicated on drawings.


All sprinkler indicated on the drawings as concealed type shall be of a decorative style flush with the ceiling with ceiling plate cover. The visible parts shall be of satin finish chrome. The deflector and retaining parts shall be concealed in the sprinkler body.

All sprinklers indicated on drawings as pendent, upright and side wall, concealed shall be of the fusible solder fast response type constructed of high quality bronze with ½" male threaded inlet and standard ½"

Return bends arrangement to be followed for any Pendent sprinkler installation

Sprinkler Material:

Body: Brass

Body cap: Brass

Deflector: Copper



Sprinkler selection, type, temperature shall comply with NFPA 13. Sprinklers shall be pressure rated to suit the selected fire pump’s shut off head

Sprinkler guards shall be provided to sprinklers located with in escalators and locations where there are possibilities of mechanical damage to the sprinkler

Sprinkers shall be UL listed, FM approved & approved by Saudi Civil defence

3.2.11 Fire Pumps

The fire pump shall be of the base mounted, single stage, centrifugal type, horozontal split case directly connected to an electric motor through a heavy duty flexible coupling for main pump & diesel engine for stand by pump. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common cast iron base plated provided with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole. The fire pump unit shall be supplied complete with pump, driver, and accessories as described below. The pumping unit (Pumps, drives, controllers, couplings, etc) shall be listed by



Page 200/245

Underwriters Laboratories and FM approved shall meet all requirements of the National Fire protection Association, 20, 2007 Edition. The pump capacity and pressure shall be as shown on the Drawings. The pump shall deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure not less than 65% of rated pressure. The shut-off pressure shall not exceed 120% of rated pressure.

The pump casing shall be of cast iron having a minimum tensile strength of 35,000psi and shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psig and hydrostatically tested at the factory to not less than 250 psig. Bearing housing supports and suction and discharge flanges shall be integrally cast with the lower half of the casing. Removal of the upper half of the casing shall allow removal of the rotating element without disconnecting the suction and discharge flanges.

The impeller shall be of the enclosed type and shall be of vacuum cast bronze. It shall be dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft sleeves. The shaft sleeves shall extend the entire length of the seal boxes to protect the shaft and shall be key locked and threaded so that they tighten with the rotation of the shaft.

Teflon gaskets shall be provided between the impeller hub and the shaft sleeves to protect the pump shaft. The pump shall be equipped with renewable casing wear rings which shall be locked by dwelling to prevent rotation.

The pump rotating element shall be supported by two heavy duty grease lubricated ball bearings mounted in machined moisture and dust proof cast iron housing and bolted to the pump casing with register fits to ensure permanent alignment.

Grease seals and water stingers shall be provided to protect the bearings from contamination. Bearing housings shall be so designed as to flush lubricant through the bearing. Easily accessible grease fittings shall be provided for positive bearing lubrication. The pump shaft shall be of high strength steel accurately machined to give a true running rotating element. The shaft shall be sealed by split packing glands designed for easy removal for inspection and maintenance. The packing shall consist of INTERWOVEN, GRAPHITED asbestos, diagonally cut packing rings with lantern ring connected to the pressure side of the pump by a cored passage in the parting flange of the pump.

The electric motor shall be of the drip-proof, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900rpm. The pump shall be provided from the factory with lifting lugs, coupling guard and tapped holes in the suction and discharge flanges for pressure gauge connections.

The fire pump unit shall be supplied complete from the factory with the following accessories: -

• Suction and discharge pressure gauges, not less than 3½" dial, reading in P.S.I. and having arranged equal to twice the rated design working pressure of the pump complete with gauge valves.

• Main relief valve, size 3" minimum, factory set to open at a pressure slightly greater than the rated design working pressure of the pump with capacity to pass all the water discharged by the pump without developing excessive pressure on the system.



Page 201/245

• Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of the pump when operating at shutoff, factory set to open just higher than the rated design working pressure of the pump and lower than shut-off discharge pressure

• Automatic air release valve on the casing vent.

• Suction and discharge matching flanges

Each fire pump unit shall be supplied from the factory with controller, for floor mounting, of water tight construction and marked Fire Pump Controller.

The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic, across-the-line type and shall contain the following: Externally operable disconnect switch, circuit breaker with an inter rupting capacity to suit the motor magnetic starter, pressure switch, pilot lamp to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available, ammeter test link, voltmeter test studs, and a two position selector switch marked automatic and non automatic.

The controller shall be completely assembled, wired and tested at the factory, ready for installation and operation with simple external electrical connections. The controller shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20 & NFPA 70

Fire Pump controllers are to be located within the Fire pump room which is to be sprinklered, hence the controllers shall be drip proof as well

The pump shall be given a complete performance test at the factory with positive suction pressure and with a 15 foot suction lift.

NPSH shall be calculated and considered for designing the pump.

All fire pumps shall be designed to be suitable for the prevailing climatic conditions in Saudi Arabia. Factory visit shall be provided by the contractor at no extra cost to the client for employer’s representative/s to witness the factory testing with performance of fire pump sets before shipment to the project site.

3.2.12 Jockey Fire Pump

The Jockey fire pump shall be vertical multi stages stainless steel construction.

The electrical motor shall be close-coupled to the pump and shall be of the drip-proof, squirrel cage induction type with permanently Lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm.

The pump shall be provided from the factory with one suitable starter of the totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct on line type with low volt and overload protection in each phase and suitable for automatic operation.

3.2.13 Sprinkler Piping

No pipe serving automatic sprinklers shall be less than 1" even if serving only sprinkler. All connections of sprinkler pipes shall be made to the top of cross mains and feed mains to keep dirt and sediment out of sprinklers and sprinkler pipe. The ends of all the cross of feed mains shall be provided with a flush and test connection comprised of 1" gate valve and 1" hose adapter to allow fitting a 1" rubber hose for manually discharging the water to the



Page 202/245

nearest bathroom of sanitary fixture. No test outlet shall be made less than 1" in order to give a test flow equivalent to the flow from one sprinkler.

A Hydraulic Calculation to be submitted by the specialised contractor complying with NFPA 13 & 14.

3.2.14 Hangers And Supports

Horizontal pipes shall be supported by hangers of the universal pipe loop type. The hangers shall have rods that are adjustable in length and washer type ceiling plates. The hanger shall be attached to the concrete of the ceiling by means of expansion shields of size to suit the hanger rod size.

The hangers shall have the thickness and width of flat steel and the size of hanger rod as given in the following table: -

Pipe Dimensions Size of Rod

Size of Flat Steel

1" - 2" 1/16" x 5/8" 3/8"

2 1/2" & 3" 3/32" x 3/4" 1/2"

4" & 5" 1/8" x 3/4" 5/8"

6" 1/8" x 1" 3/4"

All pipe sizes shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 metres. Cross mains of automatic sprinkler piping shall be supported independently of the branch line hangers.

One hanger shall be provided on each length between branch lines. Hangers shall be installed without regard to the locations of pipe sleeves through walls. The pipe shall be centred in the sleeve and not supported by it. Vertical pipes shall be supported at every floor by means of clamps bolted around the pipe with legs on both sides that rest on the concrete floor.

3.2.15 Standpipe

Standpipes shall be UL listed oblique pattern globe type with non-rising bronze spindle, fitted with a leather strap and padlock with two keys. The hand wheel shall be marked to show direction of rotation and the valve shall be complete with blank plug and chain. Inlet size shall be 65mm flanged and the outlet 65mm female to suit instantaneous coupling. The Standpipe shall include an adjustable pressure-reducing device to ensure an outlet pressure of 6.9 bar (100 psi), as per NFPA requirements (as acceptable to the Saudi Civil Defence).

3.2.16 Breeching Inlets;

Breeching Inlets shall be UL listed and of vertical or horizontal pattern having a 150mm flanged outlet and four 65mm instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains. Breeching inlets shall be equipped with a 25mm drain valve to drain the riser. The entire breeching inlet shall be enclosed in a suitable flush mounted box with a labelled wired glass door.



Page 203/245

Breeching Inlet location for stations shall be placed diagonally at 2 locations along the perimeter of the premises and the location shall be not more than 30.5mtrs from the fire brigade hard standing location.

3.2.17 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided as required by NFPA 10, 2007 Edition. The stored pressure extinguishers shall be 4.5 kg, ABC dry powder or 5 kg carbon dioxide type or 2 kg ABC dry powder. The extinguisher shall include a gauge for indication of pressure.

Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed at a suitable height and in the hose cabinets. Where fire extinguishers are installed on the wall, they shall be complete with wall mounting brackets.

The fire extinguishers shall be designed and constructed as per the latest BS 5423, shall be UL/FM approved.

All the equipments used in fire fighting system shall be UL/FM approved & shall also be one approved by local authorities.

Pipes, fittings and all the valves, sprinklers, equipments used in Fire fighting system shall be pressure rated to suit to the operation of shut of pressure of the pumps

3.3 PRE ACTION FOAM WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM

Pre action Foam water Sprinkler System shall be of Double knock type confirming to the requirements of NFPA 11, 2007 Edition, NFPA 13, 2007 Edition & NFPA 16, 2007 Edition

Foam concentrate shall be of 3% AFFF. Water for the foam water sprinkler system shall be drawn from the sprinkler network. Deluge valve shall be provided with pneumatic head with trim assembly. Isolation valves shall be provided at downstream & upstream of the deluge valves. By pass valve (isolation valve) for Deluge valve shall be provided

Bladder type Foam tank shall be located near the deluge valve with foam proportioner. The foam proportioner shall be suitable for proportioning 3% of foam concentrate. A foam concentrate sensing line shall be there in the foam proportioner to monitor the flow of foam concentrate & to avoid the flow of water alone into the area being protected. Downstream of the deluge valve shall be normally filled with Compressed air

Foam concentrate carrying pipe shall be of stainless steel SS 316. All fittings & valves used in foam concentrate network shall be of stainless steel SS 316

Double knock system shall be with 1) sensing of heat (bulb fuses) by the sprinkler & 2) detection of smoke / fire through detectors

Bladder tank size & foam concentrate quantity shall be as referred by NFPA 11 & shall include 100% standby reserve for operation of the system. In addition to that the suitable quantity of foam concentrate shall be made available within the maintenance facility for testing & commissioning of the system

All the components use for the system including but not limited to bladder tank, foam concentrate, pre action valves, isolation valves, sprinklers, foam proportioner, etc shall be UL listed, FM approved and shall be approved by Saudi Civil Defence



Page 204/245

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

1. All zone control valves, drain, test, alarm valves, Isolation valves, flow switches, air release valves, shall be provided with identification signs of the standard design adopted by the automatic-sprinkler industry, or their equivalent.

2. A hydraulic data information nameplate shall be secured to the riser with chain, directly above the controlling alarm check valve and shall include the following design data.

i. Building designation

ii. Location of remote area

iii. Design density

iv. Area of application

v. System demand {Gpm (l/s) and psi (kPa) at base of riser}

vi. Data shall be permanently engraved on the nameplate as follows:

vii. Material shall be durable plastic or aluminium. Minimum height of lettering is 1/8".

3. The Contractor shall furnish and place in a clear, plastic envelope attached to each sprinkler alarm check valve riser: one complete set of typed or printed maintenance and operating instructions, a set of prints of the as-built working drawings and hydraulic calculations of the sprinkler system.

4. Contractor shall supply each riser with a cabinet containing maintenance and repair equipment (spare heads, wrench, etc.)

5. Each Contractor shall affix an identification tag on each system riser indicating:

Name of the Contractor

Business Address of the Installing Contractor

Phone Number

24-hour emergency contact phone number.

3.5 FLUSHING

Client’s Site manager & Safety manager shall be informed in advance in writing or as per required documentation before performing the flushing activity Water shall be discharged at a safer location without any damage for human, properties, services, etc. All necessary precautions & arrangements shall be taken by the specialized approved contractor before conducting the test. All required work permit procedures to be complied with before performing the flushing activity. The testing area shall be barricaded & sign boards shall be displayed

1. Before connecting sprinkler systems to the main supply, each sprinkler supply line shall be flushed out thoroughly by the Fire Protection Specialist Contractor in the presence of the engineer, through an unrestricted opening not less than (100mm) 4 inches in diameter. Minimum flowing quantities are specified in NFPA 13. Similar flushing process shall be carried out for the entire standpipe network as specified in NFPA 14

2. Failure to comply with this requirement shall necessitate flushing of the entire sprinkler system by the Contractor at no additional cost.

3. A (100mm) 4-inch temporary pipe or two 2½-inch fire hoses shall be provided by the Contractor to discharge water to a suitable location, as designated by the engineer.



Page 205/245

3.6 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

shall include, but not limited to: - 1) Factory tests and off-site tests. 2) Visual inspection and checking. 3) Setting to work, safety and quality tests. 4) Commissioning, regulations, tuning and adjustment. 5) Functional tests. 6) Performance tests. 7) Final mock-up tests. 8) Statutory tests and inspections

3.6.1 Factory Tests and Off-site Tests

Factory test shall deem to be included. Factory test and off-site tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works or by an approved independent testing body/laboratory where specified, or elsewhere as approved. Where indicated, 'type-tests' on items of equipment to demonstrate compliance shall be carried out. 'Type-tests' certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer. Factory quality and general inspection test recommended by the manufacturer shall be required. Where indicated or necessary, factory performance test shall be carried out for each of the offered equipment before delivery. Factory test certificate certified by qualified factory engineer shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. This approval shall normally be required before the materials or equipments are dispatched from the manufacturer’s works. Factory test shall be witnessed by an independent approved agency where indicated. The Contractor shall note that the Engineer may require witnessing tests and inspections of manufactured equipment during construction at the manufacturer’s works. Where this requirement is indicated in the Contract, the Contractor shall allow for making the necessary arrangements.

3.6.2 Visual Inspection and Checking

Site inspections of 'work in progress' will be made by the Engineer or the representative from time to time. The Contractor shall keep such inspection record for checking from time to time. Works to be permanently covered up shall be subjected to inspection, pressure test and other tests before cover up. During the inspection, if the Engineer discovers any work that has been covered up before inspection and testing, this work shall be uncovered for inspection and testing to the Engineer’s satisfaction. The cost involved in uncovering the work, inspecting, testing and re-concealing the work together with any consequential losses shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to the client. Any defective works and installation of poor workmanship found during visual inspection shall be rectified or replaced before proceeding with further tests.

3.6.3 Setting to Work, Safety and Quality tests

Prior to any commissioning and testing works, the Contractor shall check the completion of the works, the associated builder’s work, the related fire services provisions and the associated building services installations, to ensure that commissioning can be proceeded without obstruction. Before any installation is subjected to commissioning and site testing, it shall be thoroughly cleaned both internally and externally.



Page 206/245

The Contractor shall be responsible for initially setting the plants to work including: -

(a) Preliminary checks to ensure that all systems and system components are in a

satisfactory and safe condition before start up. (b) Preliminary adjustment and setting of all plant and equipment consistent with eventual

design performance. (c) Carrying out pressure test, hydraulic test and other tests required before energising the

equipment and plant. (d) Checking the proper functioning of the protective devices and safety valves in the

installation and carrying out all necessary safety testing. (e) Energizing and setting to work on all plants. (f) Initial regulation and demonstration that the installation delivers the correct rate of flow

at the conditions specified in the Contract.

Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be performed as per the requirement of NFPA 13 before any ceiling is installed below the sprinkler piping. Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be performed as per the requirement of NFPA 14 Hydrostatic test pressure shall be 3.5 bar (50 psi) more than the maximum system working pressure & in any case shall not be less than 13.8 bar ( 200 psi) for Pump suction & discharge piping, sprinkler piping & standpipe system. Each water control valve shall be fully opened and closed under water pressure proper operation. Where sprinkler locations are roughed-in, using plugged drop nipples projecting below the level of finished ceiling; the hydrostatic testing shall be performed two times. i. First, after the system is completed using the plugged drops, and before the ceiling panels

is installed. ii. Second, after the plugged drop nipples are cut to length for the finished ceiling, or

replaced with other drop nipples of correct length, and the sprinkler installed The Contractor shall arrange for any specialist plant or equipment to be commissioned and tested by the specialist equipment manufacturer’s skilled commissioning engineer and/or technician.

3.6.4 Commissioning, Regulations, Tuning and Adjustment

The Contractor shall regulate, balance, tune, commission and adjust the installation and equipment as appropriate and necessary to deliver the conditions and requirements specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall allow carrying out such adjustment and re-adjustment as necessary until all the requirements are met and the installation is accepted by the Engineer.

3.6.5 Functional Tests

The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer the functioning of the installation, system and equipment complying with the operational and functional intent and the requirements in the Contract. The Contractor shall demonstrate and test the proper operational mode, control and the sequence of the operation in various parts of the system and installation.



Page 207/245

3.6.6 Performance Tests

The Contractor shall carry out tests to prove the performance of the installation, system and equipment in term of flow, pressure, current, sound level, and other technical/design aspects complying with the requirements in the Contract and the statutory requirements. The Contractor shall regulate, balance, tune, adjust and modify the installation, system and equipment as necessary till the performance requirements are met. The final setting and operational parameters of all equipment shall be recorded. Where necessary, the Contractor shall carry out full load test by simulation or other approved method to prove the performance of the installation at full load condition. Prior to the acceptance of the installation, the Specialist Contractor shall, in the presence of the engineer, subject the system to the tests required by NFPA for the completion of the Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate. In addition complete operating test of dry pipe, water spray, stand pipe and hose system shall be performed. The system shall be complete, tested and ready for operation and shall include all necessary and required connections. Testing shall be as required to confirm to current applicable requirements of NFPA and local code authority. The serving authority having jurisdiction engineers and owners shall be allowed to conduct such tests as may be required. Any cost in connection with these, test is borne by the contractor. Alarm Testing: Contractor shall be responsible for testing new alarms and modified alarms installed under this contract. Defective alarms shall be replaced immediately. Installation completion Check List shall be prepared by the contractor & shall be signed off by the Engineer. The checklist shall include but not limited to the following,

3.6.6.1 Sprinkler & Standpipe systems

• Pipe Installation • Supports • Hydro-testing • Flushing • Identification bands • Equipment installation (sprinklers, flow switch, test & drain valves, riser drain valves,

isolation valves, supervisory cable between the valve & the fire alarm loop IFU, hose reel, pressure relefi valve, lock shield valve, hose outlet, air release valves, pressure switches, alarm check valve, alarm water motor gong, water motor gong drain, flow meters, level switches, drains valves, etc)

• Fire hose cabinets • Portable fire extinguishers

3.6.6.2 FM200 Gas Suppression Systems

• Room Integrity test records • Pipe Installation • Supports • Hydro-testing • Flushing • Nozzle Installation • Cylinder Installation



Page 208/245

• Cylinder supports • Manifold installation • Discharge pipe connected to cylinder • Low pressure switch • Discharge pressure switch • Detectors & loop test • Notification devices, IFU, etc

3.6.6.3 Inspection, Tests and Adjustments of Fire Pumps

A detailed method statement for installation, testing and commissioning of Sprinkler system, Stand pipe system, Fire pumps, Gas suppression system and Fire detection, alarm & actuation system shall be prepared inline with the requirements of NFPA & Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) by the specialized Fire contractor who’s registered and approved by Authority having jurisdiction.

Installation, testing & commissioning shall be carried out as per approved Method statement. Method statement for Installation, testing & commissioning of Fire pumps shall be prepared in consultation with the fire pump, drive & controller manufacturer.

3.6.6.3.1 Prior to Start Up i. Check the pump motor assembly alignment. Adjust if necessary. Weld steel cleats on

pump and motor bases to lock them in aligned position. Values achieved at final alignment (within the permissible limit as recommended by the pump manufacturer) shall be recorded & signed of by CRCC & the Engineer

ii. Tighten and lock foundation and coupling bolts. iii. Check pump shaft for free rotation. iv. Check electrical continuity and insulation of motor and the control panel, by meggering. v. Ensure that the relief valve is correctly calibrated and installed. vi. Shut off the system isolating valve/s and open the test line. vii. Ensure that the circuit breaker trip rate is correctly selected and the elements properly

installed. Adjust the star delta change over timer to the period recommended by the motor manufacturer.

viii.Check system power supply voltage. Perform all other checks outlined in the controller operation manual, before energising the controller.

ix. Ensure that the suction lines and the pump casing are full of water. 3.6.6.3.2 Start Up i. Check and correct, if necessary, the direction of rotation of the pump, by momentary

operation of the emergency start lever. ii. Close the valve on the test line partially to avoid the operation of the pump at high

discharge rates. iii. Start the pump on manual mode. iv. Check the motor full load current by manipulating the flow. v. Check the pressure relief valve for proper operation by gradually closing the test valve.



Page 209/245

vi. Check the pump and motor bearings for signs of overheating. vii. Check the suction line for signs for entry of air and proper suction intake flow. 3.6.6.3.3 Verification of Performance i. Check the pump head at nominal flow and at 150% of nominal flow and ensure

conformity with design requirements. ii. Close the test line and stop the pump. Release the system pressure gradually with the test

valve. Check and adjust the pressure switch setting for automatic cut-in. Check and adjust the pressure switch setting for automatic cut-in and cut-out of jockey pump.

3.6.6.3.4 Put System into Service

i. Isolate the fire pump controllers. ii. Close the test line and open the system isolating valve. Ensure that the system outlets are

closed. iii. Fill the system with the jockey pump. Maintain pressure for 24 hours and ensure that

there are no leaks. iv. Energize fire pump controllers and ensure that the system is in automatic mode.

3.6.6.4 Commissioning of Fire Protection System

3.6.6.4.1 Sprinkler System

Ensure Installation is complete & signed off by the CRCC & the Engineer

Before filling & pressurizing the sprinkler network, ensure air release valve at elevated points are ready for operation

During filling & pressurizing the sprinkler network ensure air pockets are vented from the system.

Ensure the outlet of test & drain valve is connected to the nearest floor drain.

Ensure cabling is completed for supervisory switch of all valves, flow switches, pressure switches, etc.

Ensure programming of Fire alarm system panel is completed.

Once the system pressure is achieved, check for the operation of each zone flow switch by opening the test & drain valve. Upon opening of the test & drain valve, check for the following,

• Local Alarm in respective area is actuated • Signal in Fire Alarm Panel for Flow Switch actuation with specific address with

location, loop, floor, equipment, etc • Signal in Fire alarm panel for pressure switch ( at Alarm Check Valve) actuation • Actuation of Alarm Motor gong • Actuation of Pumps • Check all parameters inline with a contractor developed Cause & Effect matrix

The above procedure shall be carried out & recorded in sequence for all the Zone Control Valves Supervisory status of all valves in the Fire systems shall be monitored by closing / open in Fire Alarm Panel.



Page 210/245

Conduct the testing for the operation of sprinkler system by fusing a sprinkler bulb & check for the following;

• Local Alarm in respective area is actuated • Signal in Fire Alarm Panel for Flow Switch actuation with specific address with

location, loop, floor, equipment, etc • Signal in Fire alarm panel for pressure switch ( at Alarm Check Valve) actuation • Actuation of Alarm Motor gong • Actuation of Pumps • Check all parameters inline with a contractor developed Cause & Effect matrix

The testing area shall be barricaded & sign boards shall be displayed.

3.6.6.4.2 Standpipe Systems

Ensure Installation is complete & signed off by CRCC & the Engineer. Before filling & pressurizing the standpipe network, ensure air release valve at elevated points are ready for operation. During filling & pressurizing the standpipe network ensure air pockets are vented from the system. Ensure the air lock in the hose outlets are vented properly before pressurizing the system. Ensure cabling is completed for supervisory switch of all valves, flow switches, etc Ensure programming of Fire alarm system panel is completed. Once the system pressure is achieved, check for the operation of each fire hose reel & hose outlet Actual flow test shall be carried out & recorded (witnessed by CRCC & The engineer) at each Class III system (1” & 2 ½” {or 1 ½”} outlets for required flow & pressure. Water shall be discharged at a safer location without any damage for human, properties, services, etc. All necessary precautions & arrangements shall be taken by the specialized approved contractor before conducting the test. All required work permit procedures to be complied with before & during performing the testing activity.

3.6.6.4.3 FM200 Gas Suppression System

• Ensure room integrity test in performed. • Ensure the pipe work installation is completed. • Check for the Nozzle drill sizes installed is in line with calculation & drawings. • Ensure the cylinder support provided is in line with manufacturer’s requirement. • Ensure appropriate time delay for solenoid valve operation is programmed as per the

operator’s requirement. • Ensure all the cabling works are completed for the following, • Cylinder head – solenoid valve. • Pressure switch for cylinder pressure low. • Discharge pressure switch. • Detectors in Zone 1 & Zone 2 are connected as per the drawing & tested. • Ensure the flasher, horn, strobe, etc are connected as per the drawings. • Ensure all the signages are installed as recommended by the manufacturer & NFPA. • Ensure cabling is done & testing for the interface with ECS system.



Page 211/245

• Ensure the cabling between the gas release panel & Main Fire alarm panel is performed and tested.

• Remove the solenoid valve from the cylinder. Ensure the operation of solenoid valve will not discharge gas.

• Check for panel healthiness. • Perform fire simulation in Zone 1 detectors; check for the Zone 1 fire indication in

Gas release panel & main fire alarm panel. • Check for Alarm bell actuation. • Check whether fresh air supply & exhaust system is shut off for the particular room. • Perform fire simulation in Zone 2 detectors; check for the Zone 2 fire indication in

Gas release panel & main fire alarm panel. • Check for the operation of Horn / strobe. • Check for the flasher operation. • Check for the solenoid operation (probe movement). • Perform check for Panel fault in GRP by removing a device from the network.

Ensure the annunciation is made available in the main fire alarm panel. • Cutoff the AC power supply to the GRP & check for AC power failure indication in

the GRP. Ensure the annunciation is made available in the main fire alarm panel. • Check for the operation of manual release & abort switch • Check for cylinder pressure low & gas discharge indications by appropriate

simulation process. • Upon completion & signoff of the commissioning process and ensuring with the

operators, connect the solenoid valve to the cylinder head. 3.6.7 Final Mock-Up Test

Before arranging statutory inspections with Saudi Civil Defence, the Contractor shall arrange a final mock-up test with the Engineer to demonstrate all the items required for the statutory inspections have been completed and tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Before the final mock-up test, the Contractor shall ensure that all documents required for statutory inspections shall be available on site. Further mock-up tests shall be required if the installation fails to meet with the satisfaction of the Engineer in the test. The Contractor shall not arrange inspection with Saudi Civil Defence till the satisfactory acceptance of the mock-up test by the Engineer. The Contractor shall allow adequate time in the commissioning and testing programme for re-testing of the system in case of failure. The Contractor shall indicate the mock-up test and the inspection by Saudi Civil Defence as the milestone events in the critical path programme to be submitted to the Architect at the commencement of the works.

3.6.8 Statutory Tests and Inspections

The Contractor in advance to submit the normal procedure adopted by the statutory bodies during inspection. After reviewing the requirements with CRCC, the Contractor shall draft an Inspection plan with sequence of tests. The Contractor shall keep available all necessary tools & equipments, SCD approved drawings, during the statutory tests. The Contractor shall be ready with adequate number of staff / technician along with required communication devices for the tests.



Page 212/245

3.7 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR COMPLETION & HANDING OVER 3.7.1 General

The Contractor shall submit the documents detailed in this chapter as a part of work completion. The Contractor shall note that the system cannot be handed over until all the foregoing requirements (where applicable) in addition to the acceptance of Saudi Civil Defence have been carried out to the satisfaction of CRCC & the Engineer.

3.7.2 Test Certificates

Before the handover inspection, the contractor shall provide the following test / witness certificate where applicable;

(a) Copies of Manufacturer’s factory test certificates for Fire pumps, drives, controllers, etc. (b) Copies of Performance test certificates of Fire pumps (c) Copies of Type test shall be submitted for motors. (d) Copies of Engine factory test certificates (e) Copies of Certificates from UL / FM / equivalent (f) Copies of Hydraulic & pressure test certificates performed at works shall be submitted

for pumps, valves, portable extinguisher cylinders, FM200 cylinders, diesel day tank, etc. (g) Copies of Non Destructive Test certificates for Pump casings, portable extinguisher

cylinders, FM200 cylinders, etc. (h) Copies of Registered Surveyors on pressured containers, etc. (i) Copies of Certificates of conformity for all products. (j) Copies of all noise test / survey records on every noise emitting plant and machineries,

individual room / space and a statement of compliance with the statutory requirements under the current local ordinance.

3.7.3 Installation Completion, Testing & Commissioning Certificates

Installation Completion, Testing & Commissioning Certificates shall consists of hydrostatic test certificates, flushing test certificates, checklists, commissioning record, etc witnessed & signed by CRCC & the Engineer or his representative.

3.7.4 “As Built” drawing

As Built drawings shall be submitted in line with the final installation. 3.7.5 Operation and Maintenance and Services Manuals

All necessary copies of Operating & Maintenance Manuals as detailed in the Contract documents and associated documents. The contractor shall include functional spare parts and contact lists of the suppliers in the manual.

3.7.6 Manufacturer’s Name Plate

Every item of plant supplied by a manufacturer shall be fitted with a clearly engraved, stamped or cast manufacturer’s name plate properly secured to the plant item and showing: • Manufacturer’s Name



Page 213/245

• Serial Number • Approval • Model Number • Rating / Capacity • Date of Supply • Testing & Working Pressure

4 PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICES

4.1 DRAINAGE

4.1.1 General

The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating the whole of the drainage works in this Contract as indicated on the drawings.

The Contractor shall include within the Contract Works for the following:

(a) Demolition and removal from site buildings, walls, gates, fences, hoardings and any other obstructions and generally clearing of the site and all works necessary to enable the drainage works to commence.

(b) Secure spoil heaps and stacking of all material deemed suitable for re-use.

(c) Disposal of timber and filling tree root-holes.

(d) Provision of catch pits or other means to maintain excavations free of water and to prevent contamination of existing drains, watercourses or soak ways, including regular cleaning out of such catch pits, etc.

The Contractor shall set out all drains in accordance with the drawings and site directives and provide all necessary items for the complete execution of the works. Any permanent works constructed in the wrong position and/or incorrect materials and/or level according to drawings or as directed by the Engineer, shall be demolished and new works fixed in the proper location, all at the Contractor's expense.

The works under this section of the specification shall include the supply, delivery, and site storage, erection, testing and commissioning of all necessary pipe work, fittings and associated materials to provide a complete drainage installation.

The Contractor shall check the invert levels and sizes of existing drains, sewers, catch pits and manholes before the commencement of any works and shall notify the Engineer immediately if the declared invert levels or sizes are found to be inaccurate.

The Contractor shall check that the existing ground levels as indicated on the drawings are correct, and any incorrect levels indicated on the drawings shall be reported to the Engineer prior to disturbance of the existing ground relevant to the disputed levels.

The whole of the work specified herein, where applicable and except where specifically stated, shall conform to the requirement of the following British Standards:-

BS EN 752:1998 Drain and sewer systems outside buildings



Page 214/245

The Contractor shall give and submit all requisite construction notices to all necessary authorities.

Any drainage works carried out prior to the completion of heavy earth moving operations and/or liable to be subjected to heavy construction traffic or other abnormal loads shall be suitably protected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Failure to do so will render the Contractor fully responsible for all known and latent defects within the drainage system.

Unless stated to the contrary, any thickness of materials described means the thickness after full compaction.

All pipes and fittings shall be stacked or stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Before the commencement of any drainage works, the Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer the latest proposed final ground levels and if any drain would, due to the levels, have less than 750 mm cover, inform the Engineer, prior to commencement of the works to enable revised invert levels to be provided, if deemed necessary.

Failure to comply with this requirement shall render the Contractor liable to all costs relating to any remedial works to enable the drainage works to be constructed at a depth deemed by the Engineer to be satisfactory.

Where a specific joint is required that has not been specified, it shall have the approval of the Engineer.

Damaged protective coatings on drainage pipe work and components shall be rectified to their original condition as approved by the Engineer or shall be replaced with new undamaged items.

All materials for drainage works shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Pipe work and other materials delivered to the site and employed on the works, shall be new and free from rust and other debris.

Ground water and water arising from construction operations shall not be permitted to enter the permanent drainage systems, unless via a catch/silt pit in accordance with Municipality recommendations and in agreement with the Engineer.

4.1.2 Excavations & Backfilling for Drainage Works

4.1.2.1 General

Excavations shall be made for all pipelines and other works to such depths as are shown on the drawings, or required by the Engineer or are required to permit the proper execution of the works.

If the Contractor makes any excavations below the level of the drains, foundations, or other works, he shall refill the excavations with concrete at his own expense.

Drainage of trenches shall be carried out by the Contractor, to ensure that the trench bottom is at all times free from water.



Page 215/245

Unless agreed otherwise all excavations shall be formed with vertical sides and of not greater dimensions than stated in this Specification, with allowance for timbering, shuttering or other necessary temporary work.

Excavations beyond these dimensions for any convenience of the Contractor will not be permitted and should any excavation accidentally exceed the width or depth stated, to the detriment of the support or foundation of any of the works or adjacent structures, the Contractor shall refill such extra width with concrete or as directed, at his own expense.

The formations of all excavations are to be cut and trimmed to the exact lines, levels and depths shown on the drawings, or to such other lines, levels or depths as directed.

Where a concrete or granular bed or surround is required to the pipeline, manhole etc. the excavation shall be taken out to the overall dimensions of the bed or surround. The sides of the trench shall be vertical with no undercutting.

Where pipelines are to be laid at or below existing ground level under fill, and there is less than 1.2 m of existing ground above the pipe crown, the fill shall be completed to a depth of 1.2 m above the crown of the pipe and the trenches excavated in the fill material.

Where pipes are to be laid within fill, the fill shall be completed and the trenches excavated in fill material for such pipelines and associated structures.

All soft spots shall be removed from the bottom of trenches and other excavations, which shall then be refilled to formation level with the same material and compaction as the permanent work is to rest on that formation. Any void which results from over excavation below formation level shall be refilled in the same manner.

The Contractor shall remove surplus excavated material from the site unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.

Trenches for pipelines shall be excavated to a sufficient depth and width to enable the pipe jointing/bedding/hunching/surrounding to be accommodated.

The Contractor shall design, supply, fix, maintain and remove all planking, strutting and shoring required for the adequate temporary support of the faces of the excavation for the duration of the works, which shall be of sufficient strength to ensure the safety of personnel and to prevent damage to the works and to any new or existing foundations of adjoining buildings and structures, trench slips or falls shall be made good.

On completion of the works the excavation shall be refilled as detailed in BS EN 752:1998 Drain and sewer systems outside buildings, or except where otherwise specified, and where applicable, shall have surfaces reinstated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall not backfill excavations until services have been tested and approved as provided in the section “Testing and Inspection of the Drainage Works". This shall not absolve the Contractor from final testing after backfilling has been completed.

Timbering supports, sheeting, piling, struts, wailings and bracing for trench walls shall not be left in place after backfilling without the approval of the Engineer.

If it is anticipated that trench supports cannot be progressively withdrawn as the trench is backfilled and compacted, the Engineer shall be informed prior to pipe laying so that suitable



Page 216/245

pipe bedding can be adopted to cope with subsequent settlement of the trench fill when the timbering is finally withdrawn.

Trial holes, if considered necessary, shall be made well ahead of work to ascertain the positions of existing services and obstructions. All pipes, ducts, cables, mains and other services exposed by trial holes and/or excavations/utility services, shall be reported to the Engineer and relevant Authority.

Suitable temporary support shall be provided as soon as possible to avoid damage to the services. Any damage caused through negligence to observe this clause shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager and the owner and/or the relevant Utility Suppliers.

The operations of trench excavation, pipe laying, backfilling and construction of manholes shall be carried out with the object of minimising the amount of excavations open at any time.

All excavations shall be cleared of water both by day and by night, and shall be shaped to prevent any accumulation of water either in or adjoining the excavation or the spoil there from.

Temporary brick and concrete catch pits shall be built to not less than the specification of a permanent installation.

Sumps shall be constructed and maintained clear of all excavations for permanent works, so that water is at all times kept below any permanent works in the course of construction.

Excavated material which is suitable for use as backfill shall be adequately protected to maintain its suitability for re-use.

Excavated materials or any other materials shall be placed at a safe distance from the excavations and shall not be placed closer than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the excavation, unless suitable working and safety arrangements are made.

4.1.3 Supports for Excavation

All excavations shall be supported and secured to ensure the proper execution of the works and to prevent any settlement of the adjoining ground or structures thereon.

All supports for excavations shall be inspected and approved by the Construction Manager prior to commencement of works.

Systems of timbering using poling boards, runner or steel trench sheeting shall be used according to the ground conditions and shall be designed to prevent loss of ground during excavation and to ensure that backfilling can be carried out in accordance with the requirements, leaving no voids.

4.1.4 Trench Widths

The maximum permitted trench widths are set out below and shall be strictly followed without variation except as provided for under the Contract. Widths are soil face to soil face and include the thickness of timbering or sheeting.



Page 217/245

Trench widths may be reduced provided adequate space is demonstrated for the proper support of the trench and for the laying, aligning and jointing of the pipes and for the placing of the bedding and covering materials as required.

Below the transition depth, the trench width specified shall not be exceeded for a minimum of 300 mm above pipe soffit level, concrete surround or granular surround, whichever is the highest.

Maximum Trench Widths and Transition Depths

Nominal

Pipe Diameter

Minimum (mm)

Trench Depth

Maximum (mm)

Trench Width

100 450 525

150 490 600

225 580 700

300 680 750

If any trench is cut to a greater width than shown in the aforementioned Table the Engineer shall be informed to enable a suitable alternative structural pipe work bedding to be calculated.

All excavations for drainage shall be in open cut unless agreed in writing by the Engineer.

All mud, rock projections, boulders and hard spots shall be removed from the trench bottom and correct levels made up with a 50 mm thick concrete blinding.

Excavation for any section of the drainage works shall not commence until a complete supply of all pipes, fittings, bedding material and/or bricks and concrete for manhole construction, are available on site for that section of works.

4.1.5 Excavations in Rock

Rock shall be defined as follows:

'Solid naturally occurring geological strata which cannot be broken up or dislodged either by using a hand pick or a mechanical bucket type excavator'.

Irregularities and over break of excavations shall, unless otherwise agreed prior to the commencement of permanent work, be made good to the correct dimensions with concrete as specified.



Page 218/245

Width of trench excavations for drainage works to be carried out in rock shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to any excavation in rock by a trial trench excavated in the presence of the Engineer.

All excavations for drains shall be in open cut unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Engineer.

4.1.6 Pipe Materials

4.1.6.1 General

All pipe materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions.

4.1.6.2 Schedule of Pipe Materials

4.1.7 Pipe Laying

4.1.7.1 General

Every line of drain shall be accurately laid, shall be perfectly true in line and gradient from point to point.

Bricks or other hard packings shall not be used as temporary pipe supports, nor shall pipe spigots be permitted to bear on socket inverts in such a manner as to produce uneven pressure on the joints.

Where provisions have been made for future connection the ends of the pipes shall be sealed with proprietary stoppers and the position of the ends shall be clearly marked on the surface with a concrete post or pad. The stopper shall be marked with blue plastic tape for surface water or red for foul and a galvanised wire shall be installed linking the concrete post and the stopper to facilitate a location at a later date.

Sockets, where applicable, shall face up the gradient. The spigot of each pipe shall be well driven home into the socket of the pipe previously laid and the joint completed as described elsewhere in this Specification. The bore of the pipe shall be cleared of any obstructions before the next pipe is laid. Care shall be taken that there is no irregularity in the invert at the point of the junction.

Where it is necessary to shorten any pipe, it shall be cut off square and be free from any irregularities.

Pipe and channel bends shall be of the long radius pattern unless specifically indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

Service Description Pipe Diameter Pipe Specification

Drainage Pipes Below Ground

110 -160 BS 4660 and BS EN 1401-1. Class 4.



Page 219/245

No pipes shall be jointed together prior to being laid without the approval of the Engineer.

During the progress of the works, all open ends of drains shall be temporarily sealed off with suitably shaped sealing plugs or caps of an approved pattern. On completion of the drainage works, open ends shall remain sealed off with the specified sealing cap end, until such time as the future building pipe connections are made thereto.

Any damage or inconvenience within the construction and maintenance periods caused by flooding due to blockages or inconvenience caused by flooding due to blockages within the drainage services shall be deemed to be the responsibility of the Contractor.

Drains shall be kept free from mud, debris, superfluous cement or other obstructions for the duration of the Contract and only handed over after the completion of the Contract. Any mud, debris, superfluous cement or other obstructions found within the drainage system at any stage of the Contract shall be removed immediately to the full satisfaction of the Engineer. At the completion of the Contract, all drains and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and each drain length shall be individually rodded and pressure jetted with water to remove any debris.

Vertical bends, traps and gullies shall be accurately bedded on and surrounded with 150 mm minimum (C30) mass concrete. The Contractor shall provided and fix all necessary extension pieces and all requisite fittings.

Where pipes pass through watertight structural walls they shall be fitted with puddle flanges as indicated on the drawings or as agreed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that they are fixed in the correct positions and at the required levels, and also that they are watertight after installation.

The Contractor shall ensure and provide that adequate provision is made for the expansion and contraction of all pipelines, concrete and any other materials used in the execution of the works.

4.1.7.2 Levels and Site Rails

The Contractor shall set up and maintain temporary bench marks and shall provide all necessary labour and materials, levelling instruments, boning rods and shall erect and maintain all sight rails, commensurate with the drainage works.

Site rails shall be truly set to the falls of the proposed line of pipes and the rails shall be painted in 2 halves, black and white, so as to indicate the intended centre of the pipe. Boning rods shall be of such a length that when sighted in with the rails the foot of each rod is at the invert level of the pipe. Timber pegs shall be set in the trench bottom on the centreline of the pipeline and to the exact invert level. The pegs shall not be more than 2.5 metres apart.

The remaining materials below the top of the pegs shall be excavated by hand, prior to removal of the pegs. Bedding materials under pipelines shall be placed prior to pipe laying. Joint holes shall be formed in the pipe bedding, which shall be sufficiently large to receive the sleeves/collars of the pipe and to permit jointing, but shall be no larger than is required for these purposes. Boning rods shall be used for grading the pipeline and each pipe shall be levelled individually.

Sight rails shall be set up for all lines of drains, there being always at least three rails in position at one time on each line of pipes to any one gradient.



Page 220/245

The allowable tolerance on given invert levels shall be ± 5 mm provided that the as-laid gradient of the pipe runs between successive given invert levels shall not vary by more than 10% from that shown on the drawings and provided that the relative level differences between pipes in an individual installation are maintained. Alternative schemes for providing line and level control may be proposed but shall be subject to submission of full details prior to implementation.

4.1.8 Refilling Excavations containing Pipe work

Backfilling shall, wherever practicable, be undertaken immediately the preceding operation has been completed. Except where special backfill material is specified, trenches shall be refilled with suitable excavated material in accordance with specified requirements. Excavated material which is unsuitable for use as backfill shall be removed from site.

On completion of the works the excavation shall be refilled as detailed in BS EN 752: 1998 Drain and sewer systems outside buildings, or except where otherwise specified, and, where applicable, shall have surfaces reinstated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall not backfill excavations until services have been tested and approved as provided in the section "Testing and Inspection of the Drainage Works". This shall not absolve the Contractor from final testing after backfilling has been completed.

The initial layer of backfill material shall, unless otherwise specified, be free from stones and any other material which is undesirable. Backfill shall not be thrown directly onto, but carefully placed under and around pipes and compacted in thin layers using hand tools up to at least 300mm above the top of the pipe or special surround.

Filling above the initial layer shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 300mm loose depth, and compacted to a dry density not less than that of the adjoining soil.

Trench supports shall be withdrawn ahead of the layer to be filled, care being taken to keep the sides of the trenches solid and to fill all the spaces left by the withdrawn supports.

Mechanical appliances may only be used for compaction of backfill when there is a minimum of 450mm of material above the crown of the pipe, providing the appliance is suitable for the conditions and will not damage or displace the pipes.

4.1.9 Underground Drainage Identification Caution Markers

The Contractor shall supply and install above all drainage pipelines, underground durable caution marker tape, suitable worded to identify the classification of the drainage pipeline type.

The caution tape or marker band shall be manufactured at a minimum width of 150 mm and be polyethylene or polythene heavy gauge strip, coloured red for foul and surface water drainage.

The caution tape or marker is to be suitably worded in English and Arabic in block capital printing. The wording shall be approved by the Engineer before the Contractor orders the pipe for installation.

The caution tape is to incorporate an electronic wire or metallic detectable backing to facilitate future tracing by using electronic survey of underground services. The type,



Page 221/245

manufacturer and pattern must be approved by the Engineer before ordering or final installation.

The caution tape shall be buried not more than 300 mm from the finished ground levels and not less than 150 mm unless approved by the Engineer.

4.1.10 Testing and Inspection of Drainage Works

4.1.10.1 General

The Contractor shall give written notice at the following stages, to the Engineer, for the purpose of inspection and measurements:

(a) When excavations are complete.

(b) Concrete and/or beds are laid.

(c) Drains are laid and jointed.

The Contractor shall provide clean water and all assistance and appliances for testing during the progress of the Contract and for the final testing procedure.

All works shall be inspected, tested and approved as specified before backfilling of excavations is commenced.

The Contractor shall locate and remedy all defects found during testing and shall repeat the test to the satisfaction of Local and/or Water Authorities. The remedying of all defects will be at his own expense.

The Contractor shall ensure that all sections of the drainage system are completely clear of any obstructions, debris and superfluous matter before any tests are applied.

To facilitate the general construction programme, tests shall be made of sections as the works proceeds, such testing, however, shall not absolve the Contractor from his liability for any subsequent or final testing.

For drain pipe lines up to and including 825 mm diameter an air test shall be applied after construction but before backfilling, and after backfilling a water test shall be applied. Manholes shall be separately tested by applying a water test.

The drains shall be further tested for straightness of run by the insertion of a lamp at one end of the drain and a mirror placed at 45º to the invert at the other end. A full circle of light shall be observed.

Drain lines 230 mm and over nominal diameter shall have a ball not less than 200 mm diameter rolled down each length of drain to check for continuous grading of the drain invert.

The Contractor shall keep a record of the results of tests carried out on the drainage installation throughout the Contract, recording date of test, by whom tested, and witnessed. The results and two copies of the records shall be sent to the Engineer on completion of the Contract.



Page 222/245

4.1.10.2 Air Test

For an air test expanding plugs shall be moistened and applied to both ends of the pipe and all lateral connections. Air shall then be pumped by bellows or manual pump into the pipe at the lower end until a pressure equal to 100 mm water gauge is recorded on a U-tube at the upper end. Allow 5 minutes for stabilisation of air temperature.

Adjust the test air pressure to achieve 100 mm water gauge.

Without further pumping, the water gauge should not fall by more than 25 mm in a period of 5 minutes.

After the testing period has elapsed the pressure shall be released from the lower end and this shall be indicated by a fall of pressure in the manometer, proving continuity throughout the pipe.

4.2 HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES

4.2.1 General

Pipes shall be of sizes and general routing as indicated on the Drawings. Valves shall be of the same size as the pipe run in which it is installed. Piping material shall be as specified under the respective systems for the particular system concerned.

All pipe work and fittings shall be installed, stored and transported in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

All pipe work shall be installed to allow for thermal movement.

All pipe work shall be free from surface or general corrosion and without any scaling pitting, excess weathering or damage. Any pipe work so affected shall be removed from site and replaced at no cost to the contract.

Each length of pipe work shall have at least one coloured identification band or identifying mark when delivered.

All pipe work shall be supplied in the standard manufactured straight lengths but not less than 6 m long except where shorter specific or flanged lengths between fittings are actually required.

Prolonged storage in sunlight may lead to degradation of thermoplastic pipe and fittings due to the combined effect of heat and ultra violet radiation. Therefore temporary covering shall be used wherever possible to prevent exposure. Pipes should not be subjected to excess of temperatures variation within the pipe work stack or storage facilities.

All pipe work shall be stored on flat level ground free from sharp stones etc. and stacked to heights not exceeding manufacturer's recommendations.

Side bracing of pipe storage facilities stacks should be provided to prevent stack collapse.

Smaller pipes may be 'nested' inside larger pipes.



Page 223/245

Any pipe work installation shall be installed so that the complete system can be drained down quickly, easily and without disruption to other services.

Where it is required to shorten any pipe, it shall be cut off square and cleanly with an approved pipe cutting machine.

4.2.2 Cutting and handling of pipe and accessories

Transport of pipe lengths to the point of installation shall be so arranged that neither spigot nor socket ends nor flanges become damaged.

Care shall be taken not to damage pipe lining and coatings. Any pipes damaged in cutting or handling shall be rejected. Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe shall be permitted only on the barrel of the pipe. The interior of pipes, valves and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being placed in position and shall be kept clean during laying or fixing operations by plugging.

Cuts in non-metallic pipes shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Cuts in all pipes shall be made square to the axis of pipes and all burrs and other irregularities removed by reaming and filing before fixing.

Pipe cuts at valves and special castings shall be accurately made to bring all valves, castings and other accessories to their correct positions.

At the end of the working day all exposed pipe ends shall be covered. Dirt and foreign matter shall be excluded from pipes by the use of end caps, plugs or rigid plastic covers. A valve fitted to the open end of a disconnected pipe is not acceptable for pipe sealing.

4.2.3 Protection and storage of pipe and accessories

All pipes shall be properly supported clear of the ground on stable and secure pipe racks and suitably covered to protect them from the weather.

No pipe or material of any kind shall be placed inside another pipe or fitting if any lining or coating has been applied to either.

Plastic pipe and components shall be protected from direct sunlight in a ventilated enclosure.

Rubber or compound gaskets, sleeves and adhesives not for immediate installation shall be stored in a cool area protected from direct sunlight.

4.2.4 Schedule of Pipe work Materials

Service Description Pipe Diameter Pipe Specification

Potable Hot and Cold Water

All sizes Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC)



Page 224/245

4.2.5 Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe work

All potable hot and cold water pipe work shall be chlorinated poly vinyl chloride.

Dimensions for pipe work shall be based on ASTM F441/ F441 M Schedule 80.

All pipes and fittings shall be jointed by solvent cement in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation recommendations.

4.2.6 Pipe Erection

All pipes shall follow the lines of walls as indicated on the drawings, unless the site conditions prevent this, in which case the runs may be varied to suit the site conditions, subject to the agreement of the Engineer.

Uncovered pipes shall be located not less than 25 mm nor more than 40 mm clear of walls. Insulated pipes shall be located so that the insulation is not less than 15 mm nor more than 25 mm clear of walls.

All pipes shall be fitted well clear of the floor when situated in rooms, to permit cleaning beneath the pipes. Where possible a 115 mm clearance shall be left between the underside of the pipes and the finished level of the floor and in no case shall the pipe be less than 100 mm clear of the floor.

The Contractor shall ensure that the installation looks neat and tidy and that there is accurate spacing between pipes, valves and joints etc., all symmetrically lined up. Similarly all directional changes in groups of pipes shall be taken from common radius points. Adequate space must be left for the application of the insulation and for separate insulation of each pipe.

Special care shall be taken before final assembly and closing up to ensure that all pipes are properly cleaned out and free from flux grit, scale and jointing material. Ends of pipes temporarily unconnected for any reason shall be closed with plastic caps. Plugs shall not be used for this purpose. No open ends shall be left after working hours. The Contractor shall accept full responsibility for any damage that may be caused to any plant or its failure in operation by neglect of such care.

All pipe work shall be installed so as to allow for any possible expansion or contraction of the pipe work.

PTFE thread sealant tape shall meet the performance requirements of BS.5292: Type C.

4.2.7 Air Vents and Drainage

All pipes are to be run with appropriate gradients to ensure the free release of air and drainage at suitable points of the system.

Wherever possible air vents shall be installed in concealed accessible positions and shall be the automatic type. Where they can not be located in an accessible position they shall be the air bottle type, with remote manual air release valve.

Drain valves shall be fitted at all low points and where required to facilitate draining the installation as a whole or in parts and on the system side of all zone isolating valves.



Page 225/245

Manual drain valves shall be provided at all low points of water piping systems irrespective of whether are indicated on the Drawings or not to permit draining any part of the system for maintenance and repair. Drain valves shall be of the gate valve type of 3/4" minimum size. Where necessary drain valves shall be provided with brass serrated hose connectors on their outlet.

Manual air vents shall be provided at all high points of water piping systems irrespective of whether they are indicated on the Drawings or not to permit venting any air collected at the high point that tends to obstruct flow. Manual air vents shall be of the globe valve type of 1/2" minimum size.

Automatic air vents shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings for venting the air automatically from the high points of the system.

4.2.8 Unions

Pipe unions or flanges, depending on size and material of piping, shall be provided at piping connections to equipment and near valves, controls, strainers and other accessories that need to be taken out for replacement, cleaning or repair. Unions or flanges shall also be provided at adequate intervals in the piping to permit easy disassembly for alternations and repair.

Piping connections to moving equipment shall be made through flexible connections to reduce the transmission both sides of equipment. Any reduction in pipe size shall be made right at the equipment and valves, flexible connections and other accessories shall be the full pipe size indicated on the Drawings. Piping connections to equipment shall be arranged in amateur to permit easy removal of the equipment for servicing without disturbing the piping. At the same time the piping shall not interfere with the removal of equipment or parts thereof. The unions or flanges shall be installed between the equipment and the isolating valves.

Unions used on threaded pipes size 2" and smaller shall have female threaded ends and ground metal to metal seats. Unions shall be of the same manufacture, pressure class and material as the other pipe fittings specified for the system concerned.

4.2.9 Flanges

Flanges shall always match the flanges provided on valves and equipment as far as pressure rating, facing, drilling and thickness. Flat face flanges shall never be mated with raised face flanges. Flanges on black steel pipes shall be black, forged steel of the slip-on or welding neck type. Flanges on galvanized steel pipes shall be galvanized steel of the threaded type. Flanged joints shall be made perfectly square with the pipes and shall be fitted with 1.5mm thick asbestos composition ring gaskets and assembled with steel, square head machine bolts and hexagonal nuts. The bolts shall be of diameter and length to suit the flanges and to allow the nuts to utilize the full length of their thread.

Gaskets for flat face flanges shall be of the full face ring type with punched bolt holes.

Joints between Dissimilar Metals

Joints between dissimilar metals shall be made through dielectric insulated unions and flanges to prevent electrolytic interaction and corrosion. This applies particularly to joints between ferrous and nonferrous piping.



Page 226/245

Insulating unions shall be used on threaded piping and insulating flanges on welded piping. Flanges shall be fitted with insulating gaskets and Teflon sleeves and washers between flanges, nuts and bolts. The entire insulating joint including the dielectric material shall be suitable and capable to withstand the temperature, pressure and all other operating conditions of the service for which they are used.

4.2.10 Flexible Connections

Flexible connections shall be of seamless bronze tubing with annular corrugations covered with high tensile strength bronze braid and shall be suitable for 150psi cold water working pressure.

Flexible connections shall be of the same as the pipe in which they are installed. They shall have screwed ends for sizes 2 ½" and larger.

4.2.11 Anchors

Pipe anchors shall comprise a U-bolt of 3/4" diameter shaped to fit the pipe and welded to it at all points of contact. The U-bolt shall be bolted to an adequate structural angle frame which be securely fastened to the building structure.

4.2.12 Guides

Pipe guides shall be constructed in the same manner as anchors except that the U-bolt shall fit loosely around the pipe instead of being welded to it.

4.2.13 Expansion Joints

Provision for movement due to expansion and contraction shall be made either by loops, special expansion joints, or by change in direction of the pipe work. Supports at such points shall be arranged to ensure that all movement is taken up by the loop, joint, or change in direction of the pipe work. Where pipe work is required to be pre-stressed the extent of the cold draw will be indicated on the drawings.

Expansion bellows shall be of axial pattern or as indicated and shall be provided with screwed or flanged ends as appropriate, unions shall be used with screwed ends to facilitate replacement, unless otherwise approved. They shall incorporate internal liners if required and shall be manufactured from 18/8 stainless steel or other approved material appropriate to the duty, also designed to withstand the test pressure of the system. Bellows shall be capable of not less than 2,000 complete cycles of movement over the designed working range without failure.

Expansion bellows for angular movements shall be arranged as indicated on the drawings. They shall be provided with tie rods or hinges to take end thrust.

All bellows expansion joints shall be provided with external protection where exposed to damage. For axial bellows this shall comprise an external sleeve.

Bellows shall be installed so that they are not subjected to stresses other than those for which they are designed. Unless otherwise indicated they shall be installed so that they are in their free position at a temperature midway between the high and low limits of normal service.



Page 227/245

Bellows expansion joints shall be provided with guides to ensure that all movements are taken up in the designed manner. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be closely followed. Guides shall be secured rigidly and shall provide free movement for expansion without undue constraint. Means for lubrication shall be provided where necessary.

For plastic pipe work, loops and/or manufacturers thermal stress units shall be used to accommodate all expected/calculated contraction/expansion movements.

4.2.14 Pipe Sleeves

Where pipes pass through walls, floors and ceilings, sleeves of the same material as the services pipe shall be used.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the sleeves are in the correct position at the time they are built in.

The space between the pipes and sleeves shall be packed with a suitable flexible material to maintain the fire rating of the walls and floors, and finished with an approved mastic sealant.

Where sleeves are on pipe work exposed to view, wall, floor or ceiling plates shall be fitted at one or both ends of the pipe sleeve.

4.3 VALVES

4.3.1 General

All valves hall be installed so that they may be accessible for inspection and maintenance, and are fully openable.

Valves hall be in line size unless otherwise specified on the drawings.

All valves shall have the manufacturers name, material designation, pressure rating and size clearly marked on the valve body. In addition all stop valves, check valves and strainers shall have arrow indication of flow direction.

Isolation valves shall be installed on the outlets to water storage tanks, branches to main distribution pipes, adjacent to float operated valves, adjacent to pumps and all other items of equipment and any locations specified on the drawings.

4.3.2 Valve Labels

Valve labels shall be firmly fixed to all valves, pipe, handles, keys, instruments, gauges, control and other equipment, etc. and elsewhere to facilitate maintenance with engraved multi-layer Formica or similar labels.

All labels are to be of adequate size as to give clearance between lettering and fixings to ensure an aesthetic arrangement on completion. Pipeline labels shall generally be not smaller than 100mm X 20mm.

Where applicable, labels shall be fixed utilising Chrome Plated brass round head bolts and nuts or wood screws.



Page 228/245

For pipelines or valves where applicable, labels shall be fixed by means of a key ring in each upper corner suspended from chain loops over the relevant pipe.

Graphical symbols for use on equipment shall be created and applied in accordance with BS EN 80416-1, BS EN 80416-2, and BS EN 80416-3Valve Identification;

All lettering used on labels shall be "Arial Bold" capitals (except where indicating metric units or directed) with black letters on white labels for normal purposes. Where special colours or details are required these shall be particularly specified or directed.

All lettering shall be in English and Arabic, heights for the English lettering shall be as follows:-

Pipelines, valves, motor valves, doors, etc. 8mm

Sensors, pressure gauges, general instructions, etc. 4mm

4.3.3 Valve and Strainer Schedule

4.3.4 Gate Valve;

Gate valves 15mm NB up to and including 50mm NB shall be manufactured to BS5154 rated for a design pressure of PN20. The body and stem shall be of DZR copper alloy with threaded ends to BS21 and be stamped with the BS ‘Kite mark’.

System Description Application Valve Type Size range (mm)

General Draining

Draining Plant Items

Drain tap

Gland Cock

Gauge/Test Cock

15

15 to 50

15

Potable Water General Isolation

Fixture Isolation

Backflow Prevention

Tank Inflow

Gate

Ball

Check

Float

15 to 50

15 to 20

15 to 20

15 to 50



Page 229/245

Gate valves of 65mm NB up to and including 90mm NB shall be manufactured to BS5150 rated at a design pressure of PN20. The body shall be of Cast Iron with flanged ends to BS4505 and seating faces shall be of gunmetal.

4.3.5 Ball Valve;

Ball valves shall have a nickel-plated DZR copper alloy body with threaded ends to BS21 and a design pressure of PN25. The ball shall be Teflon coated and the seat of a PTFE material.

4.3.6 Butterfly Valves;

Butterfly valves 100mm NB and above shall be “wafer” pattern in accordance with the dimensions in BS EN 593 and suitable for flanges to BS 4505. The body shall be manufactured from cast steel to ASTMA 216 Gr. WPC or cast iron to BS 1452 Gr. 250. The disc shall be nylon coated SG iron or EN plated cast iron. The shaft shall be manufactured from 410 stainless steel with ‘O’ ring seals

Generally valves up to and including 200mm NB shall be lever operated and valves above 200mm NB shall be gear operated. The gear-operated unit shall include a position indicator.

4.3.7 Check valve;

Check valves 15mm NB up to and including 50mm NB shall be “swing” pattern manufactured to BS5154 rated for a design pressure of PN25. The body shall be of gunmetal with threaded ends to BS21.

Check valves 65mm NB and above shall be “swing” pattern to BS 5153 rated for a design pressure of PN20. The body shall be of Cast Iron with flanged ends to BS4504 and seating faces shall be of gunmetal.

4.3.8 Float Valves

Float valves shall be of all bronze construction including levers and arms, with cooper float and shall be suitable for a cold design pressure of PN10. Float valves 15mm NB up to and including 50mm NB have screwed ends to BS21 and 65mm NB and above have flanged ends to BS4505.

Float valves shall be of the full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close tight against maximum pressure when float is half submerged. They shall have renewable synthetic rubber valve disc and balancing piston.

4.3.9 Strainers

Strainers size 2" and smaller shall be screwed, Y - type, bronze body, 150 psi steam working pressure rating, with 20 - mesh stainless steel screen and screwed cap with ½" tapped hole for installation of blow down valve.

Strainers size 2 ½" and larger used on water service shall be flanged, basket type, cast iron body, 125 psi steam working pressure rating, with 20 - mesh stainless steel basket screen, bolted cap and ¾" tapped hole at the bottom for installation of blow down valve.



Page 230/245

4.3.10 Automatic Air Vents;

Automatic air vents shall be of the float type, with body, base and connection tail of DZR copper alloy, cover, float and vacuum breaker, temperature resisting, synthetic material suitable for a working pressure of 6 bars.

4.3.11 Gauge/Test Cocks

Gauge cocks for use with cold water shall be “straight” pattern with a polished bronze body, parallel threads, ground plug type with lever handle.

4.3.12 Gland Cock;

Gland cocks shall be “straight” pattern with a hose union connection and complete with a captive cap. The body shall be of Gunmetal with threaded ends to BS21.

4.3.13 Drain Tap;

Drain Taps shall be manufactured to BS2879 type 2, “lock shield” pattern. The body shall be of DZR copper alloy with threaded ends to BS21.

4.3.14 Vortex Inhibitors;

Vortex Inhibitors shall be designed in such a way as to prevent the pump from creating a vortex and drawing air in to the suction line of the pump when under a low suction head.

4.3.15 Pressure Gauges;

The pressure gauge range shall be chosen in such a way that the indicator shall be situated near a middle position during normal operating conditions. The gauge shall have an adjustable pointer.

Pressure gauges shall be of the Bourbon tube type of minimum 100mm dial diameter with flange less back and 15mm male threaded bottom connection.

Gauges shall have overall accuracy of one per cent (1%) of scale range and shall comply with the following schedule:

Pressure (bar) 10 4.5 3.0 2.5 1.5

Gauge range (bar) 0 - 20 0 - 10 0 - 6 0 - 5 0 – 3

Figure intervals (bar) 2 1 1 1 0.5

Intermediate intervals (mbar)

500 100 100 100 100



Page 231/245

4.4 PIPE WORKS SUPPORT

4.4.1 General

All piping shall be supported on steel hangers and supports of adequate strength and design to carry the weight of piping and concrete without sagging, swaying, vibrating, failing or deforming, and to allow free movement of pipes due to expansion and contraction without causing noise, damage to piping or to construction.

Hangers and supports shall be provided complete with all necessary structural steel, rods, bolts, nuts, turnbuckles and all other necessary components.

The use of wire, metal bands, rope, wood, chain, strap and perforated bar or any other makeshift device for supports will not be permitted. Hanging pipes from other pipes will not be permitted.

Pipe hangers and supports shall have smooth flat bearing surfaces, free from burrs or other sharp projections, which would wear or cut into the pipe.

Hangers and supports shall be of a design that allows adjustment of the required slope in piping and that permits removal without dismantling the pipes.

Embedded attachments such as insert in concrete shall be provided during the concrete pouring operations.

Valves and other heavy items of pipe work equipment shall be individually supported and shall not be suspended from the pipe work. Supports for valves and other heavy pipe work ancillary items shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Hangers and supports shall be of design and strength to meet all static and operational conditions to which piping and equipment may be subjected. The calculations for determining the loads at each hanger or support for selecting the proper type and size of components shall take into account the weight of pipe, valves, fittings, insulating materials, suspended hanger components, all appurtenances and the weight of the normal operating contents, In addition, the extra loadings due to pipe expansion and

Contraction, vibrations from equipment, hydrostatic testing, water hammer, reaction forces etc. shall be taken into consideration.

Pipe hangers and supports shall be located, in addition to the maximum spans specified under the respective pipe material; taking into consideration concentrated loads, elimination of overhung sections or bends and load reaction on terminal connections.

The specified maximum spans between hangers and supports are for straight runs of pipe and do not apply where concentrated loads such as the weight of valves or heavy fittings exist, where changes of direction in the pipe occur between hangers and supports.

Hangers and supports shall be placed as close as possible to concentrated loads. Where changes in direction or branch connections occur, the spacing between hangers and supports shall be reduced to less than 75% of the maximum spans specified. A hanger or support shall be located immediately adjacent to any change in direction of the piping and at every branch connection. Risers shall be supported independently of adjacent horizontal hangers.



Page 232/245

Where a horizontal pipe is subject to considerable movement in the vertical direction or is subject to vibration from moving equipment, spring cushions shall be used.

Piping shall be supported independently of equipment not to cause the equipment to be stressed by piping weight or pipe expansion and contraction.

Piping shall be routed to use the surrounding structure for support, anchorage, guidance or restraint, with adequate space provided for use of the prop hanger or support, Parallel lines, both vertical and horizontal, shall be spaced sufficiently apart to allow room for independent pipe attachments for each line.

Multiple pipe runs where the bottoms of the various lines are approximately at the same elevation shall be supported in groups on a trapeze hanger with provisions made to keep the lines in their relative positions to each other by the use of U-bolts. Lines subject to extreme thermal expansion shall be free to slide or to roll.

Hangers and supports shall be securely fastened to the building structure by means of masonry expansion bolts without causing over stress to any part of the construction Intermediate steel shall be provided where required to transfer the loads to areas where they can be accommodated safely.

Hangers and supports shall be designed and tested to sustain a load 8 times the actual supported load.

Masonry expansion bolts shall be of minimum 20mm diameter. They shall be drilled in the concrete and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

On insulated pipes, special provisions shall be made at the point of support to prevent damage to the insulation due to pipe weight or movement and to provide a firm attachment of the pipe.

On hot insulated pipes, pipe protection saddles shall be used.

On hot insulated pipes supported from above, either a pipe clamp may be used directly on the pipe or the arms of the clamp extended outside the insulation of a larger hanger of clevis or pipe clamp type may be used lined with insulation protection shields.

The length and metal thickness of insulation protection shields for different pipe sizes shall be as given on the Drawings.

The maximum spacing of trapeze hangers for multiple pipes shall be the maximum spacing for the smallest pipe on the trapeze.

All piping located in mechanical equipment room and having connection to vibrating equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers for a distance of at least 15 m or 100 times the pipe diameter from the vibration equipment, whichever is the greater.

4.4.2 Testing of Hot and Cold Water Services

4.4.2.1 General



Page 233/245

All pipe work shall be tested as soon as practicable after installation and before completion of shaft walls, access panels, suspended ceilings and applications of any insulation.

The domestic hot and cold water service pipe work shall be tested with potable water to a pressure of 1.5 times the working head and maintained for two hours without further application of pressure, and without visible leakage or drop in indicated pressure.

In the event of the failure of any test the defect shall be located and repaired, and the test repeated.

4.4.2.2 Test Certificate

A test certificate shall be submitted following successful testing of the complete system.

The test certificate shall include:

O Project name: O Name of trade contractor: O Service: O Section under test: O Nature of test: O water O pressure O duration O System flushed: yes/no O Record drawing submitted: yes/no O Signatures for trade contractor: O Witness: O Date of test:

4.4.3 Sterilization of Hot and Cold Water Services

4.4.3.1 Completion of Testing

After satisfactory completion of the final testing the following sterilization procedure shall be carried out.

4.4.3.2 Sterilization Procedure

All hot and cold domestic water services, tanks and water heaters shall be sterilized in accordance with BS 6700.

The Contractor shall supply all necessary fittings to enable the chlorination to be carried out.

4.4.3.3 Disposal of Sterilizing Water

Sterilizing water shall be disposed of in compliance with the requirements of the Local Water Authority or Authority having jurisdiction.

Protective clothing and goggles shall be provided for the operatives carrying out this work.

4.4.3.4 System Analysis



Page 234/245

On conclusion of the process, samples shall be taken from each system for bacteriological analysis, by an independent public analyst, to confirm the water is of potable quality.

4.4.3.5 Certificate of Sterilization

Detailed records shall be maintained for all sterilization procedures carried out. a copy of sterilization certificates for all parts of the system shall be submitted containing the following information:

o Project name: o Name of trade contractor: o Service: o Section sterilized: o Method of sterilization: o Contact time: o Minimum chlorine level at outlets: o Signatures for trade contractor: o Witness: o Date of sterilization:

4.5 RAINWATER, SOIL, WASTE AND VENTILATING PIPEWORK

4.5.1 General

All pipes and pipe fittings shall be carefully examined before fixing. Defective items shall be replaced. Jointing rings, couplings and adaptors, shall be of types recommended by the manufacturer of the pipes to be jointed. Joint ring material shall be to BS 2494 and shall be stored in bags as- delivered and not exposed to sunlight. Particular care shall be taken that all pipework is erected and secured truly parallel and plumb with vertical surfaces. All horizontal pipework shall be arranged with falls to BS EN 12056. All branch, connections to horizontal pipework shall be swept in the direction of flow. Long runs of pipework shall be erected so that stresses of expansion and contraction, due to temperature variation, are taken up by expansion joints. Where small bore branches are made to mains remote from anchor points, the branches shall be arranged to form a radius arm so that the axial movement of the main does not stress the connecting fittings. Where expansion devices are used they shall be of similar material to the pipe, installed in line with the axis of the pipe, and shall be free from compression, tension or torsion. The female member of the expansion devices shall be firmly anchored to allow the male member to take all movement. Pipes passing through fire compartmentation, walls, floors, and in-fill slabs shall be fitted with intumescent fire sleeves installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions.



Page 235/245

Proprietary pipe sleeve systems incorporating ring seals and cover plates shall be used as a finish to pipework, up to and including 50mm diameter in occupied areas other than plant room. Union type fittings shall be provided to make up to outlets of basin and sink wastes, drip cups and dilution receivers, etc, on pipework up to and including 50mm diameter. Joints in pipework shall not be made within the thickness of walls, floor or roof, or where they would later be built in wherever this can be avoided. Jointing material shall not project into the bore of pipes, fittings or appliances. Access plates shall be fitted at the foot of each vertical stack and also at junctions to horizontal branches of 50mm diameter and over to enable the complete piping system to be internally cleaned and rodded. Access caps/plates shall be fitted at ends of all horizontal pipework, at junctions, and at changes of direction on branch pipework. At all penetrations of roofs a suitable method of providing a water seal and weathering shall be used. Soil, waste and vent stacks above each highest branch shall be continued upwards, at the full diameter, above roof level to such a height as to afford a safe outlet for foul air and terminate with a balloon or cage. Joints between branch soil pipes and WC pan spigots shall be made by the use of a suitable flexible WC connector.

4.5.2 Schedule of Pipework Materials

Service description Pipe Diameter Pipe Specification

Waste pipes up to 50mm BS 5255: 1989

Soil pipes and Rainwater Pipes 75 -160mm BS 4514 and BS EN 1329-1:2000

Dewatering Pump Discharge Lines

all sizes HDPE

Condensate Drains all sizes Galvanized Mild Steel to BS EN 1387:1985 (EN 10255).

4.5.3 PVC – U Pipework

Fittings and couplings for use with PVC-U pipes shall be jointed with and incorporate elastomeric rings or utilise a push fit system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.



Page 236/245

Joints between PVC-U pipes and other materials shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers installation instruction utilizing patented adaptors. Joints between small diameter branch pipes to main stacks shall be made using elastomeric seal rings or gaskets. A local ring seal expansion joint shall be provided and positioned immediately above branch connections to main stacks. Provisions shall be made to accommodate thermal expansion. A support bracket shall be provided immediately below each pipe connector.

4.5.4 Galvanized Mild Steel Pipes

All tubes shall be of uniform thickness within the manufacturing tolerances as stated in the appropriate British Standard and shall have a concentric bore throughout.

All pipes shall be hot-dipped galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 to achieve a galvanising thickness of 100 microns.

Pipe up to and including150mm NB shall be to BS EN 10255:2004 ERW pipe.

Screwed pipes shall be supplied with at least one socket for each length fitted and threads not fitted with sockets shall be fitted with protectors during transit.

Screwed joints on pipe work shall be made in accordance with the provisions of BS 21.

Where tube is galvanised care shall be taken to ensure that threads are carefully cut so that the number of exposed threads is minimised. Steel exposed shall be painted with suitable galvanising paint immediately upon fabrication.

Screwed pipe work joints shall be made using a suitable jointing compound and cleaned off when joint has been made.

Joints on galvanized pipe from 65mm NB up to and including 150mm NB shall be made with screw on heavy quality galvanised flanges.

Galvanized pipe fittings shall be bead type, hot dipped galvanised finish, to BS 143 & 1256.

4.5.5 Rainwater Goods

4.5.5.1 General

Gutter systems shall be complete with all necessary angles, outlets, stop ends, and jointing components to provide a fully watertight system as shown on the Architects drawings.

Gutters shall be supported as indicated on the Architects drawings.

Gutter lengths shall be jointed using gaskets supplied by the manufacturers and strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

4.5.5.2 Rainwater Pipe work

Pipes shall be fixed plumb.



Page 237/245

Offsets shall not be formed from bends of less than 112.5 degree angle.

Rainwater pipes shall be complete with all necessary offsets, bends, branches, shoes/connections to gulleys or drains to provide a complete rainwater drainage system as indicated on the drawings.

4.5.6 Pipe work Supports

4.5.6.1 General Requirements

Pipe work supports shall be provided in accordance with the following table and either side of bends.

Pipe material Pipe size (mm)

Vertical pipes (m)

Low gradient pipes(m)

PVC-U 32-40

50

75-100

150

1.2

1.2

1.8

1.8

0.5

0.6

0.9

1.2

Multiple pipe supports for pipes of differing sizes shall be spaced at intervals required for the smallest pipe.

Suspended-type pipe hangers and accessories shall be constructed and assembled in accordance with BS 3974: Part 1.

The type of pipe hanger clip or hoop used shall be selected according to the application, special provision being made in instances where the piping or tubing is subject to axial movement due to thermal expansion and/or contraction.

Where the Sub-contractor proposes to support pipes on cantilevers of fabricated mild steel section, either bolted or welded, he shall submit full details of his proposals to the Contractor for acceptance prior to ordering or fabrication.

Where individual fixings require cutting for and building into the building structure, the Sub-contractor shall arrange for positions to be marked out on the building for acceptance by the Contractor before cutting-out and fixing.

Contact between dissimilar metals must be prevented.

Socketless pipe systems shall be supported, in accordance with manufacturer's fixing instructions, adjacent to every joint. Long sections of drain shall be laterally braced to the structure with angle section mild steel to prevent horizontal movement.

Angle section mild steel thrust brackets shall be fitted at vertical bends to prevent axial movement of suspended pipes.



Page 238/245

Pipes in shafts shall be fixed with two-piece eared type holder bats bolted together with cadmium plated mild steel bolts and nuts and screwed to shaft walls using 50mm No.10 cadmium plated mild steel screws and plastic wall plugs.

All steel brackets shall be wire brushed clean of rust and then painted with one coat of red-oxide paint prior to erection. Following erection and installation of the piping the brackets shall be painted with one additional coat of red-oxide paint.

Exposed pipe work fixed to walls in occupied areas shall be supported on brass or mild steel pipe rings as appropriate with screw on back plates.

4.5.7 Testing

4.5.7.1 Initial Test

All internal pipework, and jointed external pipework, shall be tested with air as soon as practicable after installation and before enclosing with shaft walls and suspended ceilings etc.

Open ends of pipe shall be fitted with plugs, one of which shall incorporate a tee-piece for connection to air pump and manometer. Air shall be pumped until the manometer indicates the required pressure.

Pipes shall be tested by air pressure at l00 mm wg held constant for 5 minutes.

4.5.7.2 Final Test

On completion of the installation and connection of all sanitary appliances, a further air test shall be carried out.

Pipes shall be tested by air pressure at 38mm wg (374Pa) held constant for 3 minutes.

4.5.8 Gutters

All gutters shall be filled to overflow level after the outlet has been plugged. After 5 minutes the gutter shall be inspected for evidence of leaks.

4.5.9 Pumping Mains

The mains shall be slowly filled with water to exclude air and the supply shall be left running for sufficient time to ensure that the system is fully purged of air. A test pressure of 1 x closed head pressure shall be applied and maintained for at least one hour without further pumping.

In the event of the failure of any test, the defect shall be located and repaired, and the test repeated.

4.5.10 Test Certificate

A Test Certificate shall be submitted following successful testing of the pipework.



Page 239/245

Test Certificates shall include the following:

o Project name: Name of Contractor/Sub-contractor: o Service: o Section under test: o Nature of test: o Air o Pressure o Duration o Materials and installation in accordance with the specification: o Signatures for Contractor/Sub-contractor: o Witness: o Date of Test:

4.5.11 Sanitary Appliances

4.5.11.1 General Requirements

The sanitary appliances shall be fixed only/supplied and fixed as detailed on the Sanitary Fittings Schedules.

Suites containing more than one component shall be obtained from a single source to ensure compatibility. All colours including white shall be batched to ensure accurate colour matching. All metal appliances shall be supplied with tags for electrical bonding.

4.5.11.2 Protection

Protective coverings shall be retained, when practical, during and after fixing.

All packings and protective wrappings, etc, are to be completely removed from inside and outside of all appliances prior to Practical Completion.

4.5.11.3 Installation General

Where masonry walls are faced with ceramic tiling, wall plugs shall be pushed beyond the back face of the tiling.

Floor standing appliances shall be bedded in suitable mastic and secured with screws and not bedded in cement mortar unless so specified.

Only brass or stainless steel screws shall be used throughout.

All tap bodies shall be 'broken' and greased before assembling in the sanitary ware.

Taps and. waste fittings shall be bedded using washers or suitable mastic. Any surplus mastic shall be cleaned off immediately after installation.

When an appliance is fed with both hot and cold supplies the hot tap shall be fixed on the left hand side and the cold on the right when viewed from the front, unless otherwise specified on the drawings.



Page 240/245

4.6 PLUMBING FIXTURES

For plumbing fixtures materials and workmanship refer to Architects General Specification.

4.7 REINFORCED CONCRETE WATER TANK

Where shown on the drawings water storage tanks and service tanks shall be constructed in concrete with a waterproof lining or coating. All lining materials shall be approved by The Engineer prior to use.

The water tanks shall be complete with all required inlet, outlet, test, drain, overflow, warning connections and vents (with insect mesh), swivel or hinged lockable manhole covers over ball float valves and level switches. Where partitions are specified, each section shall be provided with a set of all required connections, ball float valves, level switches, ladders, manholes with covers, over flows, vents.

Where indicated on the drawings the tanks shall include valve boxes for accommodating float valves so as to maximise the useful volume.

Access ladders shall be provided externally and internally at each access manhole into the tank. Adequate provision shall also be made for access to the inlet connection and top inlet box.

External access ladders shall be hot dipped galvanised and internal ladders shall be GRP.

The nuts, bolts, washers, tie rods etc shall be of galvanised steel and all tanks more than 1 metre in height shall have internal and external ladders, details as defined above.

The tanks shall be filled with water and allowed to stand for 48 hours. They shall then be examined for leaks and repaired as necessary.

4.8 PUMPS

4.8.1 General

Pumps shall be provided from the factory complete with their electric motors.

Motors shall be either closely coupled to the pump or flexibly coupled to it as specified for the particular pump concerned. Horizontal base mounted pumps shall have their motor mounted on a common cast iron or fabricated steel base and properly aligned at the factory. The pump and motor base shall be supported on an isolated reinforced concrete foundation as detailed on the Drawings and the base shall be aligned and levelled throughout its entire length and width.

Piping shall be supported independently of pump nozzles to prevent piping weight or stresses from bearing on or being transmitted to the pump muzzles.

Drains for packing glands and base shall be piped to the nearest floor drain or sump.

Pump impellers and rotating assemblies shall be satirically and dynamically balanced at the factory.



Page 241/245

Pumps shall be provided from the factory with plugged connections for casing vent, drain and suction and discharge pressure gauges.

Pumps shall be provided with shaft packing or mechanical seals compatible with the design of the pump and nature of the liquid pumped, in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations or as specified for each particulate pump.

Packing rings shall be installed in alternate layers staggered 90 deg, The packing shall be tightened for seal while permitting the prescribed amount of leakage for lubrication.

Mechanical seals shall be installed and aligned in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

All pumps shall be suitable for the prevailing climatic conditions.

4.8.2 Water Booster Pumps

The pumping / booster sets shall be of the package type with pumps, all interconnecting pipework, valves, non return valves, flow switches, diaphragm vessel and electric controls all pre-piped and pre-wired and mounted on a common base frame. A panel containing all controls, starters etc., shall be mounted on the front of each unit. The panels shall have a power on light, run and trip lights and hand/off/auto switches for each pump. A duty selector switch shall also be fitted to enable to lead pump(s) to be alternated. Each pump shall be fitted with an hours run meter. The panel shall be mounted such that no vibration is transmitted into it during operation of the unit. The common frame shall be manufactured from mild steel angle or hollow section. The frame and all major components shall be finished with a quality enamel gloss paint to the manufacturers standard colours. The units shall be arranged such that upon a fall in pressure within the diaphragm vessel the lead or jockey pump shall run. Should this pump not satisfy the demand or alternatively fail, the second pump shall operate. The pump casings shall be cast iron to BS 1452, the impellers gun metal to BS 1400. Seal shall be of the self-adjusting type to DIN 24960. All components shall be suitable for the operating temperatures and pressures of the systems in which they are installed. All flanges shall be in accordance with BS 4504 to the table appropriate for the temperatures and pressures of the systems to which the units are connected. All water pressure-boosting sets are to be tested to BS 5316 before leaving the manufacturer's works and test certificates and performance curves are to be submitted to the Architect.

4.8.2.1 Anti Vibration Mounts and Isolation

The units shall be fitted with anti-vibration mounts.



Page 242/245

The units shall be supplied complete with flexibles on all pipe connections.

4.8.2.2 Controls

The booster units shall be complete with all controls necessary for their fully automatic operation. Each unit shall be supplied complete with facilities to enable the interconnection by others of float switches arranged to stop operation of the unit should the contents of the associated storage tanks rise above or fall below pre-set levels. Each unit control panel shall have an IP55 enclosure and be of the micro-processor or contactor switching type and be complete with the following

• Isolator

• Hand/off/Auto selector for each pump

• Visual indicators of hours run for each pump

• Cyclic pump change over

• Automatic rotation of duty pump

• Adjustable start delays

• Omission of the faulty pump from the rotational cycle

• Low water cut-out circuitry with sequenced pump re-start

• A volt free three wire contact suitably rated for switching a 24 volt, 50 mA external sourced circuit to initiate a signal for following faults or lockout conditions to be remotely relayed to a BMS system

• Pump motor tripped

• Low pressure alarm

• Low water level in break tank

• High pressure alarm

• Power

• The fault signal initiation is not to be affected by electrical isolation of the booster set.

• Visual LED when using micro-processor control panel.



Page 243/245

4.8.3 Dewatering Sump Pumps

Pump sets shall be provided for the locations and duties as indicated in the Equipment Schedules.

The pump sets shall be of the sewage or dirty water types in accordance with their duty requirement. The sewage pumps shall be of the non-clog type with open impellers. The dirty water (seepage) pumps shall be of the closed impeller or vortex type. The submersible pumps shall be rated in accordance with IP 68 and shall have corrosion class in accordance with appendix A of IEC 364-5-51.

The efficiency of the pump set at duty point shall be not less than 90% of the maximum efficiency for the pump.

The pumps shall be of the centrifugal type vertically mounted close coupled to their fully submersible electric drive motors. Pump impellers shall be cast iron to GG 25 confirming to ASTM 35B or cast stainless steel. Shaft, studs, nuts, screws and washers shall be stainless steel grade 304, S15.

The bearings shall be of the rotating element type, grease packed and sealed for life.

The pump shall have two mechanical seals. The seals shall work independently of each other, one to seal off the motor, one to seal off the pumped fluid. An oil chamber shall act as a buffer between the seals and a coolant for the seals. A moisture detection probe in the oil chamber shall detect the presence of water in the chamber and thus the deterioration of the lower seal. The probe shall operate a remote alarm.

A lifting chain with shackles, rings etc. shall be fitted to each pump, which shall support the weight of the pumps during installation and removal from the sump. The chain shall comply with BS 1663 and be hot-dipped galvanised.

Motors shall be submerged and cooled by the liquid in which it is submerged. The windings shall be protected against burnout by a thermostat or thermistor arranged to trip the pump.

The submerged cable shall be multi-core and fully insulated LSF to BS 7211. The cable shall be sealed and glanded into the motor before the pump leaves the factory. The cable junction box shall be sealed from the outside. The cables shall be supplied long enough to reach the starters. For all low point seepage sumps the starters are quite far from the nearest station seepage sump. Therefore the cable shall go into a waterproof isolation socket, which shall be cabled to the starter. The isolation sockets may be a composite arrangement, but in either case the Pump Number shall be clearly labelled on the plug and the socket.

The pump sets shall be complete with boltless self-aligning duck-foot assembly, which allows removal of the pumps without disturbing the pipe work, Guide rails on which to raise and lower the pumps shall be of galvanised steel and complete with all fittings and support brackets.

Pump duties shall be achieved with the impeller shaft speed not exceeding 2900rpm unless otherwise listed.

Pump connections shall be screwed to BS 21 up to DN 50 and flanged to BS 4504, PN 16 for DN 65 and above.



Page 244/245

The permissible service pressure of cast iron pump casings shall be generally in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Impellers shall be keyed to the drive shaft, the impeller being retained by a hexagonal nut.

4.9 ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS

Type: A - Unvented type with sacrificial anode up to 100 litre capacity.

Unvented type electrical hot water heaters shall be provided in the positions shown on the drawings.

The water heaters shall be suitable for a working pressure of 600 kpa and 75°C temperature.

The water heaters shall be complete with their standard heater element. The heater shall be glass lined, and the shell and lining shall be guaranteed for 10 years by the manufacturer.

Each water heater shall be fitted with a 20 dia safety valve with built-in check valve discharging (through a small bore copper tube) to the buildings drainage system via a floor trap.

The cold water connection to water heaters shall include an additional non-return valve. Three meters of cold water connection pipe upstream of the NRV shall be of uninsulated copper tube.

Water heaters shall be suitable for 220V/1PH/60Hz power supply or 380V/3 phase/60Hz supply as indicated in the equipment data sheets.

The Contractor shall handover to the Owner the following spares at the time of commissioning:

• Heating elements: 6 nos. or 5% of the total installed quantity (whichever is greater) of each type of heater.

• Thermostats: 6 Nos. or 5% of the total installed quantity (whichever is greater) of each type of thermostat for water heaters.

All water heaters shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the installation of heater.

Full details of electrical hot water heaters shall be submitted to The Engineer prior to installation.

4.10 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION

Pipe identification banding shall be applied after covering and/or protective and decorative painting is complete.

Pipes and pipelines shall be painted in colours in accordance with BS1710: 1984 complete with the identification colour code indicators.

Colour coding shall be provided as follows:



Page 245/245

• At 8m intervals on straight runs,

• At all changes of direction,

• Within 300mm of all valves,

• Within 300mm of all equipment items,

• At all junction points and branch (unless end of branch is visible from junction),

• All lines passing through walls and floors where lines are accessible and not visible from an identified main.

Direction-of-flow arrows and graphical symbols shall be stencilled in black on a regular white background.

Letters and symbols shall be pipe nominal bore or 50mm in height whichever is the lesser.

Identification colour schemes shall be listed in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.

All valves, except where adjacent to draw-off points, shall be fitted with a 50mm diameter 1.5mm thick aluminium disc. The disc shall be arranged to fit above the hand wheel held in place with a locknut for all wheel operated valves or attached to the valve by means of a brass chain or ring. The disc shall be stamped with numbers or letters and indentation filled in “black”.



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-1.2

Compliance statement

شركة صلة




, 2010





General Wet fire fighting systems shall comprise the following:

* Water tank.

* Standpipe system

* Sprinkler system.

* Foam – water sprinkler pre-action system

* Pumps and motors.

The complete system shall be in accordance with the requirement of Saudi

Civil Defence (SCD). Complied - As per NFPA Standard

Whenever the word "provide" is used it shall mean "furnish, install, test &

commission complete and ready for use".Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Equipment capacities and performance requirements shall be as listed in

the schedule of Equipment shown on the Drawings. Under Al-Madar Co.

The proposed fire fighting system as shown on the drawings or the one to

be provided shall be submitted for approval to SCD. Under Al-Madar Co.

Standpipe System

Standpipe systems shall be provided in accordance with the requirements

of NFPA 14, 2007 Edition. Under Al-Madar Co.

Standpipe system water shall be supplied from the fire water storage

tanks. Fire pumps shall supply the water to supply the standpipe outlets

and hose reels.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Civil Defence inlet breeching pieces shall be provided at each station for

the use of the Saudi Civil Defence to pump water into the system. Under Al-Madar Co.

The location of the breeching inlet shall not be more than 30.5m from the

hard standing location. Hard standing location shall be designed by the

Architect considering the road accesses with appropriate turning radius as

required by NFPA and local authorities.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Sprinklers;

The installation shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 13 ordinary

hazard 2 and shall comprise of an incoming water main to a storage tanks,

duty and standby sprinkler pumps, Installation control sets, distribution

pipe work, control valves and sprinkler heads.

Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Fire water reserve shall be maintained for one hour operation of fire pump

as required by NFPA. Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.1

3.2.2

3.2.3

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Page 1 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Centrifugal pumps arranged as duty and standby each designed to cater

the 100% demand of the fire protection system. Each fire pump shall have

its own dedicated controller located at fire pump room. Duty fire pump

shall be of electrical motor driven & standby fire pump shall be of diesel

engine driven with a diesel storage tank located within the fire pump

room. The fuel capacity shall be as required for 8 hours operation of the

fire pump. The requirements of electrical & equipments shall comply with

the requirements of NFPA 20, 2007 Edition & NFPA 70, 2007 Edition. The

system pressure shall be maintained by jockey pump. Jockey pump

capacity shall be 5 – 7% of the main fire pump

Under Al-Madar Co.

The entire assembly & components in the fire pump room like but not

limited to pressure relief valve with waste cone, flow testing

arrangements, venturi, shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20

Under Al-Madar Co.

Diesel tank shall be located with in a bund wall & the bund wall shall be

sized for 110% of the fuel tank capacity. Diesel storage tank shall have level

indicators to monitor the fuel level in the tank

Under Al-Madar Co.

Diesel tank area shall be provided with a modular type foam water

sprinkler pre action system complying with NFPA 16 Under Al-Madar Co.

Codes and Standards;

The works described in this section shall comply fully with the

requirements of the applicable “Code and Standards” section of this

specification

Complied

Pipe Work;

Potable pipe and fittings shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Pipe

work” section of this specification Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Pipes used in Fire Portection system shall be Hot dip galvanised SEAMLESS

steel pipe confirming to ASTM A53, Grade B Installation under Al-Madar Co.

Valves;

Valves shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Valves” section of this

specification

(2.16.3 through 2.16.17).

Fire protection valves shall all be UL listed and or FM approved with 1380

kpa (200 psi) minimum pressure. Valve shall have 2070 kPa pressure rating

if valves are components of high pressure piping system

Complied, we submit OS&Y gate valve with 250 PSI (17.2

Bar), UL Listed FM Approved.

Valves controlling water flow in fire protection piping shall be O.S&Y-

Outside Screw and Yoke type, except as noted, and shall be UL Listed, FM

approved.

Complied.

Gate valve shall be OS& Y type as indicated in the drawing. Sizes up to 50

mm and below shall be threaded type. The valve body shall be cast bronze

and wheel shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL listed and rated for 1380

KPa (200 psi) working pressure.

Complied, with model (18) , UNITED Brand, OS&Y Gate

Valve, Threaded Type, Sizes up to 50 mm and below with

200 PSI, UL Listed FM Approved.

3.2.4

3.2.5

3.2.6

Under Al-Madar Co.

Page 2 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Sizes 65 mm and above shall be Cast Iron OS&Y Gate valves where

indicated. The valve body shall be cast iron with grooved or flanged ends.

The valve shall be UL / FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa working

pressure (or 1725 KPa where required).

Complied, with model (F-607-RW), NIBCO Brand, OS&Y Gate

Valve, Flanged Ends with 250 PSI (17.2Bar), UL Listed FM

Approved.

Use class 1725 KPa OS&Y gate valves where required. The valve body shall

be cast iron and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA

standards.

Complied.

OS & Y gate valves have a tamper switch & shall be monitored electrically

through a supervisory switch in the fire alarm panel.

Complied, with model (OSY2), SYSTEM SENSOR Brand, UL

Listed FM Approved.

Supervision switches shall be installed for all fire protection valves. The

devices shall be electrical; single pole, double-throw; with normally closed

contacts and include design that signals controlled valve is in other than

normal position

Complied

Check valves shall be swinging type or split clapper type with flanged /

grooved ends. The valve body shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL / FM

approved and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure (or 1725 KPa where

required).

Complied, with model (F-908-W), NIBCO Brand, Check

Valve, Cast Iron, Flanged Ends with 175 PSI (12.1 Bar), UL

Listed FM Approved.

Complied, with model (F-938-31), NIBCO Brand, Check

Valve, Ductile Iron, Flanged Ends with 285 PSI (19.7 Bar),

Conform to (MSS SP-71).

Complied, with model (F-968-B), NIBCO Brand, Check Valve,

Ductile Iron, Flanged Ends with 500 PSI (34.5 Bar), Conform

to (MSS SP-71).

Butterfly valves shall be Grooved type with tamper switch. The valve body

shall be made of ductile Iron coated with nylon-11. The valve shall be UL /

FM approved and rated for 1380 KPa working pressure.

Complied, with model (GD-4765-8N), NIBCO Brand,

Butterfly Valve, Ductile Iron with 300 PSI (20.7 Bar), UL

Listed FM Approved.

Complied, with model (X43H), CLA-VAL Brand, H Style for

large flow area design, service without removal from line,

with a 316 Stainless Steel Strainer. Strainer Mesh size

standard 10 mesh / 2000 Micron / Openings 0.078 inch.

Complied, with model (911), MUELLER Brand, Y Type, Cast

Iron, ASTM A126 Grade B.

Riser Check Valve : Grooved Riser check valve Black Enamel Painted,

Ductile Iron Body to ASTM A536 grade 65-45-12 4”-8”, Grade E EPDM

encapsulated Ductile Iron disc, stainless steel spring and shaft, rated to

300psi (1370kPa). Suitable for Anti Hammer service and horizontal or

vertical installation. Provided drilled, tapped and plugged stream for 2”

drainage outlet and ½” pressure taps both upstream and down stream of

disc. UL Listed and FM approved.





Use class 1725 / 2070 KPa check valves where required. The valve body

shall be cast steel and shall be designed & manufactured according to

AWWA standards.

Y–Type Strainer: Y Type Strainer consist of Ductile Iron Body , ASTM A-536

grade 65-4512 , Type 304 Stainless Steel cylindrical removable baskets with

1/16” perforations and 41% open area for 2-3” strainer size. 1/8” (3.2mm)

diameter perforations and 40% open area 4”12” strainer size.

Page 3 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Flexible Joints: Flexible Couplings in series shall be installed near the

pumps to reduce the noise and Vibration if recommended by the pump

manufacturer

Under Al-Madar Co.

Building Expansion Joints: Flexible couplings shall be used to accommodate

any movement in the pipe due to Building expansion or contraction. A

proper study and calculation needs to provide by the Manufacturer.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Hangers and Supports; Under Al-Madar Co.

Hangers and Supports shall be as scheduled and specified in the “Hangers

and Supports” section of this specification (2.15.15 and 2.15.23). Under Al-Madar Co.

Pipeline Identification and Labeling; Under Al-Madar Co.

Pipelines and equipment shall be as scheduled and specified in the

“Pipeline Identification and Labeling” section of this specification (4.16). Under Al-Madar Co.

Fire Fighting Water Piping – General

All pipes used for fire fighting water distribution shall be hot galvanized

steel iron seamless schedule 40 confirming to ASTM A53 Gr. B assembled

with GI threaded fittings for pipe sizes 2" and smaller and with grooved

mechanical fittings for pipe sizes 2½" and larger.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire fighting water piping system shall be provided with valves on all

mains and branches for sectionalizing the system for maintenance and

operation.

Under Al-Madar Co.

All valves used in the fire fighting water piping system (Pump Suction,

Discharge, Risers) shall be of the rising stem type to clearly indicate

whether the valve is in the open or closed position. All these valves shall

be provided with tamper switch with and shall be monitored through fire

alarm system. All valves in the zone control valve shall be butterfly valve

with supervisory switch and shall be monitored through fire alarm system.

The valves shall conform in all other respects to the specifications given

under Valves.

Complied - With all valaves used in the fire fighting water

piping system and in the zone control valve shall be OS&Y

Gate Valves 250 PSI with supervisory switch.

All over ground pipe fittings up to 50mm shall be of malleable iron

threaded joint confirming to ASTM / ASME B16.3 & piping of 65mm and

above shall be of mechanical grooved type confirming to ASTM F1476 &

ASTM F-1548

Under Al-Madar Co.

A 2" drain valve of the globe type shall be provided at the base of every

riser as referred in NFPA13 & 14. Piping shall be sloped not less than 2%

towards the drain valves.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire fighting water pipes shall not be used in any way to supply water

for other purposes. Under Al-Madar Co.

All valves shall be supervised electrically in the Fire Alarm Panel. Under Al-Madar Co.

Sprinkler System Description

Installation of sprinkler systems shall comply with NFPA 13, standard for

the installation of sprinkler system, or as directed by the civil defence

authorities.

Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.7

3.2.8

Page 4 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

The installation shall be a Wet Sprinkler System and the flow of water to

the sprinkler pipe work shall be controlled by installation control valvesUnder Al-Madar Co.

The system shall be charged with water under pressure up to the sprinkler

heads so that when one or more of the sprinkler heads operates the wet

alarm valve is actuated allowing water to flow from the open sprinkler

heads.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The water from the storage tank shall be used as the suction supply for the

electrically driven pumps. Pumps shall be automatic in operation and shall

be designed to comply with the performance characteristic of automatic

pumps as specified in the relevant section of the NFPA Rules.

Under Al-Madar Co.

A jockey pump shall be installed to maintain pressure in the system pipe

work. Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire water storage tanks shall be located as shown in drawings. The

tanks shall be of concrete construction as detailed on the structural

drawings. High grade corrosion resistant hot deep galvanized steel puddle

flanged sleeves shall be used and the velocity in the suction pipe shall not

exceed 4.57m/s.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Water tightness is to be assured by caulking the space between the two

pipes. Provide caulking rings on the inner pipe. Under Al-Madar Co.

The water tanks shall be lined with a laminated non toxic plastic liner or

equivalents, factory made, with all necessary pipe openings ready formed.

The liner material shall be approved by water authorities for the storage of

potable water.

Under Al-Madar Co.

electrically, flow switch (connected to the fire alarm system) test and drain

valve, pressure gauge, etc to comply with NFPA 13. The outlet of the drain

valve shall be connected to the nearest floor drain.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Each sprinkler riser shall be connected with an alarm check valve &

isolation valve. The zoning of the sprinkler system shall comply with the


Under Al-Madar Co.

Alarm check valve shall be provided with pressure switches to monitor the

pressure drop in the downstream. An alarm motor gong shall be connected

to the alarm check valve which shall generate mechanical alarm upon flow

across the alarm check valve. The location of the gong shall be near to the

location of breeching inlet.

Complied - with model (E2), RELIABLE Brand, UL Listed and

FM Approved.

Complied, with Supervisory Switch model (OSY2), SYSTEM

SENSOR Brand, UL Listed FM Approved.


Brand, UL Listed FM Approved.

Sprinklers shall be provided at the escalators truss with dedicated isolation

valve (with supervisory switch) & flow switch to monitor in the Fire alarm

panel. A drain valve shall be provided at the lower most level of the fire

pipe network.

Page 5 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Where the void height exceeds 800mm above the false ceiling shall be

considered as a separate zone and shall be provided with sprinkler system. Under Al-Madar Co.

All the isolation valves shall be provided with a supervisory switch which

shall be electrically supervised in the Main fire alarm panel. There shall be

an individual address for each isolation valve.

Complied

Provide fire alarm panel to indicate all sprinkler zone control valve -

monitoring , solenoid valves, FM 200 gaseous fire suppression system and

flow switches. The alarm panel shall be prepared to be connected to the

fire alarm panel of the station or the concerned building (if any).

Under Al-Madar Co.

Fire Protection Specialties

* Installation Control Valves

Both the wet and dry type CVs shall have the following components. Select

the trim as appropriate.

* System Isolation Valve

Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), Outside Screw and Yoke (O.S&Y)

construction with solid wedge and flanged ends.

* Alarm Check Valve

Cast Iron body, Flap type construction with flanged/grooved ends,

metered bypass with ball valve for pressure maintenance flow, test and

alarm flow arts, bolted access cover, pressure gauges, pressure switch at

inlet and outlet etc.UL listed & FM approved.

* Test And Drain Valve

All bronze, angle valve with screwed ends complete with metering orifice,

discharge turn dish etc.

* Alarm Test Valve

All bronze, multi port plug valve with screwed ends, operating lever,

engraved position indicator attached to body.

* Strainer

All bronze, Y type strainer with screwed ends, screwed cover and 30 mesh

stainless steel screen for alarm supply line.

* Water Motor Alarm

All bronze construction of through the wall type with threaded inlet and

outlet connections, wall sleeve, drive shaft and bell.

* Pressure Switch

Normally closed, pressure switch with contacts rated for 5amps. The unit

shall be fully enclosed with tapped conduit entry.

* Flow Switches

3.2.9

Complied - with Y Type Strainer 3/4" 24 mesh.

Complied

Complied





Complied




Complied, with model (EPS10-2), SYSTEM SENSOR Brand,

Contacts Rated at 10.0 Amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5 Amp @

6/12/24 VDC, UL Listed FM Approved.

Complied

Page 6 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Provide vane type flow switches with volt free, normally open contacts

rated for 5amps and enclosure with tapped conduit entry. The flow switch

shall be adjustable, to give contact at flow equal to that of one sprinkler.

The unit shall be complete with pipe size saddle, clamp, sealing gasket etc.

Sprinklers


Concealed fast response type with chrome plated cover for front of house

areas as indicated on drawings.






FM Approved.




FM Approved.




Listed.

All sprinkler indicated on the drawings as concealed type shall be of a

decorative style flushComplied

with the ceiling with ceiling plate cover. The visible parts shall be of satin

finish chrome.

Complied, with Chrome Finishe for Cover of Pendent Fusible

Element Quick Response Concealed Sprinkler.

The deflector and retaining parts shall be concealed in the sprinkler body. Complied




57°C for Cover Plate, Chrome Finishe for Cover, UL Listed

and FM Approved.




FM Approved.




Listed.

Return bends arrangement to be followed for any Pendent sprinkler

installation Sprinkler Material:

3.2.10





All sprinklers indicated on drawings as pendent, upright and side wall,

concealed shall be of the fusible solder fast threaded inlet and standard

½"response type constructed of high quality bronze with ½" male

Page 7 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Body: Brass

Body cap: Brass

Deflector: Copper



Sprinkler selection, type, temperature shall comply with NFPA 13.

Sprinklers shall be pressure rated to suit the selected fire pump’s shut off

head

Complied.

Sprinkler guards shall be provided to sprinklers located with in escalators

and locations where there are possibilities of mechanical damage to the

sprinkler

Complied - with models (C & D), RELIABLE Brand.

Complied - with Sprinkler models (G4A-R5415) & (G XLO-

R2921) are UL Listed & FM Approved.

Complied - with Sprinkler model (JL112 ECLH/ECOH-R7326)

is UL/ULC Listed.

Fire Pumps

The fire pump shall be of the base mounted, single stage, centrifugal type,

horizontal split case directly connected to an electric motor through a

heavy duty flexible coupling for main pump & diesel engine for stand by

pump. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common cast iron base

plated provided with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.

The fire pump unit shall be supplied complete with pump, driver, and

accessories as described below. The pumping unit (Pumps, drives,

controllers, couplings, etc) shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories

and FM approved shall meet all requirements of the National Fire

protection Association, 20, 2007 Edition. The pump capacity and pressure

shall be as shown on the Drawings. The pump shall deliver not less than

150% of rated capacity at a pressure not less than 65% of rated pressure.

The shut-off pressure shall not exceed 120% of rated pressure.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump casing shall be of cast iron having a minimum tensile strength of

35,000psi and shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psig and

hydrostatically tested at the factory to not less than 250 psig. Bearing

housing supports and suction and discharge flanges shall be integrally cast

with the lower half of the casing. Removal of the upper half of

Under Al-Madar Co.

The impeller shall be of the enclosed type and shall be of vacuum cast

bronze. It shall be dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft sleeves. The

shaft sleeves shall extend the entire length of the seal boxes to protect the

shaft and shall be key locked and threaded so that they tighten with the

rotation of the shaft

Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.11






FM Approved.

Sprinklers shall be UL listed, FM approved & approved by Saudi Civil

defence

Page 8 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Teflon gaskets shall be provided between the impeller hub and the shaft

sleeves to protect the pump shaft. The pump shall be equipped with

renewable casing wear rings which shall be locked by dwelling to prevent

rotation

Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump rotating element shall be supported by two heavy duty grease

lubricated ball bearings mounted in machined moisture and dust proof

cast iron housing and bolted to the pump casing with register fits to ensure

permanent alignment.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Grease seals and water stingers shall be provided to protect the bearings

from contamination. Bearing housings shall be so designed as to flush

lubricant through the bearing. Easily accessible grease fittings shall be

provided for positive bearing lubrication. The pump shaft shall be of high

strength steel accurately machined to give a true running rotating element.

The shaft shall be sealed by split packing glands designed for easy removal

for inspection and maintenance. The packing shall consist of

INTERWOVEN, GRAPHITED asbestos, diagonally cut packing rings with

lantern ring connected to the pressure side of the pump by a cored

passage in the parting flange of the pump.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The electric motor shall be of the drip-proof, squirrel cage, induction type

with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed shall

not exceed 2900rpm. The pump shall be provided from the factory with

lifting lugs, coupling guard and tapped holes in the suction and discharge

flanges for pressure gauge connections

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire pump unit shall be supplied complete from the factory with the

following accessories: Under Al-Madar Co.

* Suction and discharge pressure gauges, not less than 3½" dial,

reading in P.S.I. and having arranged equal to twice the rated design

working pressure of the pump complete with gauge valves.

Under Al-Madar Co.

* Main relief valve, size 3" minimum, factory set to open at a

pressure slightly greater than the rated design working pressure of the

pump with capacity to pass all the water discharged by the pump without

developing excessive pressure on the system.

Under Al-Madar Co.

* Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of the pump

when operating at shutoff, factory set to open just higher than the rated

design working pressure of the pump and lower than shut-off discharge

pressure

Under Al-Madar Co.

* Automatic air release valve on the casing vent. Under Al-Madar Co.

* Suction and discharge matching flanges Under Al-Madar Co.

Each fire pump unit shall be supplied from the factory with controller, for

floor mounting, of water tight construction and marked Fire Pump

Controller.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Page 9 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic, across-the-

line type and shall contain the following: Externally operable disconnect

switch, circuit breaker with an inter rupting capacity to suit the motor

magnetic starter, pressure switch, pilot lamp to indicate circuit breaker

closed and power available, ammeter test link, voltmeter test studs, and a

two position selector switch marked automatic and non automatic.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The controller shall be completely assembled, wired and tested at the

factory, ready for installation and operation with simple external electrical

connections. The controller shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 20

& NFPA 70

Under Al-Madar Co.

Fire Pump controllers are to be located within the Fire pump room which is

to be sprinkle red, hence the controllers shall be drip proof as well Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump shall be given a complete performance test at the factory with

positive suction pressure and with a 15 foot suction lift. Under Al-Madar Co.

NPSH shall be calculated and considered for designing the pump. Under Al-Madar Co.

All fire pumps shall be designed to be suitable for the prevailing climatic

conditions in Saudi Arabia. Factory visit shall be provided by the contractor

at no extra cost to the client for employer’s representative/s to witness the

factory testing with performance of fire pump sets before shipment to the

project site.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Jockey Fire Pump

The Jockey fire pump shall be vertical multi stages stainless steel

construction. Under Al-Madar Co.

The electrical motor shall be close-coupled to the pump and shall be of the

drip-proof, squirrel cage induction type with permanently Lubricated and

sealed ball bearings. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm

Under Al-Madar Co.

The pump shall be provided from the factory with one suitable starter of

the totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct on line type with low volt and

overload protection in each phase and suitable for automatic operation.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Sprinkler Piping

No pipe serving automatic sprinklers shall be less than 1" even if serving

only sprinkler. All connections of sprinkler pipes shall be made to the top

of cross mains and feed mains to keep dirt and sediment out of sprinklers

and sprinkler pipe. The ends of all the cross of feed mains shall be

provided with a flush and test connection comprised of 1" gate valve and

1" hose adapter to allow fitting a 1" rubber hose for manually discharging

the water to the nearest bathroom of sanitary fixture. No test outlet shall

be made less than 1" in order to give a test flow equivalent to the flow

from one sprinkler.

Under Al-Madar Co.

A Hydraulic Calculation to be submitted by the specialised contractor

complying with NFPA 13 &14. Under Al-Madar Co.

Hangers And Supports 3.2.14

3.2.12

3.2.13

Page 10 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Horizontal pipes shall be supported by hangers of the universal pipe loop

type. The hangers shall have rods that are adjustable in length and washer

type ceiling plates. The hanger shall be attached to the concrete of the

ceiling by means of expansion shields of size to suit the hanger rod size.

The hangers shall have the thickness and width of flat steel and the size of

hanger rod as given in the following table:

Pipe Dimensions Size of Rod Size of Flat Steel

1" -2" 1/16" x 5/8" 3/8"

2 1/2" & 3" 3/32" x 3/4" 1/2"

4" & 5" 1/8" x 3/4" 5/8"

6" 1/8" x 1" 3/4"

All pipe sizes shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 meters. Cross

mains of automatic sprinkler piping shall be supported independently of

the branch line hangers.

One hanger shall be provided on each length between branch lines.

Hangers shall be installed without regard to the locations of pipe sleeves

through walls. The pipe shall be centred in the sleeve and not supported

by it. Vertical pipes shall be supported at every floor by means of clamps

bolted around the pipe with legs on both sides that rest on the concrete

floor.

Standpipe

Standpipes shall be UL listed oblique pattern globe type with non-rising

bronze spindle, fitted with a leather strap and padlock with two keys. The

hand wheel shall be marked to show direction of rotation and the valve

shall be complete with blank plug and chain. Inlet size shall be 65mm

flanged and the outlet 65mm female to suit instantaneous coupling. The

Standpipe shall include an adjustable pressure-reducing device to ensure

an outlet pressure of 6.9 bar (100 psi), as per NFPA requirements (as

acceptable to the Saudi Civil Defence).

Under Al-Madar Co.

Breeching Inlets;

Breeching Inlets shall be UL listed and of vertical or horizontal pattern

having a 150mm flanged outlet and four 65mm instantaneous male inlets

complete with blank caps and chains. Breeching inlets shall be equipped

with a 25mm drain valve to drain the riser. The entire breeching inlet shall

be enclosed in a suitable flush mounted box with a labelled wired glass

door.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Breeching Inlet location for stations shall be placed diagonally at 2

locations along the perimeter of the premises and the location shall be not

more than 30.5mtrs from the fire brigade hard standing location

Under Al-Madar Co.

Portable Fire Extinguishers

Under Al-Madar Co.

3.2.15

3.2.16

3.2.17

Page 11 of 12

شركة صلة




, 2010





3.2.1

Sela Company


3

Item No.


3.2

Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided as required by NFPA 10, 2007

Edition. The stored pressure extinguishers shall be 4.5 kg, ABC dry powder

or 5 kg carbon dioxide type or 2 kg ABC dry powder. The extinguisher shall

include a gauge for indication of pressure.

Under Al-Madar Co.

Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed at a suitable height and in the

hose cabinets. Where fire extinguishers are installed on the wall, they shall

be complete with wall mounting brackets.

Under Al-Madar Co.

The fire extinguishers shall be designed and constructed as per the latest

BS 5423, shall be UL/FM approved. Under Al-Madar Co.

All the equipments used in fire fighting system shall be UL/FM approved &

shall also be one approved by local authorities. Complied, with UL Listed or/and FM Approved.

Pipes, fittings and all the valves, sprinklers, equipments used in Fire

fighting system shall be pressure rated to suit to the operation of shut of

pressure of the pumps

Under Al-Madar Co.

Page 12 of 12



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2

Sprinkler System Components



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.1.1

(Model JL112& J112 –Upright)

Extended Coverage Ordinary sprinkler (ECOH)

Extended Coverage Light Hazard sprinkler (ECLH)

ModelJL112&J112-UprightECLH-ExtendedCoverageLightHazardECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazardECOH-ExtendedCoverageOrdinaryHazard-QuickResponse

Model JL112 & J112 ECLH/ECOH Upright

(SIN R7326 – Link and RA7326 – Bulb)

• Quick Response for Light Hazard(16' x 16', 18' x 18' and 20' x 20' spacing)

• Quick Response for Ordinary Hazard(12' x 12' and 14' x 14' spacing)

• Standard Response for Ordinary Hazard(16' x 16', 18' x 18' and 20' x 20' spacing)

Features1. Extended Coverage Ordinary Hazard protection to

400 ft2 (37.2m2) per sprinkler.2. Nominal K = 11.2 (160).3. Available in brass, chrome and polyester coated

finishes.4. For applications as per NFPA 13.

Approvals Organizations1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)2. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (cULus)3. NYC MEA 258-93-E

UL Listing CategorySprinklers, Automatic and Open Extended CoverageSprinklers-Ordinary Hazard Occupancy UL GuideNumber – VNIV.

The Reliable Model JL112 and J112 sprinkler areExtended Coverage Sprinklers for use in OrdinaryHazard 1 and 2 occupancies with a coverage area of upto 400 square feet per sprinkler.

For all light hazard applications it is a Quick Responsesprinkler. For ordinary hazard applications, it is aStandard Response sprinkler when the spacing is 16' x16' and larger. When the spacing is 12' x 12' or 14' x 14',the sprinkler is Quick Response for ordinary hazardapplications.

The use of ECLH/ECOH sprinklers can provide lowerinstallation costs by requiring fewer sprinklers, lesspiping and reduced labor.

ECLH/ECOH sprinklers are to be installed accordingto the design criteria shown in this bulletin, NFPA 13,and all other local codes and ordinances. Flows andpressures as shown on pages 2 and 3 of this bulletin,must be used for the appropriate spacing and for thedesignated hazard classifications.

This ECLH/ECOH sprinkler is available in variousfinishes, which includes a white polyester corrosionresistant finish.

Design CriteriaReliable Model JL112 & J112 ECLH/ECOH sprinklers

shall only be used in systems designed and installed inaccordance with NFPA 13 and all other local codes andordinances. The following design criteria also apply:• Minimum sprinkler spacing is 8 ft.• Sprinklers have a minimum flow requirement for each

spacing as shown in the Flow Requirements Table onthe reverse side.

• Sprinklers are only to be used in systemshydraulically designed per NFPA 13.

• Deflector to commodity clearance shall be aminimum of 18 in (457mm).

• ECOH sprinklers shall be installed in unobstructedconstructions as defined in NFPA 13. For open webtruss construction web thickness is not to exceed 1inch.

• ECOH sprinklers which are installed above thebottom of a horizontal obstruction, shall have theirdeflectors located as shown in the Obstruction Tableon page 3.

• Sprinklers can be installed under a sloping ceiling notexceeding 2 inches of rise in 12 inches.

• Maximum working pressure is 175 psi at the sprinkler.

Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc., 103 Fairview Park Drive, Elmsford NY 10523

SIN RA 7326 is Corrosion Resistant withWhite Polyester Coating.

Bulletin 173 Rev.AB

ulle

tin173

Rev.A

Model JL112 Upright(R 7326) - Link

Model J112 Upright(RA 7326) - Bulb

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

Sprinkler Model TypeTemperature Rating Max. Ceiling Temp. Maximum

SprinklerSpacing

MaximumCoverage

AreaTHD Size Approvals

�F �C �F �C

JL112 ECLH/ECOH- R7326 Upright 165 74 100 3820' 400 ft2

¾"

NPT1,2

JL112 /ECOH- R7326 Upright 212 100 150 66

J112 ECLH/ECOH- RA7326 Upright 155

200

68

93

100

150

38

6620' 400 ft2

J112 ECLH/ECOH- RA7326 Upright

Sprinkler Model Specifications






16' x 16' 256 ft2 39 12.1 51 20.7

11.2 160.018' x 18' 324 ft2 49 19.1 65 33.7

20' x 20' 400 ft2 60 28.7 80 51.0

Flow Requirements - Ordinary Hazard - Standard Response



2.





14' x 14' 196 ft2

30 7.2 39 12.1 11.2 160.012' x 12' 144 ft2




Spacing Coverage Area Flow(gpm)

Pressure(psi)

"K" Factor

US Metric

16' x 16' 256 ft2 30 7.2

11.2 160.018' x 18' 324 ft2 33 8.7

20' x 20' 400 ft2 40 12.8

Flow Requirements - Light Hazard - Quick Response


Conversion Table

1 in = 25.4 mm

1 ft = 0.3048 m

1 ft2 = 0.093 m2

1 gpm = 3.785 lpm

1 gpm/ft2 = 40.74 mm/mim

1 psi = 0.6895 bar

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

Spacing CoverageArea

NFPA13 - 1991 Requirements NFPA13 - 1989 Requirements "K" Factor

Ordinary Hazard 1 Ordinary Hazard 2 Ordinary Hazard 1 Ordinary Hazard 2 Ordinary Hazard 3

US Metric0.15 gpm/ft2

Density0.20 gpm/ft2

Density0.16 gpm/ft2

Density0.19 gpm/ft2

Density0.21 gpm/ft2

Density

*Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure *Flow *Pressure

14' x 14'and less

196 ft2 30.2 7.0 39.2 11.9 31.4 7.6 37.3 10.7 41.2 13.0

11.4 164.416' x 16' 256 ft2 38.4 11.4 51.2 20.2 41.0 12.9 48.7 18.2 53.8 22.3

18' x 18' 324 ft2 48.6 18.2 64.8 32.3 51.9 20.7 61.6 29.2 68.0 35.7

20' x 20' 400 ft2 60.0 27.7 80.0 49.3 64.0 31.5 76.0 44.5 84.0 54.3

Minimum Flow Requirements For Earlier Editions of NFPA 13 - FOR REFERENCE ONLY

*Flow is in gpm and pressure is in psi(1)


3.

Installation Requirements for Under Concrete Tees - cULus

• The stems of the concrete tee construction must be spaced at less than 7.5 feet (2.3m) on center but more than 3feet (0,9m) on center. The depth of the concrete tees must not exceed 30 inches (762mm). The maximumpermitted concrete tee length is 32 feet (9,8m); however, where the concrete tee length exceeds 32 feet (9;8m),non-combustible baffles, equal in height to the depth of the tees, can be installed so that the longitudinal spacebetween the tees does not exceed 32 feet (9,8m) in length.

• The sprinkler deflectors are to be located in a horizontal plane at or above 1 inch (25,4mm) below the bottom of theconcrete tee stems.

• When the sprinkler deflectors are located higher than a horizontal plane 1 inch (25,4mm) beneath the bottom ofthe concrete tee stems, the obstruction to sprinkler discharge criteria requirements of NFPA13 for extendedcoverage upright sprinkler applies.

Sprinkler Finishes

Bronze

Chrome

White Polyester Coated

Finishes

Ordering Information1. Sprinkler Model2. Temperature Rating3. Finish

Corrosion Resistant

J112 ECLH/ECOH

Bulb

�F �C

155

200

68

93

J1 Wrench

Model J1Sprinkler Wrench

Use Model J1 Wrench for JL112 & J112ECLH/ECOH Upright Sprinkler

Removal and Installation

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest pertinent Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory MutualResearch Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances, whenever applicable.

Products manufactured and distributed by RELIABLE have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highly qualified andreputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.


Manufactured by

Revision lines indicate updated or new data.EG. Printed in U.S.A. 09/08 P/N 9999970311

Recycled Paper

Fig. 1

Distance from Sprinklerto Side of Obstruction

Maximum Allowable DistanceDeflector Above Bottom of

Obstruction

Less than 1'....................................................... 0"

1' to less than 1' - 6".......................................... 0"

1' - 6" to less than 2'.......................................... 1"

2' to less than 2' - 6".......................................... 1"

2' - 6" to less than 3'.......................................... 1"

3' to less than 3' - 6" ......................................... 3"

4' to less than 4' - 6".......................................... 5"

4' - 6" to less than 5' ..........................................7"

5' to less than 5' - 6" ......................................... 7"

5' - 6" to less than 6' ......................................... 7"

6' to less than 6' - 6" ......................................... 9"

6' - 6" to less than 7' ........................................ 11"

7' and greater .................................................. 14"

Location of Deflector to Horizontal Obstruction


Solder Link Bulb

Classification �F �C Classification �F �C Bulb Color

Ordinary

*Intermediate

165

212

74

100

Ordinary

Intermediate

155

200

68

93

Red

Green

*Ordinary Hazard only

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.1.2

Quick Response Concealed Automatic Sprinkler (Model: G4A)


Bulletin 129 R

ev. HBulletin 129 Rev. H

Model G XLOExtra Large Orifi ceSprinkler

Extra Large Orifi ce Sprinkler(SIN R2921)FeaturesThe Reliable Model G XLO sprinkler offers the opportunity for:

Pipe size reductionFewer sprinklersElimination of booster pumpsIncreasing densities with existing systems1/2” NPT (R½) available for retrofit installations only.Also includes additional Specific Application listing. (See detailed “UL Specification Application listing” described on the back page.)

Listings & Approvals:Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)Listed by Underwriters Laboratories’ of Canada (ULC)Approved by Factory Mutual (FM)NYC MEA 258-93-E (NFPA 13*).

UL Guide NumberVNIV

UL Listing CategorySprinklers, Automatic & Open Extra Large Orifice Upright Sprinkler and Specific Application Sprinkler.Technical Data

Sprinkler Type

Nominal K FactorSprinkler Height

ApprovalsSprinkler

Identifi cation Number (SIN)

US Metric

Upright 0.64 Orifice with

¾” NPT (R¾)11.2 160

3.14” (80mm)

1,2,3,4 R2921

Upright Retrofit 0.64 Orifice with

½” NPT (R½)

11.2 1603.25”

(83mm)1,2,3,4 R2921

Note: This product has been tested and listed for storage applications to qualify its use in lieu of 5.6K or 8.0K Factor sprinklers for the protection of high-piled storage.

Product DescriptionThe Reliable Model G XLO sprinkler is a center strut solder in

compression extra large orifice upright sprinkler that has been designed to control high challenge fires in both palletized and rack storage occupancies utilizing relatively low water pres-sures. This sprinkler is available with either the standard 3/4” NPT (R ¾) threads for new installations or with 1/2” NPT (R½) threads for retrofit applications.

1.2.3.4.5.

6.

1.2.3.4.

It has been proven in full–scale fire testing, has complied with the applicable mechanical and hydraulic sections of the lat-est sprinkler standards and has Factory Mutual Approval and Underwriters Laboratories and Underwriters Laboratories’ of Canada Listings.

This product is intended for use as a standard spray sprinkler in hydraulically designed systems with a minimum pressure of 7 psi (0.5 bar) in accordance with the area/density curves of NFPA 13* standards and for all area/density methods of design as ref-erenced by Factory Mutual (FM) Prevention Data Sheets.

Design CriteriaThe following criteria apply when designing an automatic

sprinkler system utilizing the Model G XLO sprinkler for NFPA 13* applications.

Sprinkler spacing shall be a minimum of 6 ft. (1.8m)Sprinklers with ² NPT (R½) are to be used for retrofit applica-tions only.Sprinkler discharge pressure for NFPA 13* standard and all Factory Mutual (FM) applications shall be a minimum of 7 psi (0,5 bar).Factory Mutual (FM) Loss Prevention Data Sheets contain requirements which differ from NFPA. The Model G XLO is Approved by Factory Mutual for all area/density meth-ods of design as referenced by FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets.

The Model G XLO Extra Large Orifice sprinkler is intended for standard flow/pressure requirements and standard placement as specified for NFPA storage requirements. The Model G XLO sprinkler is not a “Large Drop” or “ESFR” sprinkler.

Temperature Ratings

Classifi cationSprinkler

RatingMaximum Ambient

TemperatureFrame Color°F °C °F °C

OrdinaryIntermediate

High

165212286

74100141

100150225

3866107

UncoloredWhiteBlue


••

•

•

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight


Manufactured byRecycled

Paper


EG. Printed in U.S.A 11/09 P/N 9999970022

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory Mutual Research Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable.

Productsmanufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highly qualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.

Finishes

Standard Finishes

Bronze

Chrome

Special Application Finishes

Lead Plated (1)

Wax (1) (2)

Wax/Lead (1) (2)

- 165°F (74°C), 212°F (100°C) and 286°F (141°C) Temp. Ratings



(1) UL Listed only.(2) 212°F (100°C) Brown wax may be used on 286°F (141°C) Sprinklers when maximum ambient temperatures do not exceed 150°F (66°C)

The UL Specifi c Application Listing is:The Model G XLO upright sprinkler is intended for use in accor-

dance with NFPA 13* standards when installed in accordance with the standard sprinkler positioning and area/density flow cal-culation requirements as specified in each respective standard. Model G XLO upright sprinklers may also be installed to protect single, double and multiple – row and portable rack storage of Class I–IV, Groups A and B plastics, cartoned, expanded or un-expanded, as well as exposed unexpanded with a maximum storage height of 20 ft. (6.5m), maximum ceiling height of 25 ft. (8.2m) or 27** ft (8.8m) maximum ceiling height, 36” (914mm) minimum deflector to top of storage clearance, design density of 0.60 gpm/ft2. (24.7 L/min/m2), and a design area of 2000 ft2. (186m2) for wet systems and 2600 ft2. (242m2) for dry systems.

**Note: Maximum 27ft ceilling height is allowed by NFPA 13*, without in-rack sprinklers in a protected area, pro-vided the ceiling sprinklers’ discharge is increased to 0.6 gpm/ft2 in a 2000 ft2 design area.

InstallationReliable’s Model G XLO sprinkler must be installed accord-

ing to NFPA Standards or the appropriate Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheets for all area/density methods of design as well as the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

The Model GXLO sprinkler meets the NFPA 13* code stan-dards for approval by Factory Mutual and listings by Underwrit-ers Laboratories & Underwriters Laboratories of Canada.


MaintenanceModel G XLO Sprinklers should be inspected quarterly and

the sprinkler system maintained in accordance with NFPA 25. Do not clean sprinklers with soap and water, ammonia or any other cleaning fluids. Remove dust by using a soft brush or gentle vacuuming. Remove any sprinkler which has been painted (other than factory applied) or damaged in any way. A stock of spare sprinklers should be maintained to allow quick replacement of damaged or operated sprinklers. Prior to instal-lation, sprinklers should be maintained in the original cartons and packaging until used to minimize the potential for damage to sprinklers that would cause improper operation or non-opera-tion.

Ordering InformationSpecify:

Sprinkler ModelTemperature RatingFinishes

1.2.3.

Model H Sprinkler Use only the Model H sprinkler wrench for sprinkler removal and installation. Any other type of wrench may damage the sprinkler.



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.1.3

Extra Large Orifice Sprinkler (Model: G XLO)

Model G4AQuick ResponseConcealedAutomatic Sprinkler

Bulletin 154 Rev.F

Approvals & Listings1. Underwriters Labortories, Inc. (UL)-

Quick Response2. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)-

Quick Response3. Factory Mutual Research Corp. (FM)-

Standard Response• Light Hazard Occupanicies-

No Limitations• Ordinary Hazard Occupancies

Groups 1 & 2 Wet Systems Only4. NYC MEA 258-93-E - Quick Response

U.S. Patent number 4,880,063.

ApplicationThe Reliable Model G4A

Concealer®

is the most versatilequick response concealed sprin-kler available. It provides the bestform of fire protection whileoffering an attractive appearanceand ½� (13mm) of cover adjust-ment for ease of installation. Thesmall diameter cover plate as-sembly is easily attached andblends into theceiling,concealingthe most dependable fire protec-tion available, an automaticsprinkler system.

The Model G4A Concealer® is designed for use whereaesthetic appearance is important. Offices, hospitals, motelsandrestaurantsarebuta fewof theapplicationswhere itcanbeused. It isavailable indifferentorificesizesallowingthedesignerto optimize system performance, thereby achieving a veryefficient installation.

The Model G4A Concealer® is a UL Listed Quick ResponseConcealed sprinkler intended for use in accordance with NFPA13. FM Approves this sprinkler as a standard responseconcealed sprinkler intended for use in accordance with FMLoss Prevention Data Sheet 2-8N.

Product DescriptionTheReliableModelG4AConcealer

®usesaprovenquick re-

sponsefusibleelement inastandardstylesprinkler framewithadrop-down deflector. This assembly is recessed into the ceilingand concealed by a flat cover plate assembly. The threadedengagement provides ½� (13mm) of cover adjustment. The flatcover plate is attached to the skirt using either 135°F (57�C) or165�F (74�C) ordinary temperature classification solder.

Whentheceilingtemperaturerises, thesolderholdingtheflatcover plate melts, the flat cover plate released thus exposingthe sprinkler inside to the rising ambient temperature.

The subsequent fusing of the element opens the waterwayand causes the deflector to distribute the water. Any secureengagement between the cover plate and cup will assure thatthe drop-down deflector is properly located below the ceiling.

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. , 103 Fairview Park Drive, Elmsford, New York 10523

The Concealer�

UL Quick ResponseFM Standard ResponseConcealed Sprinkler With a½� (13mm) or 1½� (38mm) Adjustment

Features1. Cover plate attachment with 1

2� (13mm)assembly adjustment.

2. Smooth aesthetic ceiling profile.3. Factory installed protective cap.4. Available in brass, chrome or black

plated and white painted finishes.5. Ordinary temperature rating.6. Multiple orifices for design flexibility.

Bulle

tin154

Re

v.F

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

InstallationDo not install the G4A Concealer

®in ceilings which have

positive pressure in the space above.• Cut a 25

8 inch (67mm) diameter hole is cut in the ceiling, thesprinkler is easily installed with the Model G4 Wrench. Thewrench has drive tangs which insert into the cup slots.When installing a sprinkler the wrench is first positioned intothe sprinkler/cup assembly until the wrench tangs engagethe drive slots in the top of the cup (there are two sets ofdrive slots in the cup). The sprinkler is then tightened intothepipefitting. Wheninsertingorremovingthewrenchfromthesprinkler/cupassembly,careshouldbetakentopreventdamage to the sprinkler. DO NOT WRENCH ON ANYOTHER PART OF THE SPRINKLER/CUP ASSEMBLY.Install the cover plate by hand turning the cover in theclockwise direction until it is tight against the ceiling.

A protective cap is provided to protect the drop-down sprinklerdeflector from damage which could occur during constructionbefore the cover plate is installed. The cap is factory installedinside the sprinkler cup. Remove cap to install sprinkler, thenre-install cap until the cover plate is installed.

MaintenanceThe Model G4A Concealer

�

should be inspected quarterlyand the sprinkler system maintained in accordance with NFPA25. Do notclean sprinklers with soapandwater, ammonia or anyother cleaning fluids. Remove any sprinkler that has beenpainted (other than factory applied) or damaged in any way. Astock of spare sprinklers should be maintained to allow quickreplacement of damaged or operated sprinklers. Prior toinstallation, sprinklers should be maintained in the originalcartons and packaging to minimize the potential for damage tosprinklers thatwouldcauseimproperoperationornon-operation.

Ordering Information1. Sprinkler Model2. Nominal Orifice3. Flat Cover Plate

Assembly Finish4. Inlet Type

Temperature Rating

Classification Sprinkler CoverPlate

Max. AmbientTemp.

Ordinary 165�F/74�C 135�F/57�C 100�F/38�C

Intermediate 212�F/100�C 165�F/74�C 150�F/66�C

Technical Data

Sprinkler Inlet TotalAdjustment

NominalOrifice

Nominal K FactorThread Approvals Sprinkler

Identifcation (SIN)US MetricNon Adjustable ½� (13mm) ½� (15mm) 5.6 80 ½� NPT (R½) 1,2,3,4 R5415

Non Adjustable ½� (13mm) 716� (11mm) 4.2 60 ½ �NPT (R½) 1,2,4 R5413

Non Adjustable ½� (13mm) 38� (10mm) 2.8 40 ½ �NPT (R½) 1,2,3,4 R5411

Adjustable 1½� (38mm) ½� (15mm) 5.6 80 1� NPT Male or Female 1,2,4 R5418

Adjustable 1½� (38mm) 716� (11mm) 4.2 60 1� NPT Male or Female 1,2,4 R5413

Adjustable 1½� (38mm) 38� (10mm) 2.8 40 1� NPT Male or Female 1,2,4 R5412

Model G4 SprinklerWrench

UL Listing CategorySprinklers, Automatic andOpenQuick Response Sprinkler

UL Guide NumberVNIV

Standard FinishesBronzeChromeWhite Paint

Special ApplicationFinishesBright BrassBlack PlatingBlack PaintOff WhiteSatin Chrome

Cover Plate Finishes(1)

(1)Other finishes and colors areavailable on special order.Consult factory for details.

Fig.1 - ½� NPT Non-Adjustable Inlet Fig. 2 - 1� NPT Male-Adjustable Inlet Fig. 3 - 1� NPT Female-Adjustable Inlet

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory MutualResearch Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable.Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the mosthighly qualifiedand reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.


(800) 431-1588 Sales Offices(800) 848-6051 Sales Fax(914) 829-2042 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address

RecycledPaper


EG. Printed in USA 4/07 P/N 9999970150

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.2

Sprinkler Guard

Model C & Model D

Sprinkler Guards• Model C• Model D

Model C Sprinkler Guards

Model C Series sprinkler guards are designed to beassembled onto installed sprinklers. They areconstructed of heavy gauge wire welded to steelmounting plates and finished with zinc plating. Otherfinishes are available. Guards protect automaticsprinklers in locations where they are subject tophysical damage. Refer to guard selection table forlisting and approval information regarding specificsprinkler and guard combinations.

All Model C guards are certified by FM Approvals.Models C-2 and C-3 also have cULus Listings.

• Model C-1


• Model C-2

Model C-2 guards are used with pendent drysprinklers.

• Model C-3

Model C-3 guards have a water shield attached.When assembled to an upright sprinkler, thecombination is for upright intermediate sprinklerapplications.

• Model C-5

Model C-5 guards are supplied with a water shieldand O-Ring which are assembled to the sprinklerbefore the sprinkler is installed. The guard is theninstalled to the sprinkler after it is installed in thefitting.

Model D Sprinkler Guards

The Model D Series sprinkler guards aresupplied as kits to be assembled to the sprinkler atthe job site before sprinkler installation. The kitconsists of the guard, ½� and ¾� locknuts and awater shield when being used as an intermediatelevel sprinkler. The pendent intermediate has anO-Ring supplied.

Each guard type is fabricated of heavy gaugewire welded to steel mounting plates and complieswith the latest UL standards. Guards protectautomatic sprinklers in locations where physicaldamage can occur.

Model D Series guards are also available factoryassembled on the sprinkler ready for immediatesprinkler/guard installation. Consult factory foravailability.

• Model D-1

Model D-1 guards can be assembled to pendent,upright and horizontal sidewall sprinklers.


Model D-3 and D-6 guards have a water shieldattached and are assembled to upright sprinklers.The sprinkler guard assembly is for uprightintermediate level sprinkler applications.


Model D-4 and D-5 guards are D-1 guards suppliedwith an original water shield which is threaded on (½�)or passed over (¾�� the sprinkler inlet thread. Thecombination forms a pendent intermediate levelsprinkler.

Guards and water shields are finished with zincplating. Other finishes are available upon request.

All Model D Guards are cULus Listed. Refer toguard selection table for listing and approvalinformation regarding specific sprinkler and guardcombinations.

Model D1 Sprinkler Guard

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. • 525 North MacQuesten Parkway • Mount Vernon • New York • 10552

Bulletin 208 Rev.F

Listings & Approvals

1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. andUL certified for Canada (cULus)

2. Certified by FM Approvals

3. NYC MEA 258-93-E

4. Scientific Services Laboratories (SSL, Australia)*

* For Models C1, C2, C3 guards.

Patents:

USA Patent Number 5,893,418Applies to Model D Series Guards

Bulle

tin208

Rev.F

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

2.

Model C-1 Guards

Model C-2 Guards

Model C-3 Guards

Model C-5 Guards

Model D-1 Guards

Model D-5 Guards

Model D-3 Guards

Model D-4 Guards

3.

Model D-6 Guards

Guards are approved to be used with sprinklers listed below.

(1) MEA approval on D-1, D-3, D-4, D-5, C-2, and C-3

(2) SSL approval on C-1, C-2, and C-3

(3) Model GFR does not have FM Approval.

(4) Sprinkler guards are listed and approved only for use with specific sprinklers. The use of any other

guards on these sprinklers may impede their operation or distribution and negate all approvals and warranties.

Guard Model (3) Sprinkler ModelApplication Sprinkler Type Orifice Sizes

Approvals with SIN Number

MEA(1) , SSL(2)

cULus FM (3)

D-1 G, GFR, F1, F1FRPendent, Upright,HSW

3/8”, 7/16”, ½”,17/32”

R3611, R3613, R3615,R3612, R3621, R3623,R3625, R3622, R3111,R3113, R3115, R3117,R3121, R3123, R3125,R3127, R3635, R3131,R3133, R3135, R3137,R1711, R1713, R1715,R1712, R1721, R1723,R1725, R1722, R1735,R1011, R1013, R1015,R1016, R1017, R1021,R1023, R1025, R1026,R1027, R1231, R1233,R1235, R1236, R1237

D-3 G, GFR, F1, F1FR Upright Intermediate ½”, 17/32”R3625, R3622, R3125,R3127, R1725, R1722,R1025, R1026, R1027

D-4 G, GFR, F1, F1FRPendent Intermediate(Large Shield)

½”, 17/32 R3115, R3117

D-5 G, F1, F1FRPendent Intermediate

(Small Shield)½”, 17/32

R3615, R3612, R1715,R1712, R1015, R1016,R1017

D-6 G XLO Upright Intermediate 0.64 R2921

C-1 G, F1, F1FR

Pendent, Upright,HSW, VerticalSidewall, Upright &Pendent

3/8”, ½”, 17/32”

R1011, R1015, R1016,R1017, R1021, R1025,R1026, R1027, R1235,R1285, R1712, R1715,R1721, R1725, R1735,R1785, R3612, R3615,R3622, R3625, R3635,R3685

C-2 F3, F3QR Pendent ½”R1616, R5314,R5714, R4216

R5314, R5714

C-3 G, GFR, F1, F1FR Upright Intermediate ½”, 17/32”R3625, R3622, R3125,R3127, R1725, R1722,R1025, R1026, R1027

R3625, R1725,R1025, R1027

C-5 G, F1, F1FR Pendent Intermediate ½”, 17/32”R1015, R1017,R3615, R1715,R1712, R3612

4.

Installation Instructions

• Model C Guards

With both cups unhooked, slightly spread open theguard. Insert steel plate into the installed sprinklerbetween the threads and the wrench flats. The steelplate tabs should face the sprinkler wrench flats and fourcontact points engage the sprinkler neck.

For Model C-2, the steel plate fits into the groove ineach wrench flat and the guard is located by the notch inboth steel plates.

Snap the farther locking clip into place, then close thenear clip. The guard is now securely installed in place. Iflocking clip requires too much force to snap closed oropen, slightly flex the wires on both sides of the clip andeither close or open the clip.

Finish

Standard Finish—Zinc with chromate dip.

Other finishes, quoted on request.


• Guard Type (D-1,D-2 etc.)

• Finish (Standard or other)

• Sprinkler Inlet Thread Size,D-4 & D-5 Guards Only.

• Optional: Consult Factory for assembly onsprinkler.

Specify Sprinkler:� Type.� Temperature Rating.� Finish.

• Wrench: Not supplied by Reliable

Overall Cage Size:

Models C-1, C-2, C-5

278� (73mm) High X 23

4� (70mm) Diameter

Models C-3, D-3, D-6

234� (70mm) High X 41

2� (114mm) Diameter

Models D-1, D-5

258� (67mm) High X 3� (76mm) Diameter

Model C-4

278� High X 41

2� Diameter

• Model D Guards

Before a sprinkler is installed into a fitting, assemblethe guard on the sprinkler using the same techniquedescribed above for the Model C Guards. Theninstall a ½� or ¾� locking nut on to the NPT threadsuntil the nut is tight against the guard. Each guard issupplied with both size of locking nuts. Theassembly of sprinkler and guard is then wrenchedinto place using an adjustable wrench maximumsize 8� and a jaw opening of 11

8� (for D-1, D-3, D-4or D-5) or an adjustable wrench maximum size 10�

and a jaw opening of 1516� (for D-6).

Wrench must be placed over the guard. Do notuse the wrench directly on the sprinkler wrenchboss. The sprinkler wrench boss requires aspecial wrench.

5.

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.(800) 431–1588 Sales Offices(800) 848–6051 Sales Fax(914) 668–3470 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address

Manufactured by


E.G. Printed in U.S.A. 8/04 P/N 9999970152

Recycled Paper


Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highlyqualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.

Reliable...For Complete ProtectionReliable offers a wide selection of sprinkler components. Following are some of the many

precision-made Reliable products that guard life and property from fire around the clock.

• Automatic sprinklers

• Flush automatic sprinklers

• Recessed automatic sprinklers

• Concealed automatic sprinklers

• Adjustable automatic sprinklers

• Dry automatic sprinklers

• Intermediate level sprinklers

• Open sprinklers

• Spray nozzles

• Alarm valves

• Retarding chambers

• Dry pipe valves

• Accelerators for dry pipe valves

• Mechanical sprinkler alarms

• Electrical sprinkler alarm switches

• Water flow detectors

• Deluge valves

• Detector check valves

• Check valves

• Supertrol electrical system

• Sprinkler emergency cabinets

• Sprinkler wrenches

• Sprinkler escutcheons and guards

• Inspectors test connections

• Sight drains

• Ball drips and drum drips

• Control valve seals

• Air maintenance devices

• Air compressors

• Pressure gauges

• Identification signs

• Fire department connection



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.3

Water Flow Detector (WFD) -WFD30-2

Replacement Parts

A3008-00 RetardMechanismA77-01-02 TerminalBlock546-7000 CoverTamperSwitchKitWFDW CoverWrenchWFDN4 Replacementgasketkit

New WFD30-2 models install in 2″ hole sizes

UL models are NEMA 4 rated

Sealed retard mechanism assures that the retard is not contaminated by dust and dirt when the cover is removed

Visual switch activation permits installer to accurately set retard under noisy conditions

Rugged, dual SPDT switches are enclosed in a durable terminal block


100% synchronization activates both alarm panel and local bell simultaneously

System Sensor’s WFD series is compatible with schedule 10 through 40 steel pipe, sizes 2″ through 8″, and can be mounted in a vertical or horizontal position.Robust Construction.The WFD series consists of a rugged, NEMA 4 rated enclo-sure. Designed for both indoor and outdoor use, the WFD series operates across a wide temperature range, from 32°F to 120°F.Reliable Performance.UL listed models are equipped with tamper resistant cover screws to prevent unauthorized entry. Inside, two sets of SPDT (Form C) syn-chronized switches are enclosed in a durable terminal block to assure reliable performance.

False Alarm Immunity.The WFD series incorporates a mechanical retard feature, which minimizes the risk of false alarm due to pressure surges or air trapped in the sprinkler system. In addition, the mechanical retard’s unique sealed design is immune to dust and other contaminants.

Simplified Operation.The WFD series is designed to simplify installation. Two conduit openings permit easy attachment to the local alarm system. The retard mechanism and dual SPDT switches are field-replaceable.

UL ULC/Canadian Models Models

WFD20 WFD20AWFD25 WFD25AWFD30-2 WFD30-2AWFD35 WFD35AWFD40 WFD40A WFD50 WFD50AWFD60 WFD60AWFD80 WFD80A

Product Overview

WFD40

WFD SeriesWaterflow Detector

S p r i n k l e r S y S t e m S m o n i t o r i n g

S739CS169

1W9A2.AH

7770-1209:140

167-93-E

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Line

imran

Line


Vane-type waterflow detectors shall be installed on system piping as designated on the drawing and/or as specified herein. Detectors shall mount on any clear pipe span of the appropriate nominal size, either a vertical upflow or horizontal run, at least 6″ from any fittings which may change water direction, flow rate, or pipe diameter or no closer than 24″ from a valve or drain. Detectors shall have a sensitivity in the range of 4 to 10 gallons per minute and a static pressure rating of 450 psi* for 2″ - 8″ pipes. The detector shall respond to waterflow in the specified direction after a preset time delay which is field adjustable. The delay mechanism shall be a sealed mechanical pneumatic unit with visual indication of actuation. The actuation mechanism shall include a polyethylene vane inserted through a hole in the pipe and connected by a mechanical linkage to the delay mechanism. Outputs shall consist of dual SPDT switches (Form C contacts). Two conduit entrances for standard fittings of commonly used electrical conduit shall be provided on the detectors. A grounding provision is provided. Unless noted, enclosures shall be NEMA 4 listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. All detectors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for indoor or outdoor use.

StaticPressureRating450PSI*

TriggeringThresholdBandwidth(FlowRate)4–10GPM

MaximumSurge18FeetPerSecond(FPS)

CompatiblePipe:Steelwaterpipe,schedule10through40

ContactRatingsTwosetsofSPDT(FormC)10.0A,1/2HP@125/250VAC2.5A@6/12/24VDC

OverallDimensionsInstalled:

©2005SystemSensor.Thecompanyreservestherighttochangeproductspecificationswithoutnotice. A05-0180-010•6/05•1381


ULModelNumbers ULC/CanadianModelNumbers PipeSize HoleSize

WFD20 WFD20A 2″ 11⁄4″

WFD25 WFD25A 21⁄2″ 11⁄4″

WFD30-2 WFD30-2A 3″ 2″

WFD35 WFD35A 31⁄2″ 11⁄4″

WFD40 WFD40A 4″ 2″

WFD50 WFD50A 5″ 2″

WFD60* WFD60A 6″ 2″

WFD80* WFD80A 8″ 2″

*Maximumpressurerating400psiasapprovedbyFactoryMutual.

ConduitEntrancesTwoopeningsfor1⁄2″conduit.Oneopen,oneknock-outtype

OperatingTemperatureRange32ºFto120ºF(0ºCto49ºC)

EnclosureRating*NEMA4–suitableforindoor/outdooruse

CoverTamperSwitchStandardwithULCmodelsOptionalforULmodels,partno.546-7000

ShippingWeightWFD20:4.2lbs. WFD40:5.2lbs.WFD25:4.3lbs. WFD50:6.3lbs.WFD30-2:4.5lbs. WFD60:6.8lbs.WFD35:4.7lbs. WFD80:7.5lbs.

DelayAdjustmentDial:

ServiceUseAutomaticSprinkler:NFPA-13OneorTwoFamilyDwelling:NFPA13DResidentialOccupanciesupto4Stories:NFPA13RNationalFireAlarmCode:NFPA-72

Warranty3Years

U.S.PatentNumbers3,845,2594,782,3335,213,205

PartNumber Description

A3008-00 Retardmechanism

A77-01-02 Terminalblock

546-7000 Tamperproofswitchkit

WFDW Tamperproofwrenchforcover

WFDN4 Gasketkit


3.0″

3.75″

Pipe saddle

U bolt nut

Width: See Table

Plastic vane

Pipe

U bolt

1.6″

ModelWFD20WFD25

WFD30-2WFD35

Width4.6″4.6″5.2″5.7″

ModelWFD40WFD50WFD60WFD80

Width6.8″7.8″9.0″

10.8″

NOTE: Common and B connections willclose when vane is deflected, i.e.,when water is flowing. Dual switchespermit applications to be combinedon a single detector.

CONTACT RATINGS125/250 VAC

24 VDC10 AMPS2.5 AMPS

WFD

B B

COM COM

WFD

B B

COM COM


To nonsilenceable initiating zone of

listed FACP


B

COM

To power sourcecompatible

with belllocalbell

WFDswitch assembly


Break wire as shown forsupervision of connection.DO NOT allow stripped wireleads to extend beyondswitch housing. DO NOTloop wires.

T16-0010-XXX

B

COM

ACOM COM

SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2

A B B A

•CAUTION•ROUTE WIRINGAWAY FROMSHARP EDGES & COPONENTS

SWITCH SCHEMATIC•READY• STATE


System Sensor Headquarters3825OhioAvenueSt.Charles,IL60174Ph:800/SENSOR2Fx:630/377-6495www.systemsensor.com

System Sensor CanadaPh:905.812.0767Fx:905.812.0771

System Sensor EuropePh:44.1403.891920Fx:44.1403.891921

System Sensor in ChinaPh:86.29.8832.0119Fx:86.29.8832.5119

System Sensor in SingaporePh:65.6273.2230Fx:65.6273.2610

System Sensor – Far EastPh:85.22.191.9003Fx:85.22.736.6580

System Sensor – AustraliaPh:613.54.281.142Fx:613.54.281.172

System Sensor – IndiaPh:91.124.237.1770x.2700Fx:91.124.237.3118

System Sensor – RussiaPh:70.95.937.7982Fx:70.95.937.7983



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.4.1

Supervisory Switch (Model: OSY2)

Models Available

EPS10-1 One SPDT SwitchEPS10-2 Two SPDT SwitchesEPSA10-1 ULC/Canadian VersionEPSA10-2 ULC/Canadian Version

Replacement Parts

S07-66-02 Replacement Cover ScrewsWFDW Replacement Cover Wrench 546-8000 Cover Tamper Switch

EPS10 Series

Pressure Adjustment Wheel

System Sensor EPS10 Series switches are designed for use in wet, dry, deluge, and pre-action automatic sprinkler systems to indicate a discharge from a sprinkler. The EPS10-1has a single SPDT switch while the EPS10-2 model contains two SPDT switches.

The EPS10 Series features field adjustable pressure sensitivity to provide an alarmresponse between 4 and 20 psi. It is factory set to respond at 4 – 8 psi on risingpressure. The pressure adjustment wheel requires no special tools and does notaffect switch synchronization on the EPS10-2.

Product Overview

Model shall be an EPS10-1 or EPS10-2 pressure type waterflow switch as manufac-tured by System Sensor of St. Charles, IL. They shall be installed on the sprinklersystem with connection as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.Pressure switches shall be of the bellows-activated type.

Switches shall have a maximum service pressure rating of 250 psi and shall be fac-tory adjusted to operate at a pressure of 4 – 8 psi. There shall be one (1) or two (2)SPDT contacts rated at 10.0 Amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5 Amp @ 6/12/24 VDC.

The contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated on the plans, pressureswitches according to appropriate NFPA standards. Switches shall be providedwith a 1⁄2″ NPT male pressure connection to be connected to the alarm check valveof a “wet” sprinkler system, into the intermediate chamber of a “dry” system, or toa pre-action or deluge valve. They shall be activated by any flow of water equal toor in excess of the discharge from one sprinkler head. Switches shall provide 1knockout type and 1 open hole for 1⁄2″ conduit fitting attachment and a groundscrew provision for electrical grounding.

The switch enclosure shall be weatherproof and carry a UL 4x/NEMA 4 ratingwhen used with proper electrical fittings and conduit. The cover shall incorporatetamper-resistant screws.

The unit shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and approved by FactoryMutual.

Engineering Specifications EPS10-1 (SPDT), EPS10-2 (2/SPDT)

APPROVED

Sensitivity adjustment wheel,no tools required

Reinforced diaphragm resistspressure spikes

Two conduit entrances provided

NEMA 4 rated

EPS10-1 AND EPS10-2Alarm Pressure Switches


VdS

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Line

imran

Line

imran

Highlight


Specifications

Maximum Operating Pressure250 psi

DifferentialApproximately 3 psi throughout range

Maximum Adjustment Pressure Range4 to 20 psi

Factory SettingOperates at rising pressure 4 to 8 psi

Pressure Connection1/2″ NPT male glass reinforced nylon

Switch Contact RatingsEPS10-1: One set SPDT (Form C)EPS10-2: Two sets SPDT (Form C)10.0 A, 1/2 HP @ 125/250 VAC2.5 A @ 6/12/24 VDC

Dimensions5.12″ H x 3.325″ W x 4.250″ L(13.0 cm x 8.4 cm x 10.8 cm)

Operating Temperature Range:Indoor or outdoor use –40°F to 160°F (–40°C to 71°C)

Cover Tamper SwitchUL Models: Optional P/N 546-8000ULC Models: Factory Installed

EnclosureRated UL 4x, NEMA 4 for indoor or outdoor use

Shipping Weight1.2 lbs. (.54 Kg)

Service UseAutomatic Sprinkler: NFPA 13One or Two Family Dwelling: NFPA 13DResidential Occupancies up to 4 Stories: NFPA 13RNational Fire Alarm Code: NFPA 72

Warranty3 years

Pressure Switch Basic Dimensons Electrical Connections for EPS10-1 and EPS10-2

Typical Sprinkler Applications

HEXADJUSTMENTSCREW

MAIN ADJUSTMENTWHEEL

41/4″�

51/8″�

LOCKINGSCREW

1/2″ NPT

COM

AB

GROUNDSCREW(GREEN) SWITCH #2

MODEL EPS10-1

ACOM

BSWITCH AT 0 PSI

SWITCH AT 4-8 PSI (HIGH TRIP PT.)B

COMASWITCH 1

MODEL EPS10-2SWITCHES AT 0 PSI

BCOM

A

BCOM

A

ACOM

B

ACOM

B

BOTH SWITCHES ACTIVATE SIMULTANEOUSLYSW1 SW2

SW1 SW2SWITCHES AT 4-8 PSI (HIGH TRIP PT.)


Model Description

EPS10-1 Alarm Waterflow Pressure Switch, One SPDT, 4–20 PSI

EPS10-2 Alarm Water flow Pressure Switch, Two SPDT, 4–20 PSI



Replacement Parts

Model Description

S07-66-02 Replacement Tamper Screws for Cover of EPS

WFDW Replacement Tamper Proof Wrench for Cover of EPS

546-8000 Cover Tamper Switch for EPS Series

ALARMCHECKVALVE

OS & YVALVE

WATERBY-PASSVALVE

LOCAL ALARMSHUT OFFVALVE

RETARD

WATERMOTORGONG

EPS10

WET SYSTEM

WIRE TO ALARMINDICATING CIRCUITOF FIRE ALARMCONTROL PANEL

TOSPRINKLERSYSTEM

ALARMCHECKVALVE

OS & YVALVE

WATERBY-PASSVALVE


RETARD

WATERMOTORGONG

EPS10

WET SYSTEM

WIRE TO ALARMINDICATING CIRCUITOF FIRE ALARMCONTROLPANEL

TOSPRINKLERSYSTEM

DRYPIPEVALVE

OS & YVALVE

WATERBY-PASSVALVE


WATERMOTORGONG

CHECKVALVE

EPS10

DRY SYSTEM

WIRE TO ALARMINDICATING CIRCUITOF FIRE ALARMCONTROL PANEL

TOSPRINKLERSYSTEM


System Sensor Headquarters3825 Ohio AvenueSt. Charles, IL 60174Ph: 800/SENSOR2Fx: 630/377-6495 Documents-on-Demand800/736-7672 x3www.systemsensor.com

System Sensor CanadaPh: 905.812.0767 Fx: 905.812.0771

System Sensor EuropePh: 44.1403.276500 Fx: 44.1403.276501

System Sensor in ChinaPh: 86.29.524.6253 Fx: 86.29.524.6259

System Sensor in SingaporePh: 65.6273.2230 Fx: 65.6273.2610

System Sensor – Far EastPh: 85.22.191.9003 Fx: 85.22.736.6580

System Sensor – AustraliaPh: 613.54.281.142 Fx: 613.54.281.172

System Sensor – IndiaPh: 91.124.637.1770 x.2700Fx: 91.124.637.3118

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.4.2

Alarm Pressure Switches (EPS10-1 & EPS10-2)

System Sensor’s OSY2 is used to monitor the open position of an Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y) type gate valve.

Robust Construction. The OSY2 consists of a rugged housing, intended for indoor and outdoor use. When installed with the actuator in the vertical position, the OSY2 is NEMA 3R rated per UL.

Application Flexibility. The OSY2 features a user-friendly mounting bracket and adjustable shaft to permit mounting to most OS&Y valves, ranging in size from 1″ to 12″. Its right angle design and wide bracket span provides maximum clearance for valve components, to accommodate troublesome valves. Removing the OSY2’s gate valve bracket allows the unit to monitor side-bracket style pressure reducing valves.

Simplified Operation. Installation is made easier with the OSY2’s single side conduit entrance. By providing a direct conduit pathway to the electrical source, right angle fittings are not required. Installation is further simplified by the OSY2’s adjustable length actuator, which eliminates the need for cutting the shaft.

Reliable Performance. The OSY2 is equipped with tamper resistant cover screws to prevent unauthorized entry. Inside, two sets of SPDT (Form C) synchronized switches are enclosed in a durable terminal block to assure reliable performance.

Models Available


OSY2A OS&Y Supervisory Switch (ULC/Canadian) Replacement PartsOSYRK ReplacementHardwareKit546 -7000 CoverTamperSwitchKitS07-66-xxTamperScrewsforCoverWFDW CoverWrenchHEXW ReplacementHexWrench

Product Overview

OSY2

NEMA 3R rated enclosure User-friendly mounting bracket fits newer valve yokes Single side conduit entry does notrequire right angle fittings Adjustable length actuator eliminatesthe need for cutting the shaft Accommodates up to 12 AWG wire Three position switch monitors vandal and valve close signals

Two SPDT contacts are enclosed in a durable terminal block for added strength 100% synchronization activates bothalarm panel and local bell simultaneously


S p r i n k l e r S y S t e m S m o n i t o r i n g

S739 CS169 7770 –1209:217

OW6A8.AY 167– 93–E

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

©2004SystemSensor.Thecompanyreservestherighttochangeproductspecificationswithoutnotice. A05-0196-008•07/04•#1309


ContactRatingsTwosetsofSPDT(FormC)

10.0A@125/250VAC

2.5@6/12/24VDC

OverallSwitchDimensions53/4″Hx3 1/2″Wx3 1/4″D(14.6cmx8.9cmx8.2cm)

BracketSpan2 1/4″Hx6 3/4″Wx1″D(5.7cmx17.1cmx2.5cm)

MaximumStemExtension25/8″(6.7cm)

ShippingWeight2.8lbs.(1.3kg)

ConduitEntrancesOnesinglesideopenfor1/2″ conduit

OperatingTemperatureRange32ºFto120°F(0ºCto49ºC)NOTE:TheOSY2willoperatefrom– 40ºFto120ºF(– 40ºCto49ºC);howeverULdoesnottestcontrolvalvesupervisoryswitchesbelow32ºF(0ºC).

EnclosureRatingULindoor/outdoorNEMA3Rwhenmountedwiththeactuatorvertical

CoverTamperSwitchStandardwithULCmodelOptionalforULmodel,partno.546 -7000

ServiceUseAutomaticSprinkler:NFPA13OneorTwoFamilyDwelling:NFPA13DResidentialOccupanciesupto4stories:NFPA13RNationalFireAlarmcode:NFPA72

Warranty3years

U.S.PatentNos.5,478,038;5,213,205


Model shall be model number OSY2 supervisory switch as manufactured by System Sensor. OSY2 shall be installed on each valve as designated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and shall be adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the valve control or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die cast metal housing, which shall provide a side entrance for 1/2″ conduit and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. A grounding provision is provided. The switch assembly shall include two switches each with a rated capacity of 10 Amp @ 125/250VAC and 2.5 Amp @ 24VDC. The cover shall contain tamper-resistant screws for which a security wrench will be provided with each switch. The OSY2 shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed for indoor or outdoor use. The OSY2 shall be Factory Mutual, CSFM, and MEA approved.

OSY2 Mounting

Electrical Connections for OSY2

Ordering InformationModelNumber Description

OSY2 OutsideScrewandYokevalvesupervisoryswitch

OSY2A OutsideScrewandYokevalvesupervisoryswitch(ULCmodel)

PartNumber Description

OSYRK Replacementhardwarekit(wrenches,screwpackandJ–hooks)

546 –7000 Covertamperswitchkit

S07– 66–XX Tamperscrewsforcover

WFDW Replacementtamperproofwrenchforcover

HEXW Replacementhexwrench


System Sensor Headquarters3825OhioAvenueSt.Charles,IL60174Ph:800/SENSOR2Fx:630/377-6495www.systemsensor.com

System Sensor CanadaPh:905.812.0767Fx:905.812.0771

System Sensor EuropePh:44.1403.276500Fx:44.1403.276501

System Sensor in ChinaPh:86.29.8832.0119Fx:86.29.8832.5110

System Sensor in SingaporePh:65.6273.2230Fx:65.6273.2610

System Sensor – Far EastPh:85.22.191.9003Fx:85.22.736.6580

System Sensor – AustraliaPh:613.54.281.142Fx:613.54.281.172

System Sensor – India Ph:91.124.637.1770x.2700Fx:91.124.637.3118

System Sensor – Russia Ph:70.95.937.7982Fx:70.95.937.7983

THE FOLLOWING ARE EXAMPLES OFACCEPTABLE MOUNTING POSITIONS:

THE FOLLOWING MOUNTINGPOSITION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE:

ACTUATORVERTICAL (DOWN)

ACTUATORHORIZONTAL

ACTUATOR VERTICAL(POINTING UP)

Top View

Switch 1

COM COM

A B B A Switch 2 CONTACT RATINGS125/250 VAC

24 VDC10 AMPS2.5 AMPS

Sup. Switch

B B

COM COM

Sup. Switch

B B

COM COM


to nonsilenceable initiatingzone of listed FACP


B

COM

to power sourcecompatible

with belllocalbell


Break wire as shown for supervisionof connection. DO NOT allow strippedwire leads to extend beyond switchhousing. DO NOT loop wires.

Strip Gauge

W0223-00W0211-00

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5

Valves



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.1

High Pressure Alarm Check Valve (E3)

Model E3 High PressureAlarm Check Valve4� (100mm), 6� (150mm),165 mm & 8� (200mm)


Features1. 300 psi (20,7 bar) ratings. Factory tested

hydrostatically to 600 psi (41,4 bar).2. Grooved seat design ensures positive

water flow alarm operation.3. Precision retard chamber minimizes false

alarms under variable pressure conditions.4. External by-pass minimizes false alarms

under all supply pressure conditions.5. Grooved inlet and outlet connections.

Less weight than flange valves.6. Vertical and horizontal trims available.7. Three compact galvanized trim styles

available:• Individual part trim• Segmentally assembled trim• Factory trimmed valve

8. TestANDrain�

valve with pressure relief,optional:• Exercises the clapper with alarm test.• Functions like the Inspector’s Test

Port with greater convenience.

DescriptionThe Reliable Model E3 Alarm Valve activates the water

flow alarm device in wet pipe sprinklers systems. Thedesign allows for installation under both variable andconstant supply pressure conditions. When water flowsin the sprinkler system due to the operation of one ormore automatic fire sprinklers, the alarm valve opens,allowing continuous flow of water into the system andtransmittal of water pressure to electrical and/ormechanical water flow alarm devices.

Bulletin 410 Rev.D Bu

lletin

41

0R

ev.D

Approvals & Listings1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

and Certified by UL for Canada (cULus).


• When used with the Model E3 trim sets.

• Optional TestANDrain�

Valve is not FM Approved.

3. Scientific Services Laboratory (SSL, Australia).100mm, 165mm & 200mm.

4. NYC MEA 258-93-E

5. Conforms to EN 12259-2 metric sizes only (CE).

6. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) Approved.

Ordering Information – Specify:

• Valve size – 4� (100mm) or 6� (150mm), or 165mmor 8� (200mm).

• Type of trim – Constant Pressure or VariablePressure.

• Style of trim – Individual parts trim, segmentallyassembled trim, or factory trimmed valve.

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

Valve Description1. Rated working pressure: 300 (20,7 bar).2. Factory hydrostatic test pressure: 600 psi (41,4 bar).3. End and trim connections:

• Threaded openings per ANSI B 2.1 or ISO 7/1 R.

• Grooves per ANSI/AWWA C606.4. Color: Black.

Red (E3A*)Red (Metric)

Model E3 Trim DescriptionThe basic trims for the Reliable Model E3 High

Pressure Alarm Valve (Figs. 3 & 4), are arranged forrapid, easy and compact attachment, and serve asconnection points to Reliable alarm and otherdevices. They also act as a means for testing theoperation of the alarm devices without causing thesystem to operate. The Model E3 high pressure alarmvalves are available in two trims and may be installedin the vertical or horizontal position in the main supplyto the wet pipe system:• Constant Pressure Closed Drain – Retard chamber

not required. This trim set is used where water supplypressure does not vary such as a gravity tank. Themechanical sprinkler alarm line automatically drainsto the 2� (50mm) main drain line.

• Variable Pressure Closed Retard Chamber Drain –Retard chamber required. This trim set is used wherewater supply pressures vary. The retard chamber andmechanical sprinkler alarm line are drained through aclosed, checked connection to the 2� (50mm) maindrain line. Only one drain connection is required.

Note:• The trim set permits both vertical

and horizontal installation.

• A TestANDrain�

valve segment is optional, tobe purchased separately, as a replacement tothe valve (Figs. 3 & 4).

2.

OperationVariable Pressure

The Reliable Model E3 High Pressure Alarm Valvein it’s closed and open positions is shown inFigures 1 and 2. The closed position is maintainedas long as the water pressure in the sprinklersystem piping above the alarm valve is greaterthan, or equal to, the supply pressure. A flow ofwater in the system piping, resulting from thedischarge through one or more fused automaticsprinklers, causes the clapper to rise off itsgrooved seat and permits water from the supply toenter the system for distribution on the fire.

Water now flows through the uncovered grooveand alarm line into the retard chamber. Once theretard chamber is filled the water flow activates themechanical and electrical alarms (Figs. 3 & 4).

Virtually all sprinkler system piping containsconfined air. If a water hammer or pressure surgeoccurs in the supply line, the increased pressurewill compress the confined air and cause the alarmvalve clapper to lift intermittently which may resultin false alarms. The Reliable Model E3 Alarm Valveminimizes false alarms under these conditions bytwo features:a. The by-pass connection with check valve (Figs. 3 & 4)

allows pressure surges from the supply to by-pass thealarm valve clapper. An excess system pressure isthus created which steadies the clapper. Should aheavy surge unseat the clapper and permit water toflow into the alarm line, the retarding chamber thencomes into action.

b. Two Drain Orifice restrictions on the supply side ofthe Retard Chamber allow intermittent flow to bedrained before the Chamber fills and activates thealarms.

Constant PressureThe operation of the Model E3 Alarm Valve in

installations where the water pressure is constantis the same as described above, with thisexception: The retard chamber is not required andwater passing through the groove in the alarmvalve seat flows directly to activate the mechanicaland electrical alarms.

Fig. 1 Closed Position

Model E3 High Pressure Alarm Valve (Figs. 1&2)

Fig. 2 Open Position

Groove Dimensions

ValveSize

OutletDia.

GrooveDia.

GrooveWidth

Face ToGroove

Dim.

ValveType

in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in mm4 100 4.500 114.0 4.334 110.1 3

8 9.5 58 16 E3 & E3A*

6 150 6.625 168.0 6.455 164.0 38 9.5 5

8 16 E3

6 165 6.500 165.0 6.330 160.8 38 9.5 5

8 16 E3A*

8 200 8.625 219 8.441 214 716 11 3

4 19 E3 &E3A*

* “A” designates valves made for Australia

imran

Highlight

3.

Fig. 3 E3 Vertical Trim

Fig. 4 E3 Horizontal Trim

E-3 Vertical and Horizontal Trims:


Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by themost highly qualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.

Manufactured by:

The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.800.431.1588 Sales Offices800.848.6051 Sales Fax914.829.2042 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address

Recycled

Paper

Revision lines indicate updated or new data.E.G. Printed in USA 11/07 P/N 9999970179

Constant Pressure,Vertical Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Vertical Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Vertical Trim — Top View

Installation must be made with 300 psi (20,7 bar) minimum rated grooved couplings, such as the Star�

Fittings Model C-2 LW. Tomate with ANSI Class 250 or Class 300 Flanges, use listed grooved flanged adapters having appropriate pressure rating.

Valve A B C D E F G H I J K L M

4�

(100mm)7�

(178)10½�

(267)15�

(381)6�

(152)16¾�

(426)15�

(381)3½�

(89)5¾�

(146)12�

(305)4½�

(114)6½�

(165)10�

(254)8¼�

(210)

6�

(150mm)(165mm)

758²

(194)11½�

(292)16�

(406)7�

(178)15¼�

(387)16½�

(419)4¼�

(108)7�

(108)12�

(305)4½�

(114)6½�

(165)10�

(254)6¾�

(172)

8�

(200mm)75

8²

(194)11½�

(292)16�

(406)7�

(178)15¼�

(387)16½�

(419)4¼�

(108)7�

(108)12�

(305)4½�

(114)6½�

(165)10�

(254)6¾�

(172)

Installation Dimensions in Inches (mm)Model E3 Vertical & Horizontal Trim Illustrations

Constant Pressure,Horizontal Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Horizontal Trim — Front Elevation

Variable Pressure,Horizontal Trim — Top View



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.2

Iron Body Check Valves (500 PSI WWP)

NIBCO INC. WORLD HEADQUARTERS • 1516 MIDDLEBURY ST. • ELKHART, IN 46516-4740 • USA • PH: 1.800.234.0227 TECH SERVICES PH: 1.888.446.4226 • FAX: 1.888.336.4226 • INTERNATIONAL OFFICE PH: +1.574.295.3327 • FAX: +1.574.295.3455

www.nibco.com38



DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions F-968-B Size A B D E Weight In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg. 2¹⁄₂ 65 11.50 292 5.83 149 7.50 191 1.00 25 62 28 3 80 12.50 318 6.31 160 8.25 210 1.13 29 77 35 4 100 14.00 356 7.56 192 10.00 254 1.25 32 129 58 6 150 17.50 445 8.50 216 12.50 318 1.44 37 225 102* Proper machining facilities required.

MATERIAL LIST PART SPECIFICATION 1. Body Bolt Steel ASTM A 307 2. Identification Plate Aluminum 3. Bonnet Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Body Gasket Reinforced Graphite 5. Body Nut Steel ASTM A 307 6. Side Plug Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000 7. Hanger Pin Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000 8. Hanger Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400 9. Disc Nut Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400 10. Disc Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400 11. Seat Ring Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy C84400 12. Body Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B

500 PSI WWP Iron Body Check ValvesFire Protection Valve • Bolted Bonnet • Horizontal Swing • *Renewable Bronze Seat and Disc •Class 250 Flanges

250 PSI/17.2 Bar Saturated Steam to 406º F/207º C500 PSI/34.5 Bar Non-Shock Cold Working Pressureto -20º F to 150º F/-29º C to 66º C

CONFORMS TO MSS SP-71 TYPE 1 •APPROVED BY NEW YORK CITY B.S.A. 143-69-SA AT

350 PSI NON-SHOCK COLD WATER

F-968-BFlanged

F-968-BFlg x Flg


NIBCO Iron Body Check Valves may be installed in both horizontal and vertical lines with upward flow or in any intermediate position.

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.3

Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm (Model C)

Model C Me chan i calSprin klerAlarm

Bul le tin 612 Rev.I

The Re li able Au to matic Sprin kler Co., Inc., 525 North MacQuesten Park way, Mount Vernon, New York 10552

Fea tures 1. De pend able − Pel ton Wheel Type.

2. Prompt − Pos i tive Op er a tion.

3. Ny lon Bear ings − No Lu bri ca tionNeeded.

4. Com pact − Light weight − Easily In stalled.

5. Rust-Free Cast Alu mi num Gong. No Gong Cover Needed.

6. Gong Avail able in Red and Bright Me tal lic Fin ishes.

7. Self-Setting Af ter Op er a tion Elim i nating Need of Re moving Cov ers, Plates, Etc. to Re set In ter nal Mech a nisms.

The Re li able Model C Me chan i cal Alarm, also called a wa ter mo tor and gong, is the hy dro-mechanicalalarm of Re li able Wet and Dry Pipe Au to matic Sprin -kler Sys tems. Usually mounted on an out side build -ing wall and en er gized by wa ter flow ing from thealarm (wet) or dry pipe valve, it au to mat i cally sounds a con tin u ous pierc ing alarm when the sprin kler sys -tem op er ates to ex tin guish a fire.

Approvals1. Listed by Un der writers Lab o ra tories, Inc. (UL).2. Listed by Un der writers Lab o ra tories of Can ada (ULC).3. Ap proved by Fac tory Mu tual Re search Cor po ra tion, (FM).4. Verband der Schandenversicherer eV. (VdS).5. Loss Pre ven tion Coun cil (LPC).6. NYC BS & A No. 587-75-SA.

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory MutualResearch Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable.

Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 80 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highly qualified andreputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries.


(800) 431-1588 Sales Offices(800) 848-6051 Sales Fax(914) 668-3470 Corporate Officeswww.reliablesprinkler .com Internet Address

Manufactured byRecycled

Paper


E.G.. Printed in U.S.A 08/01 P/N 9999970059

Operation

When an alarm (wet) or dry pipe valve is operated by thefusing of one or more automatic sprinklers due to fire,water flows through the ¾ inch strainer, and ¾ inchpiping that connects the mechanical sprinkler alarm tothe alarm or dry pipe valve. On entering the mechanicalsprinkler alarm inlet, the water passes through thenozzle and impinges against the pelton wheel bladescausing the pelton wheel to rotate. The striker assemblyconnected to the pelton wheel by the drive shaft alsorotates causing the striker to impact against the gongproducing a continuous piercing alarm. The water, afterimpinging against the pelton wheel, drains off throughthe 1-inch drain outlet in the body housing.

The alarm continues to sound as long as water is flowing through the sprinkler system. It may be shut off by closingthe alarm control valve located in the piping lineconnecting the mechanical sprinkler alarm with the alarm(wet) or dry pipe valve.

Reliable Model C Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm is selfsetting after each operation, eliminating the need ofremoving cover plates, etc. to reset internal mechanisms.

Installation

The Reliable Model C Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm iseasily installed. As illustrated in the figure below, a ¾”(19mm) support pipe of appropriate length runs throughthe wall supporting the pelton wheel body on the insidewall surface and the gong assembly on the exterior wallsurface. The entire assembly can be secured andaligned by simply screwing the body onto the supportpipe, compressing the wall support washer.

The drive shaft is furnished in a standard length of 18” for a 14” (355mm) wall. Longer shafts for thicker walls arefurnished on request. The drive shaft can be installed byremoving the body cover and pelton wheel from thebody.

The gong has a raised boss at its center so thatidentification nameplates can be retained by the 3

8” gong bolt. A stan dard fire alarm iden ti fi ca tion sign forat tach ment be low sprin kler alarm gongs can be sup plied by Re li able.

The Mechanical Sprinkler Alarm shall be located asnear to the alarm (wet) or dry pipe valve as practicable toavoid long runs or many fittings in the piping thatconnects to such devices. Galvanized or brass pipe of asize not less than ¾” (19mm) is to be used. The ¾”(19mm) Strainer, provided with the Mechanical SprinklerAlarm, must be installed at the alarm outlet of the waterflow detecting device. When a retarding chamber isused in connection with an alarm valve, the strainer shallbe located at the outlet of the retarding chamber.

The 1-inch drain outlet should discharge into an opendrain. For installation instructions, refer to the separatebulletins, “Instructions for Installation, Operation, Careand Maintenance” for Reliable Mechanical SprinklerAlarms, Alarm (Wet) Valves and Dry Pipe Valves.



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.4

Ductile Iron Body Swing Check Valve (Class 150)

A H E A D O F T H E F L O W®www.nibco.com


www.nibco.com

84

Revised 9/28/2009

Class 150 Ductile Iron Body Swing Check ValvesRaised Face Flanges • Bolted Bonnet • B 584 Bronze Trim

285 PSI/19.7 Bar Non-Shock Cold Working Pressureto -20º F to 100º F/-29º C to 38º C185 PSI/12.8 Bar Saturated Steam to 450°F/232°C ◆


F-938-31Flanged-Raised Face

F-938-31Flg x Flg

MATERIAL LIST PART SPECIFICATION 1. Bolt Steel ASTM A 307 2. Identification Plate Aluminum 3. Bonnet Ductile Iron ASTM A 395 4. Body Gasket Synthetic Fibers 5. Nut Steel ASTM A 307 6. Side Plug Bronze ASTM B 584 7. Hanger Pin Bronze ASTM B 371 8. Hanger Bronze ASTM B 584 or Ductile Iron ASTM A 536 9. Disc Bronze ASTM B 584 10. Seat Ring Bronze ASTM B 584 11. Disc Nut Bronze ASTM B 371 12. Body Ductile Iron ASTM A 395

NIBCO Check Valves may be installed in both horizontal and vertical lines with upward flow or in any intermediate position.


◆ For detailed Operating Pressure, refer to Pressure Temperature Chart on page 111.

DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions Size A B D E Weight In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg. 2 50 8.00 203 3.94 100 6.00 152 .63 16 24 11 2¹⁄₂ 65 8.50 216 4.50 114 7.00 178 .69 17 35 16 3 80 9.50 241 5.13 130 7.50 191 .75 19 47 21 4 100 11.50 292 6.13 156 9.00 229 .94 24 81 37 5 125 13.00 330 6.81 173 10.00 254 .94 24 100 45 6 150 14.00 356 8.00 203 11.00 279 1.00 25 146 66 8 200 19.50 495 9.44 240 13.50 343 1.13 29 255 116 10 250 24.50 622 12.06 306 16.00 406 1.19 30 426 193 12 300 27.50 699 16.13 410 19.00 483 1.25 32 660 299

Lever and Weight/Spring Options available. (see page 99)

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.5

Iron Body Check Valve (175 PSI WWP)


www.nibco.com31



175 PSI WWP Iron Body Check ValvesFire Protection Valve • Bolted Bonnet • Horizontal Swing • Renewable Seat and Disc •Drilled and Tapped for Ball Drip Outlet

MATERIAL LIST PART SPECIFICATION 1. Pipe Plug Cast Iron or Steel 2. Bonnet Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B 3. Bonnet Gasket Non Asbestos 4. Bonnet Bolt and Nut Steel ASTM A 307 5. Hinge Plug Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400 6. Hinge Pin Brass ASTM B 16 (not shown)

7. Disc Hanger Nut Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400 8. Disc Stud Bolt Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000 9. Disc Cage Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class B or Malleable Iron ASTM A 47 (not shown)

10. Disc Plate Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400 11. Disc Hanger Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400 12. Disc Nut Brass ASTM B 16 Alloy C36000 13. Seat Ring Cast Bronze B 584 Alloy C84400 14. Disc Rubber (W) 15. Body Cast Iron ASTM A 126 Class BNOTE: Sizes 21⁄2, 3, 5, & 10 are manufactured by Kennedy Valve and distributed by NIBCO.

Material list applies to sizes 4", 6", 8", 12" only. All sizes are drilled and tapped ³⁄₄" at Boss "C" for ball drip.


CONFORMS TO MSS SP-71 • UL/ULC LISTED • FM APPROVED •

APPROVED BY THE NEW YORK CITY B.S.A. 143-69-SA

An automatic ball drip is available for NIBCO Underwriter's check valves. The ball drip is installed at boss location "C" on the check valve of the fire department connection. It will close against pressure, but will open when pressure is off allowing water to drain from the fire department connection.

¹⁄₂" Ball Drip # RG 22000³⁄₄" Ball Drip # RG 22100

F-908-WFlanged

F-908-WFlg x Flg

Ball Drip

DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions Size A B C D Weight In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg. 2¹⁄₂ 65 10.00 254 6.44 164 7.00 178 .69 17 53 24 3 80 10.25 260 6.63 168 7.50 191 .75 19 62 28 4 100 13.00 330 8.00 203 9.00 229 .94 24 103 47 5 125 15.00 381 9.19 233 10.00 254 1.00 25 145 66 6 150 16.25 413 10.31 262 11.00 279 1.00 25 174 79 8 200 19.50 495 11.50 292 13.50 343 1.13 29 290 132 10 250 22.00 559 13.31 338 16.00 406 1.19 30 490 223 12 300 27.50 699 15.56 395 19.00 483 1.25 32 683 310NIBCO Iron Body check valves may be installed in both horizontal and vertical lines with upward flow.

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Line

imran

Line

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.6

Butterfly Valve (300 lb. WWP)


www.nibco.com41



MATERIAL LIST PART SPECIFICATION 1. Upper Stem Stainless Steel ASTM A 582 Type 416 2. Upper Bushing PTFE Bronze Sintered on Steel 3. "O" Ring Buna-N 4. Body Ductile Iron ASTM A 395 with Polymide Coating 5. Disc Ductile Iron ASTM A 395 with EPDM Encapsulation 6. Lower Bushing PTFE Bronze Sintered on Steel 7. Lower Stem Stainless Steel ASTM A 582 Type 416 8. Dust Plug PVC 9. Nameplate Aluminum 10. Gear Operator Cast Iron and Steel 11. Indicator Flag Cast Iron 12. Handwheel Cast Iron*-8N version has two factory mounted internal supervisory switches. -4N version is gear operated onlyUses NIBCO model #TS-4 Switch Kit. Polymide coating has NSF certification.

UL/ULC LISTED • FMRC APPROVED • 2¹⁄₂" - 10" UL LISTED FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR SERVICE • CALIFORNIA STATE FIRE MARSHALL APPROVAL NO. 7770-1243:101 • APPROVED BY THE NEW YORK CITY MEA 9-97-E, VOL.2 WHEN ASSEMBLED WITH APPROPRIATE NYC INDICATOR FLAG

Fire Protection Valve • Grooved Mechanical Style • Nylon Coated Ductile Iron Body • Extended Neck • Elastomer Encapsulated Disc • Accepts Internal Supervisory Switches • Compatible with IPS Pipe

DIMENSIONS—WEIGHTS—QUANTITIES Dimensions Size A B C D E F G H In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. 2¹⁄₂ 65 2.88 73 2.72 69 0.31 8 0.63 16 3.85 98 2.42 61 11.94 303 2.91 74 3 O.D. 76.1 3.00 76 2.84 72 0.31 8 0.63 16 3.85 98 2.42 61 11.94 303 2.91 74 3 80 3.50 89 3.34 85 0.31 8 0.63 16 3.85 98 2.86 73 12.48 317 2.91 74 4 100 4.50 114 4.33 110 0.38 10 0.63 16 4.56 116 3.84 98 14.18 360 2.91 74 5 125 5.56 141 5.39 137 0.38 10 0.63 16 5.86 149 4.79 122 15.17 385 2.91 74 6 150 6.63 168 6.45 164 0.38 10 0.63 16 5.86 149 5.73 146 17.54 446 2.91 74 6 O.D. 165.1 6.51 165 6.32 161 0.38 10 0.63 16 5.86 149 5.73 146 17.54 446 2.91 74 8 200 8.63 219 8.44 214 0.44 11 0.75 19 5.26 134 7.71 196 19.42 493 2.91 74 10 250 10.75 273 10.56 268 0.50 13 0.75 19 6.29 160 9.56 243 24.03 610 3.90 99 Dimensions Size J K L M N P Q R Weight In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. In. mm. Lbs. Kg. 2¹⁄₂ 65 3.54 90 2.13 54 5.82 148 5.67 144 4.19 106 3.25 83 5.9 150 3.46 88 22 10.0 3 O.D. 76.1 3.54 90 2.13 54 5.82 148 5.67 144 4.19 106 3.25 83 5.9 150 3.46 88 22 10.4 3 80 3.54 90 2.13 54 5.82 148 5.94 151 4.44 113 3.54 90 5.9 150 3.97 101 23 10.4 4 100 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 6.31 173 5.33 135 4.35 110 5.9 150 5.03 128 28 12.7 5 125 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 7.32 186 5.83 148 4.84 123 5.9 150 6.27 159 31 14.1 6 150 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 8.62 219 7.11 181 5.93 151 5.9 150 7.25 184 41 18.6 6 O.D. 165.1 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.64 194 8.62 219 7.11 181 5.93 151 5.9 150 7.25 184 41 18.6 8 200 3.54 90 2.13 54 7.91 201 9.80 249 8.05 204 6.87 174 9.8 250 9.25 235 53 24.1 10 250 3.98 101 3.03 77 9.49 241 11.61 295 9.86 250 9.17 233 11.8 300 18.00 457 88 40.0

GD-4765-8N*Grooved

2¹⁄₂" thru 8"

GD-1765-8N10"

(not shown)


imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-2.5.7

Gate Valve (Model-18)

22

MATERIAL LIST NO. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL

1 Set Screw Steel

2 Hand Wheel Iron

3 Yoke Bushing Brass

4 Stem Brass

5 Packing Gland Brass

6 Cap Screw Steel

7 Packing Graphite Non-Asb.

8 Bonnet Bronze

9 Spirol Pin Stainless Steel

10 Wedge Bronze

11 Body Bronze

Size A B C Ship Wgt. (lbs.)

Qty. Unit Pack

Qty. Per Case

1 2.55 6.55 7.97 3.85 6 18

1 ¼” 2.81 7.61 9.47 6.26 2 12

1 ½” 2.86 7.84 9.75 6.55 2 6

2” 3.09 8.88 11.22 9.96 2 6

UNITED BRASS WORKS, INC. 714 S. Main St., Randleman, NC 27317

Tel: 800-334-3035 Fax: 800-498-4696 www.ubw.com

Model 18 Gate Valve Bronze Screwed Ends Outside Screw & Yoke

UL Listed / FM Approved @ 175 lbs. WOG

200 WOG @ 180 ° Max 100% Pressure Tested

Rising Stem MEA Approval 255-93-E

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-3

Strainers



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-3.1

H Style Strainer (X43H)

H Style Strainer

X43HMODEL

• Low Pressure Drop

• Ductile Iron Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated Construction with a 316 Stainless Steel Strainer

• Large Flow Area H-Style Design

• Service Without Removal From Line

The Cla-Val Model X43H H-Style Strainer offers an effective means ofremoving unwanted solid particles in pipeline flow. These strainers areideal for preventing fouling, debris and particle buildup in Cla-ValAutomatic Control Valves. The large flow area design, with a flat stainlesssteel strainer mesh perpendicular to flow, is optimized for low pressuredrop applications. Maintenance is fast and easy with the compact H-pat-tern, requiring only top cover removal. The strainer may be installed in anyposition, however, installation with cover up is recommended.

D

C

B

C

B

DD

C

B

Strainer Size (inches) 1 1⁄2 2 2 1⁄2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 24A 150 ANSI 9.06 9.06 9.06 11.81 11.81 15.7519.6922.8324.0225.5931.5037.4043.31AA 300 ANSI 9.13 9.13 9.13 11.89 11.89 15.8319.7622.9124.0925.6731.5737.4843.39B 150 ANSI 3.26 3.26 3.66 4.06 4.33 5.63 6.69 8.86 8.88 10.2412.2019.0919.09BB 300 ANSI 3.26 3.26 3.66 4.06 4.33 5.63 6.69 8.86 9.56 10.9412.2019.0919.09C Max. 150 ANSI 3.78 3.78 3.78 5.91 5.91 7.52 8.82 11.61 15.1614.9619.6923.9823.98CC Max. 300 ANSI 5.20 5.20 5.35 6.22 6.22 7.99 9.33 12.7915.6715.6719.6923.9823.98D Dia. 150 ANSI 7.87 7.87 7.87 9.25 9.25 15.74 18.11 22.0526.7726.7735.4346.8546.85DD Dia. 300 ANSI 7.99 7.99 7.99 9.37 9.37 15.8618.2322.1726.8526.8535.4346.8546.85G Drain/Blow-off Plug 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 2 2 2 3 3Approx. Ship Wt. Lbs. 33 36 39 59 73 143 212 432 626 683 970 1175 1962

Strainer Size (mm) 40 50 65 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600A 150 ANSI 230 230 230 300 300 400 500 580 610 650 800 950 1100AA 300 ANSI 232 232 232 302 302 402 502 582 612 652 802 952 1102B 150 ANSI 83 83 93 103 110 143 170 225 228 260 310 485 485BB 300 ANSI 83 83 93 103 110 143 170 225 243 278 310 485 486C Max. 150 ANSI 96 96 96 150 150 191 224 295 385 380 500 609 609CC Max. 300 ANSI 132 132 136 158 158 203 237 325 398 398 500 609 609D Dia. 150 ANSI 200 200 200 235 235 400 460 560 680 680 900 1190 1190DD Dia. 300 ANSI 203 203 203 238 238 403 463 563 682 682 900 1190 1190G Drain/Blow-off Plug 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4 2 2 2 3 3Approx. Ship Wt. (kg) 15 16 18 27 33 65 96 196 284 310 440 810 890

Dimensions

Sizes (Inches): 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 24Ends: Flanged, ANSI Class 150 and 300Max Pressure Rating: 150# - 250 psi • 300# - 400 psiFluids: Compatible with Materials of ConstructionTemperature: Maximum 180°FMaterials:

Body & Cover: Ductile Iron ANSI B16.42; Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating StandardCover Seal: Buna-N® Synthetic RubberStrainer: 316 Stainless Steel; Ductile Iron, Epoxy Coated FrameStrainer Mesh Sizes: Standard 10 mesh / 2000 Micron / Openings 0.078 inch

Optional .039 and .059 inch openings availableDrain/Blow-Off Connection Furnished with Stainless Steel Plug as Standard.

Cover Fasteners: Stainless Steel

Specifications

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

CLA-VAL Copyright Cla-Val 2010 Printed in USA Specifications subject to change without notice. P.O. Box 1325 • Newport Beach, CA 92659-0325 • Phone: 949-722-4800 • Fax: 949-548-5441 • E-mail: [email protected] • Website cla-val.com

©

Model X43H Style Strainer Typical Application

Model X43H Flow Chart

E-X43H H-Style Strainer (R-1/2010)

100

10

100 1,000 10,000 100,000Flow (gpm)

Pre

ssur

e D

rop

(ps

i)

1

3” 4”

2 1/

2”

1 1/

2”

6” 8” 10”2” 12” 16” 24”14”

200,000

20”

Constant Downstream Pressure

Strainer Size (inches) 1 1⁄2 2 2 1⁄2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 24CV (Gal/Min. - gpm.) 96 150 254 367 654 1644 3922 4566 6800 8949 11692 18264 26302CV (Litres/Sec - l/s.) 23 36 61 85 157 395 702 1097 1580 2150 2809 4388 6319

CV Factor

Cv in gpm = gpm @ 1psid head loss • Cv in l/s = l/s @ 1bar head loss



________________________________________________________________________________________________

Section-3.2

UL Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Strainer (Model: 911U)

Strainers provide economical protection for costly pumps, meters, valves, and other similar mechanical equipment by straining foreign matter from the connected piping system.

Typical ServiceThese strainers are UL approved and are used to prevent clogging in fire service systems such as automatic sprinkler systems and various spray systems.

Features• Extra large baskets have an Open Area Ratio of at least 7 to 1. AWWA a minimum require-

ment is 4 to 1 Ratio

• Extra large capacity baskets equal very low pressure drop and long intervals between clean-ing and servicing, essential in this service.

• NPT tapped blow-off connections are available on request.

Pressure Drop

Screen

Material

ES-MS-911U

Model: 911UU.L. Listed Cast Iron Flanged End Y Strainers for FirelinesSizes: 21⁄2" – 12" (80 – 300mm)

911U Class 125

Pressure/Temperature–Non-ShockModel Material Rating CWP911U Cast Iron 175psi @ 150°F 12 bar @ 66°C 125psi @ 406°F

Model 911U

STANDARD (WATER)

MODEL SIZES MATERIAL OPENING

911U 21⁄2" – 12" 304SS .250 perf

SIZE

PRESSURE DROP @

15 FT/SEC

21⁄2" 2.313" 3.274" 3.185" 3.626" 3.598" 3.08

10" 3.2912" 2.79

911U

Body Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B

Cover Steel ASTM A515 Grade 70

Gasket Compressed Fiber

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

imran

Highlight

A Div is ion of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. USA: 1491 NC Hwy 20 West St. Pauls, NC 28384; www.muellersteam.com Tel: 910-865-8241 Fax: 910-865-6220

Toll Free Phone 1-800-334-6259 Toll Free Fax: 1-800-421-6772

ES-MS-911U 0715 © Mueller Steam Specialty, 2007

Mueller Steam Specialty product specifications in U.S. customary units and metric are approximate and are provided for reference only. For precise measure-ments, please contact Mueller Steam Specialty Technical Service. Mueller Steam Specialty reserves the right to change or modify product design, construction, specifications, or materials without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make such changes and modifications on Mueller Steam Specialty products previously or subsequently sold.

Dimensions and Weights

Apply for Certified Drawings

B

A

C

Model 911U

SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT

A B C

in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. kgs.

21⁄2 60 14 356 101⁄4 200 14 356 60 273 80 143⁄4 375 103⁄4 208 15 381 65 294 100 171⁄2 445 1213⁄16 318 18 457 125 565 125 193⁄4 502 141⁄2 276 201⁄2 521 172 786 150 215⁄8 549 157⁄8 298 22 559 210 958 200 26 660 211⁄2 398 301⁄2 774.7 360 16310 250 31 787 243⁄4 467 351⁄2 902 610 27712 300 371⁄4 946 291⁄2 552 421⁄2 1080 1045 475